THE PIVE SENSES

BY

EMANUEL SWEDENBORG
Being the first draft of a treatise intended as part of the
Animal Kingdom series, and parts of which were
elaborated by the author and published as

THE ANIMAL KINGDOM

PART III

TRANSLATED FROM THE LATIN

BY

ENOCH S. PRICE, A. M.

PHILADELPHIA, PA.

SWEDENBORG SCIENTIFIC ASSOCIATION

19 1 4
THE FIVE SENSES

BY

EMANUEL SWEDENBORG
Being the first draft of a treatise intended as part of the
Animal Kingdom series, and parts of which were
elaborated by the author and published as

THE ANIMAL KINGDOM

PART III

TRANSLATED FROM THE LATIN

BY

ENOCH S. PRICE, A. M.

PHILADELPHIA, PA.

SWEDENBORG SCIENTIFIC ASSOCIATION

19 1 4
 TABLE OF CONTENTS.
PAGE.
Translator's Preface
IV
Bibliographical Note vi

----
I. PROLOGUE
II. THE COMMON TRUNKS OF THE CAROTIDS
The Common Branch of the External Carotid
.
6

II

The First Branches of the External Carotid 13

The Remaining Branches of the External Carotid 16

III. SENSE IN GENERAL 22

IV. SMELL ­ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 31

V. THE EAR AND THE SENSE OF HEARING - - . _. 54

The External Ear .. - - - . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. &7

The Cavity of the Drum of the Internai EaT and the

Eustachian Tube ­ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 72

The Ear - _. . . . . .. 84

The Cochlea ­ . . . . .. 97

VI. THE EVE AND SIGHT 105

Light and Colors 115

Colors 119

The External Parts of the Eye _. . . . .. 125

The Tunics of the Eye (Albugineous; Sclerotic;

Cornea) _., ., 136

The Tunics of the Eye (Choroid; Uvea; Iris) 141

On the Humors of the Eye, and on the Retina 147

The Humors and Sight _........... ISO

VII. EPILOGUE CONCERNING THE SENSES OR SENSATION IN

GENERAL - _.. _ ' - .. - ..~ _ _::. 179 - 2lf 2.
VIII. THE SENSE OF TASTE OR THE TONGUE. Experience .. _ 283

The Sensory of Taste in General and in Particular 286

IX. THE SENSE OF TOUCH OR THE CUTICU:S EXPERIENCE 307

Analysis _. . . . . . . ............. 307

The Cuticles in Particular _.. " .. . .. .. .. 310

The Adipose Membrane 336

 TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE.
This posthumous work of Swedenborg, now for the first
time appearing in book form in the English language, first ap­
peared in installments in the pages of NEw PHILOSOPHY for a
long period of years. If any apology is due from the trans­
lator to the public for the great length of time required to
complete the work, he vvould plead only lack of time to de­
vote to it owing to the press of other engagements.
The work put into the hands of the writer, by the SWEDEN­
BORG SCIENTIFIC ASSOCIATION, for translation, is by the Latin
editor entitled. EMAN. SWEDENBORGH SACRAE REGIAE MAJES­
TATIS REGNIQUE SUECIAE COLLEGIAE 1V1ETALLICI ASSESSORIS
REGNUM ANIMALE ANATOMICE, PHYSICE ET PHILOSOPHICE
PERLUSTRATUM. CUJUS PARS QUARTA DE CAROTIDIBUS DE
SENSU OLFACTUS, AUDITUS ET VISUS, DE SENSATIONE ET
AFFECTIONE IN GENERE, AC DE INTELLECTU ET EJUS
OPERATIONE AGIT.
The work was edited from Swedenborg's MS. by Dr. Jo. Fr.
lm. Tafel and published in both Tübingen and London in
1848. In this edition Dr. Tafel, in an appendix, has noted
numerous critical changes from the original 1V1S. on two hun­
dred and three of the two hundred and twenty-sev~n pages of
the whole work. In addition he has four pages of close print
indicating the changes made in spel1ing and punctuation.
This is sa id not as a criticism of the work, but in extenuation
of the poor quality of the translation. The translator was
unwil1ing to do interpretative wor1<', but desired to let the
treatise tel! its own story so far as he was able to do so in
English. The obstacles to clearness and' smoothness were
very great, for, as has been indicated in the rematks concern­
ing Dr. Tafel's critical notes, the MS. was exceedingly dif­
ficult owing to its very nature. The work on the Senses was
a first draft of a contemplated work and not a finished treatise.
lt gives every internaI evidence of having been written at the
utmost speed. merely as memoranda, and contains the very
 TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE. v

kind of errors that lllight naturally be expected under such

circumstances, namely, el!iptical sentences, in somc cases sa
llluch sa as ta be scarcely intelligible ta any one but the writer ;
""rang terminations; wrong spelling; and wrong or no punc­
tuation.
A considerable number of errata have been noted by the
translator which wil! appear as an addendum ta an exhaustive
index now being prepared by him, but which' is tao late to go
out \Vith the book. It is the translator's hope that the index
wil! be forthcoming sOllletime dl1ring' the succeeding year.
The consecutive paragraph nUlllbers, printed in heavy type
have been supplied by the translator. They do not occur in the
original MS. nor in Dr. Tafel's Latin edition.
The translator here \vishes ta acknowledge his indebted­
ness ta Mr. 'William A. Farrington and others for valuable
assistance in proofreading; ta the Rev. Alfred Acton for
judicious and kindly criticism, assistance in translation, and
the furnishing of lllateriai for the Bibliographical Notes; and
ta the Rev.Eldred E. Il1ngerich for transcribing from the
original NIS. the chapters on Taste and Touch.
ENOCH S. PRlCE.
Bryn Athyn, Pa.,
Oct. 7th, 1913.
 BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTE.
In the margin of the MS. corresponding to the latter half
of p. 47 of the present translation the author wrote the fol­
lowing: "There is a C01111110n sense under which f10urishes a
particular sense, the sense of touch, under which is that of
smell; also common causes, such as cold, heat of the heart,
which impinge, hence are effects, and the effects of these ef­
fects." (See Lat. ed., pp. 237-8.)
The original is contained in Codex 58 of the author's MSS.;
the order of this codex, so far as the present work is concerned,
will appear below.
The reference to A. K. in n. 642 indicates that the work was
finished in 1744. The date is still more definite1y fixed by the
reference in n. 616 ta a dream by the author on July 1-2, 1744.
That it was finished on July 3, 1744, is stated in the author's
diary for July 3-4, 1744. A later entry, namely, for August
1, 1744, informs us that on that date Swedenborg commenced
preparing the chapters on Taste and Touch for the press.
For the position of this work in the A. K. series, see
Acton's translation of the work on GENERATION.
The work was published in the Latin edition by Dr. J no.
Fr. lm. Tafel in London and Tübingen in 1848. In this
edition, by order of the Swedenborg Society, the learned
editor omitted the chapters on Taste and Touch, because they
had been elaborated and published by the author in 1745 as
Vol. III. cf A. K. Dr. Tafel also decided to omit a chapter
on physical experiments by Desaguiliers, inc1uding some pas­
sages on the eye and sight, and he announced that he would
publish them later. (See Lat. ed., pp. 237, 238, 244.) This,
unfortunately, has never been done.
\iVhen the translator came to rendering from the Latin
edition he failed to note the omission of the chapters on Taste
and Touch until after the first part of the present work had
already been printed. ,But for obvious reasons it is highly de­
sirable that the whole of the author's first draft of the SENSES
 BIBUOGRAPHICALNOTE. VII

be published, wh ether he has rewritten a part or parts or not.

The translator therefore gladly availed himse1f of a transcript
from the photolithographed MS., made by the Rev. Eldred
E. Iungerich, and from it he has prepared the translation of
the chapters on Taste and Touch. It \Vas necessary to insert
these at the end of the work and not in the place where they
are found in the original MS. An endeavor has been made,
however, to correct this in sorne measure by the following
table of contents presenting the arder of the chapters as writ­
ten by the author :
Prologue.

The Common Trunks of the Carotids.

The Sense of Taste or the Tangue. Experience.

Sense in GeneraJ.1

The Sensory of Taste in General and in Particnlar.

Smel1. 2

The Sense of Tonch or the Cutic1es.

The Ear and the Sense of Hearing.

The Eye and Sight.

Epilogue Concerning the Senses or Sensation in General. 3

1 Accordng ta a note by the should be adduced experience re­

author this chapter was to have
fol1owed after the Epilogue. In
the autograph MS. the chapter
occupies pp. 14-19. The note in
question, occurring on p. 14 in
Swedish, is "This matter to p. 19
ol1ght not ta come first, but the
parts investigated by the analytic
method; this and several other
things belong to the Epilogue at
the end. 1 have been thus in­
formed in a clream." On each of
the following pages (15-19), he
writes: "Put after the Epilogue"
(Lat. Ed., p. 236).
2Immediately preceding this
chapter-heading the author enters
the fol1owing note: "Perhaps. and
in the place of experience there
specting the mamillary process in
place of a preface, because the
brain ol1ght ta be known tn par­
ticl1lar, especial\y as regards the
scal::e (Lat. Ed., p. 237).
3 Between this and the preced­
ing chapter the al1tograph MS.
con tains a chapter (pp. 122-126),
cntitled "Physical Experiments
from Desaguilicr," the last sec­
tion of which treats of "The Eye
and Its Rays;" and a short chap­
ter (p. 127), on "Ideas From
Sight' and Touch." N either of
these chapters ,,"ere included in
the Latin eclition of the Senses,
nor indeed have they as yet been
transcribed. They may be seen
in 6 Photo. "MSS .. pp. 102-10j'.
VIII BIBLIOGRAP[-{ICAL NOTE.

Besides the work on the Senses here presented, our author

also wrote two earlier works on Sight and Hearing. These
are incomplete! but considerable portions of them are still
preserved in MS. and have been photolithographed in 6 Phot.
MSS., pp. 108-176. T;lere is also an earlier draft on the skin
(ib. 1-11), and an incomplete fragment on the Tongue con­
taining, in fact, only the anatomical description of that organ.
1t was found impossible to inc1ude these in the present volume,
but it is hopeà that they will SO:11e time be transcribed and
translated.
 THE SENSES.

CHAPTER 1.

PROLOGUE.

1. 1. 'vVE have treated of the viscera of the Iowest or abdo­

minal region, as also of the superior or thoracic region: order
requires that we treat of the members of the highest region, or
that of the head, accordingly of the sensory organs, the cere­
brum, cerebe1Jum, and of the medullas of the head and of the
spine.
2. 2. Let us therefore ascend by an analytical way, from
those things which, if you please, are 10\\rest and which as it
\Vere rest upon the earth, to those which rest ulJon the m:iddle
and as it were sublunary region; 6na1Jy to highest things, which
constitute a kind of heaven or Olympus, where with her
nymphs resicles Pallas. who is said to have been created from
the brain [of Jove] . We must ascend to highest things as it
were by the rounds of a radder ; that way in the meantime must
be c1eared, that the descent may be easy; for when we have
mountecl by an analytical way from postremes or posterior
things to superior or prior things, and when we have explored
the quality of that which is in the superior or prior world, then
we are furnished as it were with new Mercurial wings, in order
that we may be able to ascencl safely, and without error, and
thus syntheticall'y, and not by errors and hypotheses, from
prior to posterior things.
3. For when we mount up even to superior or 11rst things,
thell we are enabled (licet), as if from the top of a m()ulltain
or of Parnassus, or from a high tower or in a mirror
2 THE SENSES,

(speculo*), to exam:ine those things. as' placed below distinetly

or together, and ta imitate the most far-reaching sight of su­
perior beings which regard ail mundane things, at one look, as
placed belo'N them, and embrace bath worlcls together in
the same sight. For when we have emerged ta superior things,
then we as it were put off the animal nature and put on the
truly hU111an, and, if l may sa say, the angelic; then first we are
rational men; nor do wc, Iike worms, walk and creep upon the
ground, and seize only those things which are obvious to the
senses, and consider them alone useful. Wc are gifted with a
sublimer mind; but we have not trodden the way which leads
us thither, which is the analytical aJone; for the way is broad,
and of inunense labor so long as the senses instruct us; from
these we ought to be removed, and ta sojourn as is were above
ourselves in our spiritual sphere, wllich is truly intelleetual.
How arduous this ascent is, is known ta everyone who is
carried away by the pleasures of the senses and o'f his: body;
for these things must be as it were put off, and interior pleas­
ures adopted in place of them, the sense of which we do not
have before we have obliterated the former by the service of
time.
4. 3. We have promised that we would next treat of. the
heart, arteries and blood, then of the members of bath sexes
ascribed to generation, as also of the conception and formation
of the fœtus.
5. But furthcr than what has already been said of the heart,
arteries ancl veins and blood, in the little work \vhich l have
called the EconOl1ty of the Anùnal KingdoFn, the matter having
been carefuUy weighed, we find that we cannat proceed thither
immediately and next in orcier, for ail things of the body teach
what the blood is. In orcier that we may investigate the blood,
every nook and corner which that traverses must be traversed,
name1y, the viscera of the abdomen and of the thorax, and es'­
pecially the brain; for the blood is the universal essence of the

*lf this word were specula it would mean "a Iookout," which would
,eem more in kecping with the series.-TR.
 PROLOGUE. 3

body, to be collected from ail the viscera, whatever each one

has in its bosom, and whatever nature it bears. Universal
things are prim. Especially the cerebrum is to be investigated,
whither the blood returns as to its native soil, and where it is
again resolved into its principles, and, as animal spirit, enters
into the fibres, and completes the circle of its life. Besicles, in
the blood there are not only the eIements of the kingdoms of the
earth, but also of the animal spirit; and in this the soul itself
resicles which creates the life of the blood. Unless these things
are first examined we shall stick in the arena, and taik about
infini te things whch are said ta be in the blood, which knowl­
'edge we have not yet acquired ; where'fore unless it is first evi­
dent what the brain is, what the compound and simple fibre,
what the animal spirit and what the soul is, we speak only un­
known things. and, j ust as if we believe that infants understand
what one says, we produce only formulas, when yet we must
penetrate more deeply than ta words and the coverings and
pictures of things, of which every one favors his own, th us in­
nnitely diverse ideas. 1\'0 science consists in terms, but in the
notion of the thing which is within the terms.
6. 4. A sil1l'llar reason occurs in regard ta the explanation
of the gcnital organs, as also of the fonnation of the fœtus in
the ovum; for the genital organs, especially of males, are as­
cribed, not to the bJood, but ta the spirits, which circulate
through the fibres and adjust themselves ta the most perfect
fonTIS of nature, and to these they so adapt the very life of the
parent soul, that the genital fluid or seed thence forlll:ed is suit­
able for producing what is silllilar; sincei therefore it is thus
far still unknown what the animal spirit is, and what the soul
is which has that life in it, surely exallliining the organism
would he uma veling the instrumental. without a knowledge of
the principaï cause, when yet the organic or instrumental, to­
gether with its principal, make one cause; wherefore l do not
see that l can proceed thither, or ex-plain the genital members
be'fore l shall have taught what the brain is. what fibre, what
spirit, and what the soul is; which is the reason that now l
oug'ht to fttrther set aside that exposition of those members;
4 THE SENSES.

for as was said it would be ta offer only words not understood,

and rather ta involve the science in shadows, than ta bring it
out of the shadows.
7. Hitherto the understanding has examined only the won­
dèrfuJ things of the senses, as one looks through the windows
at what is done in the streets ; now the senses shaH examine the
more wonderful things which are off the streets, within in th
byways.
8. Hitherto we have investigated wonderful things by the
external sense ouly; now you shaH see more wonderful things,
when we look into the causes of things. and the interlacings of
the fabrics :-and still purer things-if by sense we can con­
template those supreme things, which also we shaH try, but only
in stupor with a dislocated knee, (sed -modo pel' stuporem
eluxato gcnll). But in a cloubl'e sense we shall contemplate the
wonders of God, thus not as animaIs, but as m:en and rational
beings.
9. Induced by this reason, l wish first by our analytical way,
b)' mC'ans of anatomical experience, and by doctrines which
shall lead by the hand, to arrive at ct knowledge df the soul;
and sa ta clear the steps, that fmally we can return, and, as it
were nes'.:elld ta those OI"gans; for the analytical is ta ascend,
anel afterwards thence to descend, leaning upon those same
ladders by which wc ascend, for there we borrow wings.
10. 5. Furthermore these genital organs themsclves are as
it were organs of a more perfect nature; for they are the
cxereise grounds of the loves, ancl the very native land, or
Cyprus, of VentIS, thus the Olympus of all delights, ta which
things we can not come except a priori et superiori,' for they are
the centers of ail pleasures and. as it \Vere, dwelling places of a
higher life: for the)' have for their end higher loves, which, de­
~,ceneling from Ùle soul herself, respect the procreation of
human, and the propagation of heavenly, society. Wherefore,
the)' are altogetber above the spbere of those organs which
constitute inferior tl1ings; we ought thus ta descend to tl10se
organs but not indeed ta ascend by tbem ta bigher things. The
genitals are also separate from the rest of the viscera, and con­
 PROLOGUE. 5

stitute a region of their own or a central one of the body itself,

as, for instance, the testic1es and the rest. Yea, we do not come
ta the use of these members until about the youthful or adult
years; then also they constitute another and as it were more
lovely, happy and heavenly life, as appears in insects, which,
while worms live a long time for the appetite and the stomach,
but finally put off their first life and' put on this lïfe of venereal
[ove, when, under another form, they are furnished with wings,
as are bats; they then sport above the earth in the atmos'Phere
as in their heaven, and give attention to procreation. There­
fore we leave this part as yet, until we shalI have come ta a
know!edge of superior things, and have grovvn a little aIder in
the knowledge of things, irnitating in these nature herself who
teaches us the \Vay.
11. 6. ln the rneatime we shall study and investigate an­
a[ytically the organs of the senses. then the cerebrum, the cere­
bel!unl, and their two appendages or medullas; these conduct
us inta the entrancc hall ta the senses and interior lives, where­
fore to the knowledge of Our mincl and soul; for she there re­
sides as in !ler own organism or in her own causes, from which
as from a centre and beginnings she can rule the whole circum­
ference, amI all effects; as also the interconnection of things,
experience, diseases, affections and single things, teach. Finally
we shal! search out the way by new doctrines, which, as briclg'es,
are ta he built, in orcier that we rnay be able ta ascencl from the
organic world to that heaven which the soul inhabits. \Vith:­
out these aids we labor in vain, for there is no passage except
with new doctrines as guides, which doctrines shaH, with God's
help, be next presented.
 CHAPTER II.

THE COMMON TRUNKS OF THE CAROTIDS.

12. E"Cperience. There are two carotids; the left carotid

ascends frami the arch of the aorta, the right, for the most part,
fronl the subcIavian artery of that sicle; both near the trachea
and the internai j ugular vein, ta, the altitude of the larynx, with­
out branches; thus far the)' are called the Com:mon Carotids;
but there, at the larynx, they are divided into t\Vo great
branches, one of which is ca lied the external. the other the in­
ternai carotid; the former tends especially into the externat
parts of the heacl, the latter into the skull and brain. The ex­
ternal carotid is in front of and nearer ta the larynx, but the in­
ternai is behincl ancl farther from it.
13. Analysis. The blood vessels in the body take their di­
rection according ta the circles and comimon axes of the whole
body, and according ta the proper or particular axes of the
viscera, in arder that they may be in the stream of motion, nor
be disturbed by any diversity arising from the mPtions of the
body or viscera, but that they may distinctl)' perform thcir
offiees.* This can be seen everywhere.
14. 2. The earotids of the trunk. the aorta and the sub­
c1avian artery eoneur in one umbilieus [or centre l, especially
in the subcIavian; for the centre of the upper body. or ôe
tenTlIinus of the vertebral axis is there presented; wherefore also
the Thoracic 'Duct ther.e concurs with the subc1avian vein; the
aorta runs clown according ta the vertebral axis and passes
throug11 perpetuai centres and fu1cra, and indeed even to the
receptacle of the chyle, which it sometimes perforates; for
the receptacle of the chyle constitutes the other terminus of that
axis, or as it were. a killli of umbiliclls. This now is the reason
that the aorta, subclavian, and the carotids coneur here. The

*The word in the original is mWliis, should be ·",.ulten:bus.-TR.

 COMMON TRUNKS OF CAROTIDS. 7

carotid proceeds then even to the centre of the skull in the

sphenoid bone to the cIinoid processes, and a branch of the ex­
ternal carotid even to the temples.
15. 3. If the blood is borne up'"vard or downward in its own
orbit or animal world, it is the same as if it were thus forced
by the heart, elther upward through the carotids or to the side
through the subclavians, or downward through the aorta.* in
whatever position the body may be in; for every body is a
worid within a worId, and therein forms its own ways, direc­
tions, pressures and gravities, nor does the external world aet
upon it, except that it sustains this whole little world, and causes
that it exercises its powers aright.
l!6. Thus the center of gravity of every arteriaI branch is
toward its smal1est branchlets and their encls, which also are
beginnings. Every member is such a center, whither they aim,
or whither they tend. There are in the head as n1jany centres
as there are organs and gIandules ; then also the brain is such a
center, and in the brain there are as many centers as there are
parts and individual things; thus in the body there are as many
centers as there are visccra. The sanguineous stream seeks
these its centers, and it is the same whether in respect to our
universe this center be at the summit or at the center of the
earth, which is confirmed by many things; but when these cen­
ters have been set in motion, when they suddenly stop, or when
the mass of the vessel overcomes the strength of the motion,
as sometimes happens in the head, then it sustains the pressure
of the whole.
17. 4. AlI the viscera, so also aIl the organs of the head,
and also the brain, demand of the heart each its own quantity
and quality of blood; for the artery gives nothing of its own to
any viscos, but only brings and offers the indiscrete wave. It
determines neither the quantity nor the quality.
18. 5. W11at determines the quantity of blood through the
carotids is each and every organ which thence receives its sup­
ply; thus there are man)' fountains which attract those streams.

*The word in the original is a7Jitarm, should he aortam.-TR.

8 THE SENSES_

In order that ail things may flow according to the course of na­
ture, there is everywhere an internai, a mediate and an external
cause, which concur wonderfully to the same effect. The in­
ternai cause is calleel attraction or invitation; the meeliate is the
assistant cause, or promotion; the external is propulsion or in­
citation; thus the effect flows spontaneously front itself, when
they conClU'.
19. The inte-rnat cause, which determ,ines the quantity
through the branch and the trunk df the artery, is in the very
.smal1est things and beginnings, which open themselves from
their own or other adventitious cause, and, as it \Vere, invite
the blood into themselves like syring-es ; for when those smarIest
g'landular fol1ic1es are expanded, then the bood from the branch
presses in; as in the brain, when the cortical glands are e.,'(C­
panded, the desired supply rushes in from the neighboring
branches; 50 also in the remaining glandular fol1ic1es, as al50
in the motor fibres. There are only glandular congeries and
Ill,otor fibres, besides papil1ary fonns, which constitute ultimates.
vVhen these are opened, a supply, determined by the expansion,
flows in from the infinite smal1est branches; into the in­
numerable srnal1est branches it flows in from those somewhat
larger, then from the larger, finally from the trunks; thus, in
order that the quantity of blood in the inmost arteries may al­
ways be as much as may be demanded of the branches which
unite from these, there are in the smallest arteries myriads of
little branches which inosculate to form one larger, anel so forth,
50 that the number in the direction of the trunk decreases.
From these things now one may j udge how great a syringe­
like force from the inrnost arteries urges that the brood may
be invited from the trunk. This also is the reasOn that the
camtid rises at almost a right angle.
20. mlence it fol1ows that no more can be impel1ed than is
invited, for it resists a greater quantity: besides that, the trunk
contracts itself in relation to the desire_
21. The externat cause, which determines the quantity
through the trunk and the branch, is the undl1lation begl1n by
the heart; for the blood is l1rged by the und111ation,-\see our
 COMMON TRUNKS OF CAROTIDS. 9

Animal Ecotlmny,-to the extent of the force of the unduration,

then also notice that the undulation goes upward, sideways and
downwards, usually in ail directions; this is the propulsion or
incitation which corresponds to the attraction or invitation.
22. Thc Jncdiate or assistant causc, is the reaction of the
muscular tunic, which is similar in every branch ta what it is in
the heart; for the force of the ~eart is, by a. similar organism,
continued through its branches,-see our Animal Econorny.
The rule is general, that the force arising in the beginning or
fountaill is continued such through aU the channels, for similar
powers are adjoineel which push forward. This is cal1eel pro-
motion.
23. 6. 1\:s to the quality of the brooel, there are similar
causes.> internai, 11l.ediate externa1; for every member demands
for itself its OW11 quality as weU as its own quantity of blood;
nor does a better blood arise to the sensories of the head and to
the brain, because the carotid goes upward. This world has
nothing in conJ'mon with the greatest world, in which it lives'.
24. Thc intcrnal orimnost causc resides in the glandules
themselves and in the fibres; for ultirnate organic forms are
contexted from the s11l.aUest ncrvous fibres. These fibres bear
the same animus or appetite and aversion as the cerebrum it-
self and the cerebeUul11, whence the fibres arise. The larger
organs desire this but refuse that, as, for instance, the tongue,
the nostrils, etc., wherefore also the slnal1est organs. A com-
pound derives what it has from its simples. Therefore the
things which the brain and its fibres desire, these !ittle !ips at-
tract, drink up and lead aside with avidity, but if they he of an-
other nature they refuse ancl reject them. and, as it were. vomit
them bac1c Thus every single viscus. member and, organ
draws to itself the kind and nature of blood suitable 'for itself
and its use, and it attracts this from the mielst of the torrent.
Other things they reject either into the neighboring veins by
anastomosis, or elsewhere by excretory vessels. Fr-orn use are
formed the com;binations and the single things, sa that nothing
else may occur. This inmost cause, caned invitation. is why the
10 THE SENSES.

purer blood is carried to the sensories of the head artd to the

brains.
25. The external cause is, that the carotid artery turns to
the left or backward from; the trunk of the aorta; for every
little wave, flowing spontaneously, flows according to the di­
rection of the universal vortex, as one may see in water and
other fluids, and in the atmbspheres themselves; hence things
more fluid are borne ta the left more easily than to the right
This is the reason why the thicker blood, the same nature lead­
ing, flows clown to the right through the aorta, laterally through
the subclavian, and the better essences through the carotids; it,
[the purer bl'oodl tencls thither in whatever position the carotids
may be. In like manner the branch elevates itsel'f to the larynx,
sa also the internai carotid, namely, to the left.
26. The mediate, assistant or prom.oting CQ.use, is a tremb­
ling or tremulous modification of those organs arising in both
the larynx and the ear, then in the other sensories, finally in
the inmost parts or those of the brain. The modification is
cru cler about the larynx, purer toward the superior sensories,
and purest in the brain; wherefore the purest essences thus
modifiecl are borne to the exact place where their nature con­
cords with the organism. But this caUSe will he explained at
greater length in the doctrine of modifications.
27. To mediate causes must also be referred this, that
throughout the whole way there are many glandules which in­
vite and th us draw off the salivas and the thicker and slower
parts of the blood (concerning which below) to this end, that
the blood may remain purer.
28. 7. In order that these things n1;ay rightly accompany
the effect, it is necessary that the carotid should ascend through
a long tract near the trachea all the way to the larynx smooth1y
or witlwut branches, for several reasons, namely:-1. In order
that it may form a larger channel with capacity suffi.cient to
control all those mixtures, whence ail the organs can draw each
its own allotment, \vhich could not be done in a short canal.
2. In order that, according to the usual custom of nature, ail
things may at first be poured together, as it were, into a chaos,
from which each single thing may draw distinctly its own sup­
 COMMON TRUNKS OF CARO TfDS. Il

ply and portion. 3. In orcier that in this passageway the blood,

by the aid of the trachea and then of the larynx, may in its first
passage be excited and ani111lated by sonorous vibrations; for
the sonorous tremor and other. modifications penetrate every;
single part, where'fore, as is to be known, it keeps the parts dis­
tinct from one another, so that every organ can take its own es­
sences distinctly. 4. Because the trachea is actuated by more
extraordinary motions than the l'est of the viscera, therefore
this artery does not before this dare to send off any branches;
see The Trachea.

The CO'm111JOn Branch of the Extern<Jl Car.otid.

29. E.1;perience. The external carotid is the greater, and by

its direction is as it were a continuation of the tnll1k of the caro­
tids; it pushes itself insensibly outward between the external
angle of the lower jaw and the parotid gland, to which in pas S1­
ing it gives off branches; finally it ascends toward the ear, and
terminates on both sicles at the temples; in this passage it gives
off branches which can he divided into anterior Or internaI, and
posterior or external.
30. l AnalJ.sis. Each comnKlll br.anch contains within it ail
those essences, namely, as great a supply and such a quality of
blood, serum; and Iymph as the organs thence clependent re­
quire; thus the C0111mon carotid contains the whole supply and
quality which the whole head with its organs and the brain
demand. The external carotid is the common branch of. ail the
organs of the head.. both of the sensory and ntotor organs or of
the muscles as also of the glands; likewise every branch of
every organ is common or proper to it. This branch the vis­
cera the111~elves share with one another according to use.
31. 2. In a common branch of this kind there is always a
like quantity and a like nature of requisite blood and serum;
for nature always conspires to an equilïbriu111 which we caH an
equation: if indeed one organ attracts more of its own kind or
species of blood, then it flows more quickly; the celerity itself
12 THE SENSES.

does not hinder a Iike suppl)' frOin being present, for it is com­
pensateel by the cele rity, sa far that a like ratio ail the while
subsists. See equation in our Animal Econotny.
32. 3. In oreler that a greater supply anel another quality
of blood than it needs should not be obtrueled upon the brain
against its will, the external carotid is a continuation of the
conunon trunk, and is larger than the internai carotid. The in­
ternaI carotid goes off thence at almost a perpendicular, which
is the first artifice of nature that nothing he obtruded except
what is desirecl (Sec the Intercostal vessels). Therefore the
blood flows past the internaI carotiel when the brain does not
require it; wherefore the external carotid is continued from the
trunk and is larger than the internai.
33. 4. In orcier that the sensor)' and motor organs shall not
dra\v an)' but the purer blood,-for there is a blood for the sake
of those organs, that is, for the sake of motion and sense, where­
fore they require apurer blooc1,-therefore from the blood ap­
proaching in the way the more water)', serous and impure por­
tions are drawn off by various little fabricated glandular ma­
chines, and by still other artifices. Every common branch has
its own diverticula. and resting places, into which it throws the
imlPurer parts of the blood, and thus clarifies itself, that a sup­
ply of purer blood may be present for the sensor)' and motor or­
gans. The common branch of the internai carotid has the great
parotid gland which draws off an imcrT"lense amount of watery
serum, as is known from experience. \iVherefore also in its
passage the common branch gives off branches to the parotid
gland so that that gland is the COl1ll1lon purifier of that brood.
This is also the reason wh)' the parotid gland is situated where
it is, close under the ear. and indeed subjoined to muscles, as
to the masseter. If that gland, which regards the mou th and
tangue, \Vere not for that use, it wourd not be drawn up sa high.
A similar thing occurs with every branch less cornmon, which
alwa)'s has its own salivary glands, in order that it may un­
load its super-abundance of impure serum and blood.
34. 5. The blooJ of this cornmon branch is also excited by
cruder tremblïngs, which correspond ta its stream, abundance
 COMMON TRUNKS OF CAROTIDS. 13

and nature, namely, from the larynx even to the ear and the
temples; for both the larynx and the car, together with the
temples, tremble cOlltinually from sounds which pervade the
bones and the membranes themselves through "vhich the com-
mon branch passes. Thus the crudest modification invades the
trunk from the beginning to the end, that is to say, so that the
parts tremble inclividually, and the blood is in that state of life
that it may not clol, but he agitated continually and in parti cu-
laI', which contribl1tes much to the giving off to each organ its
own portion.
35. 6. For every tremor pervades the fibres which go to
make u)) the vessels themselves, wherefore it also pervacles the
bloO(I which they contain or con vey ; for at the first, this cru der
tremor, which is excited from speech or hearing, or from the
larynx and the ear, attacks the vessels; afterwards a m.ore sub-
tle tremor which arises from: the sense of taste, then that which
arises from s111ell, finall'y, a still more subtle one which arises
from the subtle tremor of sight, excite, not the blood itself, but
its spirit or the interior essence of the blood. The cruder senses
mge into a trclllor or lll.odification the whole g1'obule of the
blood, but the purer, the parts themsel'ves of its corporeal
structure, the still more subtle, its spirit. Thus ail things con-
tribu te to the end that there be nothing in the hlood that is
not clriven on in its own vital motion. The comllllon branch or
caroticl artery thus arso tends in such a \Vay that according to
the degrees of its progression it may reccive this more
animatec1 vital motion; for it proceeds at last to the organ of
sight or the eye. For nature does not progress e\ren a line
without the consideration of use, for it intends 110thing but
ends. This is the reason why the nerves of the fifth pair go to
ail the organs o.f the senses, namely, th;:t they may communi-
cate and dispense the single things of the senses.

The First Branches of the ExfeYilal Carotid.

36. Experience. The first branch of the externar carotid

rises from the sal11e source at the side; it immediately makes a
14 THE SENSES.

small circuit, and after it has given off branches ta the neigh­
boring j ugular glands. for the fat and for the skin, it runs
transversely, and distributes itself ta the thyroid glands, to the
muscles and other parts of the larynx; it also gives off little
branches to the pharynx and to the hyoid muscles. This is to
be called the lar}Ingeal, or superim" guttural arte1"Y. The
second branch crosses in front of the neighboring horn of t!1e
hyoid oone, and goes to the hyoid and glossal m;uscl'es, to the
sublingual gland, and finally crosses in front of the horn of the
hyoid bonc and buries itse1f in the tongue, where it is called
the sublingual and also the ranine Mter}'.
37. 1. ,r'1nal}'sis. The purest blood anù that of the best
quality is required in each organ of the senses. then in the
motor organs or the muscles; for the blooel is form~d according
to sense and motion, and in senSe and motion consists the life
of the boely; the animal spirit itself also, and its beginning.
which is the soul, wins instantly to learn and ta do what con­
duces to the boùy; whercfore the lowest universal essence or
the blood ought to be most promptly obedient ta it, and to cor­
resp(:mcI exactly to those things both in quality and ql.lantity.
38. The organs of the senses are the ear, which corresponds
to the larynx, or hearing to which sound corresponds; taste
fol1'ows this in purity, then smell; final1y sight. which is the
purest of the external senses: in a similar grading the purities
of the blood ancI of the spirits themselves ought to correspond.
39. 2. From the flux of the arteries, especiall"y of the eX"
ternal carotids, it appears in 'vvhat manner the blood is dis­
persed and tempered whire on the way to the organs men­
tioned, sa that none but what is pure comes to those sensory
and motor organs. These temperings and artifices are not yet
very weil known, wherefore they shall be briefly expanc1ed.
40. :). In orcIer that the desired quality of brood and of the
right kind may always approach, there are in the way exeretory
and secretory organs; the excretory are the cutic1es and many
cellular textures, which entice into themselves, and Iead away
the unsuitable serocity. The secretory grands are those which
ciraw into themselves the sali vary hUl11ors; thus the rest of
 COMMON TRUNKS OF CAROTIDS. [5

the blood \vhich fiows to that organ is of a more defecated

kind. This is the reason why the first branch which is ca lied
the laryngeal, or superior guttural is first \cd to the j ugular
glands and to the cuticle which draw off the muddy parts (see
Winslow above concerning the first branch). A like thing oc­
curs in regard to the \ittle branch which goes off thence trans­
versely toward the larynx, for this also is derived into its
cuticles and into its glands, namely, the thyroid and arytenoid,
where the still impure residua are clrawl1 off; th us what rel­
mains is purely sanguineous. A like thing still more ac­
curately occurs in the still smaller and in the smallest branch­
lets which we cannot cbserve; for there nature is in her own
cxercising-ground.
41. 4. Now as to the qu,antit)l of the blood, lest too great an
abundance infest the organ, it is led away partly by the veins
which are adjoined in a perpetuaI anastomosis with the small'­
est arteries, partly also by the fat, which absorbs superfluities,
as notice the omentu111; that these branches also go off ta the
fat see \Vinslow. ThllS bath the right quality and the right
quantity approach to that motor organ.
42. 5. The very cletermination of the proper branch. which
supplies a given organ favors these things; for this branch
runs, Or is led off, from a more conlLmon branch (see WinsYow
in regard to the first branch), wherefore no greater sanguin­
eous flooel is inj ected into it than the organ itself demanels;
for the blood undulating not thus transversely ta the si des as
much as it urges obliquely forward, therefore, no more pushes
in than just the amount requireel by that organ; thus the in­
vitation is altogether correspondent to the cause, 50 far that
the invitation itself is the primary cause. This is eviclent from
an examination of the nature of th.e unc\t[lation, then also from
the fOl'w,ard motion of the bloocl into the excurrent vessels. By
this reason nothing can be brought ta the larynx but the blood
of just that kind which corresponds ta the uses of the organ;
for ail' things are formed according ta use; nor cloes nature
proceecl a hairsbreadth (lineolam) without the consideration
of use.
16 THE SENSES.

43. 6. A like thing occurs in regard to the second branch,

which is ascribed to the tongue and to its muscles and sen­
sories; for that branch first approaches the sublingual grands
and the pituitary or mucous membrane, in which places it puri­
fies itself of its serum of a poorer quality, and by infinite an­
astomoses "directs itself into the veins, also into the fat of the
tongue, then it betakes itself into the tongue: and, indeed, the
more perfectly are the parts of the organ multiplied in the de­
gree that that sense is more subtle. So also many other things
which conduce to that same end.
44. 7. Here ought also to be observed : that the blood is de­
termined into the muscles of the pharynx and the hyoid boue
by two ways, or by two branches, that is, the first and second.
or the laryngeal and lingual', because there are two primary of­
fices of the pharynx and the hyoid bone, name1y, that they may
serve the larynx in its operation of speech, then that they may
serve the tongue in its operation of mastication. This is the
reason why the blood fiovvs in distinctly by the branches of both
the l2.ryngeal and lïngual arteries, so that the \vork of one may
not disturb that of the other, but that it may be continually
ready; for the pharynx assists the larynx in its operation of
speech, likewise also does the hyoid with its muscles, and the
tongue assists both; thus it appears how carefully it is pro­
vided. That the laryngeal branch also fiows into the muscles
of the pharynx and of the hyoid boue, then also that the lin­
gual' branch fiows into the same, see Winslow.

The Renwining Branches of the Externat Cm'otid.

45. 1. ExIJ'erienee. The third bronch, or the inferior max­

illary artery, goes to the maxillary gland: to the styloid mus­
cles, to the mastoid, to the parotid and to the sublingual' glands;
it gives off branches to the muscles of the pharynx and ta the
fiexors of the head. The fourth bronch, the external maxil­
lary,goes anteriorly over the masseter muscles, over the mid­
die of the lower jaw to the side of the chin (wherefore it is
 COMilWN TRUNKS OF CAROTIDS. 17

calleel the mental artery), under the apex of the angular mus­
cle of the lips, anel to it as also ta the buccinator, and ta the
quadratus of the chin. The tortuous branch, together with
the like of the other side, constitutes the coronal artery of the
lips; it ascenels to the nostrils, and gives off to the muscles and
cartilages of the nose, and downward it sencls off a branch
communicating \Vith the coronal artery of the lips; finally it
ascends to the angI.e of the eye, to the common muscle of the
lids and of the eyebrows, and to the frontal muscle, where it
ceases. The lifth bran ch, the internaI maxillary, is noteworthy ;
it goes to the pterygoid muscles; it then divides inta three
branches. The first goes to the inferior orbital fissure; it di­
rects itself towards the peristaphilinus muscles, and to the
glanelular membrane of the posterior nares; inferiorly it dis­
tributes itse1f to the parts in the orbit of the cavity [of the
nose]. A subordinate branch also enters the cranium: as far
as the dura mater, and communicates with the artery of the
dura mater, entering from beneath through the sphenoid bone.
It sends off still another oranch ta the maxillary sinus and ta
the teeth. The second goes ta the sackets of the teeth and to
the teeth and loses itseH wh en it has passed betwecn the angle
of the lower jaw and the parotid gland, and thus forms the
tem.poral arfcry.. The anterior branch of the temporal artery
goes to the frontal' muscle; it sometimes gives off a little
artery through the cheek bone (os de la pomette) to the or­
bit of the eye. The middle branch goes partly to the frontal
muscle, partly ta the occipital; the posterior portion goes to the
occiput and communicates with the occipital artery; these also
give off branchlets to the teguments.
46. 2. Allalysis. A similar thing occurs with regard to
the rest of the branches of this artery, as with regard to the
tlûrd branch, which gives off branches to the styloid muscles,
ta the mastoid muscles, to the muscles of the pharynx and to
the flexors of the head ; this approaches the maxillary and sub­
lingual glands. The fourth branch, which supplies the m;as­
seter muscles. the buccinator, the quadratus of the chin. the
orbicularis of the lips, final1y the musdes of the eyelids, of the
2
18 THE SENSES.

eyebrows and the frontal muscles, goes to the nostrils, and

there disposes of its superfluities, etc. The fifth brancl~ lïke­
wise, which is divided into several other branches. goes to the
muscles of the orbit of the eye, and to the eye itself; this one
crosses to the nostrils and also to the parotid gland, and thus
unburclens itself of impuritie~; for those glands are the great­
est purificatory organs of the head, namely, the nostrils, to­
gether. with the pituitary membrane of trle nase and palate,
and with the parotid gland ..
47. 3. Therefore, as to what pertains to the eye, or to
sight. the blood which is sent out thither purifies itself of
phlegm and injuriolls sera in its whole passage: l, by
branches to aU the grands of the throat, of the larynx, pharynx,
of the tongue and of the jaw ; 2, in transit by branches thrown
off inlo the pabte and nostrils ; 3. finally by the proper branch,
which is also diverted toward the nostrils and even to the
parotid gland; 4, to say nothing of the branches proper to the
orbit of the eye.. which go to the gland of the lids and the eye­
hrows; 5, this blood which approaches by the last branches
<lUght tü come to the eye altogether pure. 6. Yea, it should
be of that purity that it can penetrate the orbital foramen into
the dura mater, and communicate with the internaI carotid,
for it is purified throughout the way. 7. That such blood is
re4uired by the eye will' be shawn in its analysis. for the sense
of the eye is of a purity proxinùîte \Vith the mediate sense.
48. 4. As the blood acts in the greater and common
branches sa also it acts in the smal\er and particurar branches,
or in those proper to any organ, and indeecl [in the latter]
much more perfectly, orderly and regul"arly; for f1uids and sub­
stantials in their least forms are. as it \Vcr·e, in the exercisc­
ground of their operations; neither are there such diverting
causes and inconstancies, and similar things which lead them
aside from their mIes and law:;, and divert them from nature
which offers them guidance. For the farther you proc.eed
from princip les and first causes toward effects, the more in­
constant1'y. uncertail1ly and limiteclly a thing happens. because
lt draws one into errors and mocks the senses.
 COMMON TRUNKS OF CARO TIDS. 19

49. 5. But in what manner nature acts in her least forms,

and how very perfectly, cannot be sa well apperceived trom
any sensory organ of the head as from the brain itself; for the
brain is the most perfect organ, and because of its large mass
it manifests all the ruies of nature exactly; therefore, those
things which are still desired we sha11 be taught in the follow-
ing Part on the Brain. which things, 1Jowever. we taste before-
. hand in each sensory organ.
50. 6. Thus we can kno\\' all the rules of operating nature,
which regard the circulation of her blood, and the determina-
tion of its vess.e1s; then also we could determine why its vessels
flow thus and sa, and not otherwise. For nature, from a cer-
tain physical and natural necessity, does not and cannot other-
wisc" tend to proposed encls and uses. This is the reason why
nature in the determination of her vessel"s is everywhere like
herself in every object. The very differences originate not from
use. but from diversity of tissue, for every subject, especia11y
in the head and face, has a different tissue, but. given a use or
an endwhich she intends. nature everywhere observes her
ruies: therefore it is worth while to e},."j)lore those rules which,
being explorcd, you can know the deter111lination of visible
causes, and also that of invisible causes. From least things
we may lcarn marc pcrfectly and certain!'y of the rules which
nature observes; for in least things she is perpetua11y in her
mies. \Vihereforc, from the brains we may best learn of thosc
precepts which, taken together. exhibit the natural necessity of
the organism. Those most general rules are many, as follows:
51. I. Ail vessels are in the stream of the motion of their
own viscus. for every viscus has its own determinations ac-
cording to common axes, peripheries and centers, according ta
w.hich also are its motions. Among thcmselves the viscera,
(each part in itself) bo:'d their directions according to centres
and axes, which regard the direction of thc integers, and these.
the direction of the whole; therefore in arder that the bîood
may he rightly distribllted, a11 the vesselsflow in those di-
rections; wherefore we may. from the directions of the yeso
sels. as also of the fibres, l'earn the deterntination of tInt or-
20 THE SENSES.

gan of the body as to its axis, peripheries, and centres, like­

wise vice versa; wherefore also we may learn of the determina­
tian of their motion. ;:;nd thus of the tissue itse1f; for those
things which we do not distinctly perceive and refer ta forms,
ta their axis, and ta many other things, these we understand
only obscurely, and we cannat explore their tissue, wherefore
neither can we explore the causes of their progression ta ulti­
mate use; therefore the first rule is that the vessels and fibres
traverse the cleterminations of the body, then those of every
viscus, finally those of ever)' part; for the vessels are deter­
minant and the viscera, thence excitecl, are their cletermina­
tions. But the more tmiversal' cletermination is of the nervous
fibres ,"vhich, however. concur with the blood vessels; for the
vessels follow these fibres; th us first things conCUr with last
things, in orcier that media may be detenndnecl ta their OW1)
uses. 2. The second rule is, that to every organ is furnishec1
both the due CJuantity ancl the due quality of blood. ancl this in­
deed according to use; for without the clue allotment, a desig­
nated use 1V0uid never be obtained in externals. The due
quantit)' is obtained br the dra\ving off of the blood into the
veins both rroximately to that organ. and everywhere also in
tiiC C<J1I:.'i1-.:,)n branches. to this extent, namel)'. that the
organ is neveï obliged ta receive as great a quantity
of bl'oocl as in any case its common artery pours in: for in the
time of wakefulness there is a greater incitation than invita­
tion of the bloocl: in the time of sIeep they mutually corre­
spond; therefore the passages which clraw off ought to be
open, namely. bath those that open into the cuticIes, which also
draw off the quantit)'·:· both of the blood and of the serum.
3. Now as to qua!ity of the bIood, there are everywhere placed
gIancluIes which draw the phlegm into themseIves, and thus
purify the bIood for the organ; -therefore there are excretions
which are beneficial, and which, by way of the saliva and of
the stomach, etc.. lead back again into the blood, l'est anything

*The word in the original is qlla/itatcJII; the contcxt strollgly indi'

ca tes that it should be qUllntitatcm.- TR.
 COMMON TRUNKS OF CAROTIDS. 21

perish which can be of use; this is the reason of there being

sa many glands. and also the reason of their position, some­
times sicle by side with the viscl1s which they serve. 4. The
mutual correspondence of incitation and invitation is for the
most part obtained by the tissues of the given organ in least
things. then by the direction of the vessel either obliquely or
transverseYy, for the more obliquely or transversely any vessel
is directed from the cam/mon tn1l1k the less can the inciting
and urging force be present and the more inviting the force can
be, as may appear from the flux of the undulation. 5. For the
nobler an organ is the more transverse determinations of that
kind are there from the common branches, even to the most
particular; this appears especially from the branches which go
ta the eye and to the brain. As ta those which go to the eye,
6rst it is the com:mon branch which leads off [from the
carotid], then aIl the remaining four, then the branchlets likc­
wise, even so that they can bring in more deeply nothing else
than that which is suitable for the sensory. This is especiaIly
50 in the case of the brain, where many transverse and angu­
lar detern1inations occur in the comJ1lon branch. and stilY more
in the smaIler branches. These are the general rules which
nature everywhere follows; there are yet innl1merable mies, as
it were, subject and subaltern to these, which rules nature ob­
serves; thence uses and enc\s are known, and there is nowhere
any deviation. You may see other things in the determina­
tion of the internai carotid, which is as it were an exemplar of
ail; for these things, which have the leadership of life act most
distinctly and regularly for the sake of the internai sensa­
tions; sa that these may be the rules of the remaining sensa~
tions.
 CHAPTER III.

SENSE IN GENERAL.

ANALYSES.

52. 1. Living is sensating, and, according to the excitation

of the sensation, doing. Life is only half and th us imperfect
in sensating, but perfect and full when conjoined with action;
for sense mIes over action and is in it,-is life in effect; other­
wise it is only in causes, principles and as it were in potency,.
for in action there can be whatever belongs to sensation.
53. 2. The external senses give life to the body; for they
are the external organs and sensories of it. But the internal
senses give life to the superior mind, for they are its internal
organs. In these latter the Understanding and yVill meet, as do
sensation and action in the body; for understanding is higher
than sensating; for the understanding is furnished by the in­
ferior organs and sensates according to their information. Thus
in place of sense is understanding, in place of action is will.
They change their names in a superior sphere or in every su­
peri or degree.
54. 3. The senses are given in order that they may instruct
the soul, as also our rational mind [as to these things]:-1.
V/hat is going on in the macrocosm or in the world outside its
microcosm, so that it may ascertain what the world is doing out­
side the sou!. 2. That it may ascertain whether that which is
bound to enter 1S suitable for the microcosm or not. 3. In order
that the body may thus be enticed and united to the circumfluent
world, and especially to the society and its members in which it
is. 4. In order that its [the soul's] understanding may be in­
structec1 by the way of the senses, or a posterior way, and may
grow into intelligence; thus that it may continually be more
c10sely united to the superior power or to the sou l, finally to the
supreme mind, in order that this may, with its operations, morc
distinctly inflow. 5. In order that in the world we may ac­
 SENSE IN GENERAL. 23

knowledge, venerate, and finally adore the great Creator;

wherefore we see all these wonelerful things anel in the course
of time, as we become aelult, still more wonderful things. 6.
Thus the senses explore the things which are the ultimates of
the worlel, anel which do not reach to the sphere of sight, of
which otherwise we woulel have no cognizance.
55. The senses are the explorers of things in ultimates in
order that the soul may ascertain them by the means [thus of­
fereel] .
56. 4. As to what appertains more specifically to our senses,
it is known that there are five :-1. The cruelest sense, or touch,
is stretched round about the whole cuticle to such an extent that
nothing can attack, whether naturally from the worlel itself and
its kingdoms, or contingently, which this sense· does not apper­
ceive and announce to its sou!. Indeed if anything hurtful af­
fects the surface itself as in diseases it [announces this]. Where­
fore also the soul can enjoy the senses in order that in the cuticles
it may cognize those things which affect the surface. 2. To the
sense of touch succeeels that of taste, which sensates all those
things which are elissolveel in fluids, waters anel salivas, and
which strike it; wherefore it perceives whether the thing be good
or whether it be evil; thus it perceives what is true and what i5
false, for these things are the very ultimate ends of sensations,
namely, that they make discriminations. 3. To taste again snc­
ceeds in the matter of purity smell; for this sense perceives those
things which float in the crnder atmosphere. 4. These three
senses are neighbors to one another, and are constructeel in the
same modes with similar papillée; but their differences are as
between the prior anel the posterior. Touch is the most general
sense for it perceives a boely or congeries of parts; but taste per­
ceives the parts of this compound, as, for instance, those that
float in water, such as salts, nitres, and those things which ap­
proach to that measure; smell, however, perceives the parts of
these parts, not, however, whole salts, but the divided and
smaller elements, such as' the oily, fragrant, urinous, and
volatile parts. Thu5 these senses taken together constitute one
series, which embraces three degrees, which succeed each other
as prior and posterior.
 THE SENSES.

57. S. But the superior senses, as hearing and sight, per­

ceive the fol!owing things :-1. Those things which are distant,
whether they endeavor to touch or not, as, for instance, sounds
and objects. 2. Wherefore this sense is brought from a distance
by the atmosphere, and such as it is brought away such it is
brought in by the fibres, that the soul may recognize it. 3. They
furnish the internai sensations themselves, for they bring in
changes of state to the internai organs, which changes remain,
whence is memory. 4. The change which is then brought in
from the memory again brings in changes of state, whence are
intel!ectual ideas, which remain in the superior memory, whence
they are taken as auxiliaries when one reasons; for in every
single one of such ideas there are many things. S. Therefore
these sensations are said to be superior which have like ends,
namely, what is good and what is evil, what is true and what is
false; what is good and what is evil are natural, but what is true
and what is false are to be referred to the understanding, in
order that it mal' judge not according to the goodnesses of the
senses, but according to superior goodness, whence is truth.
This is human.
58. 6. These two senses [namely, hearing and sight] con­
stitute one series. 1. The consideration must be begun from
lowest or ultimate things, or from the hearing of sound. 2.
Then articulate sounds are to be referred to a kind of sight,
whence is imagination; wherefore hearing and sight meet and
the one instructs the other. 3. Finally this is to be referred to
the inmost sense, whence is understanding. 4. Thus the series
of these sensations is also triple, namely, hearing, sight and un­
derstanding, of which the differences are as between prior and
posterior.
59. 7. Al! sensations [perform certain offices]:- 1. They
indicate to the soul the quality of the things which touch the
sensories. 2. The soul is affected according to the disclosures
of touch, if good, joyously, if evil, sadly, whence is affection
which is natural; for all the senses have their own affections,
according to the quality of the forms which touch them, accord­
ing as these agree or disagree with the state of the soul, where­
 SENSE IN GENERAL. 25

fore as they agree or disagree with the order of the universe and
in their own universe. 3. The soul according to its affections
immediately induces changes of state upon the whole organ or
sensory. 4. \rVherefore there are sensation, affection and
change of state which mutually and immediately follow each
other; the organs are wonderfully constructed for all these
things. S. Sometimes the state is changed Ly lowest or cor­
poreal causes, as by diseases, whence other affections and there­
fore other sensations take place. Sometimes the state is chang­
ed Ly inmost causes or those in the rational minci, before con­
tact, whence also there is another sensation and another affec­
tion. (See BoerhaŒve.) \Vherefore ail ought to be distinctfy
comprehended.
60. 8. Any external sensory, whether it Le the tongue or the
nostrils or the ear or the eye, is a kiml of common sensory, con­
sisting of infinite smallest things, which are themselves little
sensories, which taken together constitute the common sensory.
1. These little scnsories are fashionecl for every kincl of ap­
proaching objects, evcn so that they are recipients and clefer­
er.ts, wh en those things which touch are agents; thus they are
passive respectively to objects, and active respectively to the
office of carrying away ta the other [sensories]. 2. The sen­
sories or !ittle sensories are pliable and elastic, even so far that,
accorcling to the nature of elastic bodies, they lose nothing from
the impact. 3. They are fashioned for every variation of im­
pelling or touching objects in that degree, and indeed from the
gteatest to the least. That which is greatest ancl least is too
blunt and too sharp, and does not faU into that sense, but per­
ishes and vanishes.'r. 4. \Vherefore the sensory of one kincl does
not receive the things which are in a superior or in an inferior
degree, but only to the greatest and least of its oWll degree,
wherefore there are limits and spheres of sensation. S. In order
that the sensory may receive all these varieties the little sen­
sories must ail be perpetually various, even so far that it is neces­

*The passage is obscure. 1 take it to mean that which is greater th an

the greatest of the preceding degree is too blunt. and that which is less
th an the least of the preceding degree is too sharl). to fall into the sense
of the preceding degtee, therefore, il perishes and \'anishes.-TR.
26 THE SENSES.

sary that not one papilla be in every way or absolutely like an­
other. 6. And whatever one little sensory, whether it be a
papilla or any other sentient part, feels, that another papil1a no­
tices, to the extent that every sensation is ,received by every lit­
tle sensory, and thus by the common organ. 7. Every modifica­
tion or tremor enters its own little sensory adequate to itself,
and it enters the point adequate to it; thus since al1 the little
sensories are various, all the various things enter. 8. Where­
fore now in every sensation there are infinite things which con­
cord. 9. Indeed, if it passes over into an elastic membrane, and
if the sense is of its degree, so that it passes over into a cartilage
at the same time, the more the sense is exalted, and becomes
sensible in the common sensory or the brain.
61. 9. To the little sensories append and adhere the nerves
which carry the mode even to the brain. 1. The nerves are com­
poundeJ according té> the degree of the sensation; thus very
simple sensations receive simple nerves or compositions, com­
pound sensations receive compound nerves; for the ascent from
degree to degree is by composition alone and division of the
fibres of various order ; wherefore it is necessary in the cognition
of the degree of the fibres to come at a cognition of the sensa­
tions. 2. Wherefore in every organ there are as many composi­
tions of fibres as there are little sensories, for they are variou3,
but still they are of one degree or series between the greatest and
the least. 3. Contacts strike the little sensories according to
their own figures or forms of modification: figures are of the
impinging parts, forms are of fluids and atmospheres; the
former take on a vibration, but the latter a modification; thus
vibration and modification mutually respond to each other. 4.
Such as is the contact in the extreme little organs, such it
traverses that whole fibre, and ail the fibres into their ante­
cedents, even toward their beginnings in the brain, or in the
cortical substance; for which reason there is no fibre on the
way, there is no spherule of the cortical substance, which does
not receive every part of the vibration or modification, even
so far that they may be the beginnings not only of those fibres,
but a11 the beginnings of the whole common sensory. 5. Not
only the fibre carries this sense, but especially the animal spirit,
 SENSE IN GENERAL. 27

which courses the fibres, which spirit 1S highly elastic,

and does not Jose anything from a receivec1 force, but pre-
sents the hole in the beginnings; thus such as it is in one ex-
treme such it is in the other, which is the reason why the
sensory fibres are softer and fuller of spirit than the motor
fibres. 6. Ali sensation proceeds according to the fibres into
antecec1ents or toward the cortical substance; but every action
proceec1s according to consequence, or from the cortex into
the muscles; the motor fibres are distinct, and action pro-
ceeds according to certain fibres, not according to aIl.
62. 10. Ali sensations, while they are coming into the fibres
and to the cortical substance, where the true common sensory is,
indicate themselves and their mutations by the mutations of state
induced upon those beginnings. 2. The purer the substance
organically fashionec1 the more mutations of state it can receive
distinctly. 1ts perfection consists in this faculty, and it is an
attribute of it; otherwise it sensates nothing. 3. The extcrna:
organs or those of sensation induce these changes of state upon
the cortical beginnings, to which they are accustomec\, whence
is memory. When these mutations return ideas go forth from
the memory; for every mutation comprehends one idea, amI un-
limited greater ideas in the degree that the sensory is purer;
fina!!y infinite ideas into which they can be changed in a mo-
ment. 4. The modification itself and the sensation exactly co-
incide, but the modification becomes sensation, so far as the
recipient principle, that is, the soul, is endowed \Vith life; modi-
fication is turned inta sensation by the life of the sou!. 5. The
soul therefore is affected by the harmony and form of the modi-
fications, whence is the affection of the sensations of the animm
and of the mind. 6. According ta that affection the state of the
internaI sensory is instantly changed, wherefore also the state
of the external sensory. The state of the external is changed
by external causes at the same time as by internaI causes; for
the fibre of the !iUle sensory communicates by fibres with
the motor fibre, with the fibre of the glands, and with all
neighboring fibre; thus indeec1 the cerebrul11 and the cerebel-
um [are affectec1] from thé prior; thus there finc1s place a
concursus of affections, wherefore, immediately, a change of
28 THE SENSES.

state. 7. Affections go before, but seem almost in an instant

to incluce change of state; for immecliately sensation finds
place, also change of state finc1s place; affection indeeù is the
means and thus the cause. 8. Affections are general, particu­
lar and singular. and are also to be referred to series and
classes. The most general affections are good and evil, joy
and pleasantness, anù grief or unpleasantness. The fibre ex­
pands itself for good, and contracts itself for evil, of itself.
9. Whereforc a11 the organs. especially their parts or little
sensories of every kind, can take on mutations of state, namely,
according to all affections. A similar state is therefore induced
upon the motor organs, and upon those of the entire neighbor­
hood.
63. l J. Ever)' sensation is carried both to the cerebrum and
ta the cerebellum; it is necessary that both become participant
of the sensation. 2. For the cerebrum is what feels the modes,
indeed also what gives forth affections. 3. But the cerebellum
is what induces suitable changes of state upon the affection. 4.
\Vherefore to every single organ of the sensory is sent forth a
nerve both from the cerebrum and from the cerebellum. S. 'llle
fifth pair of the head is a nerve of both the cerebrum and of the
cerebellum, wherefore it goes to ail the sensory organs, and thus
connects [them] with each brain; just as seeing is also from its
softer part. 6. The organs themselves, namely, the external
sensory organs, sensate nothing from themselves, but are only
fashioned for the quality of the abjects in order that they may
receive and carry away [sensations]; they are instrumental
causes; the cerebrum is what sensates, the cerebellllm also; but
this sense [of the cerebellum] does not come to the conscious­
ness of our mind, but to the soul, ta its first causes, which are
fashioned to the order of the sou\. 7. Although the soul is
everywhere, still it cannot feel everywhere unless it shall have
formed organs suitable forreceiving; although there is one
force, still the cxercise of use arises from its form and tissue' .
thus in the cerebrum are organs altogether unformed for receiv­
ing, not so elsewhere; thus every tissue is from the same sou\.
but is operated variously according to the tissue. This will be
further explained in the Chapter on the Brain.
64. 12. The senses can be sharpened, and indeed as fol­
 Sr:.NSr:. IN CEl'v'ER/1L.

10ws :-1. From the greatest to the least [degree], in order that
the sphere of sensation may be greater. 2. Then also that they
[the sensations], can be more distinctly perceived. This appears
in touch, taste, sme11, hearing, sight, in animais, in the earlier
and infantile age.
65. The causes of sharpening ancl perfection are as fol­
lows:- 1. In order that a11 may act 'separately in least parts, and
in order that they he not bound together nor adhere, as in com­
pounds, when they grow soft. 2. In order that the sheath which
covers may become softer, and that thus the little sensories may
be the more laid bare. 3. In order that the litt le sensories them­
selves may grow soft, and capable of undergoing more changes
of state. vVherefore [th~y are sharpened] lest they grow callous
or coarse, and lest they cohere to one another and th us become
useless, whence generally indistinct. 4. 'l'hat the little sensorics
may be distinguished into smaller series. 5. Then in order that
a more beautiful and softer variety may reign among the little
sensories, thus that more suitalle changes of state, even thosc
agrecing with the re1ated (affini) [state] can be inducecl. 6. ln
order that the fibres themselves mc.y grow tender [that is, sensi­
tive] and grow soft. 7. A11 these [organs] arise from use anù
(~xercise ; yea, the external organs lil<t as the internaI.
66. 13. It would seem as though t>ere couIc! he more than
five senses, if wc consider the whole sel 'es of the varieties ap­
proaching from the macrocosm, furthermore that ob.iects are
more distinctly apperceivecl by sorne [sens~s] than by others:
one organ,-except the internaI or brain,-receives the varieties
of only one series or clegree, wherefore the perfection is of the
organs. This is callecl its proper sense; there can, however, be
é\ double sense in one organ. Besicles, 1. Therc can be an organ

that can perceive divisions Boating in water that are smaller

than are the human organs. 2. There can he a sensory which
apperceives sma11er clivisions of the effluvia in the air, perhaps
also those which Boat in the ether, as, for instance, dogs can per­
:eive odors imperceptible to men, etc., animalcula still smaller
things. 3. There can be a sensory than can perceive the small­
est efflllvia in the pmer eÔer itself. 4. Then also it can perceive
the modification of that ether which Bows according to the
3° THE SENSES.

natural fonn, thence is animal magnetism, that they know their

own region (quod plagam suam sciant). 5: It will be demon­
strated in the Psychology and below that our rational mind it·
self, or because we are rational, is the reason for our enjoying
a duller acumCll of sensation [than animais]. 6. From these
things it is evident that there can be a sympathy of minds, from
influx alone by the purer ethereal atmosphere, ane! that it is in
the state after e!eath, and that every one knows the thoughts of
another. Not 50 in an imperfect state.
 CHAPTER IV.

SilŒLL.

67. 1. The uses of smell a:rc as follows:-r. Smell exists in

order that the soul may take cognizance of what slips into the
lungs, for the sake of the blood, which takes thence atmospheric
elements, and is thereby tllrned into arterial blood. 2. In arder
that the brain may be exhilarated, and perchance that its spirit
may take in ethereal and, as it were, celestial elements by this
way. 3. In arder that the cerebrllm and the cerebellllm may
be excited by external causes into their alternate changes of
animation; likewise the lungs. 4. In arder that, by the excita­
tion of sense, phlegm may be drawn off from ail the organs of
the head, and from the brain, and that they may thus be puri­
fied.
68. 2. As ta the first use, namely, that smell is in arder that
the soul may take cognizance of what slips into the lungs, for the
sake of the blood, which takes thence atmospheric dements and
is thereby turned into arterial blood, see Part II. of the Animal
Kingdon1, on the Tangue, pages 12-15, n. 284. Not~: These
things are ta be observed :-1. That the atmosphere bears in its
bosom stores and crowds of effluvia. 2. Still more so does the
ether. 3. Men sensate only the atmospheric properties and
abundance ~ brute animais sensate also the ethereaI, as is evident
from the power of scent in dogs, and from eagles and other
[birds], which sensate things from a long distance. 4. The
aliments which smell sensates, more than taste, are the purer
cÎlings of the blood. 5. But because aliments and elements of
both kinds [that is, of smell and of taste] con tribute to the
nutrition and refreshment of the blood, hence there is so great
an affinity between them; each sense fully instrtlcts the sou l, as
may appear in brutes. 6. The lungs sensate at the same time,
wherefore animais draw the animations of their respiration
deeply. 7. This is why the nerve of the fifth pair goes ta the
nostrils, and the intercostal nerve ta the lungs; the office that
J2 THE SENSES.

the fifth pair performs in the head and towards the sensory
organs, the intercostal performs towards the lungs; wherefore
they concur, or the one inflows into the other, in order that they
may act from agreement. 8. The sense, as for instance taste,
notices from the same cause what may be useful; for the soul
regards the blood as her vicar in the body. 9. That thence the
blood is turned into arterial blood, see The Nase, Part II., 10.
That the cuticles also draw in those things, see The Cutl:cle.
69. That sense is to the end that the brain may be exhila-
rated, and likewise by this way receive ethereal aliments, appears
from the following considerations :-1. It appears from the sud-
den change of the brain and the animus, from a very strong in-
drawn breath. 2. From the sudden change of the animus either
to gladness or to grief (nece1n). 3. From the cuticles, the office
of which the nostrils more distinctly perform; for thecuticles
of the nostrils are more tender, and more immediately communi-
cate with the brains by means of the fibres and membranes. 4.
From the immense abnndance of arteries and veins, as also of
glandules of varions kinds, as in the cuticles. S. From the im-
mediate sanguineous or arterial way into the brain, through the
foramina of the cribriform plate, and by other communications
with the arteries of the brain. See Win slow on the External
Caratid, above. 6. It appears especially from phenomena. 7.
Then also from the nature of this sense in that it sensates more
subtile parts than does taste, therefore if snatches up those part,
which are sllitable for the purer blood or spirit. 8. From the
..:ommunication with all the medul1ary fibre, \Vith each meninx,
especial1y the pia mater, with the arteries; all these fibres, name-
Iy, the medullary fibre, the pia mater and the artery, are concen-
trated in the cortical substance. 9. That smell is in the very
pole of the whole cranium and brain, and is the beginning of the
axis of the dllct into the body. 10. Therefore there is a certain
concentration in the inferior sense.
70. Smell exists in arder that if may excite the cerebrum and
the cerebellum inta their alternate turns (see Animal Kingdam,
Part IL). 1. As an external cause which corresponds to the
internaI. 2. This appears from sneezing. 3. From the very
organism of the fibres, and from the connection of al1 things
 SMELL. 33

pertaining ta it. 4. Why not in man as III beasts, see cited

passage.
71. Sme11 exists in arder that the mucus may .pe drawn off
from the organs. 1. From the ear. 2. From the eye. 3. From
the brain. 4. From the blood. 5. vVhence it is the duct from
ail [the organs of the head]. 6. Wherefore it is intermediate ta
a11, and as it were the central place, whither ail the pituitre flow
together. 7. Thus it is the common emunctory of the head. 8.
When a papi11a is excited, a glandule is aIso excited; thus also
the ducts, membranes and arteries, are conjoined; for the sense
is the cause of the action of a11 these things, for it is their life;
see Animal K ingdo1n, Part II.
72. The use of thcse things which the sense cf smell offers is
the circ1e; the use is for the soul, for the spirit, for the blood,
and from the blood it returns into the spirit; thus ail things are
c1arifiee! and exalted into gladness.
73. 3. The fi'l'st movement of this sensation is the reception
of those things \,,;hieh toneh; the second, thence arising, is sen­
sation; the third, fiowing forth from sensation, is affection; the
four/ho is change of state; the fifth, is the effect.
74. The first movement, or reception, is of the body or of
the nostrils, whieh admit the air feeund with effluvia. The sec··
ond, or sensation, is of the soul herself; for she sensates the
minutest divisions of toueh. The third, or affection, is of our
mine! and at the same time of the soul; for the mind does not
nerceive the minutest divisions, but only ~he affection thence re­
rlounding, and its varieties; thence it is evident how obscure
our sensdlion is, for one affection consists of infinite things;
wherefore it is evident how fallacious it is. The fourth, or
change of state, is of the mind and at the same time of the
orgap or sensory; appetite indeed intercedes anri a certain af­
fection of the animus. The fifth, or the effect, is of the organ
itself and at the same time of the whole body ta which applica­
tion is !TIacle, and ta which t\:;e it yields; for ail things in the
whole body dispose themselve~ for receiving, and for serving
the common use.
75. From these things it appears that there is a circ1e, that
it urst begins in the body, tends towards the soul and returns
3
34 THE SENSES.

ta the body, even sa that where the beginning is, there are the
terminations; but after the finished g1're it is the office of the
body, tirst, ta receive, especially sa of the nostrils; second, Qf
~he soul ta feel ; third, of 0~lr mincI ~o be affected ; fourth, of the
animus ta desire; fi/th, of tne nostrils ta be changed as ta suit­
able state; si.rtft, of the whole body ta be disposed, in arder that
an ~ffect may be givel1 forth; thus the first and the last, after
the gyre is run through, come togethel.
76. 4. N ow as ta the first movement, namely, that it is the
reception of those things wluch touch, these things are ta be ot­
~erved :-I. Those parts are especially the harder corpuscles of
the mineraI, vegetable and animal kingdoms,-angulate, poly­
gonous, plane and variously spherical. 2. These parts are like
rhose in taste, but are smaller, for where is the smallest of taste
there is the largest of smell. This is observed in this, that those
things that are tasted are not smelled except as ta the more sub­
tile parts; we taste cammon salt, alkali, acid, but we do not smell
them. 3. But [we smellJ the more volatile saline, sulphurous,
minous particles, and the like. 4. \Vherefore these things float
about in the air, and, as may appear, embraced by the bul!:e or
vapors themselves, when they are released from these bull~ they
strike the little sensories. S. \Vherefore also they are·present in
greater abundance, for they are iu a superior sphere and de­
gree, where there are more varieties but greater harmonies. 6.
The greatest of t<lste, as for instance common salt, does not act
upon the organ of smell as an abject of its sense, but as an abject
of a cornmon sense; for the cutide itself or the mucous mem­
brarie feels it, whence arises a corrugation. a kind of titillation,
a permutation, and many other things; for like things at the
same time allure many of the little sensories, or the glandules
themselves, in which there is a common sense, similar ta a more
subtile and more sensible cuticular touch. 7. \Vhence it may
appear that w!lat is the greatest of smell is not that which is the
smallcst Qf taste, but that it is of a superior c1egree, of like fig-me
with acids or simple salts, which consist of compounds. 8. The
smallest of taste can be said ta be one spine of acid salt, where­
fore' these things are the smallest trigons, cubes, parallelograms,
polygons and the like; whence the very basis, or the greatest of
 SMELL. 35

that sense, appears; whence the smal1est is known. 9. Brute

animais know distinctly still purer things, on account of many
causes, of which below. 10. From the above we might deduce
whence arises the sense of what is fragrant, noisome élnd the
rest, even so far that those senses can be described if the science
of corpuscles be worked out, without which we never arrive at
a knawledge of sensation, but only of affection, which thing is
not rational, but animal. 11. How infinite are the effiuvia of this
kind, is evident from every object of the mineraI, vegetable and
animal kingdoms, in that every one of these objects continually
breathe forth a billow and ocean of effiuvia which continually
renew themselves. Derivee! from magnetic effiuvia a similar
crowd fills full every object; especial1y the still purer things
whence are compouncls.
77. As to what concerns the second movement or sensation,
it has been said that it is proper to the soul, which apperceives
ail the parts distinctly. 1. Thence is her affection, which dif-
fers altogetber from the affection of our minci. 2. For her af-
fection is of a superior degree, and from single ciifferences taken
together truly feels whether or not a thing is suitable for the
blood; on the other hancl, the affection of our mind apperceives
delight, but does 110t therefore know from affection whether a
thing concluces or not; poisonous things frequent1y smell sweet-
Iy, sorne useful things horri!>ly, and sa forth. 3. Th~t sensa-
tion requires papilI:e adequate to the objects of that sense;
wherefore those papill:e are more subtile, and are not yisible ex-
ceiJt when boilecl in water (see vVinslow) ; there is also, accord-
ing to Heister, a villosity. 4. Those papil12e are more tender,
mare markecl, as may be seen uncler the sheath of pia mater, like
the papil1:e unaer the sheath of the Ol1tmost or coarser membrane
of the tangue. 5. They arise from the ncrves, even so that they
are nerve forms. 6. The membranes themselves cannot give
any such sense, except only the sense of touch, but the forms are
adeqllate ta the abjects. which forms can apply those abjects ta
themselves, and impress the very mode and fignre upon" thp.
nerves, whence there is a corresponcling modification. 7. It is
similar in regard to sight, the rays of which spring back from
the hard parts as abjects, whence continuously exists a modifi-
 THE SENSES.

cation. 8. How great is the abundance of such papill<e, see

Winslow. The olfactory nerves, together \Vith their meninx,
pass over into those papill<e, and are terminated in them as in
their own extremities; see the authorities.
78. The vehicles 'wlûch convey thase abjects are as fal-
laws :-1. The air is the vehicle which carries them about. 2.
Then also the purer air or ether. 3. In the ether they flow more
actively, both because they are more minute and because they
float in more volatile atmospheres, which impart to them their
force of striking. 4. It may seem as if there are vapors in which
the parts are embraced, which are set free in the tumefied nos-
trils, and th us strike [the sensories]. S. There are also spirits
which bear them, as also thin oils, and the like. 6. On accounl
of their minuteness they penetrate the mucus itself. 7. They in-
folel and insil1uate themselves into a kincl of thin humor, which
distills from the brain through the pores of the cribiform plate;
this, like the salivas on the tongue, dissolves and insinuates those
parts; for this saliva is most limpid in its first origin, but this
humor being evolved makes the rest thick, whence is mucus (sec
\Vinslow). Hence also this sense rejoices in its OWI1 saliva;
for that something similar exudes from the st:1allest arteriaJ
capillaries can also be conjectured. 8. The things which arl~
coarser are introduced into the mucus, and there beaten, an'j
excite touch, whence also such affections and changes of sta' e
redound as are corrugations and expansions, which continllal'v
extcnd themselves according to cvery contact, namdy, along
the elura mater.
79. H aw the sense of smell penetrates the comman sensary.
1. It takes place especially through the fibres of the olfactory
nerves. 2. Wherefore those fibres tend by the mammillary pro-
cesses through the pores of the cribriform plate even to those
little organs. 3. Thosc fibres are therefore multiplied and are
thin; for the thinner they are the more suitable they are for the
sense; furthermore, they are almost fluid, according to the de-
scription,-all these things being arguments of exquisite sensa-
lion. 4. Thes.e fibres are annexed to ail the fibres of the medulla
of the brain; for they arise between the corpora striata and the
thalami of the optic nerves, 5 Thence the way lies open into
 SJfELL. 37

all the cortical substance of the brain. 6. Besides these fibres,

fibres of the fifth pair also flow along which carry the sense also
ta the cerebellum; for in arder that a change of state may exist,
it is neccssary that it take place from the cerebellum, which in­
duces a change of state, not only on the organ, but also on the
whole body generally ;this change of state is the office of the fifth
pair, as has also been observed in the sense of taste. Vou will
see many causes below. 7. Besides there is also the pia mater
which hides those papill<e under its sheath; this also conveys
the sense by an opposite way towards the cortex where a meet­
ing takes place. That the pia mater enters the single spherules
of the cortex and gives them a cammon tunic is ta be seen else­
where. 8. How very swiftly the modification traverses those
very subtle fibres, and dissipates itself into the whole expanse
of the membranes, even ta their utmost limits, may appear from
the nature of the modification. Thus on account of this meet­
ing, sense is terrninated in its beginnings. 9. The sense is also
carriecl by an arteriaÎ way, or by the corporeal fibres which likc­
wise enter the cortex; which has been seen in the part on the
Cuticle and will be seen in the part on the Brain. IO. Bence
[the sense enters] by a triple way. Ir. It is allowable ta add
a fourth way, by the dura mater; but by this way the sense of
touch proceeds, whence permutation, etc. I2. Therefore every
~ensatiol1 of smell pervades the entire cortical substance of the
braill. 13. i\nd by mutations of state gives the sense, which
mutations respond ta the' modifications of the fibres, as does
sight ta harder abjects. Sensation in the cortex of the brain
is only change of state. 14. The fibre of the nerve of the fifth
pair carries those macles also ta the cerebellum, but, as may ap­
pear, by the fibres alone and [also by] their tunics, thus also
into the cortex by a double way. IS. The composition of the
fibres corresponds ta the keenness of the senses; that the keen­
ness of sense is greater arises solely from tllC composition, ten­
derness, and multiplication of the fibres, and from the abund­
ance of spirits in thel11. Ali these things cOlleur in the ani­
mations in brutes, as may appear from the description of the
mamillary processes.
80. 5. As to the affections, which the senses of smell and
 THE SE.\'SES.

taste cause, these things are to be held. 1. The affections of

the soul are of one kind, those of the rational mind another,
those of the imagination another, and those of the organ itself
of another. 2. The affection of the soul will show itself as a
certain love of the society or commerce of its own body, for
the sake of ulterior ends, either for the sake of society, or for
the sake of the heavenly kingdom, altogether according to the
spiritual state of the soul which looks above itself; but the
natural state looks to the side or to society. 3. The affection of
the rational mind is for the sake of good or evil, especially on
account of its body and minci, and its safety; thence arises an
affection of a kind of gooclness which is believed to be here
within, whither they wam those senses. The perception of
goodness is according to principles a posteriori, according to
knowledge and other things, which are the causes of the prin­
ci pIes. 4. The affection of the imagination or of the soul is a
kind of gladness and hilarity, or a sadness arising from the
sense. 5. The affection of the sense itself, whether of taste
or smell, as, for instance, sweetness or fragrance, or the con­
trary, is of the organ itself, therefore also the pleasure. This
affection does not arise from the aforesaid affections, even as
might have been concludecl of them, but only from the harmony
and more perfect form of the parts which come into contact
[with the sensory], to which like modifications in the nerves
respond, and like mutations of state in the cortex of the brain;
thus there is an agreement of form. 6. Ta know the har­
monies of those mutations 'is an immense labor, for they are
according to the forms in every degree. ï. Wherefore those
senses are not corporeal, although they are not sensatecl ex­
cept in the brain by its mutations, and the mutations of its
cortical substance. There is a harmony which can be sub­
mitted to calculation, especially in these senses where circular
forms occur, but it is of vast labor, and it would not now be
useful to go into those subtleties.
81. The causes of the desires and appetites, in tille manner
as of the mutations of the state of the organ of these senses, are
as follows :-1. The cause is the affection itself, and its cause is
the knowledge or understanding of those things which affect
 SMELL. 39

the sense. 2. \Vherefore the cause of appetites in the soul is

different from that in the mind, and sa forth. 3. There is of
the soul indeed a love of perfecting the blood, by those parts
which approach or are attracted by the atmosphere; her affec­
tion is true, but her superior affection is truer, as also her love;
because the cognition of things causing that sense is true. 4.
Of the rational mind is the desire for those things which touch
[the sensory] ; for the mind is affected by the goodness of those
things according ta knowledge which it acquires by art or ex­
periencc or other cognition. 5. But of the animus or imagina­
tion is appetite, arising either from the minci and thus from what
is superior to itself, whichis a rational appetite, or from the
quality of the sense itself, thus from the sense itself of the given
organ. 6. To the sense itself appetite cannat be attributed, but
change of state or a disposition for receiving that ta which it is
thus instigated; as, for instance, will, cupidity and action. 7.
From these things it may appear that they who have appetite
from taste or smell alone are animal, but not rational, where­
fore neither are they truly men; on this account they are not
able ta abstain from those things which are hurtful. They are
only clients of pleasure, bath in respect ta quality and in respect
ta quantity. 8. From these causes it may appear, who excite!
these senses, or, rather, what excites the changes of state thel~"­
selves, namely, on the part of the soul, it is her love, or, on the
part of the rationa1 mind, it is its desire, or, on the part of th\:
imagination, it is its appetite, or, on the part of the body, it it
its pleasure. 9. This is the reason that as many as are the heads
sa many are the senses; and that what pleases one displeas !> p

another, that what is pleasurable ta one is unpleasurable ta ...0

other, and that we sometimes desire incongruous and wondf'~·
fuI things, as do pregnant women, etc.
82. 6. The kinds of changes ol state in the sensot"y of
smell. 1. Changes of state arise from these causes, thus di­
versely in each abject. 2. Changes of state from these causes
are induced upon the cortical substance itself; these are its
more common changes; those of taste are still more comlmon,
and those of touch are the most COITUTIOn; aU these changes
the soul sensates distinct1y, for shc is everywhere. 3· Simi­
4° THE SENSES.

iar changes of state are induced upon the whole brain, that is
to say, upon its two substances, wherefore upon both hemi­
spheres of its globe, especial1y by touch and taste, and by smeI1.
4. Similar changes of state retura immediately into the or­
gan, and into every single papilla of it, which papil1a then ex­
panels itself, or retracts, or hardens, or softens, or becomes in­
fiamed, grows warm, grows coM, trembles.. and more or less
lives. S. A like change is induced upon its glandules, upon the
pituitary membrane, upon the arteries, upon the veins; thus ail
things are arranged according to affections, desires, appetites,
pleasures. 6. "Most happy is he who suffers himself to be
actuated, so far as may be, by the soul, while the soul is
actuated by the superior mind. 7. A like state is induced
upon every In!usde of the face, wherefore upon the counte­
nance. 8. But the change of state of the wl10le organ or the
nose, which is the common sensory, is not of such a kind and
is brought about Dy means of the muscles, because it either
opens the nasal apertures or closes them. elraws either littie or
mucl1 of the atmosphere. slowly or swift1y, either removes it­
self from a place, or brings itself to a prace; either cornes
thither or flees thence, either holds the nose with the fingers,
or with the hands brings up such things as are grateful, and
it procures those things for itself from the vegetable kingdom
and elsewhere, etc. 9. Thus there are changes of state proper
to the nose, and these are artificial by various means.
83. 7. As ta effects. 1. Not onry is the organ itself chang­
ed as to its state according to causes of appetite. 2, but also ail
those things are changed which conspire. as the trachea and
the lungs. 3. The veins themselves, which clraw in aereat
aliment, take upon themselves similar states; they. open or
close, thus they seek or tum away from a thing; in the same
manner as the brain so does the fibre, for a like affection re­
turas into the fibre. 4 A similar change of state sometimes
occupies the cuticles, which excite a similar cause anel snatch
up atmospheric foods. S. Therefore the state of the animal
microcosm imitates the state of the macrocosm, in that now lt is
opened and admits into itself effiuvia and vapors, now indeed
 SMELL. 4I

rej ects them. yea: sometimes not by insensible perspiration,

but by sweats. 6. Thus the whole corresponds, the cause of
which is sensation; and thence arises affection. and thence
appetite. 7. But it is the cerebeIlum, which induces these
states, not indeed the cerebruIn:: this latter sensates the af­
fection.
84. 8. As to the second use, or the excitation of the brain
b'y the sense of smell, from the things said it becomes evident,
l, that that sense. as also taste, instructs us but little as ta
what agrees or disagrees \Vith the body. 2. It instructs the
soul, indeed, especially the soul of the cerebdlurn, but its af­
fection does not come ta the cognizance of the rational mind,
because it is riot instructed by the soul, but it is only, a pleasure
which persuades. 3. \iVherefore it can be present or absent.
4. From these things it follows that the use of knowing those
things which agree with the blood is not the primary use in the
human kincl, but is the primar)' use in brutes, which are ruled
by instinct or the nature of the sou!. 5. \iVherefore the primary
use in the human kind is that the brain may be excitcd and
exhilarated by the sense of smell. 6. The sou] in the cerebel­
lum sensates ihose contacts. although no, sense reaches to the
cerebrum.
85. H O·ltl this nasal sel/se 'ixry greatly exercises the brain,
and restores the bad'Y, sOJ1retirHes in an instant. 1. This may
appear from certain medicines which with stupendous swift­
ness induce changes; [such a medicine] relieves headaches,
rcmoves pains, heals c1eafness itself, and blindness arising from
causes in the brain, and cures many morbic\ indispositions aris­
ing from the brain. as l have seen in the practice of Dr. Walth
of London, by only drawing a subtle spirit through the nos­
tril's; and as it tlms heals, sa a1so it kills and perverts. as in
mines and wells, (of which the histories are extant). by in­
haling poisonous and toxic effiuvia, and many other things.
2. 111is is because the nase is the very ultimate centre of the
sku!l, of the brain, of its meninges. of the fibres, of the cortex,
of the convolutions, in arder that from that focus it may run
through every part, even to the cortical beginnings, whence the
42 THE SENSES.

whole force returns into an the peripheries and into the body.
3. For the sense of smell is not simple, but double; smell is con­
joined with a subtle sensation of touch. 4. From both is brought
about the effect of contraction. expansion and modification,
which traverse the whole snperior region and its parts;
and incleed extends to beginnings and arises from beginning~.
therefore it is not a palliative cure. 5. The sense of touch in­
s~antly pervades the mucous membrane, which. because it is
thickly sown with so many fibres of the olfactory nerves,
penetrates from so great an expansion and by the network of
its membranes into the dura mater; 6, and because it is bound
to the turbinatecl bones, which are formed and roll'ed altogether
according to the nature of its modification. it penetrates into
evcry part of the craniunI. into the neighboring bones, (con­
cerning which see Heister), into aIl the sinuses, which are in­
vested with the same membrane, into the folds, into ail things
which depend upon the dura mater within the cranium, and
by this way into every part of the brain. 7. Then also it pene­
trates into the pia mater, which thing also at the same time a
certain sense or more subtle modification, or smeIl, perceives,
wherefore it rcaches ail the divisions of the brain in general
é'.-nd in particular. even to every surface of the cortical part
and to every division of the medullary part, so that nothing
may be left untouchecl. 8. Likewise by the fibres it penetrates
into the mamillary processes, which subtend the brain, and
are inrooted in the whole medullary substance ancI are term­
inatecl in the cortex iteslf, for the sense rUl1s through every
contiguous part, and therefore perfectly when its parts are
thus arrangecl according to every form of modification as
in the brain. 9. For the' modification or sensation of
one or of some of tl'le papilIée goes immediately to
the whale subtending membrane as into its own gen­
eral' receptacle, and th us with increased strength to the
whole medullary and cortical' substance. IO. The modification
likewise also proceeds by the arterial or sanguineous way, for
according to Winslow the external carotids communicate with
the external in this pl'ace; so aTso the veins. IL If also any­
 SMELL. 43

thing passes through which prodllces or foments the spirit

through the corporeal fibres there arising even to the cortex,
the more certain is the effect thence. 12. The effect retllrns
into the beginnings themselves, into the fibres themselves, into
the spirit, into the blood, into the beginnings, into the vital
liquors, wherefore into all things of the whore body from the
beginnings. 13. Similarly also to the cerebellum by the fibres
of the nerves of the fifth pair; 14, to the eye. the ear, (more
imITtediately, because they obstrllct from the si de ), with which
there is communication proximately by an external way; final1y
into the optic nerves by an internai way. 15. Likewise also
immcdiately into the lungs, their fibres, vessels, spirit and
blood; the lungs are the principles of life in. the body-they
are succenturiate to the brains. Hence is evident what is the
effect of this double sensation in the nostrils. 16 Further that
it excites the affections themselves of every faculty; and of the
soui from the mine!, whence is confidence, which also con-
tributes.
86. [Vii)' of Ileces,<ity by the sense of S'J/lell the brain is ex-
cited, in brutes andi'n man. 1. In brutes in order' that they
ma)' !(now the nature of thcir nourishment, nature dictating,
for thcir knowledge is natural, not adscititious and artificîal;
wherefore it is by instinct of the sou!. 2. And in order that,
as in man, they may excite into new life and n1ay be conti.nually
revived by their ~wn herbs; for they know from nature what
is lIsefl1r for eating and what for exciting, and the)' are from
nature skillful as to medicine for their body. 3. V'v'herefore
with them senses of this kind are more perfect, the olfactory
processes are larger, thinner, more tumid, more deeply inrooted
in the medullary substances. more perfectly com111unicating aIl
things with the beginnings. 4. Then also \Vith the lungs~
wherefore they draw breath more deeply even to the Banks,
while with the nostrils they gape for food, especial1y when ap-
petite is perfect. 5. In man, however. this sense is more for
the sake of excitation, for thence all things are vivified. and by
affections exhilarated. 6. In order that mlln may know what
is in the atmosphere, wherefore what Boats in the hidden parts
44 THE SENSES.

of it. 7. vVhat thence is from a distance. 8. In order that he

may perceiye the wonderful thirigs of God from amenities, and
may enjoy a delïghtful life. 9. But he does not know these
things ex priori, but from effect, whether they agree with his
mture, cyen. ad ors most fragrant and most delightfu!. IO
And on the other hand. in arder that he may be able to shun, ab­
hor, and not admit things contrary to his nature. and by pre­
servative things injected into his nostrils may repel, break them
up, etc. Il. :NIan has less acuteness as to his sensation, and
that which elisturbs his analyses, induces varieties upon his
facul'ty of thinking, thus it disturbs his proper endowment; for
smell especially effects this, for thought requires a quiet state
of the cortex. 12. Par if we attend weil to deep thoughts,
when we dral\' breath, then an abundance of ideas from the
lower part rush into the sphere of the thought, as if then, the
gate being open. the attacking army rushes in; but when we
hold the breath and expire slow"y so long we may remain deep­
Iy in the tenor of our thought. and we as it were conununicate
\Vith our superior faculty or with our soul. T11is l have very
often observecl in myself. Holding the breath is having inter­
course with the sou!. but drawing it is having intercourse with
the body. Reason also adm'its this, for as often as there is
drawn into the cortical substance itsel"f the blood or the coarser
spirit of the blood and from the body, and that substance cames
into another state, in which state the sense is altogether cor­
poreal: 13. wherefore, also wc do 110t smell, except during in­
spiration, but not during expiration, as: is knovvn. 14. T11is
<tlso is the reason why if is given ta man to breathe through the
palate thus by a shortened way, lest anything interrupt the
analysis of his rational minc!. 15. In infants and others who
live in the boely, we notice fun, not slow, inspiration. 16. The
same is confirmeel by the ecstatic phenomena of certain per-r
sons; while they are in these states they are in intercourse witI}
their sour and with its nature. 17. Wherefore the lungs and
their respirations are things which establish the corporeal
life and the motor and sensitive life of the body, and
jaïn the sonl ta the body, sa that we are able ta aet ex poster ­
 SMELL. 45

iori when the machine is reversed, according to those things

which have been said in Part II. of the Animal Kingdom. 18.
\Vherefore tü mf\n are g-iven thin mamillary processes ; for they
are almost alone for the sake of pleasure and excitation of the
corporeal life. 19. In the human race this sense is sometimes
_vanting, without an)' climinution of life.
87. Fro11t these things if appears how the rational mind
which is the proprill in of mon, takes arzvay instinct such as isin
brutes. 1. In hrutes there is no rational mind and will thence,
but a blind leading of nature, or instinct, as is known. 2. There
are with brutes senses, which immediately com111unicate the
effects of the body and the world with their sour, whence their
instincts are called forth; thus they as it were do nothing' from
themselves, but from nature. 3. Therefore all things of nature
tend from ultimates to firsts, where knowledge resides: from
this arises the affection, accorcling to which they act. 4. But in
lTlan there is another principle. or the rational minci; to him are
given senses in order that that mind ma)' be instructed, 5. and
in odeT that the soulmay inflow into the mincI. or in arder that
we may arrive at the communication of mincI by our mincI; for
the more that is cultivatecl, the more fully cloes cOl1i1tlTIunication
take place, if only we proceecI rightly, and have a desire for
those truths. 6. Thus our rational mind is that which takes
away instinct, and accorcling to its culture the mind obtaim
culture for itself. 7. And this is in order that we may live not
uncIer nature, but unùer the influx of the supreme mind or
spirit {lf Gael. 8. This is the end. why we were barn most in­
fantile and ignorant, namery, in orcler that thus vve may he as­
associated with the Supreme Being, \vhich can never he done in
the case of brutes. 9- But as to these things the)" are to be
fo::n:l in Psychological treatises; for we ought ta distinctly
cOlrUJn.:hend those faculties, and indeed accorcling ta the doc­
trines of arder anù clegrees, of influxes, of forms, etc.
88. 9. fI ow the drG'luing of the breath not oilly l10urishes
spheric elel1vents e7Jen to the corte."C of the brain. 1. This is es­
pecially l!cme in the lungs, for thither come the purest ele­
 THE SENSéS.

rnents, for the air is purified on the way, according to those

things in Part II., concerning the Lungs. 2. Thence is the re­
nascence of the blood, its splendor, and its preparation, and
change into arterial blood. 3. Something similar occurs in the
nasal cl'ypts, which inspect, as cloes the tongue, and absorb
the purer things, which fiow to it; 4, therefore there is a vari­
ous communication with the external and internai Caroticls,
5. T11e corporeal fibres are what bring forward; 6, the excita:­
tian itself of the brain and its sudden refection persuades it.
of which aoove ; 7, in the meantime the same thing as that men­
tioned concerning' the cuticles occllrs here, for this is very thin,
of the same nature, and furnishecl with a ùouble sense, thus still
more than the com1110n ct;ticle. In this cuticle there is a more
perfect sensible perspiration. 8. Renee in the nares the con­
struction .persuades so many glandllles, so many nervous fibres.
9. \iV e do .Ilot know what is done in the smallest forms; ail of
them have porosity and permeability; this is known from the
effect alone. ,
89. 10. Smell excites the alternate forces of respiration
fron'/< cxternal causes. 1. This is true, as is e"idenced by many
things, as by intestinal worms. by disease of the blood (ltema­
ticis), by the tickl'ing of the palate. and the like, which cause
il slight sensation of touch and pricking; 2, they excite the

""hole organic mechaniS111, the œsophagus, the stomach and the

intestines into contra l'y motion, trembling and convufsions. 3.
Now as regards the fibres, it excites the whole muscular
mechanisITl! by the breath of the 1110uth, by heat, by hot water,
by the hand, in another way by the pricking of the lips and by
touch, as the muscular mechanism of the heart, of the dia­
phragm, of the stomach; even after death stimulation indicates
this. 4. Still more so dnes the olfactory touch. which arises
from simil'ar causes, and indeed it excites the l111echanism of
the brain into aU parts and membranes of which it fiows, and
the fmm of which is according to a more perfect modification.
5. The ultimate composition of this is according to the fornl of
the modification of smell. 6. The external and internaI cause
is everywhere present for exciting something, after the in­
 SMELL. 47

version of. the body; for the soul which IS ln beginnings. and
the body which is in effects conspire so that aIr mediate things
coincide, as has been observed everywhere above. ï. The ex­
ternal cause of the excitation of the brain into animatory mo­
tion, and thus into the motor and local part, or into contraction
and expansion, is the friction and pricking of the parts pro­
ducing snreli: this fibre obeys more fully than the muscle and
its fibre, for it is better adapted for acting. 8. This is es­
peciany so, since in the nostrils. the whole mucous membrane,
the bones of the cranium, the dura and pia mater, the fibres and
the vessels conspire; for one touch pervades the whole COl11'­
1110n membrane; thus aIl things are connected, and fonow each
other even to the beginnings. 9. Consequently there are com­
mon mutations of state induced upon the cortex, wherefore also
upon the whole brain; mutations of state are brought about
without contraction and expansion; these mutations are, how­
ever, from smel1 arising together with expansion and contrac­
tion. for the mamil1ary processes lie like bags. and are inrooted
in all the fibres. TO. At every touch the fibres and membranes
are corrugaterl. but accorc1ing to touch and the kind of
things touching, more or less, hence there is a mDdification
\Vith contraction, which pervades even to the cortical substance.
This proceeds from a double sense; for while the sense of smel1
produces modification, the sense of touch produces â gen­
eral modification together with a certain kincl of corugation.
II. While the fibres are corrugated they are also contracted,
but at that time indeed the cortical substance is expanded, like­
wise every cavity of the brain, as is to be taught in regard to
the brain. 12. Therefore inspiration makes for the expansion
of the cortex or vital' substance, together with the soul, in which
is -life and which expands. 13· But the cortex indeed falls
together and is compressed of itself, in which is as it were
tle-ath; thus there is a perpetuaI battle between life and death ;
the soul \Vith the forces of the body, especial1y with outmost
things as those of smell'. resuscitates life, but the body col­
lapses of itself. 14. Bknce we see that the respiration of the
lungs, and the animations of the brain coincide; (see my tract).
 THE SENSES.

90. The sense of sm,eU e.1:ists only af the time of inspiration,

but HM at the tùne of expiration, on account of a manifest use,
J, in arder that the brain may be excitecl by the alternate forces
of the body and by the soul, or by things miOst remate; 2, l'est
smell and sense be struck by incongruous things. which slip
forth from the lungs, which would create perpetuai nausea; 3,
wherefore no one pcrceives his own offensive exhal'ations ex­
cept by refieetion, or from others. 4. 'l'bat putrid things go
forth from the lungs, see Part II, on the Lllngs. 5. Then also
the fibre is in its corrugation, the purer blood then flows into
the cortex, which bcing stretched by corporeal causes is duller
of feeling, as the fibre is of carrying away. 6. Furthennore the
nexus itself induces the same. for at the lime of inspiration aU
things arc, by the expansion of the ventricles and cavities, and
by the corrugation of the fibres, in a state of the reception of
sense, because they deport both one and the other kinds of con­
tact at the same time; thus also the mamillary processes and
their insertion through the cribriform plate. See further in
those things which have before been excerpted concerning the
mam.illary processes. 7. Thus the nexus ought to agree with
the operations; 8, \vherefore that relation is taste and touch.
9. vVhil'e inspiration subsists from the body, external ideas and
sensations or those of tl1e body creep up; in expiration ideas
descend fr0111 the superior region or from the soul, as has been
noted above; smell represents the icleas of this to the life. JO.
Thence also it is that expiration takes place from the less aper­
ture into the greater, inspiration from the greater into the less;
thence is im,petus and opposition.
91. II. The sense of smell and of nasal touch also excites
the pituitœ of the brain and of alt the organs of the head, es­
pecial!'y of the eye, and urges them ta dùcharge. J. This is
the prior consequence, because- it excites the brain into a kind of
corporeal rife. 2. This is to be considered as an effect. 3.
This is not only of the cause, but also of the nexus, and they
themselves induce effects; for all things conspire to these ends.
4. These things have been treated of in the Second Part con­
cerning the nose; but now more particularly.
 SMELL. .49

92. This sense excites the pituitœ of the brain, and dra,ws
thenL down, through the foranlina of the cribriforM plate, into
the nostrils. 1. That this takes place from the sinuses of the
brain, experience proves; for thither a passage lies open to the
air, which there circulates, and in the vapors of which are en-
folded by heat and by vibrations, both the sense of smell and
the hearing of speech; 2, indeed the air there is seen entering
thither, and breaking forth thence, even forcibly enough for
the extinction of a candIe. 3. There are yet many invisible pas-
sages in the cranium, for it is everywhere lamellated,and
thither enters the offshoot of the mucous membrane; there the
Iymph is driven out by vibration, thus by lïving forces. 4. The
bones of the nostrils are the very fulcra of the bones of the
cranium; from the peripheries to their own fu1cra aU fluid
tends, as to their Own foci,-midclles.-'centres of gravity. 5.
Furthermore there is an opening in the foramina of the cribri-
form plate between the membranes which accompany it to the
papiJr<e, and to the glandules; which are spread over the entire
membrane, between the pia mater and the fibres, and among
the fibres themselves. 6. These tremble from the sense of smell
and of tonch, the turbinated bone and the ethmoid in the mean-
while greatly assisting; 7, these are alternately contracted and
expanded, so that they produce a kind of pumping forth. .8.
If the)' shoufd become concreted there would be no sense. 9.
This appears especially from sneezing; indeed from catarrhal
effects. and from many phenomena. 10. The cribriform plate
is the centre and fulcrum of the whole brain, for thither each
membrane returns as to its own first and higher form. II.
There the sinnses of the dura mater begin and terminate. 12.
There are found the fa1ciform productions of the dura mater.
. 13. There the internai carotid communicates with the external.
14. 1l1ere the convolutions of the brain converge as to their
own first and nltimate; there is the station of quiet of both
hemispheres of the brain. 15. There indeed preferably <111 the
fibrons or medl111ary maniples are terminatec1 and converge
into the mamillary process. 16. This is especially the case
with its l11fJre open passage. 17. \Vhence those processes are
4
50 THE SENSES.

so tumid in the hollow orbits; being inflated they expand the

whole medulla of the brain; 18, trembling now taking place,
which :pervades the continuous and fluie! parts, and alternate
constriction and expansion taking place. the effect sUl'ely fol­
rows, namely. that the flùid is drawn thitherward. 19. Neither
are there elsewhere places of discharge not yet discovered, nor
veins which imbibe. 20. There are then cavities between the
membranes, among the furrows of the convolutions; among
the fibres passages greater and smaller; and these last are al­
ways moist, sometimes tumid with stagnant ichor, as in many
diseases. 20. This can by no means be explored by experience
in dead (collapsis) brains; man)' causes hinÙer. 21. That
pituita is of a three-fold kiml: that which is between the men­
inges, that which is between the pia mater and the fibres, and
that which is between the fibres. 22. For each kind there are
in the nostrils certain passages and determinations; 23, nam:ely,
between the double plate, or the periosteum and the mucous
membrane, through the cellular texture of the mucous mem­
brane, and finally between the fibres themselves. 24. For ducts
lie open between the membranes, '''''hich pierce the mucous
membrane, in abundance, 25. Thus it is to be affirmed, that
this lymlPh does not flow immediatel)' into the nostrils, but from
tbe interior outwardl'y. between the membranes. tbrough the
purer cellular texture, etc. 26. That Iyrnph is of a nobler na­
ture, wherefore it is reabsorbed by inS'piration, is collected into
vapors and again carried in, then also it is absorbed b)' the
veins, nor does it easily turn into mucus, unless there be a dis­
eased state.
93. 1t like'1.uise clears the lungs of pituitœ. For tickling
in the nasal opcnings strikes deeply (peT condit)into every­
thing that is appended, as tickling of the palate does in regard
to the stomach. 2. This tickling is continuee! through the
whole trachea (sec A. K., Part II) ; this becomes evident from
sneezing; 4, as also from the harmany of the motions of the
brain and of the lungs. 5. V.,rbat excites one excites the other ;
the air itself excites the lungs, and its effluvial parts excite the
fibres. 6. This ap:pears ~till better in inscc:ts where the lungs
,colTu11ing:'e \Vith ncrves.
 SMELL. SI

94. The sense of smell and of touch in the nostrils purifies

the blood of the external ca.rotid, and thus draws off the pitui­
tœ from the blood which is abottt to go forth to the brain.. I­
It is known that the external carotid has five branches . and
that the glands draw off the salivas and pituitce for the sen­
sory organs. as has been observed above. 2. The nasal crypts
especial1y, and the m,ucous membrane which according to Vieu­
sens is supplied \Vith infinite arterial ramifications, perform
these functions 3. The extent of that membrane is vast; it is
spread over the palate, the œsophagus, the trachea, and the
brain; 4, and by means of the fibres it is conjoined with the
dura and the pia mater of the brain, to such a degree that it is
a membrane of very great extent. S. Since every particular re­
fers to a general, therefore how far sme11 and that sense does
this is evident from the fonowing: for every tremar and modi­
fication courses through every continuons thing, thus upward
and downward in the same mal1ner; and since the nose is the
principal axis of the œsophaglls and the iarynx, as also the ful­
cr1l111 of the brain and its cranillm; 6, therefore from thence as
from a centre goes forth the radius of modification, in arder
that this sense may represent as it \Vere the beginning of the
vital activities of the bocly; ail things of the periphery when
the sense itself of the nose is in the centre. 7. Each sense, or
smell ancl tOllch, acts its Own part, and joins its work ta that
of the other; the one adds something local, the other modi­
fies; each exists at the same time, ancl one promotes the other.
8. Parts of this membrane are adapted to each sense; the
larger filaments. the ducts. glandules and papil1ce are active;
the cartilages, bones. etc., are passive. 9. Wherefore each
sense strikes cvery artery and vcin, and thus sends the blood
Întü circulation. for the blooo l'tins to its extremes, and thus
unburdens itseH. ra. There 3.re arteries placed, as it were.
starwise. so that from their mechanism as in the kidneys
they put off the pituit<e from themselves. II. Thenct: comes
the mucus of the nostrils when the more fluicl parts are cira wn
off. 12. This pricking and friction effects, as is evident from
disease of the bloor! (hematics), and from other things: some­
52 THE SENSES.

thing similar takes place by the puncture of washing parts.

13. Thence it becomes evic1ent what snuff does, and what other
spirits of diverse kinds which excite the fibers, do. 14. The
blood also is urged forward that it 11l!ay perform its swift circ!e
in the veins, and return purer. 15. That sense gives a determi­
nation towards the lower parts in the uvula, and outside the
nostrils; for it moves the whole membrane according to that
flux. '
95. The sense of s1nell also purifies the e'j1e of pituitœ. 1.
For this sense is the nearest neighbor of the eye;. there is only
a l'ittle bone which separates the orbit. 2. There are inter­
passages and plates betweell the nose and the eye. 3. Further-·
more there is the lachrymal sack, existing in brutes, and many
blind crypts, which are yet porous, although they will not ad­
mit a stylus. See vVinslo\v. 4. It purifies the eye in three
ways: in the first place c10ubtless it drq.ws off the superfluous
pituitce. 5. In the second place, it proceeds to the brain ,and
strikes the beginnings and excites them into a tremor, and also
the fibres, wherefore it sets the fibres, especial1y the optic fibres,
in order. 6. In the third place also. perhaps by blind ways.
by the arteries. by the membr<\ncs, it approaches the optic nerve
itself and the substances of the eye, and thus also sets
them in their order,by modes similar to those mentioned in re­
gard to the fibres and minute things of the brain; the neighbor­
hood and communication, then al'so the effects, induce this.
7. The external carotid scems to transfer its c1eansed and pure
humors rather to the eye than to the brain. and this indeed by
the membranes of the arteries, which thing is to be further in­
quired into. 8. The tremor and modification proceeds es­
pecially to what is most rn;inute. and indeed penetrates those
most minute parts themselves, because they are most nearly
neighbors. 9. In order that we may know what condl1ces to
the eye, we will say this : it \vill be that which m'oves each of its
senses, namely, smell and tOl1ch; these mutually correspond to
each other, and the things thus moving will be harmonious with
their very form; this experience alone detects, for what har­
monical1y touches each of its senses that is the best; !o. perhaps
as also the finest spirit penetrates this also will penetrate thither.
 SMELL. S3

96. The sense of stnell a/so purges the ear. This is done, l,
by the extraction of the pituit~ from the arteries penetrating
thither; 2, by means of the Eustachian tube. 3. These things
are done in arder that a tremor may pervade that tube, for it is
membranous, cartiaginous and bony. 4. Thus the tremor goes
directly thither, and strikes those parts which inhere in the
membranes. S. But the tube is situated preferably at the
palate, or at the interstice of the nostrils and the palate, in
arder that taste, and especially its tremor, may give forth its
effect. 6. Thus in a multiplex mode the sense of smell purifies,
whence its use is very great.
 CHAPTER V.

THE EAR AND THE SENSE OF HEARING.

97. I. What pertains to hearing cannot be explored, unless

we con.Hder what sound is. The ear is on!y an organic or in­
strumental cause, while sound is the principal cause; nor can
what sO'und is be examined, unlas nrst what modification is be
inquired into,o for sound is a modification of tht! air which be-,
comes sensation in the ear, whence is hearing,o but what sonor­
ous, modification is cannot be imrestigated, unless wc lcarn
what air is,o for thence or from its modulation sou1td springs
forth,o nor is -if known what air is, ulllrss 1:tS particle be known;
for the particle of air is t"ts smallest volume, or air in its small­
est tmity and simpJicity,o nor is it known what the particle of
air is, unless the quality of the prior atmosphere be known
from which t"t arises, or frum which it derÏ7les its form and
power, or from which it derives its existence and natttre~
wherefore its essence. From tnese considerations it is appar­
ent, l, of how vast a science and knowledge is this unique
sense. 2. That it cannat be fully exhausted, unless aIl things
which are in the atmûspheric worid concur. 3. Knowledge,
eXéept from principles, is only cammon (proletaria) science,
and as it were paI1iative,-only a science of the senses, not from
causes, but the science of an animal, which enjoys no reason.
4. In arder that we may explore causes it will be necessary for
us ta ascend even ta the infinite, and desc~:-~ thence ta effects..
when first we shaH ~..e able ta proceed ta caUll-::s by the analytical
way. 5. Thus we, rational men, ar\~ able ta ;..ct as angel s,
among whom we can be when we shall have expiored truths,
and are in them; this is the way tfl heaven,-to the primeval
state, perfection. 6. But a superior power will meet us, which
must be consulted; this power leads us into trutr.s,-the senses
lead us only into fallacies. ï. Thel'efore for rightly knowing
one thing aIl things are reqnireô; the whole must be known in
 SMELL. 55

order to know a part of the whole; for in every part lies hid-
den an idea of the whole. 8. Nor is it given to know what is
in any part of sensation, of modification, etc., unless we arrive
by doctrines, especiaIly those of forms, of order and of degree,
of infbxes, and of correspondences.
98. 2. W t! must begin here with the partt:cles of the air, for
thence will be evident 7.l'hat its volume is; for, l, the particle is
the smal!est volume of its own atmosphere. 2. As the partide
acts.'i0 the cong-regation of particles act. 3. An atmosphere
derives its al) from its parts,-its very nature, the form of its
fluxion, etc. 4. Rence how necessary the corpuscular doctrine
is, becomes evident. S. vVe arrive at this doctrine from a
knowledge of volume, for the phenomena of the whole are
similar to those of the parts. 6. Besides we learn that another
sphere of acting begins in the particle, for a particle is a smaIl
volume; it derives its nature from its own particles which com-
pose it; that is, from its prior things; the prior sphere is there-
in, the superior, and more perfecto 7. AIl lmity respects its
own unities, and these again theirs, thus even to the beginnings
of aU things. 8. \Vherefore to terminate the idea in a single
part. and to declare this the most simple, is to make so many
wholes, éU1d steadfastly to terminate the ideas in an occult
. quality; to do this is by no means rational, since it is not con-
sonant witt nature. 9. 'The above things now must be exclud-
ed, for we are not admitted to causes by the phenomena of the
air alone.
99. 3. From the phenomena of modification the quality of
the part or particle of that atmosphere appears, l, for the parts
are what are modified. 2. Thence the whole volume is modi-
fied. 3. The volume derives from the parts, that it acts thus
and so. 4. Or it Jerives this from the nature of the parts, and
the nature of the form, according as they act. S. Nature acts
according to its form; for substantial form corresponds exact-
ly to the form of fluxion.
100. 4. From maHY phenomena discovered in the air, if ap-
pears that its particle is of a perfectly sperical form, in such QI
way, however, that the endeavor of its prior parts is towards,
a spiral form. I. That it is spherical is eviùent from its fluxion.
S6 THE SENSES.

2. From its eql1al pressure at every point, above, below and at

the sicles, it appears that it can be in no other form. 3. This is
evident from its most easy yielding. 4. Fspecial1y is this ap­
parent from its modification. S. AIso, by the spherical action
in an object, as its action upon mercury, l1pon water withol1t,
andupon bùbbles' and vapors within. 6. A similar most equal
action cànnot result from the highest eql1ality. 7. 1t is in the
snial1èst volume as in the greatest. 8. That the air particles
touch 'eâchother at every smal1est point is evident from their
yieldance.
101. Air is compressible, expansible, in tt word elastic. 1.
It appearsfrom the experiments of Boyle that a very great
volume of air can be forced into a very smal1 volume. 2. So
also it can' be expanded. 3. If this can be done with the
volume, then certainly it can be 50 done with the parts. 4. For
there isno penetration of dimensions. S. From somewhat hard
particlesnosu<:h thing exists ;as in waters, mercuries and other
liqtiids, which cannot be compressed and dilated. 6. This com­
pressibîlity and expansibility air derives from itself from its
prior and more perfect parts of whrch it consists, which unlr.ss
the)' were thus far yielding, expansible and elastic, this com­
position could by no means beof such a nature as it îs: thus
further; 7, 8. The rule of elasticity is, that it may comunicate
everyimpressiàn with neighboring parts, in order that not any­
thing of the impressed force may perish. 9. This holds good
indeed for every distance. 10. Since this elasticity perishes in
the air. and is measnred by the distance to which it tends, it
foUows·that it is gifted with a kiild of weight, or some nature,
whkhheavy and non-elastic hodies do not have. II. Thus il"
order ·that it may absorb the impressed force; for what is truly
elastic is' neither heavy nor light. 12. From its weight, by in­
cumbency according to it5 column, frorri the measurec1 weight
itself of the'volumès of air. 13. 1t is measured from resistance
and reaction. 14. \Vhence it is evident that it is not the purest
atmosphere, but the Iast; and that therè are purer atmospheres,
in a certain order and degree of simplicity, not aloneof ex­
pansion.
102~' ThlJt it always strives to slip back into its 01'iginal fonn,
 EAR AND SENSE OF HEARING. 57

l,' or that from a form in itself most perfect it conspires to-:

wards its own form, which, such components being given, can­
nat be another form. 2. That its essence is constant, while its
modes are variable. 3. 1ts modes are its nlutations of state.
4. Experience testifies the same thing, 'for it immediately re­
lapses, and, 5, remains permanent in form and measure, ac­
cording to the weight of the accumbent parts.
103. That it derives this nature by itsclf from prior things.
I. For it is the smallest volume, albeit the unity of its own at­
mosphere. 2. The more perfect parts will be those which con­
stitute it. 3. Nor can they be otherwise than according to the
farm in composition. 4. Infinite thing's lie hidden, very few lie
open. 5. Our senses detect the 1)l>:mates, 6, as i5 evident from
microscopes, 7, from the smallest resultant phenomena. 8. The
cornmon forces of those things make themselve.' public; if there
be forces, they will be substances, if substances, they can be
assimilated to the parts.
104. S,:nce the parts of the air are clastic, they are full}'
modifiable. I. 1ts elasticity is an attribute of its modifiability,
2, and of its extension into a tubule, 3. so that afterwards what
happens in one extreme may appear in the other. 4. Thence
is sound: 5. but it is not elasticity: wherefore neither is it
pure modifiability.
105. 5. If the particles of the air are 'vesic1es, and of such
forli1, it is not to be concluded that their modification is brought
about by intrapression of the surface, and as it were by a P1tnC­
ture (vulnusculum), or insinuation, as with a cMnpressed blad­
der, '1, for every point of that particle corispires to the conserva­
tion of its form. 2. Thus it cannot be modified at' a distance,
nor does the disturbed surface communicate this. 3. Every at­
tack made upon the surface returns to the substance itself.
106. But when they are touched or compressed the-y sud­
denly compress themselvcs into smaller spheres, and dilate
the111selves into larger on.es, the same form being alww)'s con~
served, varied only in. dimension and dia1'neter, always re-­
maining spheres of the same nature. This is evident, 1,
from their composition {rom similar and more perfect spheres,
2, which do not 1:iuffer another form to be induced upon
58 THE SENSES.

them. 3. There is a striving together of ail of them towards

theil- own form. 4. This is seen from their similar nature in
their smaller, indeed in their smallest volume perceptible to
sight, 5, and in the smallest pores and vesic1es, as in the lungs,
a similar nature remains with the compressec1 partic1e accord­
ing to the height of the column, if the air be compressed or
dilated. 6. 'l'hat pressure being removed a restitution and
pressure results from .the inclosed elastic partic1es. 7. It is
similarly seen in vapors, 8, from the doctrine of fonr.s. 9.
That which produces the substantial form produces the acci­
dentaI. JO. The space atone is varied.
107. Therefore when the air ois effected by a sudden or light
compression, or by a blo'uJ, or other impulse, it similarty re­
dounds, wherefore, l, the modification of its nature consists in
the sud den compression and expansion, or action and reaction,
therefore in the sudden rebounding of the partic1es into their
original dimensions. 2. Wherefore' if the modification should
enter into the place where the air hac! been compressed, so that.
it should no longer be able to rebourld, then the air would be
destroyecl.
108. The more airis compressed, the harder it becomes,
and the more strongly it rebounds; 1. For it reduces it into a
harc1er state, 2, the more i~ remains in that compression unwil1­
ingly. 3. It returns to the equilibrium of it:> exterior pressure,
in which is the atmosphert itself. 4. Wherefore the modifica­
tion is varied accorc1ing to the c1ensity anc1 rarity of the air it­
seU, 5, as in c1iving bells unc1er water, where a new pressure is
addec1. 6. The pressure is insensible in air pumps. 7. For
there is no rebounc1, except a light one, if the air be expanc1ed.
8. The air is in its most complete equilibrium in our atmos~
phere, it is otherwise on the tops of mountains.
109. Thence is sMmd, which is a 'modification of the air, or
rather is ta be called a modulation. 1. Thus air suddenly com­
pressed, and its suc1c1en rebound causes that which sound hears;
2. For the same is communicated to the membranes lying in the
way, which are likewise elastic. 3. Nothing receivcd in these
membranes perishes.
110. 6. That snch modulation propagates itself ta a distance
 EAR AND SENSE OF HEARING. 59

accord'Î1tg ta the elasticity of the more perfect particles. 1. As,

for instance, sound reaches ta a certain distance. 2. \'Vhen one
partic1e is compressed, aisa another is compressed. 3. This
could not be without local motion. 4. Ali contiguous toucb
confirms this. 5. This appears from sound in aerial atmos­
phere, and from light in the ethereal atmosphere.
111. Evcry modification derivcs its origin from e.1,-ternal
causes which impinge. 1. The external cause is vv'hat acts upon
the partic1es, or upon the volume of the partic1es. 2. The in­
ternai cause in the partic1es themselves does not come ta sound
or the sense of hearing. 3. This may appear from twangedi
strings, Hom the strings of a musical instrument, from harps,
lyres, drums, or when the air is beaten by a somewhat hard
flexible "witch. 4. It appears from trumpets and other wind
instrument" whicb sound when blown into. 5. It appears from
e1astic plates, which vibrate when beaten, and communicate
their vibration ta the air. 6. It appears from the larynx it­
self, and from similar things. Thus it appears that what pro­
duces the modification must be outside the partic1es of the air,
but within the atmosphere of the air. 7. Wberefore from the
origin of motion.
112. Every modification thus in origin received from mo­
tion is vibrated in a double rnanner, first by a certain local
motion from the centre of motion, which finally goes off ta a
distance into a kind of conatus, not into -motion openly local,
or iuto v-ibration in its own place. 1.. This may appear from
chords and strings which are vibrated visibly. 2. It may be
seen from drums and membranes, which are vibratorily elevat­
ed and beat the air, 3, from the sound of the larynx and of
trumpets, 4, from the sound of a switch. 5. This also appears
from the whistling when the wind enters cracks. 5. When
chords betake themselves ta motion it is necessary tbat a volume
of air yie1d place, and that it rebound inta its own place. 6.
Suppose a line consisting of pure elastic spheres, the parts of
which are thus compressed, as has been said; an impulse upon
the line, moves a great part of the lirie from place, 7, even until
the impulse is absorbed by gravity. 8. Then there remains
only the vibration and the throwing of one against the other,
60 THE SENSES.

but it immediately comes to rest in its own place. 9. This can

be comparecl with the conatus to local motion, for it does not
yield more in plare than that it may immediately return; thus
it is reciprocal local motion, while at first motion may be of
many things and of the volume. JO. Then beg-ins a motion of
the particles, which is continued to a long distance, from the
cessation of the local motion. Ir. Indeed for the most part
natural motion is reciprocal, and to be called vibratory, which
continues sound generally to a long distance. 12. But that it
is also diminished, this the phenomena also declare.
113. Every modification tends to a straight Zine, for the pos­
terior part presses upon the anterior with full force, but upon
the side parts with a diminished force,. although the forces are
diminished the)' equate the whoZe and thus act upon the an-­
l

terior. 1. Suppose spherules of air to lie thus as globules in

quiet air, cubically arranged, in such a manner that six or eight
shall encompass one. 2. One particle does not penetrate into
another, unless it rem oves those that are at the sides, so that it
may act immediately. 3. The force at the same time being ex­
pended upon the lateral globules they make a full force which
is impressed upon the anterior. 4. In whatever position this
is, the full force always returns upon the part which is anterior
in the straight line, no matter how many intermediate parts
there may be; for the intermediate parts give at the same time
as much of the forces as they receive to those which are con­
tiguons. S, This may appear from sounds, in that they go off
in a straight line. 6. Especially from this, that an echo from a
wall returns directly into the ear, thus from a multiplied echo.
7. A similar thing happens in the ether, and its rays of light
which similarly rebound, even so far that this nature is con­
stant. 8. From the spherical form of particles the same thing
resufts, but not from any other figure; for then the determina­
tions would not be into a straight line, but according to the
movements of the contact.
114. The modification is therefore {rom the moved centre
into euery perijJher)i, in every direction, as radii. 1. This is
the consequence. 2. It appears visibly in water. 3. It appears
sensibly in sounds and in the air. 4. The centre being mbved
 EAR AND SENSE OF HEARING. 61

they return upon it from ail sides. 5. Tt appears visibly from

chords in the manner in which they tremble and throw them­
selves out hem their linear axis. 6. It appears in similar other
things.
115. But indeed their local motion, as also the conatus it­
self, is propagated Ùlto a spiral line, or into perpetuaI circle~
from distance to distance. 1. This agrees with the nature of
the parts, in which is the effort of flowing off into a spiral, if
nothing hinders. 2. But since in the full atmosphere there is
no such thing as a solitary part, hence the local motion is
coercecl that it may not run off into that gyre; that is, into a
natural gyre. 3. But it is evident from certain other
phenomena, as from fire, concerning which we shall treat else­
where. 4. Besides this, while local motion persists, one part
thrusts those at the sicles. 5. And each one of these those at its
sicles, which it moves to the sicles. 6. Likewise in water, but
in a circulatory manner; for the particles are hard, and do not
endeavor to come into any other form than the cirClllar by
simple tension. 7. Sound does not travel by this way, but only
the fluxion of iis parts, among which one must make distinc­
tion, for there is no modification without local motion, then a
vibratory motion, as it were conatus; otherwise one part could
not impinge upon another, and communicate its force. 8.
\Vhat local l11otion bombs set up, when ships are blown up with
powder, even sa that l110vements of the earth are caused, ap­
pears from historical narratives.
116. The pressure from the centre of fnotion bj' straight
iil'les in the direction of radii immdes e7Jer)' single part, 'Which
at the same time is moved into a spiral. On account of this
the propagation of the modification by straight lines balances
the propagation of the fluxion by the spire. 1. Thus they pro­
ceed with equal pace. 2. On the otller hand, if the one shouid
run "h·::ad of the athcr, there woulcl be no distinct prapag-ation.
Thus one corresponds to the other. 3. If the local motion
from the sicle be examined, we can clecluce geometrically, that
it is snch as is a circ1e to its diameter: such alsa results from
geometry.
117. Estecialljl also the ùlterfl1lent ether giues wings to
62 THE SENSES.

the air, as well by the straight fine as by the circle of the out­
flow. I. By the circle it does not give sound itself, but by the
straight line. 2. Every partic1e drives the ether, which sur­
rounds and holds the parts in their fonn, for no part sllbsist~
out of itsplf. 3. The air driven in volume flows, and likcwise
tends into a straight line and at the same time into a vortical
line. 4. Bence it appears that the air thence obtains wings.
5. Thi:::. fact appears from this that air passes through glass.
wood, ,vater in a [diving] beI1, through waIls, meta's, \Vith
diminished life; as in an [air] pump in which i5 a bel!. 6.
Wherefore the propagation i~ c.arried through by the ether.
7. But this i~ in a general way and in a volume, for one par­
tic1e of air responds to a little volume of ether. 8. Thus also
it is in the conatus. 9. Otherwise sound woulcl not be propa­
gated ta so long a distance.
118. From these things it 11W)' appear what an infinite
11umber of things enter into one module of sound, and 1107u
composite sound is; or it ma)' appear how gross, dull, and fal­
lacious is the sense of hearing. I. It appears from one drum,
which makes the whole tremble together with the body and
membranes; yet one stroke gives but one sound, although it
consists of 50 many vibrations 2. It appears in harps, flutes
ancl other instruments. 3. It appears that there are myriads
of partic1es of air or 50 many little volumes, 4, more in rude
souncls. 5. How many volumes are not the parts of the ether?
They are incomprehensible. 6. This appears from the mem­
brane of the ear drum consisting of sa many layers. 7. It
appears from the whole cranium and brain being stirred up.
See former excerpts.
119. In order that the particulars of sound may be heard, it
fS necessary that there be a general soft1ld to which part-iCIIlars

may be referred, by wlûch they are distinguished, and nUl')' !Je

etevated, even to the sensation of lzearing. I. Rence one 50und
increases until it i5 immense. 2. There is nothing that is not
referred ta what is general, and it can be distinguished by this.
3. The whole body of an instrument sounds together. 4. So
the whole cranium. 5. The sound is according to the elasticity
and contremulation of the body, as in mills. 6. Berc are to
 EAR AND SENSE OF I-IEARING.

be applied all the mIes concerning the cavities in the peri­

toneum. P. L, 7, see former excerpts. 8. Thus tones are parts
of a general discrete quantity.
120. 7. The differences of sottnds are as ta quantity and
quality,. q~(Qntit;y is force, 101ldness or strength,. qualily is the
depth or heign.t of pitch; th.ere are also still many other, cs>­
pecially mixeâ differences, conccrning which see The Tongue
and The Larynx.
121. Quantities arise if the parts of volumes of air are
more strongly contracted or dilated, while the same speed re­
mains; for if they are more deeply or more gently compressed
thence the quantity varies likewise. 1. This appears especial­
ly from strings and membranes. 2. The same string can pro­
cluce the same sound, if only 11 ne more strongly or more gent­
Iy contracted; 3, or even if it is elongated. 4. Likcwise mem­
branes. S. The same string contracted or shortened, the ten­
sion remaining the same, is changed as to quality. 6. That
this is quantity, and that It thence arises, is because, a similar
swiftness requires the same composition of the auditory nerve,
7, and the same composition and thickness of the membrane.
8. For if it be either more strongly or more weakly acted up­
on, until a similar sound breaks through it, but louder or
softer. 9. A like thing obtains in other things, as in tendons,
muscles, actions, and light.
122. Qual-ity however arises from a diverse swiftl1ess of
the changes of state or of compression and expansion. 1. This
also may appear from strings and membranes, and from
musical instruments, and their plates, etc. 2. Likewise from
the nerves and membranes in the animate and living body. 3.
This is also from causes, for a thing sounds more intensely,
the more swiftly or quickly it is vibrated. 3. Wherefore a
sharp sound breaks through space more swiftly than a low one.
4. This the phenomena also dictate.
123. I-ience it ma:>' appear, what local motion, and what
modification great volumes of air much compressed produce,
and what smaller volumes produce. 1. Thence a ratio can be
given between the quantities of the volume and the quantities
of the motion. 2. Then the san~e 1 espectively to qualities. 3.
The whole of Geometry can thence be producec1.
 THE SENSES.

124. Then it may appear what quality harmony is among

various speeds, in order that it may be harmonious or dis­
cordant. 1. The harmonic art teaches this. 2. The ear itself
knows it. 3. There are harmonies between like altitudes,
thence a chord exists by the lowering or raising of the sound.
4. The other things, which were adduced above about the air,
also have their natural harmonies. 5. Thus there is nothing
which may not fill a whole science, even to the extent that, if
the knowledge is to be perfect it will require a unique mind.
6. These things may be reviewed.
125. 8. From these things it ma:y appear} how sound is
modified by acol/stic tubes P-11d speaking trumpets} conchs and
horns. 1. It is different from the modification produced by
gut strings and chords. 2. It is otherwise when the voice is
emitted through tubes, as through speaking trumpets. 3. It is
otherwise when there is only a tremulation. 4. Thus the dif­
ferences are of a triple kind, although in themselves the)' are
only double. S. It is the same whether the voice is emitted or
a sound is made, only let it speed.
126. Sound is increased by trumpets according to the width
of the orifice} just as in co'mpression of the air. I. Of what
quality a sound or modification is can be elucidated and known,
if it be compared with the compression; 2, for it is alterna te
compression of the air, ând its rebounding into its own dimen­
sion, which proc1uces sound. 3. The phenomena of the press­
ure of the atmospheres are known, that is, they press accord­
ing to altitude and the aperture of the ear. 4. Sound is
urged on the more and collected in tubes if they are made ac­
cording to the spiral fluxion of the air, as in horns and other
instruments, and in the cochlea of the ear and in cylinders. 5.
It creeps along the walls, 6, and there, having coIlected force,
it flies forth through the opening, according to the ratio of
pressure, driven by bath causes of modifications, by the fluxion
into a spire as weil as by the propagation along a straight line.
7. The opening is the centre of modification, where the sound
breaks forth. 8. Furthermore, a trifling chink can stretch a
large bladder, as is found by experience. Thus a very small
and thin sotlnd can fiIl the great belIy of a trumpet.
 EAR AND SENSE OF HEARINC. 65

127. The vibration which l'uns along the walls of a trumpet

does not discriminate the sound, except as to its general quality
respectively to its parts. 1. The vibration struck out by the
vibrating walls procluces nothing clifferent from what is clone
by an instrument to which strings are attachecl. 2. For the
waH cloes not give forth a distinct souncl, 3, but a general
uncler which are particulars. 4. This is evident from speak­
ing trumpets without the voice, or with the voice, or from
trumpets through which air is fm'Ced to produce sound. S.
These things are accorcling to rU les. 6. \iVherefore the whole
of geometry is applicable here, ancl the science of these things
is inexhaustible.
128. All these things e:rist most distinctly in the ea.r, where
allthe internal and 1'1'IOst secret geametry and harmony of the
modulations of the air are; for the ear is an arga·n altogether
for receiving the madHication of the air, as the larynx is an
organ far prese'/1.fing those modifications. Thus we camtat
beNer learn abaut modifica·tion than from the ear and laryn,'l;
t/z.e11lsâves, upon 7.cJ/1ich nature has Ùlscribed the very na.fure
of the air; far 1I'l0dificaÛoll is the aclive farce af ifs form; for
the dri'ven m:r itse!f to the for/Il, yields madification, and, if in­
teriarly exmnined, fully indicates whGlt lies Mdden in the air.
129. T,f/hile the air thus 1110difiedimpinges upon the elastic
membranes, it cammunicates an Ï1npressian canfornwbleto
them; thus it passes from a· fluid sta.fe il1tO what is contù11vum
cansistent and fram what is consistent inta a fluid. 1. That it
passes from a fluid or air into the membranes appears in the
ear. 2. That it passes from what is consistent into a fluid,
appears from strings, from musical instruments, and from the
larynx. 3. Th3t sound passes a second time into what is f1uid,
appe:us from the harmon)' in the string of an instnllT~ent, when
a tring of another is touched. 4. For the general vibration
passes by means of ",hat is consistent into the body of the
other ü:strnment; 5, there it excites the very string of the
same tone. 6. This is a sign that tl1e relation and harmany
of generals is like tint of particulars. 7. For when a string is
moved together with its fastening, <>nother g-eneral
sound re~"dts. under which sol1!1c1s a like p<l.rticular. 8. The
5
66 THE SENSES.

same appears if some thing be attached ta the fastening of a

string, namely, that the particulars of the sound undergo
thence a general variation. 9. And such as is the bod3' of the
injtrument, such will be the particulars of the sound in C01I'1­
mon or in general.
130. Wherefore hearinp; is also touch, for its 7Ja:rieties and
affections result from 1nembranes and nerves being moved.
1. This appears from the modification of the air, 2, from the
air itself in ail things. 3. The air exerts a double force of
modification into the ear, namely, of fluxion and of modifica­
tion. 4. One tone, however, is highly compounded.
131. A lilœ modfiication t1'Gverses the nerves 7uhich C01'1'e­
spond and is carried to the brain; in the nerves, and especially
in the brain, modificMion mea4tS sensation, for life is in nwdi­
fication. 1t has been shawn above, l, that sensation is mocli­
fication, life being added. 2.' The modification runs fhrough
the membranes according to their composition, degrees and
velocity. 3. So also it traverses the animal spirit, whence
nerves are hard and soft.
132. As is the modification, such is the change in the braill,
in genc1'G1 and in part-icular, nmnely. in the cortex, l, where
the emls of the nerves are, 2, where the partitions are, accord­
ing to ail their compositions, 3, where the cortex is made for
receiving ail its changes of state. 4. This is announcecl in its
own manner to the sou!. 5. :Many modifications joined at the
same time create a harmony, which is natural, whence arises
affection. 6. :Many harmonies joined at one time create an­
other harmeny, which appears llncler visible and imaginative
sensation. 7. Many of the latter still further conjoined create
a harmony llnder an intellectllal idea, and so forth.
133. ln order that the car ma)' percei7Je an3'thing, itis nec­
essary that a general modification be present. I. This takes
place through the cranillm, which is everywhere perforated.
2. 1t takes place throllgh the bones of the temples. 3. 1t
happens more regularfy through the Eustachian tube. 4. It
nasses into the whoIe osseous system, 5, and into the mem­
branous system through the dura mater. 6. Wherefore the
bones are everywhere conjoined in the ear, and these com­
mllnicate with the bones of the cranium through the sutures
 EAR AND SENSE OF HEARING.

next to the membrana tympani on the one side, and through

the Eustachian tube; on the other. 8. And the modulation tra­
verses ail the nerves; wherefore nerves l'un through the aquœ­
ductus Fallopii. 9. This sense traverses the whole cerebrum and
cerebellum. ra. Indeed, it runs through the whole body, and
there is nothing which does not vibrate.
134. The modification of the air and the tremiscence of what
is contimwus, and of the hm'der parts of the body, are of the
same lûnd. I. Thus from one we may learn concerning the
other. 2. Ali parts are, in themselves, solid, or cohere well
together. 3. Between ail the parts are openings or interstices
for the ether. 4. The ether being agitated, the parts vibrate.
5. Thence arise effluvia. 6. Therefore, the life of these effiuvia
is as it were from a perpetuaI vibration.
135. H O'W wonderful is the nature of the oscillation, vibra­
tion and tre·mbhng, an.d how if penetratcs, and how strong it
is, appears abundantly from the phenomena. I. A very small
origin procluces a very great result. 2. The vibration of one
fibre transfers itself into the entire body. 3. That of a single
string bound to its fastening transfers itself into the whole
beam. 4. A single carriage vibrating affects a "vhoIe house, a
temple, a city, a mountain. 5. Thus in order that its natun:
may be most efficacious there; for nature has inscribed its owr
power upon it, 6, and has endowed it with life.

THE EXTERNAL EAR.

136. Kt:perience. The cartilage of the tube of the ear, or

the duct of the external auditorium does not make a complete
circuit; it is interrupted at one side; it makes this tube; it
terminates obliquely; it binds itself ta thè margin of the osseous
duct by inequalities: the border is bent about like a beak. In
the circuit there are incisions, obliquely transversal; the front
cleft is quadrangular. There are two ligaments, one attached
to the front part of the osseous duct, the other ta the convex
shell from the side opposite to the former. Between the two
ligaments there is, as it were, a wavy part of the muscles of the
forehead; there are muscles and coverings. The bony part of
68 THE SENSES.

the duct is longer; both together make a canal of ten lines. lt

is unequally roomy; it is tortuous; it is lined within with skin
and cellular membrane, which supplies a part of the cartilage,
and forms the cutaneous tube. The cellular membrane com~
mingles itself with the periosteum and the perichondrium.
There are glandules everywhere. There are hairs between
which open the orifices of the glands. There are arteries sent
off from the temporal and occipital arteries.
137. Analysis. ra. The external em' is a llind of plane
raised up for receiving the modifications of the air, that is ta
say, sounds,. into this plane the mod'ificaf'ions inflow e7.1erywhere,
l, for it is not to be believed that it flows into it frlom one
point to another, but into that whole hollowec1 out area, 2, in­
deed, directly into the ear itself. 3. For it approaches from the
centre by all radii. 4. Thus it inflows directly, and more
or less obliquely, according to the efflux of the sound, and those
standing near the ear, or those receiving.
138. All this mod,ificatory collection, according to windings,
is concentrated toward the concha and external auditory duct.
I. To this end the external ear is mac1e, and that form anJ
fluxion of winc1ing. 2. This also appears from artificial organ~.
3. Sound can be clilated according to direction, and can be con­
tracted; its qllantity becomes greater in a smaller space. 4.
Whcreforc the external ear is formed exactly for that concen·
tration with consummate art, from v.'hich not a single thing
can be wanting. 5. That form is spiral according as is the
fluxion of l110dified air, agreeing \Vith wbat was sald before;
6, and indeed everywhere according to the custom of nature,
in that the number of the bendings is tluee times ta and {ro,
and thus it retllrns to its beginnings, and the forrr: is not a
regular spiral, as is also the case in the intestines, in the brain,
and elsewhere, especially in illsects and their blind appendixe~,
etc. 7. That form will be treated of elsewhere more at length.
139. The concha of the ear is so fOHned, and af the smne time
the auditory tube, that not air, but a modification of the G<!'rj
appears to flow both in and out. 1. For the small anterior por­
tion, which is called the tragus, is as it were, a fence. 2. The
modification flowing throllgh the windings of the concha, does
 EAR AND SENSE OF HEARING.

not ail pass into the tube, but a part ::.lips ont l1nder the tragus.
3. In the tube there is a bending l1pward and downwar'd,
mobile cartilages and other things, which cause the modifica-
tion to return above the tragus, where there is a hollow. 4.
Thl1s the abundance is distribu{cd, 5, especially in its very high
and elevated tension.
140. Hspeciall'y also in high and ele'Z'cted sound, the tube
itself can be 'Wirlel1ed, and thus )'ield to the impelliug force, in
order that no damage ma)' be inflicted upor the organ. I. For
therc ar<: mobile cartilages. 2. Therè is a widening in the middle.
3. There is a bending, thus a bcating baclc 4. There are hairs
which lmpede. 5. There is wax, which protects the tubé that
the air thl1s modified may not be impelkd immediately against
the membrana, the tympani. 6. AlI these things are to the
end that the)' may avert inJury.
141. The external ear is so 1nade that the inodified air
strilles if e'l/crywhere; it either flows follo'Wing the walls into a
spiJ'e, or is reflected, whcre the outwa.rdly inclined lamellae, al-
thoug1t covered, rcceive if; these lamel/ae rece'Ïve and repel. 1.
This appears from the helix and antehelix. 2. Especially
whère the turning is, there it is covered, as it \Vere, by a
ceiling, lest the [sound] slip out. 3. It is the same every-
where else. 4. It would be too prolix to describe ail this
organism. 5. There is nothing in the aeollstic art which does
not exist here worked out.
142. The tremor itself striking in upon the externet ear, is
conccnfmted towards the cutaueous tube, and about the peri-
phery of the osseous tube, whe1'e if passesinto an eV1:dellt tre·mor.
1. This is the cause of the organism. 2. Therefore the ex~
ternal ear is cuticular and membranous. 3. It absorbs the raj~
of modification; it repels them and again collects them. 4. The
influent modification acts similarly. 5. Therefore that sk1n Cl
epidermis, which is cellular, finally commingles \Vith the peri-
chondrium and periosteurn. 6. This is in order that the col-
lected trcmor may finally terminate in the perichondrium and
periosteum, so that it may cause them to vibrate. 7. To this
end also is the cutaneous tube which is made to vibrate more
than the other parts. 8. To this end the soft membrane goes
7° THE SENSE::'.

off into the harder which is, according to Winslow, attached

to the cartilage and the bone of the duct.
143. AU that ab ove described, is in order that the tremor
may go forth through the whole continuous [organism], both
the membranous, the cartilaginous, and the osseous,. and thus
thence into the whole cranium. I. For the connection with
the brain is by the membranes, 2, by the cartilages and bones,
3, by the Eustachian tube, 4, by the nerves; 5, thus in order that
the sound cannot escape penetrating also by this way 111to the
whole continuous [organism]. 6. Renee is the first common
origin of that tremor or modification, which is requlred in
sound, concerning which above.
144. The vibratl:on thus dashing in, where û strilœs the
organ which is constructed for the proj)agalion of sound to the
beginnings in the brain, there operates accordinp: to the orgal1­
ism of that part. I. This is the general rule that the influent
modification acts according to the organism of tint part. 2.
Thus it acts in one way in the auditory tube, 3, in another way
in the Eustachian tube, 4, another in the vestibule of the ear,
5, another in the labyrinth, 6, in another way everywhere in the
cranium. 7. This appears a plate, stretched by a slender stem
from a fastening, when held between the teeth (a lamina inter
dentes de tenta a stapede clavicula protensa); there the teeth
receive the sound, and yet it is distinctly heard although the
ears are closed; 8, for whatever applies to itself a modification
according to its own form, propagates it both according to its
connection and according to its tone. 9. This is the cause of
the senses of the whole organism and of the whole body.
145. T/f/herefore no modification flows to the membrane of
the ear drum. except the vibration p1'opagated through the
membrane of the al/ditol"J' tube, through the cartilages and
bones. 1. 1t is carefully provided that the air shall not touch
it. 2. The wax obstructs the way and the space is c1osed, so that
there is nowhere open a chink for the air. 3. The air would
push the tympanum against the interiors, if it should strike the
tympanum. 4. yVherefore the whole flux of the modification
is wipèd a"vay, and altogether absorbed in the auditory tube. 5.
There remains only the in-dashing vibration. 6. These things
 EAR AND SENSE OF HEARING. 71

are the cause of the organism of the external ear and of the
auditory tube. 7. They are the cause of its windings; 8, the
cause of the cutaneous tube. 9. Thus the naked membrane of
the drum is nowhere exposed; wherefore if ail the wax is
removed it perishes. ra. This is the cause for the glands. I l .
This tremor, thus propagated by concentration, is transferred by
the contiguous air, thus also into its own organism. 12. This is
the cause of the connection of the membranes with the perl­
chondria and periostea, 13, and of the connection of these with
the os pervium of the temples, 14, and with the Eustachian tube.
146. Wherefore the tremor flows to the membrane of the
tympanum only around its margins or pen:phery, and goes to
the centres. 1. There is no other way. 2. But of these thing~
below.
147. II. The human external ear is alwa-ys erected for sonor­
ous modification, lest a,nything perish fro·nt things said, and
that all may be distil1âly recei7.Jtd. 1. For by the ear man
learns. 2. Tt must be of interest to human society, 3, to under­
stand by means of the ear what the world means. 4. 1t will
hear articulate sounds distinctly. 5. Therefore none or very
slender muscles are furnished it. 6. There are ligaments ,vhich
connect with the temples and thus hold the ear continually
erect for the smallest more distinct sounds.
148. 1t is otherwise in brutes, the ears of wlûch are other­
wise formed; for they do not seize upon articulate sounds, but
only sounds wlûch sigmfy affections. 1. The speech of brutes
is only for the signifying of their affections to the ear in a
general way, 2, as in love, in anger, in hunger, etc; 3, thu~
nothillg articulately. 4. This general sound can be receivêcl by
the ears of asses; 5. nevertheless they reach them forth in
order that they may catch those distinctions. 6. Otherwise
such ears are without use. 7. Thus ears are given ta each ac­
cording to his nature, 8, accorcling to use, especiàlly with his
associates-O wonderful things!
149. Therefore the uses of the ex"lernal alldl:tory duct are:
l, 1'0 collect and concentrate every sonorous modification, that
it may be strong; 2, to impress that modification upon the mem­
branes, cartilages and bon es ; 3, to tr:msfer it to the membrana
72 THE SENSES.

tympani, where it is more distinctly received and circum­

fused; 4, thus ta receive a general modification without dis­
tinction into parts; these the cavity of the drum makes, anù, 5,
the labyrinth perfects, 6, indeed, also diffuses it throughout the
whole head, whence it drives it into the nerves of the seventh
pair which run throughout the whole face; and into the second
vertebral nerve, which mns throughout the whole occiput, and
thus from the vertebree. 7. From the connection it appcars
how far sound is propagated.

THE CAVITY OF THE DRUM OF THE INTERNAL EAR AND THE

EUSTACH1AN TUBE.

150. 12. Experiellce. The membrana tympani is el1:ptical

in figure, concave, and connectèc\ with a bony ring, which
farther back is changed into a bony passage. Sorne [anat­
omists] place the foramen w here the chorda is; for some per­
sans can blow out a candIe through the Eustachian tube. The
chorda tympani is a htic nerve brought togethcr from the
fifth and scventh pairs; it is stretched unc\erneath the membrana
tympani Iike a chord. The head of the mal1eus is articulated
by a hinge joint with the body of the incus, and the longer ieg
of this w;th the head of the stapes by an arthrodial joint. But
the stapes adheres by ils base to the fenestra ovalis by means of
a thin membrane. There are two fenestr<:e; the Ïenestra ovalis
leaùs to the vestibule; the fenestra rotunda kads to the cochlea
by a closed membrane. There are two foramina. The mem­
brana tympani is pellucid, and fiat; towards the external duct
it has a slight concavity in the middle; its position is oblique; it
is composcd of several layers. The outcrmost layer is a pro­
duction of the skin or epidennis; the internaI is of the peri­
osteum of the same cavity. The little bone, the mal1eus, forms
a depression. The handle appears to be in a thin mem­
branous fold; the membrd':~ tympani serves it as a periosteum.
The little bones have periostea: the periosteum is continued ta
the fenestra and the Eustachian tube, where it comm:ngles it­
self with the internaI membrane. Betweèn the incus and the
 EAR AND SENSE OF HEARING. 73

mallelis is a thin and smalI cartilage. The stapes is boune! bv

the point of its thinner leg to the mastoid orifice, by a siJort
ligament. The malleus has three muscles, so also the Eustachian
tube.
i51. 13. The uses of the cavity of the drum are: 1. To
receive the sonorous modification or modulation concentrated
by the external ear and the auditory tube; 2. to diffuse the same
stilI further into the nerves, membranes, cartilages and bones of
the whole head and brain; 3. likewise to distinguish it into
parts, but only roughly; 4. to communicate with the laby­
rinth, in order that the modification may be most particularly
distinguished, and being \11ost distinctly received, may be right­
Iy propagated to the brain and all its parts.
152. 14. Ever)1 vibration is insl.l11tated aro1tnd the edges of
the membrana t)'lI1pani. 1. The tremor, concentrated in the ex­
ternal auditory tube and in the membranes, or periostea amI
perichondria, and thence striking upon the bone itself, does
not penetrate except into the circu1l1ference of the membrana
tympani; elscwhere the wax hindcrs it. 2. Thus on1y the'
tremor, not the air itself [penetrates]. 3. Thus the modifica­
tion of the air is put ta flight. 4. This is also the reason why in
earliest infancy there is only a humid circle, which afterwards
grows into a tube according to use and the culture of modifica­
tions, sa Hiat [sound] may be rightly introduced by this way.
153. The wax also softens the membrane and preserves it
whole in its own state, at the same time keeping out all the air.
154. And titis tre'/'Iwr, indeed, ~·s ins~t/'uated di1'ectly inta the
outennost membrane, 'l.colûch coheres to the perioste·/I.11/.. 1. For
that vibration, according to \iVinslow, is continued by the
periosteum and the auditory tube. 2. The way lies open for it
right forward and continuous; 3. but by this way, and thus
mediately, it is insinuated into the' rest of the membranes of that
same drlll11, and into the inmost membrane. 4. There are
filaments wh;ch sllbtend and bind. 5. They are of mutual con­
tact. 6. Thus the communication is mediate and immediate
with the internaI membrane of this membrana tympani.
155. The modification extends {rom the whole periphery to
14 THE SENSES.

its centre. 1. That which is insinuated proceeds according to

the continuous medium, therefore from peripheries to center.
2. It proceeds from the borders of the membrane and bone, 3·
thence also by the handle itself of the ma11eus and its periosteum.
4. The leg of the malleus is the regulator of this. 5. If we
knew the directions of the filaments of the membranes of this
drum, then it would appear that there are various directions,
and indeed that they tend tovvard the whole leg or arm; 6. for
there is a semi-diameter of the leg.
156. Thus a sonorous modification is again concentrated by
the membrana tympani, which ù the reason for the existence of
this membrane. 1. It goes together even into the centre, and
perchance to the peripheries of the leg of the malleus. 2. Thus
concentration is accomplished.
157. Thus also the general modification is concentrated, ùr
arder that it may harmonize c011!pletely in particular and in
general. 1. The general modification passes through the audi­
tory tube, 2. which corresponds to the particular modification;
3. also by the Eustachian tube, to which aiso that membrane
it attached; 4. this formation is solely for the purpose of
bringing in the tremor; it is placed under it, 5. and, moreover,
it carries it ta the other semi-circular plane, where the Icg is not.
158. 15. When the vibration is concentrated in the centre, if
is then dispersed by means of the leg of the maUeus into the
fenestra o'ualis, and titis indeed witl! facile pO'l.t'er. 1. For there
concurs into one point a concentration of a11 the vibrations into
the membrana tympani, a concentration of a11 in the auditory
tube, a concentration of ail in the Eustachian tube, and a con­
centration of the whole brain; 2. Indeed, everywhere into the
leg of the malIeus as also into the semi-diamcter. 3. The
leg of the malleus is there invested with the thin peri­
osteum produced from the inmost membrane, therefore the
more sensitive. 4.!ts extremity is in the very centre [of the
membrana tympani], where its lever presses the lever [of the
membrana tympani], it therefore most easily lifts and vibrates,
dS is weil known in mechanics. 5. The articulation effects the
same in its little crypt, which is yielding, and there it is mem­
 EAR AND SENSE OF HEARING. 75

branous and ligamentous. 6. This concentration is the second;

in the labyrinth a third and last concentration takes place. 7·
Thus there are three degrees of concentration.
159. When the leg of the malleus is moved, the whole mem-
bralla tympmti is moved, but mostly ùt the centl"e. 1. This ap-
pears from geometry and mechanics. 2. In order that the
membrana tympani may be vibratea with â. light force, it is
hollowed out. 3. For if it were tense it would not thus obey
the malleus, 4. nor would the sound be dispersed thence so
clearly. This is the prime cause of its concavity.
160. 16. The membrana tympani spreads this sound throngh
the malleus, incus and stapes, into the fenestra ovalis. 1. This
appears especially from the connection. 2. This no doubt
moves.
161. The membrane also spread.t the sound into the entire
wall round about, from which Ù is again concentrated into the
fenestra ovalis. 1. There is a connection of the membrana
tympani with the periostea of the cavity, 2. by a continuation of
the membrane, 3. by the nerves, 4. and by the Eustachian tube.
5. A nerve runs through both the membrana tympani ancl the
Eustachian tube.
162. The membrane thus also spreads the sound into the
surface of the fenestra ovalis b}, f:7:vo ways, so that there may
likewise be a concentration in its centre, as well as in the 1nem-
brancJ tympani. 1. The first way is through the malIeus, incus
and stapes. 2. The latter adheres by its border to the fenestra
ovalis, 3. and strikes the peripheries of the fenestra ovalis soft-
Iy; hence there is a concentration. 4. Every tremor on the part
of the walIs f10ws to the periphery of tlle fenestra. 5. Thus
there must be harmony. 6. It f10ws also from the walls into
the stapes itself, which is surrounded by a periosteum, and is
honow. 7. Renee a certain effect results from several causes.
163. 17. The inclosed air also contributes to the propaga-
tion of the tremor. 1. It is known that air is incIosed, and
that it enters by the Eustachian tube. 2. This air likewise, set
trembling, produces a certain effect. 3. This in the third cause.
164. This air pusltes upon the whole periphery of the cavity;
 THE SENSES.

as 1S evident from the obliqu.e position of the membrana

tympal1i. 1. That the position of the membrane is oblique, see
the authorit:es. 2. When the membrane pulsates, ail the air is
driven upwards, thus repelled. 3. Thus the repercussion is
perpetuaI. 4. If the membrane were direct it would drive
the air towards the fenestras, anc! hence there woulc! be no
repercussion, but the order, which wishes to run from the peri­
phery to the centre, would be confusec!.
165. 1t fol/ows also from the conca've character of the
membrane that the impulse against the air is not strong, but
gent/e. 1. For the membrane can yielc! and be reflected; 2.
thus, in the closed chamber, can impel its vibrations according
to the very manner of the engrossing sound.
166. Lest allything should hinder, there are two e.rÏfs for
the retreat of the air, name/y, through the Eustachian tube, and
through the mastoid foramen. 1. If the cavity should be closed
up there wouel be no new air; 2. nor coud it yielc! if there
were air in it, but there woulc! be a perpetuaI resistance. 3.
Now, however, very close to the head anc! the foot of the
membrane, there are foramina. 4. vVhile the membrane
impels the air obliquely, so that it is shocked through and
through, then the foramina themselves first receive the air,
especially the upper one. S. This also is the cause of the
obliquity of the foramina, and of their position. 6. Besic!es
they are so arrangec! that they may carry the pituitre away, and
towards the palate.
167. IS. The tremor thus concentrated flows, not on/y into
the periphery of the fenestra ovalis, but also into that of the
fenestra rotunda. 1. This takes place first from the whole wall,
2. then anew from the pulsation of the fenestra ovalis, 3. also
from the air thence set into vibration; 4. for its membrane is
continued to the periosteum of the cavity. S. Thus the same
rule applies everywhere, in order that there may be concen­
tration.
168. The general tremor is transferred, together willv the
particular tremor of the second degree, even into ail the neigh­
boring periostea, into the nerves, and into the bones of the
 EAR AND SENSE OF HEARING. 77

cranium. 1. Into the nerves, because of the chorda tympani;

2. because the hard portion of the seventh pair extends under-
neath; 3. because of the fifth pair, which consociates all the
organs, and because the seventh pair approaches the whole face;
4. because thère is an opening into the Eustachian tube, and a
continuation of its membrane, and a commingling with the
pituitary membrane; S. because there is so wonderful a con-
struction of the tube itself that it brings in, carries out, and
transfers; 6. because thère is a second opening, and through
it there is a continuation of the membrane; 7. because the ear
is carved in upon the petrous portion of the temporal bones,
where there is a continuous hollow and plates, and thus poros-
ity; 8. because onè leg of the incus touches the portio dura
of the seventh pair in the !ittle trench whère the aqueduct of
Fallopius lies; 9. because there are ligaments and many tend-
ons. 10. Ali things concur to the end that when this tremor is
spread abroad, a general mode may exist; 1 I. by the nerves.
As to the manner in which these communicate with the second
pair, and the tenth vertebral nerve, ...vith the intercostal nervt
by the par vagum, see \iVinslow; thus how thèy proceed into
the whole body.
169. THis tremor is also spread abroad thence into the
arteries and into the dura mater. I. The membrana tympani is
continued to the dura mater, 2. by a continuity of thè mem-
brane, 3. by the Eustachian tube, 4. by the arteries near to the
clinoid processes. Here that whole sonorous area is meant.
where the seventh pair goes forth, where the carotid enters,
where the basal sinuses lie and the common channels of the
sinuses. S. For this reason the cerebrum is to he treated of:
also the sphenoid bone, which is at the bases of the bones of the
cranium. 6. The nerve of the fifth pair also insinuates itself
into the dura mater. 7. A movement runs into the preceding.
8. The seventn pair also entèrs the dura mater. See Heister
and Winslow.
170. This second degree of the propagation of modulations
approaches the hard nerves, not the soft ones. I. If indeed
there is a second degree, it is not yet weH distinguished and
 THE SENSES.

purified. 2. This second degree of propagation approaches the

hard nerves of the seventh pair, and 3. it subtends the chorc1a
tympani. 4. It also touches the leg on the incus, and thus it is
set in vibration; 5. likewise the fifth pair by the Eustachian
tube and by the membrana tympani.
171. 19. Summary. 1. The auditory or extcrnal tube con­
centrates the first sonorous rays, and reduces them, as it were,
into a confused and indistinct one; for all sonorous modifica­
tion receivcd by the external ear is carried into the auditory
tube, where, by continuous reflexions, it is driven into the walls.
This tremor is the first collection, concentration, unification
and commingling into a general unit, according ta the habit of
nature everywhere. This first degree of concentration is spread
abroad and propagated into the soft membranes, then into the
more consistent, and finally, into the cartilages and bones;
wherefore also it passes into the cartilages and boncs of the
whole head, indeed into those of the whole body, as also ap­
pears vividly from the tremulation itse1f. Thence is the gen­
eral, under which will be, the following particulars: This com­
munication takes place by means of the membranes, cartilages,
bones and nerves; for the ultimate composition of the nerve of
the seventh pair also enters there; then also the second verte­
bral nerve, so that [the tremor] may be spread abroad thence
into the whole body; the concentration especially effects the dis­
tribution; wherefore the auditory tube itse1f does this where
the cartilages are conjoined to its bones. 2. The cavity of the
drum concentrates these sonorous modifications anew. and re­
duces them to its o,vn unities, and it is here that another degree
of concentration arises from the former; thus the sound be­
comes more distinct, emerging from its confused chaos; but it
is still gross, as may appear from the membrana tympani, which
is gross and multiple. This takes place by various modes, that is
to say, by the concentration of the general tremor to the centre
of the membrana tympani, the propagation to the fen~stra
ovalis, and there similarly to the centre of this by the stapes,
and by a continuation of the tremor; likewise by a concentra­
tion into the fenestra rotunda at the centre, where two degrees
 EAR AND SENSE OF HEARING. 79

are presented at the same time. In order that this degree, which
is the second, may likewise pass into all the neighboring parts,
and still move broadly, not only into the compages and mem­
branes of thè lesser cranium, but also into the meninges and
composite medullary and cortical congeries of the brain, and
t,hus more broadly, the membrana tympani is attached to the
petrous bone, and thus continued to that which invests the
cavity. The fenèstra ovalis is similarly attached to the bones,
so also [he fenestra rotunda. One leg of the malleus strikes
that portion of the periosteum to which it is attached. The leg
of the incus also strikes thè nerves of the seventh pair, where it
enters the cavity through the duct of Fallopius, and is con­
tinued to the membranes. Especially also the air, by con­
tinuous repercussions, strikes the walls. Thus many means
conspire to spread abroad this trel11or, especially the Eustachian
tube. 3. There is a third degree, \vhere a still more purifièd
sound or modification occurs in the labyrinth; for that pulse
and tremor, although there is a unity of the prior or more gen­
èral modification existing in the auditory tube, is neverthe1ess
general relativèly to those parts into which sound is distinguish­
ed inside the labyrinth. This is to be treatèd of below.
172. Thus it is to be observed: 1. That many and thus
multiple causes concur for one similar more particular cause,
in order that there may be a certain effect; 2, tIlat previously
they were commingled in chaos; 3. anel that afterwards they
are most artfully distinguished into order and degrees. 4. So
that if there should be [still another] labyrinth it woulei further
distinguish the parts which can refer to this general; but such
an organism would be still purer, and perhaps might equal the
structure of the eye, into which articulate sound [would] con­
centrate itseIf.
173. 20. The uses of the Eustachian tube. 1. It exists in
order that it may convey the sounds of the larynx by a short
cut into the ear, before the auditory duct is fully formed as in
infancy. 2. Thus that it may inaugurate the larynx into
speech. 3. That it may concur with the exterior approach,
50 that, while the second is being perfected, they full y com­
bine into one thircl. 4. In oreler that it may propagate the·
80 THE SENSES.

general tremors of the auditory tube distinctly into all parts of

the cranium and temples. 5. In order that it may receive the
tremors of the cavity of the tympanum, or the second degree
of modification, and likewise may distribute them. 6. For two
degrees of tremor like the fluids in the arteries, flow in oppo­
site directions; nor does the more particular impede the gen­
eral, and vice versa; therefore, that tube is osseous, cartilagin­
ous and membranous; it is traversed by nerves; it is formed
for conveying sound. 7. Thus in order that the auditory duct
may by this way convey the tremors into the cavity of the
tympanum, and may thus concur with the membrana tympani.
8. In order that it may transmit the air, always fresh, into the
cavity of the tympanum. 9. In order that it may give to the
air a reflex impulse, and thus to the membrana tympani the
power of acting upon the air. 10. In order that it may draw
off the pituitae of the cavity of the tympanum towards the
palate or nares. 11. Probably also it opens outside the mem­
brana tympani, as with those who are able to pass tobacco
smoke or air through this passage; this is to be inquired into.
12. In order that it may affect the deaf by way of the mem­
brana tympani; for if you seize with your teeth a beam fast­
ened to stakes, having your ears stopped, the sound creeps
through by this way, and shows that the membrana tympani
is so placed for the sake of the tremor of the auditory duct,
which tremor is dashed in by another way, a way by the
membrana tympani being denied; for that membrane is con­
structed wholly in order that it too may discern a particular
from a general, and thus may communicate it to the walls of
the cavity, without the motion of the little bones; from this
thing it seems that not only the plusation of the little bones,
but also the tremefaction of the membrane of the cavity run
together into the fenestrae. 13. In order that it may conjoin
all the tremors of the larynx, trachea, lungs, palate, nares and
dura mater; in a word, all the tremors which traverse the
pituitary membrane, with the membrane of the cavity, for the
pituitary membrane there commingles itself: just as the audi­
tory tube conjoins the exterior membranes and the perioEtea.
14. Thus by these two causes producing one thing, the effect
 EAR AND SENSE OF HEARINC. 81

cannot fail to become certainly known; for two approaches

are thus given in the cavity of the tympanum. 15. Not ta
mention a supêr;or opening through which also the tremor
flows in.
174. 21. JUany ver:y necessary ru les OCCUy here. 1. That
there can be no distinct anel regular particular without its own
general, under which it may be, to which it may be referred;
j ust as are the substances sa are all the accidents of the sub­
stances, for substances are subjects of their accidents; hence,
rules being g'iven, as ta how the particular is referred ta the
general, in the substances, as in the pcritonel1m, (which see),
rules exist as ta how thcir accidents may find place, for they
coincide. It is difficult to give the causes of accidents without
the bincling of the minci to substances as ta their
General
st!bjects. 2. \Vhatevcr happens in continuous
Rules.
things, or in the membranes, nerves and carti­
lages, a similar thing happens in contiguous things, as in
waters, atmosphcres and vice 7vrsa; wherefore a modification
passes over from the contiguous into the continuous and vice
versa. 3. But whatever is modified accorc1ing ta its form, the
samc modification falling into another form is otherwise sep­
arateel and distinguishec1.-fonn is the basis. 4. Therefore, in
orcier that there may be hearing and sense, it is necessary that
therc be an organ or an organic form, constructed wholly ac­
cording to the nature of that sense. These are the general
rules.
175. 22. J1ifutatiolls of state arising in the membrana tym­
pani, and thus in the subsequent parts, which depend upon it.
Thcse things are to be observed here:
176. There are many causes of mutations, namely, three in
we]"')' degree of concentration. I. This will appear in the
following. 2. Thus it is perceived how many things are in a
sound.
177. The first canse 'of the mutation 0/ state is quantity and
its degree; this in general. 1. Namely, that the souncl may be
higher and lower, stronger and weaker. 2. This produces
accent. 3. As in song. 4. As in speech. 5. In speech it
naiurally applies itself to, and confonns itself with, the affec­
6
82 THE SENSES.

tions, or with the causes of the changes ansmg from their

qualities. 6. As, for instance, what is expressed when one is
angry, when timid, when proud, when pious, when impious.
7· Indeed it often applies itself to one word, which expresses
something similar. 8. Thus the cause of affectionsari-sing
from diverse quantities conforms itself \Vith the qualities which
concur with it. 9. This is apperceived especially in song,
where at one time a low sound rules, at another a strong one.
JO. But the foundation lies in the affections of the mind.
178. Anotl~e'r cause is quality and its df:gree and differ­
ences. 1. For thence is hannony. 2. Thence is art, musical
and natural. 3. For celerities have a harmony among them­
selves. 4. This harmony the soul knows and feels. 5. Art
wills to receive this harmony, and it imitates and lays down
rules. 6. It is most harsh if the part be not natural, and
afterwards it rids the thing of what is artificial: if the part be
artificial, unless elevated to its own degree, it ,does not easily
accord (succedit). (See page 99 [infra page 84].) 5.* If
only we can take something from the ocean how much we,
the learned, may hear. 6. This is the reason why l do not
wish to let myself into an abundance of particulars; it is
enough if we explore common causes. 7. \iVhole centuries are
not sufficient for one thing.
179. Such as is the karmon)' such is the affection, and such
as is the affection such is the change of state; in alt the organs
there are changes of state,o in these their perfection consists.
1. Unless [the states] \Vere changed, nothing would be per­
ceived but the one. 2. There would be no variety. 3. Thus
nothing could be described as to what kind it is.
180. 23. There are many changes .of state in the ear, espe­
ciaily in the membrana tympani, whence sound is further prop­
agated. 1. How changes of state according to aIl degrees
momentarily happen, while we are ignorant of them, can
thence be perceived. 2. First the leg of the maIIeus is bound
to the membrane, and the membrane is concave (incQ1)ota).
3. The leg of the malleus by means of its muscles can turn,

*Here occurs a repetition of the numbers 5 and 6 of the subdivisions.

 EAR AND SENSE OF HEARING.

and can thus fiatten out the membrane from its concavity ac­
cording to its turning. 4. That the head of the malleus can
be turned ;md twisted somewhat, appears from its muscles;
thence the effect rebounds into a concavation and remission of
the membrane. S. vVherefore also the membrane is' elliptical
in order that it may be more fully drawn to the sides. 6.
Wherefore a nerve runs through it, which changes the state of
the membrane according to the affections of the brain. 7.
Therefore that membrane is composed of so many lamellae,
which can be folded in various ways, and can put on another
variety according to every affection (affect~t1n). 8. l'here­
fore the exterior membrane takes on a state of the first de­
gl'ee, and the interior membrane a state of the second degree;
they come to agreement by means of the intermediate mem­
branes, for the latter apply themselves as media. 9. There­
fore so many muscles are given to the malleus, in order that it
can ctherwise change the state by extending and contractillg
itself, for it is obedient to the brain. ra. Therefore blood ves­
sels run through the membrane, in order that the membrane
may change its state bath by the muscles and by the vesscls.
1 I. The same is the case with the nervous filaments j ust as in
the face and countenance. 12. Therefore a muscle is attachec1
to the incus in order that it may likewise change the state of
the stapes in a convenient manner. 13. Therefore that muscle
is inserted where the nerve of the portia dura of the seventh
pair enters.
181. But ta hunt out distinctly al! the harmonies, and thencc
arising affections, is an infinite and not a human work. I.
Wherefore l pass by the distinctions, 2. as well as the par­
ticulars; 3. still less do l descend into geometry and analysis.
4. Every single one of these things demands its own volume.
S. Every one requires a universal science. 6. Hence we see
how unskilled we are; we glory over art, which is nothing
respectively to the things which lie hidden. 7. Nature mani­
fests these things, but still very grossly. 8. Sometimes cul­
ture and art extinguish nature herself.
182. This alone: that the affections of the mind arùing (fOm
diverse (onns of ideas, especial!y those relatcd to the under­
 THE ShdSES.

standing, excite those ,-Jer)' affections which are SQ1:d to be of the

min d, which ail induce their own mutations, different from
those which proceed (rom sonorous hannony. 1. Sounds do
not penetrate alI' the way ta icleas. 2. They do not penetrate
further than the labyrinth into a kincl of rational sight. 3. The
form of the iclèas produces those affections of evil and goocl,
etc.
183. There arc a/so cOI'jJoreal comm1llûcations lil,e as of the
brain, between the sensations and motions or bet'ween the­
hannoliics and c11allges of state, as has been tolcl in other
organs of the senses; as between the membranes-the exterior
ones or those of the auditory tube, those of the membrana
tympani and of the muscles; but these are sl1btilties and have
been treatecl in regard to other organs of the senses.
(See page 99 where the se thing's have been transposecl.)

THE EAR.

184. Natural harmony is the cause of affections and affec­

tions are the causes of the changes of staté'. 1. As h:lS been
observed in other senses. 2. The farm will be such that C}uality
thence results. 3. The quality is juclgecl accorzling ta the'
harmony in which the ear, and especially the brain, Îs.
185. The ear does not judge or sensate concerning hannon­
ies, but the brain does so, where lies the sout in ÙS own organ­
isl1'l. of sensation. 1. The ear indeed according ta its state
brings to the brain a harmany agreeable ta its own form. 2.
Thus an injurecl ear brings a false harmony. 3. But l am here
speaking of a well constituted ear, which corresponds ta the
organism of the brain. 4. Similar things may be aclded in re­
gard ta the other senses.
186. 23. In the ear there are three degrees of harmonies, or
more, according to the concentrations of sMtnds. 1. One
species of harmony in the externa! ear; 2. anather in the cavity
of the tympanum, 3. a thircl in the labyrinth ; 4. The harmonies,
nevertheless all agree, 5. and one reduces the other to its own
canvenience; 6. thence there Îs a corresponclence of aIl.
 EAR AND SENSE OF HEARING.

187. The first hanllony is between quantities in the auditory

ütbe. I. As was said above. 2. A sound higher and stronger
induces another change of state. 3. Or between general quan­
tities. 4. \iVhence exists the rudest harmony.
188. In the auditory tube there also e.rists a harmony a11long
qualities, which results Ùt one perceptible sound. I. How
many things are concentrated, successively and at the same
time, in the external ear is evident from things before said.
2. These many things, however, represent one thing. 3.
Thence there is a flrst and greatest unity, in which there are
infinite varieties. 4. Thence there is sound sweet, harsh, soft,
pleasant, unpleasant, etc. S. This obtains in every tone.
189. In the auditory tube there e.rists a harmony between
the successive qualities of sound. I. This is general for it
exists between general sounds. 2. It is such as is the first
collation.
190. A secolld har1110n}/ cxists bctween quantÙies concen­
trated in the mcmbmna t}11'Npani. I. These can be called quan­
titi es of the quality of that, degree. 2. TÎ1ence indeed there is
a more articulate concent of sound.
191. In the 'membra1'la tympani there e.rists a simultaneous
harmony in e'very 1I11ity. 1. For that unity is very gross, as
has been shown. 2. Thence is the harshness of the voice, and
the softness, and many other things.
192. In the membrana tY1'1lpani e.rists a successive harmon}'
between the q1tatz:ties of so'und. I. Music is concerned \Vith
these things. 2. Not so \Vith the prior. 3. It is natura!. 4.
Thence it is made artificia1. S. It is not so in the prior, for
that is purely natmal, etc.; in sangs it can turn somewhat.
193. In the fenestra m;alis andin the labyrinth there cxist
si'milar harmonies, but purer, between the parts of the parts.
I. For what the part contains in itself as to its discrimina­
tions this the labyrinth discovers. 2. For thus it is parted
into its own degrees and parts. 3. Thus there are similar
harmonies therein. that is to say between quantities, united in
their very quality, and between the qualities themselves.
194. The brain becomes conscious of these harmonies;
thmu its state1:s cltanged, and agreeably the state of the

/
86 THE SENSES.

organ. 1. An organ which is instrumental cannot be affccted

without its principal being affected. 2. Thus correspondence
and communication does this. 3. We know how it is affected
from the softness and sweetness of sound. 4. How it is
affected from concent. S. How from concent quality is pro­
duced.
195. A II these harmonies cannat be described geometrical!y
e:rcept imperfectly, for no art exhausts al! things. 1. AlI
causes have their own harmonies. 2. AlI harmonies have their
own forms. 3. AIl forms have their own geometry. 4. AU
geometry has its own laws and analyses; thence it is evident
how infinite are alI things.
The labyrt:nth 01' 'vestibule, the annular circles and the
cochlea.
196, E.-cperience. The labyrinth is \vhere the vestibule is,
which is the cavity constituting the middle part of the labyrinth
to which the fenestra ovalis constitutes the entrance. There
are three semicircular canals, the greatest, the middle and the
smallest. S. They open their mouths into the vestibule. The
cochlea is the part opposite to the canals, making two and one­
haH turns, in which there is a nucleus and a canal, elivided
into two by a spiral lamina; the one of which opens into the
vestibule; it is calIeel the scala vestibuli; the other goes by the
fenestra rotunda into the cavity of the tympanum; it is calleel
the scala tympani. A thin membrane is distributed through
aIl the cavities of the labyrinth, arising from an expansion of
the auditory nerve. These expansions are by Valsalva called
the sonorous zones. The canal of the auditory nerve is larger,
in which there are small foramina to the labyrinth. A soft
nerve is distributed through the labyrinth. A hard one com­
municates branches to the dura mater, to the tympanum and to
the external ear. There are arteries from the external and in­
ternai carotids. There are veins parti y to the j ugulars, parti y
to the sinuses of the dura mater.
197. The periosteum of the cochlea and of the canals is
continued over the walls of the cavity, and incloses the two
fenestrae. The spiral septum of the coch1ea separates itseJf
entirely from the semicanals, from base to apex, where it 1eaves
 EAR AND SENSE OF HEARING.

a little op~ning. by which the extremities communicate with the

:anal. A wider opening approaches the oblique circuit of the
fenestra rotunda; a second opens into the vestibule; the ex-
tremities are entircly separated by the continuation of the
periosteum. The Pars moJ1is of the nerve extcnds ta the great
internai auditory foramen, where fibres by innumerable fora-
mina penetrate ta the base of the cochlea, partly by the peri-
ostea of the semicircular canals, parti y ta the canals of the
cochlea.
197"'. 24. Analysis. Ail unÙies, which are confusedly con-
centrated in the middle of the membrana tympani, are more
exactly distinguished in the fenestra ovalù. 1. For unity
cûmes thither. 2. It comes by the ossicula and stapes, as also
by the periostea. 3. It proceeds from the peripheries tû the
centre. 4. It is like an undulation which covers the surface.
5. That fenestra must be considered as the area of many
chords. 6. Thus it can be compared simply \Vith a chard,
from which we know, how when it is touchec1 a tremor runs
through it from a point touched near its fastening. 7. In
order that all the tremors may enter, it is n('cessary that that
stapes should be fastened at the circllmference. 8. And at the
same timc a kincl of local motion must bring in that modula-
tion, j ust as the air is first modified.
198. In order that the fenestra ovalis may receive the con-
fused 1l1tities of the membmna tympani if ought indeed to be
of a certain measure and to be 'uer)! thin,o the thinner it is, and
the more exact the measure, and at the same time the nearer
it is to the oval figure, and the more dosely vf is bound to the
stapes, by so 111uch the more distinctly it carries Q,way the
sense of the um1t'jl of the membrana tympmli. 1. This can best
appear from the strings of an instrument. 2. In that the nearer
ta the fastening they are touched the sharper they are. 3.
Likewise the thinner the thread or string. 4. And many things
which concur in this consideration.
199. The unities of the membrana tympani consist of suc-
cessive thl:ngs. 1. For the whole simultaneous was at first
successive. 2. It is only the dul1ness of the sensation which
causes it ta appear simu1taneous. 3. In one tone there are in-
88 THE SENSES.

finite things, especial1y in a tone of the first and second degree;

it is the work of the fenestra ovalis that these things may be
distinguished.
2ûû. The unities c01JlprehCJ;d Ùt themselves diverse quanti­
ties and their degrees. 1. This we hear from the sounds
themselvse as that they are softer or louder. 2. Thence is
accent. 3. Thence is pleasantness according ta degrees and un­
pleasantness. 4. These things are transferred into the fen­
estra ovalis which distinguishes them. S. For it consists in
greater or less pressure and action.
201. The unities comprchend in themselves differences or
discriminations of qualùy. 1. As, for instance, coarse and
fine or sharp. 2. This arises from different velocities, or, not
from degrees but from movements. 3. Unity comprehends
sllch infinite differences; thence is the interior difference and
the pleasantness of voice and of sound.
201 a. Unity comprehends ùz ilself a whole hannon)l. 1.
Thence is its pleasantness. 2. Its softness. 3. Its hardness
and harshness. 4. The grace of the voice, etc. S. This to­
gether with clegrees of ql1antity produces that which is sa id ta
be pleasant and sweet.
202. Ultit)! cu11lprchends in itself changes of state arising
from harmon'Y or dùharmony, wh·ich are alsa distinguished in
the fenestra o'ualis. 1. The change of state taking place in the
membrana tympani rebouncls into the fenestra ovalis. 2. This
takes place by the muscles of themalleusandincus.3.By
the nerves and the chorda tymp3ni. 4. AIso by m3ny other
causes, of which 'Ive have spoken above when treating of the
tYl1lpanum. S. A nerve also nms through every sicle and ail
the ossicles, in orcier that a similar change of st:tte ma)' take
place in the fenestra, but more distinctl)'. 6. Therefore ail
things are distinguished in the fenestra ovalis. 7. \iVherefore
the fenestra ovalis by means of the stapes is a common sOl1nd­
ing board. as in instruments. 8. Therefore it can be drawn
bacl< ta the borders, and stretched apart. 9. It reaches espe­
cially ta the cavity of the membrane.
203. Changes of state are induced by every movement,
(more than an;: one can imagine), generaI and particular.
 EAR AND SENSE OF HEARfxe.

204. 25. The general distinction between tones, 7.dûch

create harmony, illducc harmollY, affection al/d gelleral l11"uta­
tian, under 'luhich the distillctiolls of the part are 1/lore per­
feetl}, pe-rceived. 1. These distinctions produce musical har­
mony. 2. From which a conclusion can be drawn as to the har­
mon)' of the unities. 3. A similar harmony reigl1s in general,
the rules of which we know. 4. In simultaneol1s tones is rep­
resented ever)' successive harmon)', for it is perceived as
silnl1ltaneous. 5. Nor is it other than the form. 6. And the
distinction is between quantities and qualities. 7. Or between
degrees and moments: degrees have respect ta quantities, mo­
ments ta celerities. 8. "Ve seek in particular that harmony
which is of the whole volnme. 9. Nature grasps it. 10. Art
knows a few things; J 1. and bath together [nature and art]
grasp it most perfectl)'. 12. This, the fene~tra ovalis into
which ail the5C harmonies, affections and mutations of state
redolil1d, distinctl)' re-presents. 13. These harmonies, etc.,
mOye the sou! sensibl)'. r4. And they move the least fibres of
the brain. which thus dispose the general 5tate. 15. By means
of the muscles. the ligaments. the ossic!es, and especiall)' by
means of the stapcs whid1 coheres and is attacheù ta it. [the
fenestra ovalis], recedes or approaches, thus contraets or dI­
lates. 16. The partictùar state concurs \Vith the general, or
that of the nen'es (fi/arull1) and fibres.
205. D1:stinctions still fiNer. and tlleir lwrllumies, affections
and mutations of state, arc also iilduced, 'i.vhich are 7x·ithin
e7Jery W1ÙY of the unit)" but 'l,·llich do not rmch the percep­
tion of our mÙ1d. 1. For which reas'Ün those ossicles have
been invcsted with a very thin periostel1m. 2. The stapes is
perforated. and is traverscd br the ether. 3. And the fenestra
consists of the most subt!e neryes (Mis). 4. The state is the
best, ifan degrees of the states rightly agree. and one repre­
sents itself in the other. S. Then the alternation [of state}
which becomes sensible is most delightful. for thereby latent
affection is arotlsed.
206. 2S a . Ail these things are distinct!y transferred 1:nto
the lenestra M'atis, by the ossicies. a,na ill/'lnediately by the
 THE SElvSES.

stapes. 1. The stapes can generally recede and approach. 2.

1t can bring in every state variously,-the thinner the mem­
brane is, the greater capacity it has for more changes of state.
3. Not all the changes of state can be describecl, since succes­
sive changes are hearcl as simultaneous. 4. There are generaI.
particular and most singurar changes. 5. The most singular
do not reach the consciousness of the minci. except generally
as a kind of delight or undelight, the color of which we can­
nat give. 6. For an application to our state takes place,-we
judge naturall'y by what agrees.
207. The distinctions are a1so trallsferred by the perioste1t111
of the caVity of the t'ymop-amum and by the air. 1. They all pro­
duce one cause. 2. From a concurrence of concord. many dis­
tinctions effect the one cause more certainly. 3. Then also
from concurrence they produce harmony, affection, and mu­
tation of state of various degrees. 4. For they constitute one
series.
208. It ha.ppens in the fenestra ovalis as in the at:r, namely,
that there is a local 11lotion ['which] goes fortlt into conatus,
and tltus propagates the modification. 1. The pulse is the
local motion. 2. Thence there is an alternate tension and re­
laxation. 3. The one and the other membrane separate and come
together in the circllmference. 4. This is alternate local mo­
tion. or loco-motive pulse. 5. The air itself also requires this
and connects the cause, by contiguity, or in the air, and by
conti nuity, or in the membrane.
209. From this pulse the tremor is transferred into the con­
tùucous bone wh·ich is at the circumferencc, and ·indeed in­
stantly. 1. Thus the very distinction of the unit y is trans­
ferred into the osseous substance. 2. Wherefore also it is
transferrecl into the continuous air:. 3. This is the general of
this degree; every degree has its o\Vn generaI. 4. This gen­
eral is propagated still more \Videry than the other general, into
the cavity of the tympanum; for the more pure and subtle it j,
the more widely it is diffus.ecl. 5. ll1Us it is sent into the
cr<J.11ium, the meninges, the pia mater, the nerves, etc. 6. Thus
through the pulse and the local motion, it emulates the air.
 EAR AND SENSE OF REARlNG. 91

210. Front this pulse and the vibration of the fenestra, ail
this nOW distinct modification is c011V1nunicated b'Y the stapes to
the interior membrane of the fenestra, wherefore alsa ta the
pe·riastcllIlll of the [ab)winth. 1. This is commllnicated as weH
by the slight trem~r of the interm~diate bonc, 2, as by the at­
tachment of the circllmference, 3. and of the whole plane. 4.
For there is a continuous exterior membrane of the cavity of
the tympanum; the other membrane is continuous with the
labyrinth. 5 Tllerc can be no distinct transferrence of the
tremor without the stapes except an indistinct one.
211. 26. Every distinction therefore, and the like, returns
into the whole pe1'Ïostcum of the lab)'rinth, or of the 'uestiblûe
or semicircular ca,nals, and of the cochlea. 1. Therefore the
fenestra ovalis is the first and principal thing of these from
which a distinct modification returns, and is scattereù around.
2. Such as it is in the fenestra ovalis such is it when diffused
through the whole. 3. The very figure, form, connection and
continuation. yea the position urges this; thence the [modifica­
tion] flows fortll the same in an directions. 4. \Vhcrefore the
periostetllll is continued to the canals and to the cochlea, as
will be seen.
212. A similar distinct modification, !J'Y 1ueans of the fen­
estra o'ZlGlis, pours over into the fenestra rotunda. 1. This
also takes place by a triple way; 2. namely by the periosteum
of the cavity of the tympanum; 3. by the air; 4. and espc­
cially by the fenestra ovalis, which is the regulator, and in­
vites the correspondent local motion, and at the same time con­
veys the tremor to the little bones and to the internaI mem­
branes. Thus from the whole border a [tremor] similar to that
which is in the fenestra ovalis falls into the fenestra rotunda.
213. Therefore, the fenestra ovalù is the regulator, dis­
tinguisJu:ng the modifications of the unity of sound in the
membralla t)''/Itpall'i-it 1mparts local motion bath ta !he banes
and ta the internai membrane, wherefare to the whole laby­
rinth; such therefore as if is Ùt the fenestra (7)alis, such it is
e7Jer'ywhere propagated.
214. 26a. It is the same whether the labyrinth is full of air,
 THE SENSES.

or whether if is only full of ether. I. There are those who say

that they have c1etectec1 passages for the communication of air
uncler the fenestra; see Casaubon. 2. TheTe are those who
teach that this office is given to the fenestra rotunda, but it is
not true. 3. The air shows its own apertures. 4. If the laby­
rinth is full of expanc1ed ether it is j ust the same, for th us also
there is an equilibrium of pressure. S. The ether is the wing
of sonorous modification. 6. Therefore it would seem e1at
it could confer the same to the inmost parts. 7. It is enough
if the trcmor spread abroad through the membranes. 8. For
there is no sound in the ear, sound is as it were felt in the
brain, by the change of state and by tremors in the membra­
nous, nervous. cartiJaginous and osseous system. 9. Bence
there may be sound without the ear in the brain alone.
215. 26b. 1'0 sum up: Those things which ftùw to the
membrana tympani, and are obscurely receivec1 by it, or are
borne off by the cavity of the tympanulTI) these are rendered
more distinct in the fenestra ovalis: namely, the unities of
sound themselv,es, their harmonies, affections, changes of state,
these are renderecl distinct in the fenestra ovalis; similar things
are transferred through the whole labyrinth, where again in
the semicircular canals. and especially in the cochlea, they be­
come more distinct, and are distinctly impressecl on the nerves.
216. 27. These things therefore are silllilarly propagated by
the Îr'llestra ova,'is throu/!;h the 'who le lab'J'rin.th and its peri­
ostea, and throup;h the semiàrcular canals and the cochlea. 1.
Ali these things are protected by the same n1embrane, or by the
continuous periosteu111 ; 2. the semicircular canals by the same;
3. the cochlea by the same. 4. And because the thing is
especially to be done in the cochlea, two doors open into it. S.
One opens on the side of the vestibule, the other on the sicle of
the tympanl1m through the fenestra rotunc1a. 6. One aperture
adheres ta the fenestra rotunda, the other to the func\us or wall
of the vestibule. 7. The tr.emor in the cochlea so completely
concurs that it is the same everywhere, and thus from many
causes one thing is accomplished, an equalization is brought
about and thence a certain effect.
 EAR AND SENSE OF HEARING. 93

217. But the reason for olt this is, that here a distinct trelnis-
cence or modification ma)' distinctl)' tend into its Mun nerves,
that fronl the ner,Jes it ma)' distinctly tend into the vrain, and
that thenee a distinct sensation may arise. I. For this reason
the whole periosteum of the labyrinth is only an expansion of
the nerves of the soft portion of the seventh pair. 2. The
Iittle branches of the nerve nm through the semicircular canals.
3. They Iikewise run throl1gh the cochlea and the spiral lamina,
from the axis itself. 4. Sa that ,every tremiscence may be
poured alDroad most c1istinctly into that nerve and inc1eec1 into
the whole of it. 5. This is the reason for the whole organism
of the labyrintb. 6. Otherwise c1istinct perfection woulc1 not
exist. 7. For that very sound ought ta be exalted by many
modes, and ta be poured into the whole nerve. 8. Nor is t11is
into one part of it. 9. Nor is the sound alone, but also its
barmony, affection, and change of state of ail degrees, or of
aIl things whatsoever that ar.e in the least and the greatest
sounc1.
218. 29. The whole jJeriosteliln of the lavyrinth is an ex-
pansion of the soft part of the nerve of the seventh pair. I.
It appears as the in1110st membrane of the fenestra ovalis. 2.
It appears also as the inmost nl,embrane of the fenestra ro-
tunc1a; 3. of the walls of the labyrinth and vestibule; 4. of the
semicircular canals; 5. of the cochlea. 6. vV:her.efore also it is
the rnembrane which invests and subtencIs the spiral lamina.
7. Into this expansion is sent forth a modification by the fen-
estra ovalis.
219. A general modification passes into the bones thc1I1-
selues to which the perioste1t1Jl, is bound. I. vVherefore it
passes into the bones of the temples; 2. into the bones of the
semicircl1lar canals; 3. into tbe bones of the cochlea; 4. into
the spiral lamii1a. 5. Thus l11DSt broadly into the whole nc!gh-
borhood. 6. This general tremiscence harmonizes with the
trerniscence of the periosteum, becal1se it arises from the same
origin or from the fenestra ovalis. 7. Thus the general is con-
joined with its own particl1lar, and aIl parts tremble together
94 THE SENSES.

with the single parts in their own way. 8. The tremor l'uns
through according to the organism, and produces effects ac­
cording to the organism.
220. 30. The semicircular canals perfonn that use,-namely,
they receive the whole sonorous modification into their own
periostea, and thus cOncentrate it into lhem,selves,o for they are
cover,ed with a continuation of periosteum from the walls of
the labyrinth. 2. \Vherefore the modification is therein borne
into an orb, and thus concentrated.
221. Then further that they [the canals] may recei-ve n'cry
tremor of the bones of the same degree: 1. The canals indecd
are not only membranous, 2, but also osseous; 3. and the y aù­
here to the bones of the labyrinth. 4. T!1us they receive the
blows of the stapes and the pulsations of the fenestra ovalis by
continuation.
222. The canals receive into themselves tremors of a tripli­
cate degree: 1. The ultim:ate degree is of the !ittle bones.. 2.
The middle degree is of the periosteum. 3. The inmost de­
gree is of the fibrils by themselves. 4. In every single sound
ther,e lie that number of degrees of modification.
223. They [the canals] also receive the tremulous air or
ether, which being beatm back augments the tremor. 1. If it
be air, a rep.ercussion takes place. 2. It is otherwise if it be
ether; then the return is only into the fibrils or modes of the
first degree. 3. It is not driven into spirals, wherefore there
is the repercussion.
224. They cany off these sonorous tremiscences by the
fibres and little branches into the major branches of the nen'es
and thus into the tnmks of the nerves: 1. This is the prin­
cipal use, 2. for the nerves run through them, 3. and they are
there expanded into fibres and periostea.
225. Every single sound or tone therein invites fibres or
little b1'anches of its own composÜion, a,nd excites them into
sensible tre111iscence, and thus one sound is distinguished from
another, n<Jf otherwise than when a motion is set up in one
st1'ing another of the same tone is vibrated in another instru­
ment. 1. This experiment exists in the visible world, namely,
 EAR AlIiD SEA'SE OF HEARING. 95

that a consonance of one thing is moved by the consonance of

another, thus that there may be a quasi sympathetic evcn 111
the nervéS. 2. But the tremor from one chord dO,es not come
into the other consonance by means of the air, but by contact
of the moved instrument. 3. It is permitted to see and hear
sensible vibration. 4. There is a similar relationship in the
semicircular canals. 5. For the nerves thus press the canals. in
order that the tremulation may be concentrated into them., and
the body of the canal trembles together with the periosteum.
6. In order to understand the causes of this phenomenon, it
must be observed that every single sound has its Own div,erse
quantity or degree, and diverse quality or swiftness of motion;
just as the vibration of a string presses forward in waves
shorter or broader altog.ether according to the composition
and tension of the string, as is known. 7. The periosteum
receives the vibration of the fenestra ovalis and carries it
away into those canals, likewise also do,es the osseous wall. 8.
\Vhen the nerve receives a composition corresponding to it. a
tremor attacks this composition, not the others. 9. For if aU
vibrated, then there would b.e a confusion of waves, larger and
smaller togcther, which would rather extinguish the tone. !O.
A nerve gives forth branches of most diverse composition or
degr,ee, sa that there rnay always be found several inta which
every tremor whatever may rush. II. This is continued into
the trunk itself, and for that reason those compositions and the
trunks are vibrated. 12. Thus the same tremor always l'uns
through the trunk ,even to the brain. 13. One degree of com­
position has its O\\'n maximum and minimum; the differencè is
only that it is not again composed, but consists of more and
fewer fibres, whence is the same degree of composition. 14.
There are contremiscences of triplicate degree in every sound;
these will concord and produce one thing. 20. Wherefore by
l1l,eans of the canal aIl the sonorous contremiscences of tripli­
cate degree ar,e inborne by the trunk; if these things did not
harmonize, sound would not be sensibly raised: 21. This is the
second reason why agreeing things concord. 22. Otherwise,
contrary to nature, there would b.e repugnance and extinction.
96 THE SENSES.

23. vVherefore this rule dominates: 24. Every fibre is free, and
every composition of fibres.
226. For this reason the sonorous tremor is borne into all
the naves howe','ernulnerous the:;, are, and ùûo the trunks of
the ncr·ves, but thereinit continuesits own tremor according te
the corresponding degrce of C01l1jJosition, nor is if changed
into another. 1. SA that if there be a tremor which requires
the composition of five fibres, that tremor in every branch and
trunk mns distinctly through five fibres at once, and implicates
them in its waves. ? Sa also it is in the trunk. 3. Every
sound keeps its own composition even ta the last. 4. Other­
wise a coarser sound if it require the composition of ten fibres,
which composition will correspond ta it, thllS ten fibres ar,e
trZlversed, because the sound is coarser.
227. Thlls by means of the semicircu!ar canals e,)Cry trel1wr
is Dorile distinct!y 'into every nerve and trunlc. I. Both be-­
cause the nerve runs through them; 2. and because it is bound
ta them. 3. The tremor is concentratec1 towarc1s the nerves
from the whole surface according ta the little branches; 4. that
it may be expanded therein into the periosteum with its
branches.
228. Thus collected the trel1'~or passes from the canalsinto
the more general trunl?: 1. Namely, into the tnmk of the
softer part of the seventh pair. 2. l t is regularJy collected
from the whole labyrinth.
229. Thus Ù is not as a tube wlûch breathes forth the air
and thus sounds, as Ùi acoustic tubes, nor do sonGrous zones
see11L to be necessary, although the periostea do not strictly
adhere to the walls. I. From: the fallacies of the senses we
can conclude that there ar,e small tubes; 2. that there is a
sound or whistling within ; 3. j ust as in aconstic tubes. 4. How
incongruolls this is, and contrary ta the principles of nature, is
observed at the first ]ook. 5. The tubes are only ta the end
that the modifications may distinctly enter into the nerves, may
distinctly come through ta the brain and the cortical sub­
stance. 6. There the vibration and change of state make what
is called sound. 7. Wherefore no sound drives the air into the
 EAR AND SENSE OF HEARING. 97

walls of the labyrinth, the periosteum of which IS called the

sensory of hearing.

The Cochlea.

230. That the use of the cochlea is thus to distinguish this

last ~ùnorous modification, so that it may pass distinctly into
the nerves, that thence disc.:-iminations of sensation may be
perceived, is altogether undoubted.: but in order to know ho\'1
it effects this, its structure must be thoroughly examined.
Concerning the cochlea the following things must be obs.ervee!:
231. I. That the nucleus is an axis brought together from
mere centers,. thus it is ta be caUed the central axis,. I. for it is
erectee! in the micldle of the cochlea. 2. The spiral lamina con­
stitlltes its semidiameter. 3. The cochlea itself constitutes the
periphenes. 4. Thus that axis or nucleus is a perpetuaI center
or centers protracted into a continuous axis.
232. In this center is the 1110St quiet station of al!. fa 'Which
Ihe mobile peripheries reler thelnselves as levers. I. Thus all
the rac1ii of the spiral lamina ar,e semidiameters. 2. But they
are clrawn into a spiral flux.
233. Wherefor-e that œJ:is is hoU07.f.:, and the nerve of the
soft portiol~ resides there and if traverses this as a fulcnml, in
complete rest. 1. This is evident from those who have cle­
scribed it. 2. Then that the nerve passes through; 3. and that
thence branches are sent forth in every direction.
234. Thus if represents a llÏ1td of cane, for it becomlCS
smaUer towards the lower parts. 1. As the trunk, 2, 50 also
the periphery itself.
235. 2. The lal11,ina spiralis, which consists of the thinnest
and most highly elastic bone, is stretched forth thence like the
area of a circle, but of a circle drawn forth into a spiral. I.
Let a center, or section of the nucleus, be assumed, ane! rounc1
about it a circulaI' area. 2. If this he bent downward a spiral
thence r,esults; 3, as if all this congeries were soft, then it could
be compressed into such an area. 4. This area would represent
perpetuai circ1es, which go forth from a centre and are terrnin­
ï
 THE SENSES.

ated ln a periphery. 5, Or if you wish to describe such an

area by wires [fila], if the wires were stretched downward, a
similar spiral would be described. 6. For this reason a spiral
is referred to a circle and a circle to a spiral as to its measure.
7. This is the regular spiral, there ar,e also irregular spirals con­
sisting of other curves and of ellipses. 8. Wherefor,e this
lamina spiralis con be caUed a perpetuai semidial1teter, or a
perpetuai area of a circle.
236. This lamina is invested with a thin periosteum, which
is an expansion of the ne'rvous fibres. 1. It is so in the whole
labyrinth; 2. and in the canals. 3. The branches themselves of
the ncrves break forth everywhere and spread themselves
abroad.
237. By means of this periosteul1l1. the p'endulous IG!l1tina
sp/:raNs is attached at one .l'ide, in order that it may be more
suitable and more prompt for givÎ1tg out vibrations. i. As
may appear from the description by Valsalva, 2. and by that
of others; 3. but it forms a continuum by a continued peri­
osteum.
238. This lamina from base to apex decreases in the extent
of its area or semidiameter, first decreasing in thickness or
body, even until it ends in a 1nembrane about the apex,. but in
the same 'I1WH1!er it increases in aptitude for trembling, in
elasticity, etc. 1. Thus in order that all dimensions might be
induced upon this lamina spiralis. 2. Ali degrees of ,elasticity
from the greatcst to the least of that same degree are indued
upon it; 3. so that there may be no tremor, which may not
find somewhere its own correspondence ; 4. thus it is the most
perfect organ for receiving ail degr.ees of tremiscence and
modification.
239. 3. Similarly the nerves which flow into the lamina
spiralis from the nucleus, decrease trom the greatest ta the
least, to the end that in them may be found aU distinctions of
composition. 1. For the nerves are disseminated through the
periosteum of the lamina spiralis; 2. and perpetually decrease;
3. and are in proportion to the lamina, which serv,es as a base;
4. for the periastettm itself, which comfe~ from the nerves, in­
 EAR AND SENSE OF HEARING. 99

creases similarly in thinness in the direction of the apex of the

lamina spiralis.
240. 4. The cit"Cumference, which is the wall of the lamina
spiralis, similarl'), decreases in fullness, thiclmess and fullness
of c01nmodification. 1. This is in proportion to the lamina
spiralis, 2. ta the periosteum) 3. and to the nerves.
241. 5. From this it appears that the lamina spiralis is
vibratile, and constructed for recei-ving all quantifies and quali­
ties, or degrees and t1W1nents, or densities or celerities of the
general modification; 1. that is to say, a part of it is osseous
and elastic; 2. wherefore there are tremors and pulsations; 3·
especia!ly of the stapes in the fenestra ovalis; 4. if the
vibration is reciprocal and the local motion alternate, 5. which
is a general modification. 6. The g,eneral modifications are of
infinite variety, as appears from musical instruments, where
every tone or ([uality and celerity of sound has its own general.
7. The lamina spiralis is constructed for œceiving these varie­
ties.
242. Titus there cannot be a general tremiscence which
shall not sOl'ne'where in tItis lamina find its own correspondent.
1. Recause it possesses all degrees of amplitude; 2. al! degrees
of thickness and thinness; 3. ail degrees of elasticity. 4. 1t
can be compared with infinite composite nerves; where it finds
its own correspondent there it is vibrated; 5, and thence the
origin of its common tremor results; 6. which is then continued
likewise through the whole lamina; 7. indeed it is also trans­
ferred into the whole of the cochlea, its surface and nucleus;
8. and terminates in the nucleus and nerve, where there is a
similar rest or conahls, or a similar vibration, without local
motion. 9. Altogether as has been observed above in regarà ta
air, or in regard to the origin of sound.
243. Thü common trenwr is insinuated by diverse ways,
and there concurs, name1y, I. by the fenestra rotunda, from the
cavity of the tympanum, where this tremor reigns; 2. from the
cavity of the vestibule, by the pulsation of the stapes; 3. by
way of the semicircular canals; 4. by way of al! the banes in
which the labyrinth is inscribed; 5. by way o~ the nucleus
100 THE SENSES.

from the bones of the temples; 6. thence by the scala tympani,

and the scala vestibuli.
244. 6. The 1nodification also, which is of the second de­
grec, arising in the fenestra ovalis, by undulations from the
peripher'j' to the center also passes into the cochlea, and indeed
into ils periosteunt. 1. For this is distinguished from the bony
Or ivory-Eh part. 2. It is thinnest at the apex.
245. This tre·miscence lihewise fi1~ds its own corre'sponding
point or t1mù, which is 11l0dified with it, from which as fro11,/; a
beginn.ing, a similor n'IOde nms through the whole lamina; 1.
just as has been saicl of the bony part. 2. The causes were shown
aoov,e, why that which is harmonious harmonizes; 3. and how
this runs through the whole; 4. 'for thus that pendulous peri­
osteu111 is suited to receive all varieties; 5. and still more and
more distant ones than the boriy part itself; 6. but they will
corr.espond.
246. Liheu..ùe also the nerve, which ù implanted by
bra.,~ches of diverse dimension in the periosteum; a similar
reason occurs here as above.
247. Ali this vibration and modification respects the nucle1;ts
and the nerve as their center to which they ai11'k-'Ïnto which
they bring the·ir modes. 1. For they occupy the place of the
center. 2. They are borne into antecedents. 3. There is a
motion towards rest and conatus; 4. thus to the whole and
entire nerve, so that there is no part of it that is not modified.
5. 1t seems that the osseous part respects the nucleus, by the
mediation of which this 'vibration is borne to the neY'l'e, both
t!tus mediate/y, and the memOran01-lS part the nerve itself, and
thus i1rmwdiately.
248. Into the same nerve and its trunh are borne the vibra­
tions and modifications, which conte from the semicircular
canals and from those nerves,o 1. for all the branches come to­
gether in the nerve. 2. Thus do ail the vibrations and modifica~
tions, 3. from many causes. 4. The modification or vibration
cornes together from the whole labyrinth, 5. from the whole
cavity of the tympanum; indeed thos.e which come from the
vestibule and the cavity of the tympanum are directed indeed
 EAR AND SENSE OF HEARING. 101

into the two scal;e, but they come together and make one thing,
for they communicate by the foramen into the apex, according
to vV;inslow.
249. They come together afterward into the common trunk
in the Fallopian duct, 1. where the hard and soft portions are
together. 2. They come together by the long tract. 3. A
similar vibration also enters the nerve there and vibrates it.
250. From so many concurrent causes all things Me held
together and redttced to a hannony. 1. The more similar
causes which f10w together into one thing, the greater the
harmony, 2. es~cially in this cochlea; 3. if there be anything
dissonant one thing corrects the other and reduces it to con­
sonance, nature being leader. 4. Sa also does one ear for the
other, 5. the canal for the cochlea, 6. the tympanum for the
labyrinth, 7. one scala for the other, 8. the soft nerve for the
hard, and vice versa. 9. From all this is the greatest harmony.
251. 8. A triple degree of m.odification flows together into
every sound, œmong which degrees there will be carrespond­
cne!?"
252. The ultimate degree is vibratory. 1. It passes into the
bones, as well into the membrana tympani, as by the pulsation
of the stapes into the fenestra ovalis, 3. thus into the nighbor­
hood of all the assembled bones and membranes. 4. This is
represented in the fenestra ovalis by a common vibration, as in
the nerves by throwing out from the line which infil1s the
space, as by a r.eciprocal vibration in the fenestra ovalis. 5.
It is represented in the lamina spiralis in its bony part. 6. It
passes by the mediation of the nucleus into the trunk of the
nerve~.

253. The middle degree is a modification. 1. This begins

in the fenestra ovalis, by the thinnest and swiftest undulations,
2. which take place in that area when moved this way and that.
3. Thus there are two modifications in one plane, the one of
which does not impede the other, as everywhere. 4. This
degree is transferred into the periosteum and the membrane
of the cochlea, 5. and thence by the branches into the nerves.
254. The 'inmost degree flashes through the single fibres. 1.
102 THE SENSES.

This arises from the ether, "vhich gives a turn to the wing and
mov,es forward the modification. 2. Thus by the stapes the
lam~na acts upon the fenestra, 3. by tbe repercussion of the
ether in the vestibule, 4. in the semicircu1ar canals, S. and by
the flow of the ether in the scalce cochlece.
255. These three degrees of modification constitute one
sound, in which alt things of the sound lie hidden together, and
thus mlltuall)/ correspond t(l each at/ter, in order that one may
excite the other. 1. There is an undoubted correspondence of
ail three; 2. for there are varieties of ail which will concord.
3. That the last degr,ee excites the second is evident from the
concordance of the striqgs or chords when the body of an
organ is put in m9tion; 7. then also from causes spoken of
above. 8. "Many causes can be given, as, for instance, that the
cclerity of the whole and the celerity of the parts must agree;
nor ought they to be irrational; when they cannot agree they
mutually extinguish each other. 8 a . Similar is the ratio of the
second and of the third or inmost clegree, 9. the concord of
which is still more perfecto IO. The second degree similarly
excites the first. IL But how the fi.rst excites the second and
the second the third, also appears from musical instruments.
256. 9. That the cochlea is formed altogether for the corti­
cal flow of the ether, sufficiently appears from its structure, and
from the flow according ta its strttctllre. 1. For the ether in
the coch1ea is turned through a double spiral; 2. that is to say,
about the walls into a spiral from apex to base, 3. then in vol­
ume about the nucleus. 4. That the etl1er is turned through a
dou ble spiral, also see our philosophical princip1es in folio.
S. The higher incleed the form of the fluxion the more the spiral
fluxion is duplicated by this mDde.. finally in the superior de­
gree it is tripled. and so forth.
257. This flow of the ether argues a first degree of modifi­
cation, as does the air a second. 1. The organism is alto­
gether according to the flux of the atmosphere. 2. Thus it
appears that the ether possesses and actuates its own parts; 3.
and so far as the air and ether agree, so far also do one and
the other organisms of the ear. 4. The action of the ether is
higher, whence it is purer.
 EAR AND SENSE OF HEARING. 103

258. Whcrcfore sensations ean by no 1neans be u1'Iderstood,

nor the [nature] of their organis111., without a knowledge of
the air and the e~her', O'r of the atmosphere,o for the one' is
eonstrueted according to the nature ot the othe1'. 1. N either
can interior sensations be understoocl; 2. for sensation is
modification, life acceding.
259. It is to be observcd: 1. that the semicircular canals
are thus rationally co-ordinated, altogether as an analogue
consisting of four bounelaries, in which one has regard to the
other, as has this to the third, and the third to the fourth. 2.
Thus the trunks of the nerves, which the canals at last receive.
3. From this analogue the one continllally reduces the other
into its analogical rdation. and holds it in it. 4. This relation
regulates the cochlea itsclf. so that it may be held in a similar
relation; 5. for the cochlea is the ultimate, which al! the rest
as media respect, that it may respect ail the rest as its ultimate
antecec1ents, or those previously posterior, etc.
260. I t is to be observed: 1. The celerities of one degr,ee
whether crasser or subtiler are undulous; they run through
even frOI11 distance to dist;mc.e in equal time. 2. The subtiler
indeed make sharper waves, and the crasser greater waves
even within the same time. 3. Otherwise the sucessive [tones]
would not be ùistinetly heard, but one would run ahead of the
other, whence there would be something indistinct. 4. The
wav,es of many agreeing degrees similarly. 5. But the succes­
sions of the purer degrees are equal to the simultaneous things
of the greater degrees; 6. for those subtile waves ar,e as it were
the beginnings of the greater, which for this reason can be
calleel compositions; 7. although they ought to be excited by
an external cause at the same time as by an internaI one. 8.
In things of this kind consists the secret art of nature, which
comprehends in itself infinite things. 9. From this unique
rule the matter can be explored. The qualities of substances
are as their accidents. IO. Thus from substances and or­
ganisms we can learn how modifications take place, which are
accidents. IL Thence also the correspondence of the degrees
can be j lldged and concluded.
I04 THE SENSES.

In regard to other things see my f01'mer excerpts.

261. IO. How ideas coming forward frorn the articulate
sound of speech pass over in the common sensory into similar
ideas from visible things, cannot be given, before [we s.ee how]
visual modifications affect the same sensory.
 CHAPTER VI.

THE EYE AND SIGHT.

262. It is to be observed, that according to the admonition

one hears, l ought to refer to my philosophical principles, and
to consider the levity, the gravit y and the activity inscribed
upon the pure; and let it be said that thus it is given me to fiy
wherever l w1sh.
263. 1. Sensalions can never be explored without the ex-
ploration of the auras; for the one refers most exactly to the
otlter. I. This is evident from hearing and the aerial atmo-
sphere, 2. from sight and the ether,eal atmosphere, 3. and from .
a still superior sense which corresponds to a certain superior
or celestial atmosphere. 4. The sensory organs themselves
ar,e constructed altogether accorc1ing to the nature of the
modification of those things. 5. Thus one respects the other
as principal or instrumenta!.
264. We are never admitted into the knowledge of these
things unlcss 'We consider that as m·any prior atmospheres in
order, so many sensations; wherefore there are three natural
atmospheres to 'Which is to be added a supreme: namely, I.
air, 2 . .ether, 3. the celestial [aura], 4. finally the universal
spiritual [aura] which is the supreme. 5. Unless there be a
correspondence of the universal world with the macrocosm, we
shall never progress far in the matter of causes.
265. If we explore the atnLOspheres, it is necessary that we
explore their modifications; for modification is what produces
the sensation extant in hearing and sight. 1. Of what quality
the modifications of the atmospheres are is not understood ex-
cept from effects, 2. [perceived] by organs bound to those at-
mospheres.
266. Nor Lean we explore] modifications except by 1neanJ
of the doctrines of for111S, of order and of series. finally of in-
ro6 THE SENSES.

fluxes. 1. The doctrine of arder teaches that the more per­

fect modifications are in the superior degree. 2. The doctrine
of forms teaches of what quality is the more perfect form of
fluxion which thence arises. 3. The doctrine of influxes teaches
how the inf.erior obtains the power of acting from the superior.
4. The forms thems.elves of the fluxions indicate what are the
qualities of the substantial fonns; for they concur. S. Where­
fore corpuscular science is required; for the part is the ieast
volume, and the greater when it is modified refers itself to it,
and there subsists.
267. These things have been taught in my philosophical
principles, where the forms of the parts of each atmosphere
ha'üle been treated of and delineated. 1. These things were
clone for the present end; 2. now comes the application. 3. 1
pass over the delineations for they are there extant.
268. 2. There are many for11tS in order, inferior a·nd su­
perior. 1. The first is the angular form,-they are of the
entities of the earth. 2. The second is the circular,-they
are of fluid entities or of waters. 3. The third is the spiral,
such as is the air. -4. The fourth is the vortical such as is the
ether, more subtile than the air. S. The fifth is the celestial­
it is of the whole universe and of nature, where the beginnings
of the rest lie hidden. 6. The sixth is the spiritual form by
which the universe is ruled, and from which are given the
supreme principles. 7. The plll'ely infinite occurs, nor is it
form, but is of al! fOf11us of principles, from which flows spirit­
ual form and essence.
269. 3. Modifications of the angular form are ca.lled tre111is­
cences, vibrations, in the greater forms oscillations, 1. It is
known how these modifications penetrate the whole continuum
in an instant; 2. for instance, how when a small grain of dust
is scraped upon a marble table there is a sound; 3. that is,
from the vibration of the whole from the smallest origin, etc.,
,etc. 4. But we will pass by these things.
270. 4. jl{odifications of the circular form. appear in waters:
1. \iVhen it runs out from centers ta peripheries by continuous
rays and elevated surfaces, 2. one after the other in a continu­
 THE EYE AND 5ICHT. 107

ous series. 3. There is an action from the center in the direc­

tion of a right line. 4. There is an action from every point of
motion in a circ1e, which extends upwards and to the sides;
5. thence there is continuity; for a perpendicular !ine acts upon
the other with full force; 6. but the parts resist, thence they are
impelled upwarc1s and to the sides into the line of a tangent;
7. from which by the pressing in of the points they are con­
tinual1y bent into circJes-8. into grcater circ1es, the farther
they are removed from the center. 9. Thence all those things
which lie hidden in an unc1ulation come together, anc1 thence
the single things are unfolded. JO. But a modification simiiar
to these least things c10es not occur in the blooc1 within the
vessels; concerning which thing see the Economy of the Ani­
mai Kingdom.
271. 5. Aerial modification is perpetually eireular or it is
spiral) that is, the fonn is in the force of the fluxion or motion)
rw/wrefore also the cana/us)' 1. as above shown in the chapter
on hearing. 2. There are three forces or potencies, which
impel the aerial volume into this form: 3. The first is the de­
termination its.elf of the parts in the direction of the diameter,
for there is always a further progression of the part. 4. The
second. when one part is about to press the other anteribr one,
then it touches sev,eral parts resisting obliquely, for the most
part four, sometimes five or six) which are immediately borne
off accorc1ing to the impulse, thus each one of these parts in
turn so many others. 5. The third is the trend of the part
itself left to itself into a continuai circle or spiral, for that is
agreeable to its form. 6. See our philosophical principles; 7.
for the part is a unit, the units of which consist of the parts of
the superior atmosphere, in which there is a still more perfect
nature and form of flowing, 8. and so forth. 9. Thes,e things
conspire to a spiral fOrln, of the fluxion of the air.
272. Every spiral fluxion produees partieular fluxions)
'luhieh are as if 'lvere sueh eontinuous parts. 1. This is per·
ceiv,ed from aforesaid considerations; 2. for progression ac­
cording to a right line makes a general fluxion, or a solid spiral
(spiram eubieam) which progresses from the center to the
 108 THE SENSES.

peripheries. 3. This is begun from the impulse alone of one

partic1e obliquely against those in front of it, and at the same
time a moving forward towards those things in front. 4.
This general spiral fluxion always beco'Hzes m.ore sharp the
greater is the periphery,o 5. for the local motion is diminished
in this ratio. 6. Especially is this the case in air, where there
is a certain gravity and resistance. 7. Thus there is a smaller
forward motion towards distant points. 8. Thus this last
spiral ends in a circle,o thus it extingu.ishes itself spontaneously;
9. that is to say.. where there is no more local progression. 10.
This is the reaSOn of the extinction of this greater sphere, and
it is the boufldary of hearing. IL These are the parts of the
greater sphere.
273. Every particular spiral ends in its very own part,
which is the least volume, a.nd is thus extinguished. 1. These
are the parts of particular spheres; 2. for every part is a least
volume. 3. Every part thus becomes the center of its own
sphere. 4. Thus concur general a-ction and determination
thr01,f,gh the diameter, l..Ctith this concentration, and it modifies
every single part, 5. thus a double potency, whence there is an
unfailing effect.
274. The part itself is formed for this nature of modifica­
tion, wherefore it is the last and first bO-ttndary, and the last
and first modificatorjl potency. 1. Thus the last returns to the
first, 2. and is extingnished in every part. 3. Thus such a part
harmonizes with a part.
275. This modification of every part does not subsist, but
passes over to its own interior parts, and indeed to the 1:'mnost
parts. 1. These thus become conscious of the general modifica­
tion of the part; 2. for a part derives whatever it has from its
own nnits, 3. and indeed from that form alone ,"vhence is the
form of fluxion. 4. Thus in every part there is a kind of type
of prior universal.
----276. Particular modifications, 'Within the greater or general
modifications, are of greater sphere the farther the 1notion is
from the center, and, vice versa, they are the sharper aboz/,t the
center. 1. Theil' impulse becomes continuaily less oblique.
 THE EYE AND SIGHT. I09

2. The resistance becomes greater. 3. Thus they are twisted

into smaller spheres, 4. which are part of the greater sphere.
277. Thus the whole sphere of modification in the greatest
efligy has resfJect to the sphere of modification of the part in
the sl1wller effigy or in the s1nallest of that atmosphere. 1.
Nature is similar ta itself every"vhere, in greatest and in least
things. 2. The general form cames from the form of a part.
3. The form of fluxion, from the substantial form. 4. Thus
one thing conspires harmonically with another.
278. On this accOunt this 'spiral fonn has reference to the
circular for'l1'/' into which it ter1winates. 1. In the sphere of
general modification it goes off finally into the circular. 2. In
particular forms, Iikewise; for every part of the air is spheri­
cal, as has been saicI. 3. Or, every part has reference ta the
form of general modification. 4. For which reason the spiral
form is the measure of the circulaI'; it ends in it, and has
reference ta it finalIy. 5. T!1is is the cause of the spherical
form of the parts of the air.
279. These things hG'ZJe been delineated, described Glnd
sho'wn in '1'WY fJhilosophical fJrinàfJles.
280. That there is such a fluxion into a perpetual circle, this
the old philosophers, especially the prince of them,) s111Aelt out;
1. thus the thing is not new, 2. but agreeable to profound ideas.
3. Cite Aristotle.
281. 6. Let us now rcturn to the ethereal atmosphere) which
is the cause of sight.
282. The ether is likewise modified according to the form
of l:tS own parts, which ù superior and more perfect, and is
cal/cd a perpetually spiral or 7Jortical form. I. This is the
cause of magnetism, 2. and cannot be described except by the
poles and great cirdes in the universe ; 3. for ev,ery single part
refers to the universe. 4. "YVhence is the determination of the
univ,erse and our system. 5. Astronomy alone detects its
nature. 6. Its parts are more elastic [than those of air].
283. The ether is modified in like manner by a certain mo­
bile centre, and flows in l1:ke manne!', and the motion ends in
conatus. 1. But s;n.ce it is more elastic. the sphere proceeds
IIO THE SENSES.

farther, 2. and is more perfectly spread abroad; 3. III fact, al­

most indefinitely, respectivel)' to the other sphere.
284. The modifica!'ion of the ether is into the vortical or
perpetllaUy spiral tonlt, 1. which is to be described together
with its poles, 2. and has been described in our philosophical
princip1cs, 3. and thcrein delineated.
285. The modification of the ether likezu1se at a distance
Cllclsin a spiral lor}/1" 1. like as the air ends in a circular form;
2. this is its gTeatest surface. 3. It is a general form.
286. While the ethe1' is beil1g 1'Iwdified like·u;ise also the air
talles upon itseil pa.rticular lortns, w/rich end in units and in
parts, 1. which are thus the centres of the modification, 2.
and which centres are always held in their own form by the
modification; 3. for al! things conspire to this end.
237. This lMm has a peculia1'1:ty, na1'/"liely that it is excen­
tric, 'Zuherelore it fiows lorth into new f01'1'/1J.S) or that whole
spherc fiows forth into another new one; whicl1, is the sphere
ol the spiral fonn. 1. Its determination is doub1c on account
of its eccentricity. 2. Thus the sphere itse1f forms a new
sphere, 3. which is a sphere of an inferior form.
288. This determination is again concentrated into every
particle of the air; 1. thence is the beginning of its composi­
tion, 2. its conservation in its own state, 3. its correspondence;
4. the whole ether concurs to keep this correspondence open
(ad hanc patltlandam).* 5. Thus it holds it in continuaI con­
nection.
289. Nor does it hinder but that al! l1wdification may pass
through a right line, for thither its full force tends; but the
fiow is in its OW11 {orm) 1. j ust as has been said of air. 2. But
you will see these things profusely explained separately in the
doctrine of fonns.
290. 7. Superior forms are still more perfect) as is the
proxùnately superior fonn) which is called celestial. This re­
spects the inferior or vortical, as the vortical respects the
spiral, and the spiral the circular.

"The ward patlûalldam is nat ta he faund in lexicans, eithel' af c1assi­

cal ar af law Latin, nor is a verb patuZa ta be faund.-TR.
 THE EYE AND SIGHT. III

291. The supreme form ü still 1!1.()re superior. 1. It has in

itself still more multiplied deter.minations. 2. Any superior
form ah-vays adds something perpetuai and infinite, as does the
circular and the spiral. 2. But that finite vvhich is Iinear and
angular it always respects more from a distance, and indeed
by degrees. 3. Finally nothing but the infinite occurs.
292. But these things must be explained in a peculiar doc­
trine, otherwise we cannot l?1lO'W the causes of things, from the
spir-itual to the 11wterial, influx, correspondences.
293. 8. These things having been demonstrated and con­
firmed it will become open and manifest:
294. That, in every stipcrior form something perpetuai,
spontaneous and infinite accedcs.
295. That in fon11s thus fluent there is neither levity nor
gra vity, but that a multiple spire wipes away ail resistance.
296. That nature herse If has inscribed herself upon the
modifications, because she has inscribecl herself upon the forms
themselves. whence results the form of the fluxion.
297. That the one is correctly determ:ined from the other,
and is constantly held in its OW11 connection and power.
298. That it is nec~ssity which commands from first things
to last.. a first necessity being posited.
299. That in higher and more perfect forms there are peri­
pheries from continuo us radii, radii from continuous centres,
wherefore that the peripheries are perpetuai centres, thus there
are equilibria.
300. Thus infinite modifications within the modications.
301. That the universal is represented in every part.
302. That the atmospheres mutually correspond to each
other exactly.
303. And that [the same is true bf] the part of every at­
mosphere.
304. That in such a form of fluxions no levity and gravity
can be conceived.
305. That the general always conspires with the particular,
and that the particular without the general cannot exist.
306. That nature is present in every place, although the
distance may be very great, through her own modifications.
112 THE SENSES.

307. That the end is "vhere the beginning is.

308. How divisibility tends, how one must understand that
it is to infinity.
309. How penetrability tends, the beginning of sufficient
reason, and many things, concerning which the schools dis-
pute.
310. Thus the causes of effects can be penetrated and un-
derstood, for ail things coincide in these things.
311. One may understancl what material is, and what the
spiritual, and how materiality puts off accidents by elevation
into higher forms.
312. And how the supreme inflows into lower things, and
mediately into lowest,-or the soul illto the body, its intercourse.
313. But here now'we are to treat of, how articulate sounds
flow into ideas, and into a kind of visual sphere; l will there-
fore not extend these discussions furthcr.
314. 9. The ani1nal system is c01uposed ent'irely in adapta-
fion to the modifications of the atlnospheres. 1. Thus it is so
composed that there may be corresponding organs. 2. There
are modifications and sensations of those organs when there
is lite.
315. The blood cOncurs w-ith the Jnodification of waters, ac-
c01'ding to the circ~tlar f{)nn. See the Economy of the Animal
Kù/.gdMn.•
316. The purer blood, in the snwllest a.rterîes and certaùt
of the fibres, concurs with the spiral form, or with the form
of the aerial atmosphere.
317. The animal spirit itself in the fibres coneurs with the
fonn of the fluxion of the ether or with the vortical fon1'/..
318. The first essence of the body which has life in it, cor-
responds with the celestial for·m. 1. So that thus the soul is
of the celestial form; 2. upon which are endued ail the begin-
nings of nature. 3, It [the soul] is immediately ruled by the
spiritual form, 4. that is to say, the human soul otherwise than
that of brutes, which is of a~ inferior degree; S. in which the
animal spirit and the purer blood constitute the same thing.
319. Fron'/, the atJnospheres now it will a.pp'ear how every
essence acts agreeably to its own natU1'e. 1. But here we will
 THE EYE AND SIGHT. 1I3

treat only of those correspondences which concern the modi-

fications of the air and the ether, or which concern the sen-
sation of hearing and sight.
320. ra. In the animal kingdom aU linear determinations
are formed by the fibres from boundar'jl to boundary,' I. so that
the motions may not flow freely from the centre towards the
ultimate peripheries, 2. but according to the fibres, 3. even to the
beginnings of the fibres, or to the cortical substances.
321. The very beginnings of miJtions in the! sensations take
place in the externat tunics of the fibres,' thJe~tc.e they pass over
into interltal thÙlgS or into the animal spirits. I. The tunies
of the fibres are externat. 2. They are instrumental causes.
3. Thus all sensations arise from external causes; 4, but the
determination of the wûl is by internaI causes, or is im1ne-
diately into the animal spirit. 5. Thus sensations ascend, the
determinations of the will descend.
322. The fibre itself being touched tre111hles from the be-
ginning of the touch towards the other e.'rtremit'j'" there are
thin and very smlt waves 'UJhich creep through the fibres,
which continue the motion begun. 1. Every wave or vibraüon
is a new beginning; 2, which is thus continued toward Ol1t-
most things, 3, by the co-operatioN of the spirit it is moved
forward into the fibres. 4. vVherefore the sensory fibres are
fuller of spirit. w herefore they are softer, [than the other
fibres] .
323. The spÙ'it, thus mod·ified according to the form of ifs
Own ether, runs forth and is modified,. I, that is to say, by a
double determination. 2. The first is into the vortical form; 3
but the tunic resists, that it may nOt run forth. 4. \Vberefore
it passes into particular modifications, S. which are very sharp
and very small according to the proposition that they are very
near to the origins of motion; 6, for in every point exists a new
origin of motion. 7. Thl1s it passes into its own part which is
lliodifiec1. 8. This part strives towards the other determina-
tian or into spiral motion; 9, wherefore its thinnest tunic
(tunicula) flows forth according to a spiral motion, according
ta the observation of Leeuwenhoek and others. ra. Thus it
coincides in general and in particular.
8
114 THE SENSES.

324. H ow the superior essence is 11l0dified by a st1~1l more

superior form, or the celestial, when the tuniC'Ulœ of the fibres
are drawn forth into a vortical for1l1., will be told elsewhere.
325. II. When this spirit co mes even to the cortical sub­
stance, then it runs forth according to every form of its own
fluxion,to the type of which ail determinations therein are
formed. 1. That the cortical substances are formed to that
type must be demonstrated elsewhere; 2. for they are the most
perfect fonns of nature, 3. and indeed are fonns within forms.
326. That modification induces mtttation of state and form
ttpon those substances, according to their quantifies and quali­
ties; thettce are ideas. 1. That ideas are only changes of state
induced by culture must be demonstrated elsewhere. 2. If the
state in which olle is, be changed, there is immediately the
idea of sensation. 3. The more perfect form can under-go
endless mutations of state, and the purer they are, the more
endless mutations of state, and the purer they are, the more
perfection. S. Thence is the idea of memory. the idea of
imagination, the idea from hearing and sight. 6. There are
as many varieties of mutation of state as there ever can be
analogies in the calculus of infinites, 7, simple composites are
again compounded.
327. Mutations of state aclmowledge that stale in wlûch they
are for a basic state. 1, If those mutations are very perfect,
the more exactly are the mutations perceived. 2. If the change
takes place inordinately, then that which is perfect is perceived
as if it \Vere imperfect, and vice versa, 3, for the formed state
is in place of a base. 4. But this matter is 1110st prolix; it
must be treated of in the Psychology.
328. There are composite mutations of state which c9mpre­
hend wùhil1 them 1nany simple OIUS, 1, as may be evident from
ideas. 2. Thus they pass up from the material idea to the in­
teIIectuaI. 3, and to the more inteIIectl'1al by continuous com­
positions.
329. 12. E'l/ery articulate sound causes, not only the whole
cerebrutn, but a/so so'me certain congeries, as also a sÙlgle cor­
tical part, to change their state,. 1, for there ar,e three degrees
of composition of sound. 2. The inmost composition goes to
every single substance.
 THE EYE AND SIGHT. Ils

330. A general change of the cortical substance excites a

partict/lar one; thas the degree of a 1'IVinor articulate sound ex-
cites a visual idea. 1. That correspondence has been spoken
of above, 2, likewise of the causes. 3. Ali changes of state are
formed by the senses; 4, thus auditory changes are in com-
mon with the visual. 5. This is of artifice not of nature; 6,
wherefore the words of several languages excite the same vis-
ual idea; 7, for the idea becomes a general one, which cor-
responds to the interior as to its own particular. 8. The exci-
tation of several such ideas from the memory, produces im--
agination which is similar to visual ideas, but with those ideas
arranged in another order; 9, it is purely imaginative if only
such things are excited as enter by the eye, as the more gen-
eral ideas of material things, 10, as in infancy. 1 I. But indeed
ideas more abstract than these produce the intellectual. 12.
But about these in our Psychological treatises.
331. 12a. That there is nothing more obscure [ta the under-
standing] than light [lumen], altbough we possess an endless
number of documents of experience, and \vhat the causes are,
see 11/.Y fonner collections, in the beginning concerning the
eye.
332. That sound and sight coinàde in most things altogether
as posterior and prior, thus that we can be taught by the one
Cûncerning the other. as air and ether, see the same excerpts.
333. That sound and sight concord, as air and ether, the
ear and the eye, the sonorous idea and visual ideas, see the
tonner excapts, that thus they differ little.
334. Thus very mony things can be here applied concern-
Ùtg the ether, which have becn said heretofore concerning the
air, and its 11"liodification, quantit}" quality, ha.nnony, etc.

Light and Colors.

335. 1. In arder that a thing be partiwlarly distinguished,

it is necessMY that the1'e be a general unœer which and by
which it may be distinguished; thus in arder thM colors Jnay
appear, it is necessary that there be a universal light. 1. It is
known that color does not appear at ail witbout light, 2, neither
do the differences of sight.
rr6 THE SENSES.

336. There must be differences of hght or of genera./ modi­

fication in arder that images 'may appear with their form; 1,
For ta the extent that particulars differ from the general ta
that extent they appear distinct. 2. There are at one time dif­
ferences of parts of a general, which produce forms of im­
ages; 3. sa there are at another time differences of light and
shade; 4, as in the understanding there are the differences be­
tween good and evil, trl1th and falsity. 5. Ta the extent that
the formi of truth departs from the general form, ta that ex­
tent it appears pleasant, conjectl1rable, etc.
337. Differences of light and shade enable one to recognize
the figure itself of an abject: 1, whether it be round, 2, or an­
gular. 3. These differences are not apparent except proxi­
mately. 4. Sa also it is with contiguous and proximate things.
5. Sa also it is in the understanding. 6. This [figure] is qual­
ity.
338. Wha.t is intermediate ellablcs one to recogm:ze size or
quantit')I; 1, for everything appears as if present in the eye; 2,
hence distance is measured by intermediates. 3. \Vithout in­
termediates quantity perishes, and the smaUest is believed ta be
the largest, and vice versa. 5. Sa also it is in the understand­
mg.
339. Distance obliterates figure ùS'elf, and wipes out the
a1tgles, and makes them round; I. for the shade is confused.
2. The angles perish before the body [of the figure J c1oes. 3.
:';0 also it is in the understanc1ing.
340. Use and the culture which endues 'Ii ature, teach these
things. I. Men have this knovtledge from' exercise. 2. Brutes
have it from nature. 3. Optics is artificial, but becomes nat­
ural. 4. it [optics] aU consists in the relation of light and
shade.
341. 2. General light must arise from the sun, secondary
Jights arise from fires, from phosphorescent th1:ngs, etc., in the
sublunary region. I. These things are known. 2. The one
and the other are from a similar cause; 3, for the effects are
similar, 3, with a difference as between greater and lesser,
more perfect and more imperfect.
342. Light cannot have causes of origin different from those
 THE EYE AND SIGHT. II]

of sound, forit shoots forth from its O'Zun centres as does

sound; v, wherefore the one can be examined from the other.
2. The difference is one of 'grossness. 3. The one is a modi-
fication of the air: the other of the ether. 4. Each therefore is
outside its own atmosphere. 5. That light is of the ether or
purer atmosphere, appears from the light in the vacuum of an
air purnp, 6, and in other places where there is no air. 7. It
is the same whether there be much or !ittle air.
343. Therefore light m·ust arise fr01111 some subject which
being moved sets up a modification of the ether. This motion
11Mtst come forth trom adequate bodies or subjects, in order
that it can act in the ether suitably to its purity and celerity,
l, as air does not sound unless there be a suitable subject, 2,
and unless it be strongly urged even to resistance, 3, so that
a stronger force may exceed its resistance ; 4, so it is altogether
with light.
344. By suc!t a motion set up, the ether is modified accord-
ing 10 its nature; l, wherefore the nature of the modification
is to he examineci from the nature of the ether; 2. otherwise
we shaIl not know where vve are.
345. 3. It follows from these tJûngs, that the solar ocean
ûself, which givcs light to its own universe, sets up a certaill
local motion of the whole ethereal atmosphere of its O'lem vor-
tex,. 1. Its magnitude, 2, and active force, 3, wiIl respond to
the sphere of its vortex; 4, so that it may reach to its utmost
limits; 5, thus the one measures the other, and there is a cor-
respondence [between them]. 6. Then' [there is a correspond-
ency] of the ether itself, of its modificability and elasticity.
346, Wherefore that in the sun is a kind of animation, which
perpetually drives off the circumfiuent ether, and thus urges it
into a certain local motion, and consequent/y into moddica-
tion. 1. Altogether as with the origin of sound, 2, the one ex-
plains the other.
347. Thence the celestial aura or purest ether is urged into
a modification agreeing 'wdh its forms. 1. This is according
to the doctrine of forms, of order and degrees, then of in-
fluxes. 2. That the celestial aura is carried off into a modifica-
tion of the celestial form, which modification is to be described
elsewhere, 3 agreeably to its parts. 4. It forms such general,
1I8 THE SENSES.

and similar particular modifications; the general terminate in

the ultimate periphery in the vortical form; the particular
terminate likewise in the sa.me, and in its every part; 5,
because that modification is of triple dimension, the second
dimension of its vortical ends in a particular of the vor­
tical ether, and thus bears that part away into a modifica­
tion, and that modification is carried away into a gyral motion.
6. Its third dimension encls in a particular of the air as its out­
most, or spiral modification, together with a modification of
the vortical ether, 7, thùs by the dimensions of the modifica­
tions it ends in every particle, which it carries away into a cen­
trai gyre.
348. The li11ear determinaûoll itself of the 1'a)IS adds a cer­
tain particle} and sets up a mutatl:on of state in it l, altogether
J

according to the mode of sound in the atmosphere, 2, by which

we are taught; 3. thus there takes place a central gyration of
every part, which gyration is light.
349. The central gyration of every part of the air} and the
vortical gyrat-ion of the ether} and the celestial gyration of the
celectial aura} which mutuall)1 correspond to each other} (for
they are concentmted i11tO the parts)} produces that which is
called the modification of light. v. It arises from the sobr
animation. 2. and from the motion thence excited in the pur­
est aura, 3, and by rectilinear pressure at the same time inta
every part. 4. It conduces that every single thing may live. S.
Thence also is heat, from the air, which is vibrated, 6, where­
fore in dense air there is greater heat, in rarified air less, as on
a very high mountain.
350. 1. Thence there takes place a concentration of the
general modification into every part of every atmosphere in
its order, yea, into every least part of the atmosphere; 2. thence
there is a circumgyration of each one, 3, a perpetually renewed
life, 4. an image of the universe in every part. 5. from the di­
rect impulse in every motion into a local motion. 6. Thence
there is in every part the animation of the uni verse. 7. This
animation of every part is light. 8. Thence there is a reflec­
tion from every part, 9, from which are the images of objects.
351. Light has a similar origin in the region of the atm,/)­
 TEE EYE AND SIGHT. II9

sphere, l, that is to say, from the circumfiuous parts in f1ame;

2, for f1ame excites such parts as those upon which it feeds.
3. This circumgyration pushes against the ether, 4, and puts
on such a modification, S, although with a difference.
352, 4. From this origin Ù follows that every single inter­
fer-ing part is pushed against by the ether thus moved, l, not
only by every part, which is constituted in gyratory motion,
2, but by the gyre of every vortical, 3, especially since there
is such a form of fluxion, that every single part is in the cen­
tre, the periphery and the diameter at the same time. 4. Per­
petuai circumgyration argues that every interfering point is
pushed against. S. This is called reflection. 6. Thus every
single part is a centre of the general modification. 7. Thence
is the conservation of aU,-life anew, 8. It takes place with a
rectilinear attack.
353. From this point thus struck, light is reflected along
every radius or right line; l, indeed it is reflected along every
angle of incidence; 2, but because the interfering parts are
figured, there is nowhere but that there. is a point, from which
reflection takes place towards the eye. 3. A smaller part of
the rays gives less light, wherefore shade.

Colors.
354. In regard to coJors see The Econom;y of the Animal
Kingdom. See also my former excerpts.
355. 1. There appear in general ta be two origins of colors.
l, that is ta say from direct and shining rays of the sun, 2, and
from light itself without the sun.
356. The origins of colors from the direct and shining ra'Ys
of the sun, are those which pierce pâlucid bodies when the sun
is present: l, as the colors which are shown by pellucid bodies
variously figured: 2. as by drops, bull~, aqueous vapors: 3. by
the bullular forms made of viscid and soapy [f1uids]: 4, by
things of divers forms made of glass, by globes, by spheres,
full or empty, by prisms, parallelogram's, polygons: S, by
other angular things variously eut, by glass, by crystals, by
diamonds, and by other pellucid stones: 6, by glasses and at
the same time waters, by which they [the rays] are variously
120 THE SENSES.

caught: 7, by ices of various kinds; 8, also by the diverse

pellucidity of these things, 9, and their diverse coloration; lO.
by their state more shady and more bright; II, indeed by rays
varied in infinite modes as to pellucidity, figure, fonn, tints.
357. These origins seetJl. ta have for a basis the solar rays
themselves, in each one of which there is represented an
image of the sun, and of its fiamjl color, 1. even so far that in
the smallest point of ail there is an image of the sun, 2. and in­
deed a solar centre, for it cames from the centre itself, where
it is greatest; 2a, this is as \Vith the intensity or degree of light,
which is in the ray, 3. and according ta its very color, which
is varied according ta intervening douds and other vaporifer­
ous exhalations; 4, but these things only attcnuate the vigor
and brightness of the color; 5. thence arise differences of
color, not in particular, but in general.
358. Colors of this origin are e:rhibited bath by reflection
and refraction,o then also at the same time by bath! l, as ap­
pears from the rainbow seen through drops of water; 2. indeeJ
from glass spheres pierced by refiected rays; 3, by prisms;
4. by cut diamonds, crystals; 5. thus by bath refiection and re­
fraction, 6. according ta des Cartes and the experiments of
several others, 7. especially according to the experiments of
Newton.
359. Colors of this origin, arising bjl various refiections and
refractions, temper the raj/s themselves or the colors of the
solar fiame into more shadjl or into more and less luminatls
colors. 1. As ta how they are refiected in the parts them­
selves by which they are refiected: 2. every part refiects partly
shade and partly light, 2a, and that indeed according ta the
form of the parts, which form is, in things pellucid, for the
most part spherical; 3. it is according to the interstices which
absorb and pierce, and thus take away that part of the vigor
and lustre in the ray, 4, and thus variegate the Hamy color of
the sun in the smallest rays.
360. These things happen altogether according ta the ob­
liquity of the wall upon which the rajlS impinge, and from
which they are refiected,o 1. for a variation takes place at every
angle; 2. it is attenuated or condensed more or less by shade.
 THE EYE AND SIGHT. IZI

3. as weIl particularly as in the volume, or in part or in general,

in species or in kind; 4. from this fact w·e measure colors by
the rays in glass.
361. This is the reason why we are induced ta believe that
every single ray has ifs oum color in it, and that just .90 many
as are the diverse ra)IS, sa 11lany a·re the colors. 1. Thus the
eye induces the mind ta believe. 2. since in every single ray is
the color of the soiar fiame, or there is an image of t!1e sun,
3, as may appear from the salaI' rays, and from other fires, seen
obliquely, which rays are diffused directly from the fiame. 4.
But this color, sl1ch as is in the fiame, is in place of a base,
which is tempered by shades according to abjects in part and
in general. S. Hence the specific differences in colors accord­
ing to the degree of solar light, and the shady or lucid qual­
ity of abjects. 6. Nor are like colors easily shawn by fires and
sublunary fiames, bath On account of a defect of vigor, and be­
cause a general shade surrounds them. 7. This appears from
the concentration of the same light, whence arises a kind of
whiteness, with s()me tint of the flame.
362. These colors must be caUed fleeting, for when the sun
does not appem' they vanish, nor are they sho"lvn forth b}' the
light alone; 1. for they do not exist except with the direct rays
of the sun; 2. for their basis is that every single point or every
single part of the ether represents the sun. 3. Wherefore also
they can be concentrated, as in burning mirrors, 4. whence
there is heat and fire.
363. 2. The origins of colors from z.ight alone without the
presence of the mys of the su.n, in which ra:}IS is an ima-ge of
the sun, are as follows: 1. There is light ever)"vhere, 2.
whether it be solar, or of wax [candies], or fiamy, or phos­
phorescent. 3. in many objeets of the mineraI kingdom, whence
are the colors of minerais, of metals. of precious stones, in
which thcre is at the same time a lustre, and of other stones,
in which there is not a metallic lustre; 4. especially in subjects
of the vegctable kingdom, S. in which the parts are arranged
in a mast orderly manner, so that in every blossom, rose,
blade of grass, fruit, their j uices, ails, spirits, syrups, [there
is color]; 6. also in the animal kingdom, especially in the
blood.
122 THE SENSES.

364. This color appears as though inseated, but yetit like­

v.Jise arises from the modification of light,o 1. wherefore pic­
torial colors are most diverse. 2. These colors are laid on
ever)'where, so that the)' look to ever)' direction whatever of
the rays of the sun; 3. especially is this the case in liquid
calors ; 4. from their mixture one color arises; S. a very small
grain will tinge a large volume of water; man)' [other things
might be said].
365. This color arises from the modification of light in the
smaller compositions of angular parts, 1. thus in forms angular
and terrestrial, 2. which are polygonal and diversely arranged,
3. very beautifully in the subjects of the vegetable kingdom.
366. Ali the smallest parts shine or are pellttcid, 1. as
may appear from ail things of whatever color they are, that
by the transposition of the parts they can receive a pellucid
character; 2. thus it is with variously colored stones, precious
and ignoble. 3. This takes place in the obj ects of the vege­
table kingdom by certain penetrating spirits, 4. by the melting
of their ashes, and many other things.
367. For producing those colors at the least a double de­
gree of composition is required, if not a triple; 1. that is to say,
the smallest parts which transmit and likewise reflect. 2.
These parts according ta their angular forms variously modify
the light and shade, 3. or harmoniousl)', or according to mere
analogy or the relation of shade and Iight. 4. Thence is the
inmost cause of variegation, wherefore of modification. S.
The second composition, according to its porous arrangement,
either absorbs the light, as in various crypts and caves, in
which the Iight is turned into shade, or into what is opaque and
obscure, 6. whence is blackness. 7. or repels it variously, and
for the most part inordinately, whence is whiteness; thus black­
ness and whiteness arising thence or from a pair of the second
composition are the bases of their coloration. 8. These bases
are varied in diverse manner; the varieties are as many as the
varieties between whiteness and blackness, and as man)' as are
the varieties between blackness and whiteness so many are the
varieties between shade and light. 9. This is the more gen­
eral and basic variegation of every part of a compound. IO.
 THE EYE AND SfGHT. 123

Yet this composition hardly falls under the power of the micro­
scope; IL and if it sa falls, in such case that coloration
perishes, together with the blackness itself which resu\ts from
many things.
368. Variegated reflection tram l1V1Jre simple parts, when this
is given for a base, p'rodttces colors which appear constant, as
in pictures, fiowers and other things. 1. For those different
colors do not appear without that base, which is blackness
or whi~eness. 2. This whiteness or blackness cannat come
except from many things taken at the same time. 3. Then
when it (the whiteness or blackness) is present generally,
those things appear single; the variegations or modifications
of things are distinctly according to our mIe; 4. otherwise
they do not appear. 5. Thus light without the sun pro­
duces colors, but first there must be a general to which, as
to a base, the colors may be referred. 6. In a 'ward, these
parts can be compared ta min'ors, glasses, when on the one
and the other side there will be a leaf white or black, in Mder
that the refiections ma)! ap pear.
369. T hus the causes of each origin concur,. but these lat­
ter are m,odificatiol1S composed of endless other things by varie­
gated -rdlectians, wh1:cJt have reterel1ce ta their bases or ta the
general of the compound, whercfore ta blackness or whiteness.
I. Therefore these co1ors are variegations of general white­
ness or blackness by the variegated refiedions of light and
shade in the smallest particles, in themselves pellucid; 2. thus
they are polygons, variously angled, hollowed. plane, round;
3. but the colors perish without their own general.
370. WihereJ10re these causes are cDnstant, and may be con­
sidered ta be in the particles themselves,. I. as for instance, in
the blood, 2. in fiowers, roses, syrups, etc. 3. V,Therefore they
can be variously changed by oppositions, indeed can take on
colors gr~en, red, etc.; 4. wherefore according to the destruc­
tion of the composition, 5. according to the opposition of other
things, so that another form of general composition may come
into existence; 6. according ta poor completion of the com­
position; 7. and by endless other variations.
371. Stlch a part in a pellucid volume tinges the whole
12 4 THE SENSES.

volume uith its own color; 1. as in waters; 2. in crystals and

glasses or solids. 3. A little can make the whole volume t!1us
to be translucent, 4. for it is a kind of foundation of new
light; S. and all the rays thence emerging are reproc1uced as
if from the volume itself; each ray refers to its own origin, as
each sun-ray to the sun, as has been said above. 6. But more
rays enkindle the color, fewer attenuate it, or make it weaker.
372. The more c011l-iJact is a sùnple part, as Ù't metalhc
parts, the mO're the color thence shines with a metallic color.
1. rvfetallic elements are n1Dre compact. 2. These elements
reflect the light from many parts. 3. They are less porous. 4.
Ali things therein are more simple. S. H~nce there is a high-
el' c1egree of density, which thus exalts the color, and renders
it shining. 6. vVherefore also the surfaces are more poli shed
and less rough. 7. Thence that polish invades the color, and
superadds something as it were more perfect, which is not in
stony, saline, still less in woody parts.
373. From these things can be known the state of the for-ms
of srnaller parts, then the state of the composition respectively
to its pores. 1. But the state of the pores in particular can-
nat be thence known. 2. For the state results not only from
the quantity, but also from the quality of the pores, 3. There
is only general effect, coming forwarc1 by reason of shac1e and
light, etc. 4. This doctrine is most ample and cannot be given
in a few worc1s. S. Thus there is nothing real in colors, where-
fore 'we must not judge of a material fram its color; nothing
of color can be abstractec1, unless it may be the colored parts
in a pellucid body, which parts communicate their color to the
pellucid volume or mass. 6. But these parts, if they are broken
down. also change their colors.
374. 3. These colors of double origin are so distinct, that
the one ma)' represent itself abo'ue the otlter: 1. so that if the
reflection of a rainbow from cut crystals and diamonds fa11s
upon a colorec1 plane, whether white or black, 2, then the same
color nevertheless perishes, 3..with sorne variation but not
much. 4. In the white it constantly perishes. S. in the black it
perishes. 6. In other things the colors are varied and dulled
accorc1ing to the shades and whitenesses, which are general
bases.
 THE EY'E AND SIGHT.

375. Wheref01'e colors of the second origin, respectively, to

the former, are to be called constant; 1. for they remain spread
on, 2. as on walls, 3. sa also in tinctures, 4. on houses, 5. in the
blood, 6. in syrllps.
376. This color is attenuated in a smaller quantity of s~tch
parts, and increased in a larger quantity: 1. as is known in re-
gard ta the blood; 2. more parts being collated it increases. 3.
every part confers its own symbol. 4. But a greater or less
quantity can be in every single part. 5, Thence the principle
of ratio is ta be assumed.
377. Tif/hen such different colors are mixed they produce a
cei'tain other color; 1. according ta the mixture. 2. This is
known ta painters. 3. \iVhite and black are the bases. 4. The
color can be dilllted by transparent things; 5. and can increase
or be condensed by things opaque. 6. One color obliterates an-
other less than another will. 7. Hence an apposition of colors
is required in arder that successive things may agree. 8. This
also is known ta artifice.
See htrther n. 412-415.)

The external pa,rts of the Eye.

378. 1. Experience. 1. The eyebrows are t\\'o hairy arches,

the skins thereon, fat, muscles. 2. The eyeJ.ids are coverings.
3. As ta the canthi or angles of the eyes, the interior is the
larger; it is formed from the epic1ermis, tender skin, and the
arciform cartilage, which is cal1ed the tarSHS. vVithin the lids
are inverted with the membrana conjunctiva, lubrical, sensitive,
with the periosteum; it is a continuation of the white of the
eye; the lashes are hairs singularly bent. There are sebaceous
glands in the interior surface of the eyelids. The canmcula
lachrymalis in the greater angle is ruddy, in it there are fre-
quently glands and hairs. The semilunar membrane is for
directing the tears in that very place into the lachrymal points.
The lachY'J'mal points are two, in the greater angle, at the ends
of the tarsi, ending in ducts called horns (cornua) , thus in the
lachrymal sac, the nasal canal, and the nose itself. The lach-
rymal gland is in the orbit above the smaller angle, with ex-
cretory ducts under the upper lido
126 THE SENSES.

379. Analysis. Ail this external apparatus serves these

uses: I. They serve to change external states according ta the
state of light in general; 2. according ta the state of abjects;
3. according ta the state of the brain, as, ta the state of the
affections of its animus; 4. then also according ta the state of
the affections and operations of its mind; S. according ta the
state of the motion of the eye itself, actuated by means of its
muscles; 6. being sa actuated, ta avert all dangerous and hurt­
fui accidents from the eye; 7. ta preserve the bulb itself of the
eye by a perpetuai dampening or instillation of humor or suit­
able ointment; 8. ta pour this humor about the eye in suitable
quantity; 9. finally also ta produce the same, sa that there may
always be a sufficient supply present. 10. There are the ex­
ternal mutations of state which correspond ta the internaI ones,
which therefore concern and rule not only quantities but also
qualities of the sight; II. besides states still more general.
12. These mutations are determined by the muscles, arteries,
veins and nerves.
380. I. This apparatus serves ta change external states ac­
cording ta the state of light in general. I. \\Then the quantity
of light is absent from the eyes, they become dry, they become
hot, they grow dull, they dispose the properly arranged parts
into another arder. 2. Therefore the upper lid can be raised
and lowered more and less; 3. it can be held in that state for
some time sa as ta admit less !ight. 4. The upper !id is the re­
fore capable of elevation which effects that the !ight falling
from the sky thus very strongly does not fall upon the eyes;
S, but by means of the hairy eyebro\';'s a shadow, like that of a
cliff, is superinduced. 6. The upper lid has reference espe­
cially ta the pupil; 7. This is effectecl by more particl1lar, more
general and most generat muscles, altogether accorcling ta the
degree of the !ight and of its quantity; 8. thl1s the bulb of the
eye can be uncovered according to every form and aperture;
the muscles sa effect it. 9. Ali the muscles from the forehead
ta the septum of the nostriIs or the interior canthus of the eye­
lids have respect ta the upper !id of the eye; they are primarily
for the sake of the eye. IO. The inferior muscles of the face
have respect primarily to the mOl1th and lips (os labiale) and
 THE EYE AND SIGHT. 127

their various motion in speech, song, and chewing; but sec­

ondarily also to the lower lido IL Thus there is a harmony of
the muscles of the superior region with the muscles of the in­
ferior region. This harmony or correspondence is actually
established by the pyramid of the nose.
381. 2. According to the state of objects. 1. The aperture
of the eye is varied by means of the lids and muscles accord­
ing to the distance of the object; 2. according to the size of the
object; 3. according to the lustre or brightness, as when one
looks at snow, or anything that sparkles; 4. or in any way
affects the eye externally. 5. This happens naturally or with­
out our consciousness. 6. Thus the external state of the eye
agrees with the state of the pupil, and with the interior state;
7. for if we expand the eye for an object at a distance, on the
other hand we contract it if we look at anything sharp. 8.
Thus we dispense the general light altogether according to the
state of the light which is to seize the pupil; at one time the
light is required in greater abundance so that nothing may
stand in the way, but the sight expatiates fredy-now the eye
is contracted and but Ettle light is admitted. 9. For the bulb
shaded about perceives rays and images more keenly,-on the
contrary if much light is poured about it. IO. The shade
makes that light which enters more distinct.
382. 3. According to the state of the bmin, as, to the state
of the affections of its anim1ts. 1. Every affection of the brain
or animus redounds into the nervous fibers, and from these into
the motor fibres, thus into the muscles. 2. \Vherefore muscles
not commanded are disposed according to the state of the
animus. 3. They are expanded in gladness. 4. They are con­
tracted in sadness. 5. They grow flaccid (cadtmt) in shame,
in fear and so forth. 6. This effect redounds from the gen­
eral muscles to particular ones, or to those of the eyelids. 7.
It redounds also into the membranes, glandules and vessels.
8. Hence in sadness, there is weeping: the opposite in gladness;
9. for, because there is a compression of the brain, there is a
compression in the extremes of the fibers, wherefore espe­
cially in those of the lachrymal gland, which is approached by
many nerves, according to Boerhaave. IO. Hence such as i:;
128 THE SENSES.

the look induced upon the face such especially is the state in­
duced upon the external apparatus of the eye which is visibly
perceived and distinguished. Ir. To enumerate particular
mocles would be very prolix. 12. In the presence of shame the
upper lid fa Ils and is not raised; 13. in impudence it is opened
more fully round; 14. in fear it is sometimes closed; 15. in
wrath and courage it is fully opened. 16. In wrath the feat­
ures are held fixed and inflamed.
383. 4. According to the state of the affections and opera­
tions of the mind. 1. This is altogether by correspondence.
2. It is very quietly held in deep meditation. 3. Without medi­
tation it is vibrated in a desultory manner. 4. It is fixedly
and intently held at a tension when one listens, reads or looks
at an object. 5. In some desire it is otherwise modified. 6.
These affections are principals of the affections of the animus
and are deeply within in these latter affections. 7. The light
of sight is to be obscured and overshadowed in the degree in
which the light of internaI sight or that of the understanding
is to be illuminatecl. 8. It is not possible for the one and the
other to be active at th~ same time. 9. \Vhile the sight is most
active, as in imagination, then the understanding corresponds
only as a passive. IO. \Vhen the understanding is active and
takes ideas profoundly from itself and its memory, and ele­
vates them to its own sphere, then the sight of the body will
not even be passive. Ir. InternaI sight does not inflow into the
external, but external sight into the internaI. 12. Althoug'h the
eye does not see still it is the organ by which the mind sees. 13.
Vlherefore we can think with closed eyes, or even if we are
blind; 14. and even much more keenly when nothing interferes
with and extinguishes [our mental images]. 15. Thus external
things extinguish interior things-one light, the other, where­
fore the external must be passive in orcIer. that internaI light
may reign, 16. thus the passions of the animus, in order that
spiritu;J,1 affections may reign. 17. Reason is similar.
384. 5. According to the motions of the eye itself, actuated
attd moved by means of the muscles. 1. By means of the com­
mon muscles of the eye and forehead, then the muscles of the
eyebrows and lids, the eye can be so compressed that it may be
held back towards the posteriors. 2. Thus it acts againit the
 THE EYE AND S/GHT. 129

muscle which brings the eye forward. 3. For it can be com­

pressed very narrowly, 4. because against the cartilage of the
lower lid; S. and the contrary of this, by means of the muscles
of the lower region of the face; 6. because the tunica con­
junctiva (adjunctiva) of the eyelids coheres to the sclerotic
membrane (albuginea) of the eye; 7. The caruncula lachry­
malis as a hinge assists this compression.
385. 6. This external apparatus serves to ave-rt al! danger­
ous accidents,' I. su<;h as things which may slip into the eye, 2.
such as coarse (nar-inus) , f1ying dust, 3. and other thin things.
4. The face can be turned aside for larger offending things,
S. and the head can be bowed; 6. for this reason also the eye­
brows stand forth above and are hairy; 7. for the same reason
also the hairs of the lashes tend downward in order that such
things as dust, water, sweat and many others may be heId back
from slipping into the eyes. 8. Thus all things are provided
for.
386. 7. To preserve the internaI state of the bulb b:y a per­
petuaI moistening,. 1. that is to say br meallS of the sebaceous
glands of the tarsus and of the tunica conjunctiva (adjunctiva) ;
2. then also by means of the lachrymal gland. 3. These
humors conjoined produce the whole desired quantity, 4. by
which the eyes are anointed and c1eansed. S. Then also the
quantities [are increased] by the more narrow compression of
the lids by means of the l11uscles. 6. Therefore such humor is
attracted by the arteries: see the Q1'teries. 7. For the sake of
this end the lachrymal gland is in the sm aller canthus, where
there is the greatest motion and pressure toward the orbit.
387. 8. Ta pou-r this araund the bulb of the e)!e, 1. in order
that it may come equally to every point; 2. wherefore the con­
junctiva and the sclerotic (albug-inea) are continuous. 3.
There are no continuations of the pericraniul11, iest another
humor should break in. 4. The humor is poured about equally
throl1gh the openings of the eyes, for the membranes are
slippery and polished, indeed sensibly so according to Heister.
5. Therefore such a compression can be formed by means of
the muscles, that the humor can be carried to every point, thus
can disseminate itse1f equally. 6. The circumvolution of the
eye effects that that humor is equally distributed.
9
130 THE SENSES.

388. 9. T 0 draw off that hum or, so that there ma}' always
be a right amount on hand. 2. It is variously drawn off to the
major canthus, 3. and thence by the lachrymal points towards
the nose; 3. especially from the laéhrymal gland by the semi­
lunar tunic. 4. Thus no more is admitted from the lach­
rymal gland than can be mixed with the unctuous humor of
the sebaceous glands. 5. This latter humor is also drawn off
thither. 6. For this end the greater left [?] canthus exists.
7. There the caruncula lachrymalis is situated. 8. There is the
most quiet station of the eye as every one can see in himself
when the eye is compressed, for. the humor is driven ta the
mote quiet state. 9. The most quiet is through the lachrymal
sac into the nose, where is the axis, and other things of the
periphery. IO. For this end the lachrymal points are always
open. 1 I. According ta Boerhaave they are bound with carti··
lage in arder that they may remain open. 12. When the gland~
are pressed they pour out the most especially the lachrymal
gland, which therefore is by the lessel' canthus, and adjoined
ta the orbi t, where there is the greatest pressure because the
greatest motion.
389. IO. There are states still more geneml; I. as for in­
stance, ta lower the face, 2. to lower the whole head; 3. a "Tate
arising from averting the sight.
390. Ir. Besides as to the manner in which the muscles act,
see tholtghts concerning the muscles of the face.
391. And how the humors are drawn off, that the purest
blood is carried to the venter,* see above, thoughts conce-m­
in,!:;' the arteries.
392. 1. Experience. 1. There are four straight and two ob­
lique muscles: 2. the straight superior or great e!evator; 3. the
straight inferior or small depressor; 4. the straight internaI
adductor towards the nose; 5. the straight external abductor
towanls the temple; 6, the oblique inferior or small ml.lscie:
7. the oblique great or trochlear so called because it passes
through the cartilaginous ring. 8. These two oblique muscles
turn the eye. 9. Ail the motions take place around the centre
of the eye. IO. The muscles are bound at their extremity ta

*1 suppose this to mean the ven/cr supremus or CaVUl11 cranii.-TR.

 THE EYE AND SIGHT. 13 1

the fun dus of the orbit near to the optic foramen by short and
narrow tendons; II. thence the fleshy parts go forth to the
greatest circumference of the convexity between the optic
nerve and the fleshy tunic, where they are enlarged. 12. Ten­
dons are implanted in the circumference and by adherence
continued even to the cornea, and they form the albugineous
tunic or white of the eye. 13. The optic nerve follows every
rotation of the eye. -wl1erefore it is surrounded with fat; it
also has a curvature towards the insertion of the globe, whence
it can be extended. 14. The pupil in natural site is directly in
front. 15. Seven bones come together at the orbit. 16. The
optic foramen is in the sphenoid bone. 17. The orbits are but
little c1istance apart. 18. The orbit is invested by a production
of the dura mater, it communicates with the periosteum of the
base of the craniu111. 19. The albugineous tunic is thin to­
wards the cornea where it commingles itself with the cornea.
20. The pupil in a natural state looks forwarel. 21. And the
internaI margin of the orbit is plainly opposed to the middle
lip of the internaI globe.
393. 2. Use. 1. The eyes by means of the musc1es can nat­
urally execute every circ1e, greater and less, according to will
and determination of sight. 2. Nor can it only make simple
circ1es, but also continuaI circles and spi raIs ; 3. so that in a
greater effigy it may represent the potencies and activities of a
state of motion fo be changed in whatever possible manner;
4. but still within its own boundaries. 5. The !ids themselves
accommodate themselves entirely and naturally to the state of
the motion or gyration of the bulb, so that the tarsus of the
upper !id may ahvays hold the pupil under itself.
394. 3. The eye is per11litted to execute 1'latltral!'Y every
circle, greater and less, accordùtg to the will a·nd determination
of sight. 1. yVe cannot easily ~!etect the motions of the eye,
except in two modes: 2, first, if we hald the heac1 fixed aw!
turn the sight to every quarter, from the objects which are snc­
cessively submitted to sight, the quality of the circumgyration
of the bulb becomes apparent, but in this manner we are en­
tire!y unab!e to see except in another thing [than the eye] how
132 THE SENSES.

the eye is turned; 3. by the second manner, in a mirror, which

is the most beautiful and curious, if we hold the eye fixed upon
its own eye in the mirror, and turn the head in every direction
ta every circ1e, ta every gyre or ta every angle, then we c1early
see that the pupil is hetd in the same place and in the same
right line ta the pupil of the mirror, and that the eye makes
gyres and circles similar ta those of the head; indeed even if
we turn the head in diverse spirals, the eye follows sa nat­
urally that the voluntary confuses itself in no respect. 4. Be­
sides, this mode detects that the upper lid is likewise sa held
that it holds the pupil placed under the border of the tarsus
and of the semilunar membrane. j. Thence the harmony of
the eyelids and the eye is apparent. 6. The major circle is
when the pupil is elevated entirely under the tarsus of the up­
per !ici, when that lid is elevated ta the highest point; then that
it is depressed ta the limb border of the lower lid, sa that it
looks back almost in a right line towards the plane (libra) of
the face, then it can be transferred even ta the major and minor
canthus. 7. This is the greatest circle, which is its limit. 8:
It is not a circle, however, which it executes but an aval cir­
cuit. 9. Smaller orbits are made likewise, if we turn, bend
and throw back the head through small orbits. 10. The mus­
cles make these orbits, for it has been sa ordained that they
can make every circ1e, and every figure of rotation; for the
superior rectus elevates, the inferior c!epresses, the internaI
draws towards the nase, the externai towards the temple.
11. Besides this the oblique muscles [have their motion]. 12.
That the eyelids and tarsi follow sa exactly, arises from a mus­
cle of the lid which is likewise inserted iuto the eye by a ten­
don; see Winslow.
395. The eye can make not only simple circles but also con­
tinua1 circles and spirals. 1. This appears from the same oc­
ular observation in a mirroL 2. Nlotîon everywhere in nature
approaches ta the continuaI and wills ta take on a perpetuaI
form which a spiral represents. 3. By means of the four
straight muscles such an elliptical spiral cannat be described
but it can by the oblique muscles acting at the same time. 4. It
 THE EYE AND SIGHT. 133

is necessary that the eye be drawn obliquely into a spiral and

outside the determination which the four recti can form; 5.
thus first a continuaI spiral is described. 6. In order that there
may be a more perfect, and as it were small solid spiral, the
eye can at the same time be brought forward and drawn back
by al! the muscles; 7. and thus can form a like spiral in every
extension and retraction; 8. wherefore there is sorne curvature
of the optic nerve near the foramen, according to vVinslow,
on accQunt of the same use. 9. There is a compressible fat.
ro. There is an appendix at the posterior part. rI. Thus the
eye while it describes its own spiral determines that solid
spiral, and that in a double mode. 12. Exactly according to the
spiral form of superior particles, as in the air and ether. 13.
Picture to yourselves a scarab and the rol!ing [of his bail] :md
you will see a not simple rotation execl1ted. 14. Therefore
the major oblique trochlear exists, and is inserted by a won-
derful device so that it may adapt itself to the nerves.
396. S 0 that tlie eye in a grcater effigy represents the po'wers
and detenninations and activities of the state to be changed
Ùl- '«Ilwte'(}er possible Tatio. 1. Such also is the state of the
particles of the air and the ether. 2. Such is the state of their
modifications. 3. Such is the most perfect state. 4. Tt is a
state of motion which is changed. 5. States to be changed co-
incide with forms and places. 6. Sight demands this, in order
that it may be determinable to aU objects in an instant. 7.
Thus to infinity and perpetl1ity whatever nature everywhere
directs in its organisms. 8. But this stateof motion has its
limits within which it is held.
397. The eyeHds themselves are peTfectly accommodated;
1. As you may see in a mirror. 2. They continl1al!y hold the
pupil under the tarsus. 3. This appea~s especial!y from the
white of the eye or the albugineous tunic emerging. 4. This
cornes from the muscles of the eyebrows and lic1s which are
also inserted in a certain way in the eye; See \Vinslow on
those muscles, TTaite le la Tete, 284, et seq.
398. In order that tlzese things ma)' be SOl they are a-l'rang·,
cd according to cvery inmost mechanùal art. 1. The muscles
134 THE SENSES.

are 50 placed and fixed that they actuate aH this motion mast
conveniently. 2. They are attachecl ta the miclc1le of the cir­
cumference where there is no resistance. 3. Aponeuroses
thence stretch to the cornea, sa that every tendon and every
tenc1inous fibre determines itself exactly according to the cen­
tre and concentrations of its powers. 4. So that thus the mus­
cles have the whole external surface of the eye under them
bound to them. 5. Wherefore the albugineolls tunic performs
a triple use. 6. First, in order that the muscles by means of
it may correctly direct the 'whole eyeball. 7. Second, that the
eye may be protected from in jury. 8. Third, that it may reflect
the rays of light so that they may not penetrate by this way
into the eye, for the white repels the rays; thus that they may
centre only by the pupi!. 9. Besides this the muscles lie very
near to the common axis or radius of the nose, where the orbits
almost converge, 10. and are supported by the seven bones of
the orbit. Ir. The foramen itself passes through the sphenoid
bone. 12. By the favor of the optic peduncle the slightest mo­
tion returns into that part, as when a globe is moved trom a
certain point upon which it stands. 13. Wherefore the slight­
est motion of circumgyration returns into the optic nerve. 14.
There is almost no local motion, but only a rather small gyra­
tory motion. 15. The nerve has the power of gyrating like
the eyeball but in a smaller gyre.
399. The optic foramen does Ilot correspond to the pupil,
that is Ù is Ilot in the diameter of the eyeball,o the causes au
as follows: 1. The optic foramen, or place where the nerve
enters, is nearer to the nose. 2. For according to vVinslow the
circumference of the eyeball towards the temple is \Vider than
towards the nose. 3. It is similar in respect to the ciliary pro­
cess, so also of the ciliary corona, in respect to the pupi! and
the uvea. The causes are as follows: 4. First, because in their
first formation, while ail things were fluid, and determinations
\Vere being formed, they presented themselves for a more per­
fect form of fluxion, (as arose the very form of the fluxion of
the eye itself), that is to say, for a spiral form; this never ac­
knowledges the centre of a circle, but it is outside a circle; for
 THE EYE AND SIGHT. 135

the form of the general fluxion, as ,vas shown above is referred

to every part, which, agreeing with the gyre of its form, it
bears away from the central part; anc! at the same time when
it drives it into the central part it drives it into a new gyratory
motion, which couIc! not be c!one at all if the centre shoulcl be
in the middle as in a circ1e, for then a new ascent coulé! not
arise. S. In the formecl eye, although such a motion of parts
does not actually exist, in the proper parts of the eye, as in its
vitreous substances, yet there remains the enc!eavor towards
that motion, and thus the parts are held in a more perfect form.
6. A like motion persists every moment in the ether which sur­
rounc!s the parts, and thus actuates every part or f:oncentrates
itse1f upon every part of the crystalline humor, in arder that
it may rightly impart its own image ta every one of them ac­
cording to the modification of the ether itse1f; indeed while the
rays, thrown through the pupil and the crystalline lens, make
a similar circ1e, which thus easily tends to a spiral, (for that
circ1e, from the rays of light, and infusecl b:y the refraction of
the retina, does not have the optic foramen for a centre, but
that holds an excentric place), thence the retina acted upon
modifies the ether according to the same form, thence every
part of the vitreous humor, by means of the ether, becomes a
participant of the same modification, and finally circulates
around the whole surface. 7. The second cause is, that rays
transmitted directly through the crystalline lens shall not thus
by a certain concentration break in immediately upon the fibres
of the optic nerve, which would destroy the functions of those
fibres which receive their modes from the sensory fibres of
the retina thus mediately: otherwise there would be no sense
of sight. 8. This is the reason why other things in the eye
are similarly arranged (according to Winslow), and further­
more also the crystalline humor. See ",hat has been said in
P. II. concerning the diaphragm ancl concerning the inequali­
ties of the viscera.
 THE SENSES.,

The Tunics of the Eye.

400. 1. The Albugincous tunic, adnata or conjunctiva, that

is, the white of the eye, seems to perform these uses: 1. The
tendons of the muscles, especially those of the four rectus mus­
cles are there expanded in an aponeurosis, and indeed from
the greatest circle to the anterior peripheries in proper
order, so that every tendinous fibre has respect to its o\Vn
motor fibre in the aponellfosis, or many at the sa me time in the
muscles, and at the same time they respect from the fulcruin
or greatest circle ail those remaining points of the surface, so
that they altogether agree, so that the smallest motor fibre can
pllfsue its own \Vay most distinctly into the eyeball, and actuate
it with the most facile power; for in the determination of those
fibres a whole mystic geometry lies hidden, and they regard
one another according to ail the determinations of motion
which the eye presents in its turning, (it would be too prolix
to describe these things), wherefore it (the albuginea) ter­
minates at the beginning of the cornea where it grows fhin.
2. And the agreement is such that this motion acts, not with
violence, but with a most facile power, and thus almost more
by elasticity than by tracti ve force and gravity ; a cellular tissue
lies unc1er them, so that each fibre can yielcl and act by its own
elasticity, whence it returns \Vith the greatest power. 3. So
that the rays do not enter elsewhere through the sclerotic into
the anterior or posterior chamber and into the vitreous humor;
wherefore the fibres are so arranged and interwoven that they
repel the rays; for whiteness repels rays of light, every other
colar absorbs some part; this the sclerotic would not do at ail
without this circumfused white of the eye; wherefore it begins
where the cornea ends, and repels all the rays; and this white
of the eye is only at the anterior part, where the rays inflow
when the lids are opened. The underlying cellular tissue also
itse1f contributes somewhat that the rays may be more fully
extinguished. 4. Thus also the integument serves the sclerotic
afld the eye, for it not only sustains the light rays but also
other attacking fluias and solids, and many things, and takes
 THE EYE AND SIGHT. 137

care that the sclerotic tunic shall not be immediately impinged.

The underlying cellular tissue also contributes towarcls ex­
tinguishing the same impingement. The tunica albuginea es­
pecially takes care that the e;erosity, sometimes acrid, break­
ing forth from the lachrymal and other glands shall not hurt
the corneal part of the sclerotic, 5, so that the slightest touch
may advert not only to the brain, but also to the muscular
fibres, so tint they may concur immediately of themselves from
that cause in the body by contractions and similar modes of
averting dangers, as has been observed in other organs.
vVherefore the nerves are inserted, each tendinous fibrE: com­
municates with a motor fibre, for the latter is a continuation
of the former, and a very thin sensitive membrane is superin­
duced which is continued ta the conjunctiva of the li de; ; thus
the sensitive [fi,bre] in the conjunctiva'of the lids performs the
same use. 6. This tunic exists that it may transmit a very thin
dew between the layers of the corneal tunic and thus keep this
whole in its own state, that it may always be transparent
[dividua J and pellucid; for the aponeurotic fibres terminate in
the cornea; the cellular tissue penetrates thither; the corneal
tunic transudes this dew after circulation through the pores,­
according to the observation of Winslow ; wherefore this tunic
is lost in the cellular tissue which goes off between the layers
of the cornea and perhaps becomes still more continuous; an
opening thus leads from every muscle into the tissue. The
albuginea is interspersed throughout with arteries which also
exude a dew. Thence it may be conceived of what quality is
the circulation and use of the humor under the albugineous
tunic. 7. Perhaps also it confers to the formation of the cor­
neal tunic; as the roots confer to the formation of the nails,
for it is continued from its fibres; the aponeurotic membrane
easily goes off into the cornea by the degrees of harclness
al one, which inc\eed principal1y causes that it subsists, it also
causes that it existe;; for existence is perpetuai subsistence.
The same regularly ftowing humor brings it about, that the
cornea shall be thus pellucid, lamellated, hard, etc., perhaps
together with the nerves and vessels which here creep in, ac­
cording to \Vinslow.
 THE SENSES.

401. 2. The sclerotie tu nie. 1. It IS as it were the last

plate of the cranium of the eye, for the eye like the brain is
covered with a kind of horn)' cranium, for the eye is an ap­
penclix of the brain, or as it were a succenturiate brain, es­
pecial1y in regard ta volatile things; for this sense of sight ap­
proaches proximateI)' the supreme or inmost sense of the
brain, and still more nearl)' or in almost the same degree, if
the mass of the e)'e is as great as that of the brain. It is other­
wise therefore in the human kind \vhere the brain is the great­
est, for there is a clegree of sensation superior ta that of the
understanding which is wanting in brutes. 2. The sc1erotic
furnishes a passage for the vessels and fibres; for the vessels
ancl fibres run through the plates; they are able ta run out al­
most according ta the whole nature of their own fluxion; and
they are there very safe, and in the highest rest, nature, ancl
thus fmm, of their o\'vn fluxion; if the)' are in their form, they
are in their naturaI rest although in motion; for the nature
of rest consists in fluxion according ta the form of motion; in
these things motion and rest concur. 3. The vessels and fibres
f10w through the sclerotic from one centre ta another, or from
the circle or appenc1ix about the optic nerve ta the conjunction
of the sc1erotic with the cornea, or of the choroid with the
uvea, where there is a white circ1e : elsewhere the)' are in their
own peripheries, between the layers of the sclerotic; thus from
their own equilibrium, according ta their own equilibriu111, thus
the)' cannat be otherwise arranged for every manner of giving
off in the interior fabric, as arounc1 about the pupil, where the)'
procluce mast diverse effects, modes and forms. 4. The
sc1erotic is the strongest tunic and operates by force rather
than b)' gravity, or b)' a mode of motion and action rather than
by a mode of rest and incumbence or pressure. There is noth­
ing in it which is not elastic. Wherefore it is divided into a
great many layers, ever)'one of which is elastic. Many elastic
la)'ers produce a general elasticity, which appears as if it \Vere
not elastic ; this results from the composition; for which reason
all the vessels and al1 the fibres f10w through it as if they flow­
ed in the highest natural state. 5. In orcier that the layers ma)'
 THE EYE AND SIGHT. 139

preserve the elasticity separately and particular1y, so that it

may exist whole, a flux must go through between them not
purely aqueous, but which is also of an elastic nature such
as results from shed blood [blood-serum] and is similar to
the Iymph of the thoracic c\uct. and is apurer blood : this seems
to be C\istilled from the smallest arteries, which flow between
the layers, which arteries now carry apurer blood, from causes
recounted above; thence a fountain of Iymph seems to be led
into the chambers of the eye. There is also an efflux every-
where through the pores, according to vVinslow. 6. Thus the
sc1erotic and the cornea are also the ultimate emunctory of the
serous blooc1, in order that no other blood shall enter into the
eye itself than the purest and most suitable; this serous blooc1
also performs uses on the way, that is to say it separates the
layers, moistens them and keeps thern in a state of integrity;
it fills the chambers of the eye; thus it makes a circ1e in such
a way that new blood may always be present. 7. In order that
the elastiéity may be particular the layers of the sclerotic and
the uvea seem to arise partly from the aponeurosis of the mus-
c1es, or the albugineous tunic; within indeed they arise from
the nerve-tunics, which are there attached to them and which
are there expanded; by these means communication is effected
with the dura and pia mater, but through the nerves, not im-
mediately by the optic nerve. 8. Thus all the greater and les-
ser impulses, then also pressures and modifications here find
a covering most conformable to them, for they press every
layer and circulate through every distance. 9. From this it
can be deduced, then from the elasticity of the particular lay-
ers, that they have respect to some distinct pulsation of the
arteries and a distinct animation of the brain, through the
fibres; and that this animation as it were vanishes and does
not sensibly go forth in the common membrane. Such an ani-
mation also requires in the surface a double modification, in
order that all things may be helc\ in a conserved state of in-
tegrity. The modification itself runs forth according to the
fibres of the layers, wherefore its determinations cannot be
otherwise than in a more perfect circ1e or spiral. 10. Thus
140 THE SENSES.

the sc1erotic is the common integument of the interior of the

eye. the common modificatory, common emunctory of the
blood, and the common evaporatory of the exhalations, as has
been shown.
402. 3. The Cornea. 1. The uses of the cornea are the
same as the uses of the sc1erotic in general, wherefore those
uses must be passed over, and those which it especial1y per­
forms must be reviewed. 2. By its parabolic, el1iptic or other
convexity it serves for a common reunion of the sc1erotic, for
such a figure anteposited, if it receives any impulse, does not
distribute it against the interivrs, as a circ1e does its radii, but
against the sc1erotic and thus into a circ1e, thus it serves for
a support, for its lines proceed obliquely and insert themselves
into the sclerotic; such a figure is much stronger in its apex
than a circ1e; for it is concentered to~vàrds many foci; where­
fore such a figure can better preserve its elasticity, for il does
not go to one fixed centre but to many so that it may be yield­
ing with every relapse into its own form, which renders it
very safe. 2. It takes in a greater expanse of sky at the same
time, and thus more rays at the same time, thus widens and
extends simultaneous sight; for it protrudes from the eyebal1,
and receives what a globe cou Id not receive; thence it is ap­
parent why there are differences in its muscular system and
many other things. 3. But still the more it is protruded from
the eyeball, the more indistinct is the vision, as may appear
trom a superimposed hoUow hand and the impeding of the
influx of light from above, whence distinctness returns: for
general light obscures the particular, takes away part of the
rays and implicates them; this is done natural1y by the lashes
and the tarsus, which are placed and held c10sely aboye the
pupil, as also by means of the eyelids, their overhanging parts
and by means of their hairs as it \Vere a shady grove, which
every one can examine for himself. 4. The cornea also di­
rects the rays justly to the pupil and the crystalline lens, which
could not be done without such an appendix; whereforc the
pupil and the whole distance, likewise the forms of the iris
and of the rest of the circles, respond exactly to the figure of
 THE EYE AND SIGHT. 14 1

the cornea and to the determination of its radii. S. Sight ac-

knowledges this first gate, wherefore accorcling to its figure,
extension, pellucidity and thickness the first causes of sight
depend. In the dying, says Winslow, it is obfuscated. To
enter into particulars in respect to the cornea wou Id be to
enter into infinities.

The Tunies of the Eye.

403. 4. The Choroid. I. It is the proximate covering which

communicates all the affections of the sc1erotic tunic or ail gen-
eral modes, to the interior eyc, thus it is a uniting medium, as
weil, namely, of the motions as of the fibres and vessels, for it
receives those effects which happen in the sc1erotic tunic and
carries them towarcl the interiors, and it receives those things
which happen within and carries them towarcl the exteriors;
thus it is a mediate l1niting bond. 2. It receives the vessels
by means of which the blood has already been pl1rified in the
sc1erôtic, and carries them toward the interiors; wherefore
those vesse!s fiow in perpendicularly, 50 that ail heterogeneous
humor is eXl1ded in this last lip. 3. It also receives the fibres
which also it transmits, (according to vVinslow) ; ail action of
the one with the other is communicated according to the ves-
sels and fibres, as is known in physics; thus also the pulsatile
motion of the arteries mies in the choroid, and the animatory
motion of the nerves; likewise also the general modificatory
motion. 4. But care is taken in man)' ways t1lat these pulsatile,
trernlllons, vibratile, modifiable motions shaH Ilot penetrate to-
'Narc! the interiOl's of the eye except in a most general way; S.
that is to say, those motions circulate in tnrn from the one
tunic into the other, or from the sc1erotic into the choroid, and
return, nor do they proceecl further; there is a white band which
turns the one beginning of the uvea abont to the other, (strict!y
accorcling to VVinslo\v) ; this white band receives the tremis-
cences and refiects them into the other tunic, for becal1se it is
white it refiects the rays, wherefore also it refiects modifications
and similar things. There is another similar band or appendix
in the other center, where the optic nerve enters; these are the
142 THE SENSES.

foci; by this means the tremor of the one is reflected into the
othe 1', and vice versa, nor does it go inward. This seems to
be c!01'l.e especially in arder that those tremiscences shaIl not
verge into the uvea, the iris, the ciliary processes and many
tissues of this place. 6. In arder also that they shaH not enter
singly (singularissime) and irritate the retina and the vitre­
ous humor, care is taken by a blackness induced upon each of
its layers, namely. upon the external major, and upon the in­
ternai thinner, or Ruyschian tunic ; this blackness absorbs every
similar modification, and confuses it sa that it shaH not pene­
trate further: thus the blackness of the external tunic absorbs
the modification sa that it shall not penetrate into the internaI
tunic and into the uvea, and that of the internaI tunic, so that
it shaH not penetrate into the parts under the uvea, and inta
the crystaIline and vitreol\s humor; thus aIl remain most safe
and are cared for bath by reflections and absorptions. 7. This
tunic therefore brings it about that the entering vessels and
fibres come into a most quiet state 011 entering the uvea, where
concurs a wonderful tissue of the smaIlest things; for, accord­
ing to \Vinslow, they penetrate by that way, thus by the way
where ail vibratory motions cease and are reflected. 8. Thus
also it receives aIl the general modes of the brain through the
optic nerve, ta which it is nearest. 9. It appears ta be an ex­
pansion of the pia meninx. for here the nerves, strippecl of the
dura mater, are surroundecl by the pia mater.
404. The Uvea. 1. The uses of the uvea concur with the
uses of the choroid in a general way; 2. but the uvea derives
into itself distinctly aIl this apparatus of smaIlest parts, sa that
therein aIl things ma)' be accomplished tranqnilly according
ta the arder of nature. 3. \iVherefore the uvea is the basis
of the iris, of the pupil, of the ciliary processes or fibres, of
the ciliary ligament, of the arterial and venous band, of certain
ducts which are caIled black. 4. Thus ail things therein can
be accomplished accorc1ing ta the affections of the brain, since
the)' can be accomplished most distinctl)' and most quietl)', be­
cause therein there is none but pure blood and distilled
(spirituata) l)'mph; the others which are impure and which
 THE EYE AND SIGHT. 143

impede, are cleansecl away in innumerable ways. 5. In order

that the uvea ma)' be in this state it is fortified about by that
white band which semIs and reflects every exterior trémor
from tunic to tunic. except where from its own softness and
yielding character. and the thickness of its origin it absorbs the
tremor, so that it shall not penetrate aH the way into the
uvea: this is from external causes if anything comes from the
sclerotic, as also from the cornea; for then the sc!crotic dissi­
pates the rays and reflects them by the same way, so that thus
a tremor suddenly striking the uvea is transferred by that way
into the surface. 6. If there be any modification from the
vitreous humor, the retina, the optic nerve, the brain, the black­
ness of the underlying uvea absorbs it, just as does the black­
ness of tlie choroid. 7. The uvea therefore is the plane, where
a great many tissues concur of which it is the basis.
405. [n. respect to the coloration of the iris. I. According
to the exposition given above concerning colors, for a base will
be white and black; for these are the bases of ail colors; with­
out them the cOllors which are called constant neither exist nor
subsist, still less appear. 2. The black of the basis has its
place under the uvea, the white possesses the circumference:
thus every color is produced which is referred to both black
and white. 3. The whiteness is induced by such an arrange­
ment of the parts, that ail the rays leap back confusedly and are
not absorbed. 4. The blackness on the other hand is induced
by such an arrangement of the parts that ail the rays are con­
fusedly absorbed ; therefore the arteries in the iris are led about
in little vortices, 50 that they may form shady little crypts in
which the rays are extinguished; wherefore the black verges
toward red. The little branches of these vortices are likewise
led into little vortices, so that they may become still more deep­
Iy a shade, and so that that which is luminous may be still
more deeply absorbed. Such most subtile Iittle vortices with
their crypts induce blackness upon waters. l doubt wh ether
those parts of a fluid which pursue a straight line are similar,
for, just as to blàckness: the most general shade exists in
order that the lower plate of the uvea may be covered with
144 THE SENSES.

blackness. 4. Thus al! Iuminous modifications are àbsorbed

within, and the greater ones flow about into the orbit. S.
\Vherefore there is such a state of the uyea, that it can ~ake
on aIl the affections of the internai brain.
406. The Iris. 1. It is variously colored in subjects; the
coloration shows through the cornea; it is caIled blue, verging
to recl, to green, etc., brown (pruneIla), a band of another color
sometimes surrounds it. 2. It is colored accordîng to tempera­
ments; 3. according to affections, especially the merely cor­
poreal, as hearing; 3. accorcling to other affections of the ani­
mus, in which affections there is and exists some desire of the
mind, whence there is a sparkling, a tremulous and more live­
Iy and more fiery or flamy state; hence there are signs from the
eyes themselves of the desires of the minci, with which also
exterior states correspond, that is to say, the motions of the
eyelids and eyebrows. 4. Otherwise the coler is more torpid,
duskier and corpselike (mortifer.e similis). 5. Because the
fibres carry \Vith them the very affections of the animus and
minci, and there rather engrave them preferably where are ex­
tant subtile and quieter concentrations. 6. They then act upon
the blood vessels, and these upon the fibres; whence colors and
motions concur. 7. Sometimes they turn the black of the cye
into red, when the little vortices swelling with blood close up
the hiatuses and little crypts. 8. The iris especially receives
rays penetrating through the uvea, ancl indeed suffocates them
by the duskier color which absorbs them; finally they are ab­
sorbecl in the blackness of the posterior plate. They also dis­
pel a part into the peripheries by \Vay of the white band, as
has been said. 9. The iris also gives to the pupil the power of
dilating and of contracing which incleecl is proper to the uvea
and its border.
407. The pupil. 1. It is placed at the apex of the chamber
of the eye, and on the other sicle of the middle of the crystal­
line lens. 2. It can be dilated by the sphincter or by the or­
bicular fibres. 3. It can be contracted by the ciliary fibres. 4·
There are fibres of the cornea which pierce each layer of the
uvea, according to vVinslow, thus there is a certain determina­
 THE EYE AND SIGHT. 145

tian. 5. The pupil is dilated and contracted according ta the

quantities of light, according ta the qualities of abjects where­
fore accorcling ta the qualities of light, accorcling ta distances,
according ta opposecl magnitudes, accorcling ta the state of
wakefuilless or sleep, according ta shadows, sa easily and nat­
urally, that nothing may hinder. 6. It is openecl therefore ac­
cording ta state as the sight wishes to be sharper or du 11er ;
wherefore according ta the intention and desires of the mind.
7. In this relation the crystalline lens is brought forwarc1, or
pushed b2.ck. 8. Thus ail the varieties of the eye correspond
ta ail the varieties of abjects in particular. 9. Now there is
a very small aperture, sa small that it is almost no aperture;
now a very large aperture; tbus the diameter can be variec! ta
a great extent. 10. The ciliary ligament concurs.
408. There are ma113' changes of state in the eye. 1. There
are the external changes by means of the licls and muscles
whicb have been treated of. z. The cbanges of the state of
motion of the whole eye which bave been treated of. 3. The
changes of the state of the iris. according ta affections. 4.
The changes of the aperture of the pupil according ta objects
and interior states. 5. Changes of the place of the crystalline
lens. 6. Changes of the state of the retina. 7. Changes of the'
state of the vitreous bumor. 8. Changes of the state of the
single parts, especially of the retina, and of the vitreous
humor, which changes are infinite, and are as many as the
variations of light. 9. Thus in general, particular and singular,
happen tbe changes of state. 10. The changes of state in the
eye are ail ta the end that external states of the body and of
the world may agree with the internaI states or those of the
brain; for the eye is an instrument and is constituted as it \Vere
in a balance. Ir. The cornea covers itseJ f with a cloud, or
makes itself c1ear, according ta the quantity of light; thus Un­
dergoes those very changes of state. 12. It expands itself and
the pores gratuitously and harmonically.
409. The affections, which are the causes of the change of
state, are many. 1. They are the very quantities and qualities of
light and shade. z. They are the affections arising from ob­
10
 THE SENSES.

jccts, as from single colors, from colors among the,~selves.

3. Those arising from forms of diverse beauty in the vegetable
and animal kingdom. 4. Every form which agrees with the
orcier of nature is beautiflll, and excites love; the contrary ex­
cites aversion. S. There are affections arising from the body,
such as the corporeal sensations, pleasures, appetites and loves
of diverse kind. 6. There are also similar visual affections
arising from the imagination alone, which beautiful forms
represent. 7. There are still further affections in which there
is a certain higher beginning, as the various loves of self, of
light; thence gladness, hilarity, wrath, envy, fears, revenge,
etc., are the beginnings of these affections which are ca lied the
loves of moral good and evil, and others. 9. 1'0 all these
things the mutations of state respond, exterior, interior and
mixed. la. Nevertheless all these arise from sensation, either
external or internaI, of the cerebrum or the intellectual, of the
cerebelium or the natural, which is in the blood and in the
spirits.
410. Into what becolllillg order al! these tJûngs are cast will
appear, I. from the influx of the vessels about the conj llnction
of the choroid and the uvea, where also the sc1erotic concurs
\Vith the cornea. where there is a circ1e as it \Vere a white cen­
tre. 2. That the vessels constitute a kincl of arterial and ven­
ous circ1e from which, ancl by way of the periphery of the
circ1e, they run forth toward the centre as raclii. 3. From the
ciliary process, or the fold of the posterior byer of the uvea,
the}' run forth like radii tovvard the pupil, ancl imitateundula­
tio:~s in arder that there may not he a simp'ie circ1e \Vith radii,
sa that the folds can be contracted. 4. The going forth of the
ve!lsels and fibres is according ta these folds. S. The insertion
of the musc1es between the plates, and their deterl'l1ination is
rectilinear and articular. 6. Yea, all these things are sa beauti­
fully arrang'ed that he who is not astonished at it, does not per­
mit these wonderful things ta reach interiorly into his higher
understanding; eitl1er he is ignorant of all such things. or his
;ceal is altogether for his own bocy.
411. Olle e)'e, of the sa1Jle hnd of animais, a,nd especially
 THE EYE AA'D SICHT. 147

of 111 ell , is absolu tel)' like the eye of another neither in. gen­
era! nor in part, 1101' yet in things 1/Iost singular. L It is
varied in general figure, 2. in size, 3. in motion, 4. the albuginea
is not a1ike, neither the sc1erotic; there are endless diversities.
4. These diversities are greatest in the cornea, [which differs]
in size, figure, density, pellucidity and elasticity. 5. N either
is the iris alike in color, size and distance. 6. vVherefore
neither is the pupi!. 7. Neither is the crystalline lens ~imilar
in size, figure, compactness. distance, and action upon the un­
derlying vitreous humor. 8. Keither is the retina alike in one
and another. 9. \Vherefore neither is the vitreous humor, but
indeed every part differs variousl)'. 10. But these things agree
in things most general and in the higher genera!. 11. Thus
neither are the animus nor the affections. thus neither the mu­
tations, constant, which are according to the tissue, and the
inconstant mutations are various acconling to the affections.
12. \Vherefore the sensation or sight is varied in ail things.
J 3. ~ight is the principal, motion corresponds to it as an 111­
stru1l1enta1, the tissue corresponds to each of them.

On the HUiJl01'S of the Eye. and on the Retina.

412. L First we must repeat what and wbence are colors

and light; without a knowledge of them we shall bus)' our­
selves about the hl1l11ors in vain.
413. The doctrine of 1110dificatiollS. coïncides <vith the doc­
tTilie of the presslITe of the atmos!,heres. 1. For pressure is
the ultimatc or conatus of modifications, a like nature is in
each. 2. Pressure has regard to its o\\'n centre and its own
peripheries, 50 also modifications: the slightest pressure is in
the peripheries the greatest in the centre, so a1so modification;
in like manner the)' pour thernselves forth. 3. Pressure has
regard to every point or partic1e to which it equally tends from
the l1niversal, so also modification. 4. It likewise also has re­
gard to every volume. greatest and least. in like manner mocli­
fication. 5. Pressllre is augmented towarcllower things vvhere
it increases as the atmosphere is condensed. so also modifica­
 THE SENSES.

tion. 6. Pressure likewise respects every concave as well as

convex surface, in like manner modification. 7. Pressure acts
according to its column, in like manner modification. 8. Press­
ure from the smallest aperture acts upon the greatest space con­
tiguously, likewise mo(;ification. 9. Pressure passes through
tortuous canals simi!arly as through straight ones, and exer­
cises its force UpOl1 the underlying volume, likewise modifica­
tion (pressio?) as it penetrates, according to influx, through
the nnequal pores of the vitreous humor (vitri?), howsoever
unequal they are. 10. Pressure rebouncls or is cleflected ac­
cording to the plane of the object, ancl strives to go thence in
a right line, in like manner modification. 11. The nature of
modification can he further explained from the nature of press­
ure. and the nature of pressure From the nature of 1110dificatio;l,
and thus can he not only illustrated but extended.
414. 2. The qualit-y' of pressure Iws been discove·red, es­
pecially by experience, (rom liqnids (aquis) and the Ilerial
atmosphere. 1. For therein are ultimate effects, presented
even before the eye. 2. Thus from pressure in the air one
can conclude concerning pressure in the ether, finally of the
pressure in this purest [atmosphere]. 3. But a cognition of
the more perfect forms only is necessary. 4. For the pressure
and modification of the purest or c<:'lestial aura is into the
celestial form, tInt is to say, the general pressure ancl modi­
fication of &11 the puts and their concentration towarcl their
every single part. 5. Because excentric [pressure] acts upon
this its own part by concentration into the inferior or vortical
form of fluxion. 6. Thence by this form the y act upon every
part of the ether, which in a simibr manner, but through a
vortical form, is driven about; this form by acting upon its
own parts is again driven about, and ceases in every aerial part;
therein takes place a spiral action of every aerial part. 7. This
spiral action acts in a similar manner upon its own part], r
whence results the circular form ; the determination of which is
from the periphery towarcls centers; thence [is the action of]
\Vater. 8. Thus the one results from the other by the cleter­
mination alone accorcling to which a11 things are arranged.
 THE EVE AND SICHT. 149

415. 3. Thellce wiii appem' what light and c%rs are. r.

For light and colors are merel)' modifications of the atmos­
phe;-es. 2. \iVherefore they are active forces of which press­
ure is the conatus. 3. Ali essentials of conatus become free
in modification as in local motion corresponding to thcm;
thence also are celerities and many accidental things. 4. A
partic111ar is never givcn except from its own general; for
withol1t the general the particular flows away without rule ~nd
distinction. 5. \Vherefore a distinct g'eneral postulates a dis­
tinct particlllar ; the one respects the other as its own basis. 6.
Shade and light are the generals and bases of colors. 7.
Shadows and lights must be arranged in becoming order be­
fore particulars may appear distinctly. 8. Thu5 in glass
g'lobcs, in drops, in prisms ane! in other things where two re­
flections present colors: the first reflection only arranges the
light and shacle in orcier thai its cIifferences may be rightly
[apprehenc1ee!], the other presents the colors respectively. to
these their bases. <). In constant colors likewise, whiteness and
blackncss are the bases of the colors : then ail the varieties be­
tween \\"hiteness and blackness, in which two there is no color
as neither is there colt:>r in light and shacle first reflecteci. 10.
YVhiteness arises from an irregular reflexion of light, blackness
from thc absorption of light; intennecliates present common
clifferences, as the bases of colors. IL \Vherefore whiteness
and blackness are inc1ucee! by composition of the more open
parts, or by the greater degree of the compositions, which
makes the larger pores. 12. Colors then are variegatee! ac­
corc1ing ta the reflection of light by the particles of the more
simple composition. 13. The more these reflect of light or
shade the more another color follows. 14. \iVherefore this is
the mode of reflected light and shacle, which reflection presents
colors. 15. In orcier that this mocle may exist, it is required
that the form of the reflecting particles be variously spherical,
angul~r, concave, etc. 16. Thcnce colors are conditioned ac­
corc!ing to the forllls or figures of the particles, thus of the
sma11est thing-o 17. Thencc the attributes ancl di verse quali­
tics of colors derive their varieties. 18. That every particle
I50 THE SENSES.

shines through in the Jeast particles. 19. vVherefore aIl things

come forth from the arrangement of the particles and the
thence arising cIetermination and dispensation of the rays. 20.
\iVherefore the corpuscuJar doctrine is requirecl for the ex­
amination of colors.

The Hu·mors and Sight.

416. The aqueolls humor. 1ts uses are as follaws: 1. Tint

it may fill the chambers lest they collapse. 2. That it may
anoint the parts of the uvea, the iris, and more, on bath sides,
in arder that they may rightly perform their offices. 3. Sa that
the uvea, pupi! and crystalline Jens ma)' be freely moved as
though in their own atmosphere; wherefore that humaI' seems
to be but !ittle elastic. 4. That it may transmit the rays of light
from the cornea toward the lens-ail things regularly. 5. That
the parts may be equi!ibratcd against the pressure of the out­
side atmosphere; then aiSe> against the vitreous humor, the
crystalline lens mediating. 6. 1t seems to slip in between the
plates of the sclerotic and ta be exuded from the arteries, 50
that the purest blood may come to the uvea, for which reason
only this blood serves it. 7. It seems to be exuded in like
manner from the internai arteries which penetrate the uvea,
which is a final purification of the blood. 8. Thus this humor
although separately (secretus) always performs a use on the
way, for there is a circle of uses. 9. vVherefore from the
greatest peripheries and from the greatest motion about the
conjunction of the sclerotic and the cornea it enters the
place of the greatest rest. IO. It afterwarcls seems ta
be exuded through the pores of the cornea (for the
cornea being touchecl the humor breaks forth), in orcier
that it may always be fresh ancl pellucicl. Ir. Thus it again
performs a use outsicle the uvea over the eye. 12. It seems
that it can be shawn that although the crystalline lens ;s vari­
ously movecl, still that this humor does 110t occupy an)' more
space; for at the bringillg together of the uvea and the lens of
the posterior chamber, the cavity is extenclecl siclewise over the
 THE EYE AND SIGHT.

ciliary ligament; at their removaJ! from one a:nother, how­

ever, it is contracted; for their slipping together and apart is
not so very quick; furthermore it is probably somewhat elastic,
because it is but slightly viscous, so that it may yield.
417. The crysta1line humor or the cr}!stalline lens and its
uses. r. This humor or lens exists in order that there mal' be
a hedge between the aqueous and vitreous humors. 2. Thus
that there may be a covering for the vitreous humor itself. 3.
In order that it may receive the light and its rays, and carry
them back into the retina in the most orclerly manner. 4. It
inverts the ray in an orderly way so that what flows in from the
right mal' Row into the retina at the left ancl vice versa. S.
This is in orcier that it mal' aclapt the general state of light
ancl shacle in the vitreOlls humor, ancl it is thus the organ for
conserving that state. 6. The vitreous humar itself is what
applies itself to all general states, (of which below); that
humor therefore arranges the lens, wherefore the Jens is situ­
atecl in a fold of the vitreous ancl arachnoicl membrane, so 1hat
it mal' obey every mutation of its states. 7. 111 orcier that it
may perform these things it is necessary that it be pellucicl,
formed of plates rather than panels (tabulis) ; 8. so that it may
be of a consistency not harcl, ancl that it may not act violently:
wherefore if the pellucidity ancl softness perish, to that extent
the sharpness of sight perishes, as happens according to age;
see VJïnslow, Petit, and many others ; 9. so that it mal' be con­
vex on both sicles. ra. vVherefore the crystalline lens is vi­
bratile accorcling to ail the genera! mutations of the state of
the eye; it is as it were a balance whose two scale-pans are, the
one which sustains the externa! changes of state or those of the
world, ancl the other which sustains the changes of the st~te
of the brain, wherefore those arising from the state of the optic
nerve and of the retina: wherefore a tunic of the vitreous
humor surrouncls it, ancl at the same time a reticular tunic or
web of the retina, which accompanies it thither, thus in orcier
that every general state may circulate to the Jens as to its
own fu1crum, ancl on the outside accorcling to the state of the
uvea, which acts upon the same Jens by the ciliary ligament,
152 THE SENSES.

wherefore by its own fibres, accorcling to the external state of

light and shade. IL Thence the affection returns immediately
to the orain. and at the same time the affection returns instant­
ly into the retina and the crysta11ine humor, which retina and
crystalline humor concur to induce a change of state imme­
diately upon the lens, as in the other sensories. 12. yVhere­
fore the crystalline lens is a concentration of the general states,
to which it adapts itself, from a concourse of which it coalesces,
is rencwed, and perfected : thus also its state is changed accord­
ing to the change of state of the eye itself. 13. For there is
thus a conespondence of a11 things involved. 14. In order
that the circulation may do this. it seems that the Jens ought to
consist of plates. and that the plates oug'ht to be separated
from each other by a thin Huid; 15. in order that it may take
away every active force from the luminous rays, and that a
conatus may remain, as in the labyrinth of the ear; 16. then in
order that it ma)' temper and suffocate other hurtful vibra­
tions of light and of rays. 17. The purer part of this humor
seems to be absorbed by its own little veins in the uvea.
418. The 'vitrcotts hUllwr and its uses. I. The vitreous
humor exists that it ma} receive the rays, the differences of
light and shade. colors. images thence arising, and refer them
distinctl)' according to mIe to the rctina, which without snch
an intermediate 11t\lllor conld not easily be rlone. 2. That it ma)'
fortify the \vhole retina. in \vhich is the sensory, and preserve i',
50 that it may remain in a state of integrity: wherefore. it is
furnished with a doubie tunic, and in the farthest part is ap­
plied tightly to the retina. 3. This humar exists in order that
it ma)' receive ever)' general change of state, as weil that which
comes from external light. as that which comes from the brain
throngh the optic nerve. and the rest of the nerves; and it al­
together accommodates itself to this end. 4. vVherefore, by
the expansion and contraction of its parts it acts npon the
crystalline lens, and in like manner upon the retina in every
direction, which fo11ows trom the connection of the parts. 5.
Thlls as a balance it accommodates both the external and in­
ternaI state; the external, accorcling to the intenseness of the
light. in like manner the internaI, according ta the state of the
 THE EYE AND SIGHT. 153

thought of the brain or the internaI state, lest the one confuse
the other; this accommodation cannat be accomplished with­
out the vitreo\1s humaI'. 6. By the contraction of the parts it
c1raws the lens and relaxes the retina ta l'very mode and man­
ner, vice versa by its expansion. 7. Thus it induces upon the
retina l'very general state, which cOllting-ency, affections and
many more things plead, sa that under the regular general
state particulars may be more regularly and distinctly marked
out for l'very mode of procedure, and thus that states gelleral
and particular may coincide, 8. and this according ta the ratio
as weil of thequantity as of the qllality of external and internaI
light. 9. These parts of this substance seem ta be formecl al··
togl'ther for the modification of the ether, ta the encl that its
gcneral modification may be concentrated into l'very part, and
at the same time spread abroad into the whole pcriphery,
according ta the nature of that modification. 10. Wherefore
they do not seem ta be dissimilar ta the parts of the ether in sa
far as its modifications are concentrated in those things ",hile
they are dispersecl into the periphery. Ir. In order that the
communication may be better, every part comlllunicates \\-ith
its genl'ral through septa and very thin threads (licia) as else­
where in the body. according to \Vinslow. 12. Althollgh on this
account there are litt1c septa lest the parts be moved from their
own place, according to the nature of that modification. 13.
Then in orcier that they may always have a care for the f1uid,
and that the f1uid may be excreted by this way, thus may be
in a perpetuai state of renovation. 14. vVherefore it is like
the white of an egg, and after cleath (moram?) it evaporates.
15. It sel'ms to be composed of the f1uid which f10ws bet\veen
the fibres throllgh the optic nerve; perhaps also through the
somewhat larger tubules which those fibres form; and its fa!l­
ing in seems to be from periphery to periphery, and to be a
perpetuai communication, and its fallillg out along the septa
into the common membrane and its folding, and to be led back
through the fibres thence originating as it were corporeal, and
through the capillary veins_
419. The retùw,-its uses. 1. The retina exists in order
that it may receive ail images and rays distinctly, which are
154 THE SENSES.

projected through the crysta11ine Jens and the vitreous humor,

2. that according to qua!ity and quantity it may apply them to
itself, and through the fibres of the optic nerve refer them to
the common sensory or the brain, where similar [images] may
be received as in the rest of the sensories. 3. In order that its
purest organic forms, which cannot be distinguished by the
microscope, so they seem to be formed, may receive dis­
tinctly every variation or color of light and shade. 4. Of what
qua lity these form are, can be conjectured in some manner
from the labyrinth of the ear, namely, that they are most
wonderfu11y convoluted, so that they are able to receive and
adapt to themselves every difference, for the little organs are
multiplied as in the \vhole purer world. j. That these forms
are altogether suitable for the modification of the ether, as
the cochlea is for the modification of the air, is indubitable; but
how far they are of such a quality can not he disc1osed, except
in a pro!ix manner by comparison with those two organs, and
by the elevation of this comparison to a superior power and
perfection. 6. Ali rays have in themselves a certain general
state, whence there is an affection; a11 rays have between them
a general state, whence again there is a composite affection;
for particulars according to their harmony and disharmony
forlll a general state, thus particulars among themselves form a
more g'eneral state and so forth. 7. \Vherefore the retina
changes its states for every moment of sight; in order that this
state may agree \Vith single things, the vitreous humor is inter­
jected; and at the same time its !ittle sensories present to a
kind of whole reticular [surface], so that particular images as
soon as taken may return into the general, and communicate
themselves with a11 the little sensories; where the)' concur
about the crystalline lens, and cause that a certain effect may
al ways return. 8. It has been found that the great medu11ary
part can compress itself into a very sma11 peduncle, as the arch
of the fornix in the brain. the peduncles of the cerebe1lum, and
thence amplify themselves, and spread themselves over an im­
mense space, for the fibres can be continued and convoluted
and can spread themselves abroad, thus that while the optic
nerve at first contracts itself into a pec!uncle; thus also effects
 THE EYE AND SIGHT. 155

are more certain if the fibres are at first contracted. 9. Every

single fibre then carries away its own particular, all at once
their own general, and so forth. 10. \tVherefore the sense of
sight is likewise a touch, for that the rays wuch is evident,
from the effect of sneezing excited by solar rays, from the
change of state in objects upon which the rays impinge, from
their concentration to the extent that they excite heat and fire
which melts hard bodies.
420. Therefore sight is accomplished by the trajection of
light through the cornea across the aqueous humor, then the
crystalline and vitreous, into the retina, and from the retina
through the optic nerve into the brain. 2. AIl changes of state
arising from whatever causes, as weIl the external as the in­
ternai, altogether coincide; such is all hannony; for the brain
by its fibres rules all things; and because a general sense per­
vades all the principles of the brain, therefore the affections
thence arising are from the whole brain; 'wherefore the)' are
changes of state that cannot but coincide. 3. The very nexus
of the pa rts and of the tissue are also constructed for that
hannony. 4. Similar harmonies also appear in the atmo­
spheres ta which also their o\-\'n affections are ascribecI. J.
These harmonies refer themselves to the affections of the brain,
but they live, as do sensations, from the life which is in them.
6. To expand these things in particular would be endless, for
there is nothing singular of which there are not end ess varie­
ties; these varieties many times multiplied with endless varie­
ties constitute enless things (indefinita).
421. The a-rteries of the eye. r. There are several branches
of the external carotid 'which enter, as well from the temporal
as from the maxillary carotid, according to Winslow. 2. There
are also branches from the branches of the internai carotid,
which together with the optic nerve are brought to the retina.
3· How the blood purifies the branches of the external carotid
of its serum before that blood enters the eye, is evident from
many things, as, for instance; 4. this is done by ait five
branches to the glands, the palate, and the nase; 5. especiaIly to
the parotid under the ear; 6. by the branches to the lachrymal
gland and ta the sebaceous glands of the eyelids; 7. by the
 THE SENSES.

branches between the plates of the sc!erotic themselves; 8. by

trajection perpendicularly to the choroid; 9. in the black sub­
stance through the little vortices. 10. This to such extent
that there may be innumerable steps of purification before the)'
come into the uvea and its apparatus, and about the mem­
brane of the vitreous humor, the texture of which it seems to
select and to form [into J septa, which may act as passives. IL
The blood of the internai carotid is sufficiently purified in the
brain. 12. It concords entirely with the motion of the brai n, as
also does the optic nerve, wherefore it flows into the retina, 13.
then accordingly \Vith the circulatory motion at the moments of
the animation of the brain; wherefore the circulation and the
external vibratory motion in the carotid agree, thus they
harmonize in the retina. 14. \:Vherefore also the veins form
the sinus of the orbits, and agree with the sinuses of the brain ;
IS. which is a sign that the eye enjoys a kincl of alternate ani­
matory motion, together with the synchronous motion of the
brain, to "vhich the oerves and fibres also contribute. 16. Be­
cause the eyes are as it were two succenturiate brains, the in­
ternaI artery of the caratid flows into the very substance of the
optic nerve, which substance is of the brain. 17. Ail the
changes of state of the sensory according to the state of the
brain require that the circulation of the blood in the arteries
and its animatory motion shall harmonize; IS. but otherwise
the motions, as the l11uscular fibres require one influx of blaod.
another action of the fibre, in arder that they may alternate; 19.
therefore the external arteries of the carotid flo\V into the ex­
terior and interior mDtor fibres of the eye, 20. and l'un to­
gether about the arteria! circ!e, sa that the external and internaI
changes of state may harmonize into one. 21. How wonderful
this is, is to be wondered at. 22. They serve ta bind the little
sensories, ta form the common tunics as the reticular tunic of
the retina, perhaps also the tunic of the vitreous lcns. 23. Tlms
they have a passive quality while the papil1<e or organs arising
from the fibres have an active quality.
422. The optic n-erve. 1. It is not easy ta describe the
origins of the fibres of the optic nerve, because on account of
the very subtle medul1ary substance which they bear and pass
 THE EVE AND SlGHT. 157

through, and especially on account of the softness of these

fibres the origins cannot be detected by sight. 2. Nor while we
treated of the brain couic! a description conformable to an idea
be given. 3. It is evident that the first origins of those nerves
appear in the anterior ventric1es, where they are called the
thalami of the optic nerves, proximately l1nder the corpora
striata, where they proceed into the bombycine sinuses (sinus
bombycinl1s), and thence they are reflected through the medul­
lar)' substance, which Vieusscns calls the midclJe region of the
oval centre. 4. But still it can appear that those fibres clerive
their origin from the cerebrum and indeed not far from the
umbones, where the cortical beginnings are in their greatest
expansion, partly also from elsewhere, then also perchance on
the \Vay in the thalami themselves, and in the nerves, for
Vieussens mentions having seen a kind of cineritious substancc
interspersed through the nerves themselves; wherefore this is
in those thalami partiy by way of the copora striata, in which
way the fibres are reflected, partly from the cerebellum, partly
from the middle region where they cross that medullary part.
S. This must be confessecl, that they comml1nicate \Vith aIl the
medl1lla of the wholc brain, to the extent that there is scarcely
a fibre \vith which they do not communicate, that is to say in
the very union of the nerves with aIl the medulla which de­
scends through the corpus callosum into the base of the fornix,
and from this ; for their heads inc1ine thither together \Vith the
medullary fibre which descends through the corpora striata,
then \Vith the fibre which communicates with the isthmus,
further by the passages through the medu1!a of the brain before
emerging with the medullary part of the middle oval region.
6. These things are to the end that every modification may pass
over to the universal circuit and cortex of the brain, and that
there may be a mediate communication with the cortical sub­
stance of the sinciput or frontal portion. 7. But we will pass
these tl1ings by.
423. ln rega.rd to the passage of the optic nerve through the
brain these things must be observed: 1. That from its origin in
the ventric!es even to its insertion into the orbit and the eye,
there is a triple infJection and reflection, altogether into the
158 THE SENSES.

l11anner of a spiral; for in the ventricles they are inflected to­

\Yards the bOl11bycine sinuses, thence they are inflected to a
union and from the union again the)' are inflected, and near the
eye the)' are reflccted into a sl11all orb. 2. Thus in order that
there ma)' be a spiral which is thin about the eye, but expanded
and dilated where it approaches its origins. 3. the purer fibres
'vvill to be bent into such a spiral according to their own nature
and that of the flux of their spirits. 4. The fibre itself also goes
off towards the cortex of the brain into a curve (flexlIl11), to the
extent that a perpetuai spiral may be manifested in the com­
pound itself. S. The origins of those things exist in the ven­
tricles, which are alternately expanded and constricted, and
proceed through the medullary substance, ail of which things
are similarly twisted, to the end that that animatory motion of
the brain may be here in like manner intwisted. 6. Thlls both
the fibres and the vessels which copiollsly penetrate are estab­
lished in a flood of motion, and ail flow in a most facile potenc)'
and kincl of natural spontaneity. 7. 1'0 these fibres in their be­
ginnings aH liberty is conceded; for they are extant in the
ventricles, nothing hinders on the part of the cavity but that
every transflux of the spirits and of the blood takes place most
freely anG without constriction. 8. There is sllch astate every­
where in the beginnings of the brain that aIl things may be
rightly united, may be most free, may play as it were in tender
things, may be united, in whatsoever manner nature cIictates;
the ventricular cavity confers as mu ch as possible to that
liberty. 9. Thus provision is made in the best manner for the
organ, which approaches proximately to the nature of the
brain. and by which the mind is especially to be instructed. ra.
But according to custom of that same nature after the abund­
an ce of this liberty it is afterwarcls constrictcd and compressed
into a smalIer fascicle, as. for instance, the fornix in the cere­
brum, and the pedllncIe of the cerebellllll1 : and thus it expands
itself and binds itself to its own c!tlties; thus ail things can .be
rightly determined; \\"ithout at first a narrower compression
into a fascicle, alll determinations would be in ultimatcs nor
would they be limited, but -.vould flow off as outlaws; this is the
reason why its l11edulla is compressed into a Inore narrow fas­
 THE EYE AND SIGHT. 159.

cicle. I1. Thence all things obey the nod of the brain constitut­
ed in its own liberty while in beginnings; and to the boul1dary
and from the boulldary they rightly flow to the goal. I2. The
origins of the nerves flow from the greatest motion to the least
or to rest or to the port whcn they flow to the eye, the greatest
motion is into the ventric1e, less into the bombycine sinuses,
about the infundibulum, wherefore about the sella turcica, when
the)" are united it is stil1less, in the orbit least, final1y, there is no
motion. I3. \\iherefore ail htl1nOrs necessary to the eye flow
thither spontaneously, and are as it were twisted, thither; but
others than those which are due pass by, for the nerve is there
compressed into a fascicle. I4. It cannot be wanting from this
reason but that every single fibre, and at the same time, every
single little vessel of the internai carotid, which follo\Vs [the
optic nerve] and penetrates broadly into the eye, according to
the experience of Ridley, should be in the animation of the
brain, wherefore that the eye itself. especially the retina, is
vibrated in such a manner; for \Vith those movements the spirit
is poured through the fibres of which it cannot be deprived,
while the strength of that animation with so facile potency and
curvature cxtencls thither, so that thus on account of this
reason the brain seems to have transcribed ail its potency into
the eyes. I5. Every animation of the brain scatters the spirit
about through the fibres, and takes place by the spirit itself
thus more interiorly, but every sensation thus takes place
through the fibres and tunics thus more exteriorly; wherefore
the tunics of the fibres are exposed to the modifications, upon
which the rays impinge. The one cornes from the prior thus to
posterior things dowmvards, the other from the posterior thus
to prior things up\Vard; thence there is a circ1e from sensation
to perception and understanding, from the understanding to
the "viII and thus determination, or from outmosts to inmosts,
frOIl) inmosts to outmosts. I6. Therefore also the internai car­
otids follow, for the circulation of their blood agrees \Vith the
sa11le movements. I7. Thence the venous blûod is drawn off
înto the sinuses. But we have treated of these things above.
424. The use of the third pair of nerves, or the C01nmon
motor nervcs ~f the eye. I. vVhen the brain has been formed,
160 THE SENSES.

it appears that it designs nothing sooner than inducing diverse

states upon its eyes, wherefore it covers up ail the succeeding
nerves, or branches from them, from the second to the seventh
pair inclusively; for the eyes are succenturiate brains, and are
added as organs proximately for its operations. 2. As saon
therefore as the eye is formed, it establishes the states of its
motion, for which end it sends forth the third pair, and is sep­
arated into four or five filaments, and indeed it sencls them
forth ta four muscles, namely, ta the elevator, to the adductor,
to the depressor, and to the inferior oblique. 3. Thus it estab­
lishes its rotary motion and its mutatio:1s of state, 4. and in­
deed to those muscles in which the eye especially regards the
brain, for they draw the eye successively and at the same time
towards the interiors or towards the nose, altogether as when
we think intently, then we are accustomed to draw the eye up­
ward toward the lid and ta the nose and ta cut off the light
from it, sa that there may be freedom for the thoughts of the
brain, according to the idea of the painted philosopher (phil­
osophi picti), sa that thus these muscles may subject the eye ta
the brain but not draw it thence. 4. How it institutes and es­
tablishes al! these mutations of state, looking to this work, both
the external and internaI mutations by one nerve can be seen,
5. and indeed so that the states of external motion may concur
altogether \Vith the internaI, and the former and the latter with
the affections of the brain, which are the causes of the muta­
tions. 6. At first it sends forth this its nerve anteriorly from
that very region where the motion of the brain ceases and that
of the medulla oblongata begins, and mutually concur \Vith
each other, wherefore in the ultimate boundary of its sphere,
and the first of the sequent medulla. where it is subjected to the
motion of the cerebellum, thus in the place of its greatest
equilibrium; 7. namely, just above the annular protuberance,
where the planum striatum continued from the cerebrum abolit
ta enter the medulla oblongata coalesces; it is not far from the
first prominences of the infundibulum; 8. and in arder that
each nerve of the pair may act for one end it comes forth
jointly and from one root in united fibres. 9. Thus it par­
ticipates also in the filaments of the cerebrum and of the 'cere­
 THE EYE AND SIGHT. 161

bellum, for the action of this nerve is natural and voluntary.

JO. 1t runs through also thence ta the places of its highest
equilibrium, that is ta say to the juncture of the two carotids,
and ta the juncture of the two sinuses of the base, to the sella
equina, where it enters the sinus cavernosi, where is sitnated
the center of the os basilare or the sphenoid, IL thence to the
axis of the cranium or ta the sphenoid fissure, thus into the
orbit. 12. 1ts first branch goes to the e1evator of the eye,
which draws the eye up toward the brain, and subjects its sight
to the sight of the brain, 13. and in arder that the external state
of the upper lîds may cOnCltr, it even sends forth a shoot or
frondicula to its muscle, wherefore we see, as in a mirror, that
the upper lid applies itse1f altogether ta the motion of the pup;]
or eye; the pupil in the circumvolution of the eye is just under
the edge of the upper lid (pupill<e?), as has been observed
..bove. 14. Thus it joins the outmost state of motion with the
motiùn of the eye itself. 15. Then with other offshoots it goes
to the adductor muscle, another to the depressor, another to the
inferior oblique; thus it establishes a motion which turns or dis-
poses the sight of the eye to the sight of the brain, 16. so that
now it may unite external motions with internaI ones, or that of
the nvea itself, of the iris and perhaps of the lentiform with ex-
ternal motions or states, or with the states of external motion. a
small branch forms a kind of gangliform lens, and thence sends
forth a shoot about the optic nerve, which it encircles, 17. thus
the prior external state of the motor of the eye is joined with
the motor state of the optic nerve, for that nerve bends itself at
the same time as the eye; see Winslow. 18. At the same time
also it joins, by mcans of the optic nerve, the internaI states of
the eye with the external, which must be done from a new begin-
ning or from a formed little ganglion, for they differ sometime~
especially when the will or cerebrum actuates the motions of
the eye, not so when nature actuates it; 19. wherefore also from
that ganglîform lens it sends forth fibres or filaments bet\veen
the scleïOtie tunie and the ehoroid, even to the iris, and into the
muscles of the uvea. 20. Thus external states are united with
internaI ones by means of the optie nerve, 21. the states of eaeh
tunie, the sclerotic and the choroid at the same time, and thns
II
162 THE SENSES.

the state of the iris and of the pupil, which ought to agree w;th
the state of the optic nerve. 22. vVherefore ail the affections of
the cerebrum and the cerebellum reflecting upon the optic
nerve, whence are the mutations of state. InternaI motions and
sites altogether harmonize, yea, those of the vitreous humor, nf
the cr)'stalline lens, of the retina. 23. By means, therefore, of
this nerve is establishcd the harmony of ail the external and in­
ternai states of the eye, a'Jd they are accommodated ta the
affections of the brain, with wonderful wisdom.
425. The ~tSes of the fourth pa'Ïr of nerves or of the nerve
of the troch/ear. I. This one in like manner as the former
springs from the place of the greatest equilibrium, or from the;
place of meeting of the motions of the cerebrum and the cere­
bellum; 2. but not from the anterior part as the former, but
from the poste ri or part, about the region of the testes, not far
from the isthmus, where the first or transverse process of the
cerebellum arises; thus respective!y ta the former pair, the
nerve of which is conjoined, but the determination of the one
is anteriorl)', that of the other, however, posteriorl)', in the same
li ne where the meeting and equilibrium between bath brains
holds s\Yay. 3. Thus it seems ta receive filaments from both
the cerebru111 and the cerebellum, and it is subject to the author­
it)' of bath, or ta the will and nature, which also becomes evi­
dent from its action. 4. This pair likewise but by a longer v,'a'
runs forward in bath directions near thé septum of tl­
meninges and near the si de of the annular protuberance, ta tn<. ~
sella cquina into the sinus cavernosi, bet\veen the nerve of the
third and the sixth pair. 5. Indeed it runs above the third pair
and the rest of the nervcs whicl:. it touches, 6. This nerve goes
ta the trochlcar muscle or the superior oblique. which is the
equilibrator of the four former nerves, ta the extent that th:s
one muscle accu pies one balance of motion, while the other
four occupy the other, thus they correspond ta each other; for
those four llluscles without this trochlear couId not be al"
restecl and held back, according ta Winslow and others, hence
a separate nerve is rcquired which may actuate the other cause,
wherefore it runs forth from the opposite sicle in the meclulla
oblongata: that the office of this muscle is snch may appear
 THE EYE AND SIGl-lT.

manifestly from the application of its mataI' fibres. 7. And

lest the motions of the l'est of the muscles should disagree, but
that they may be reduced ta a unanimous one, ln the passages
it also imparts filaments ta them, sa that thus it conjoins itself
with the l'est of the muscles, in arder that there may be a
ratio of equilibrium and co-operation ta the same end. 8. Per­
haps even together with branches of the third and fifth pair
conjoined by fibrils it also goes ta that gangliform lens, for
many filaments inflow into it, and it thus actuates some equiI­
ibration and agreement among the external and internaI
changes of state of the optic nerve and of the pupi!, and of the
rest of the apparatus in the eye.
426. The uses of the lifth pair, espccially of the brallcJl of
it which gocs ta the e)!c. 1. 1t originates on bath sicles of the
protuberance, it saon commur.icates with the branches of the
dura mater, th en in the receptacula cavernosa it forms a gang­
lion: the trunk is saon c1ividecl into three branches which cross
the sinus cavernosi. The fm;t branch is the ophthalmic or
orbita l'y nerve; it passes through the sphenoidal fissures, it
first communicates with the nerve of the sixth pair and
with the intercostal nerve; it is divic1ed into thrce branches:
the first or frontal branch gives filaments ta the fat of the or­
bit. ta the neighboring membranes, ta the elevator muscle of
the orbit. ta the frontal muscle. ta the superciiiary muscle, ta
the orbicular muscle or muscle of the teguments, together with
the hard portion of the auditory nerve. The Second or nasal
brancll toward the sicle of the nase, communicates with the
ganglion of the third pair, it also crosses above the oJltic
nerve, gives off filaments ta the elevator muscles, ta the
internai canthus near the canmcuia lachrymalis. ta the neigh­
boring parts of the orbicular muscle, the muscle of the eye­
brows. the pyramidalis nasi. the teguments: an offshoot goes
ta the nase, but by reflection, ta the cranium, ta the cribriform
plate. A third branch goes especially ta the lachrymal gland,
perçhance it is bound ta the dura mater; before it goes ta the
I?.chrymal gland, it sends off a \ittle branch ta the external
iateral part of the orbit. ta the neighboring part of the tem­
poral muscle, ta that cf the orbicular of the eyelids, of the
 THE SENSES.

masseter, of the teguments, of the conjunctive membrane, ta

the fat; together with the third pair it enters the eye even ta
the uvea. The superior maxillary nerve also gives off fila­
ments ta the fat of the orbit; it is distributed ta the pituitary
membrane, ta the mouth, ta the sockets of the teeth, ta the
ml1scles of the eyelic1s, ta the neighboring parts of the nase
and lips, ta the teguments; it communicates with the seventh
pair, at the palate, the pterygoid muscles, the peristaphlinu~
muscles, those of the pharynx, of the posterior nase, at the
Eustachian tube. The ùlferior 1/wX!:zlary nerve gives off fila­
ments ta the tangue, the temporal muscle, the concha of the ear
and its neighboring parts, ta the masseter, to the buccinator, ta
the muscle of the lower lip, ta the pterygoid muscles, ta the
buccinator muscles, ta the buccal glands, ta the muscles of the
lips, ta the concha of the ear, ta the neighboring parts of the
nase, etc. 2. This nerve is the 1110St general communicator
and regulator of inmost things with outmost; thus it exists in
arder that it may consociate aU states, for nature thus pro­
ceec1s to more general things; as in the eye, there, with the
nerve of the third pair, it enters the eye itself, surrounds the
optic nerve, enters the ganglion of the third pair; thus it ap­
proaches in like manner inmost and outmost things, as the
muscles of the eye, of the lic1s, of the eyebrows, of the frontal
parts, and moves the outmost state or the muscles of the eye
generally. 3. Thus it communicates the states of sensation
with the state of the changes, by means of the state of the
affections of the brain; far it surrounds the optic nerve, enters
the eye itself, perhaps the vitreous humor, thus it actuates a
more general cause. 4. Inc1eed it c1isposes the state of the
glands for the conservation of the eye, which is the second
thing, wherefore it approaches the lachrymal gland, the rest
of the glands, the lachrymal sac, the nostrils: this nerve it is
which presses out the tears according ta the state of the brain,
wherefare it adjoins itself somewhat closely ta the dura
mater, before it approaches the lachrymal gland, and gives
off filaments ta the dura mater; thus it properly connects the
outmost states of the brain, or those which reflect in ta the
dura mater, with the inmost states of the eye. 5. The fifth
 THE EYE AND SIGHT. 165

pair also conjoins the outmost states of the eye with the out­
most state of the face, or the outmost muscles of the eye with
the rest of the muscles, wherefore it goes to them, and conjoins
itself variously with the seventh pair. 6. It likewise conforms
the rest of the senses, as taste or that of the tongue, sme11
or that of the nostrils, hearing or that of the ear, with their
motions, likewise as in the eye. 7. It conjoins the states of
a11 the sensories with one another, that they may not disagree;
wherefore it is a universal regulator. 8. It conjoins also in
sorne way the states of the body with the states of the head;
wherefore it reflects filaments into the great intercostal nerve.
9. It seems to derive its filaments from the cerebrum and the
cerebe11ul11, so that its function may be both natural [i. e.} in­
voluntary] and voluntary. la. The filaments which are of
the cerebrum, or those which communicate with the filaments of
the cerebrum in the medu11a oblongata, seem to receive sensa­
tions; the filaments which seem [to go] into the muscles seem
to be of the cerebellum; thus it joins sensations with natural
[involuntary] motions, in orcier that they may altogether co­
incide: thus it joins nature to the understanding, or the cere­
bellum to the cerebrum: this is evident from its whole func­
tion. II. But to give the office of this nerve distinctly would
be too prolix; ta do this would require a whole treatise on
the organism of animal [animate?] motion. 12. Thus then
in the eye this nerve seems to conjoin sight with motion, so
that a11 things may be harmonious according to affections.
13. From this nerve also it appears how titillation in the
nostrils by means of snuff, etc., affects the eye, because the
dura mater is excited, to which it adheres, which thus vibrates
the lachrymal gland, ancl the rest of the eye; 14. Also that
it is especia11y the nerve which causes sneezing, for it carries
the dura mater away intoconvulsions; it also moves the in­
tercostal part, as the lungs, thus the nostrils, the eyes, the
larynx, the palate, and a11 else that it approaches; and it does
this by communication with the sixth pair.
427. The use of the sixt/t pair} or externa./ 111O'tor nerve.
1. This nerve also is expencled almost only upon the abductor
muscle of the eye. 2. It arises from the lowest part of the
 166 THE SENSES.

annular protuberance near the cavity of the vertebrai parts

(vertebralium cavita,te1"I'1) , just above the corpora olivaria. 3.
From the use of the muscle it is known why this nerve is also
expended upon the motion of the eye. 4. For the abductor
is the antagonist of ail the four or five other muscles, as the
trochlear is the antagonist or equilibrator of the four former
muscles; therefore it draws away. S. Ail the rest of the
nerves and muscles as it were cqnjoin the sight of the e)'e
to the brain, for they draw it toward the superior parts, also
imvard; but this muscle disjoins and averts the sight of the
eye from the sight of the brain. 6. Thus it is of an altogether
different function, although it aets in consort \Vith the other
muscles; for the others consociate, this c1raws asuncier, as
ma)' appear from those who, while the)' are thinking, dilate
the eye, and thereby admit much light into the eye. 7. It
rules itself in consultation \Vith the other muscles; it is joined
by branches to the ophthalmic nerve of the fifth pair.
428. The uses of the seventh ha-rd pair. 1. This muscle,
rules besides the ear, the whole muscular face. 2. To it is
adjoined the fifth pair, which unites sensations with motions.
3. Rence also it goes to the frontal muscles, ta the palpe­
bral muscles, and, together with the fifth pair, is conjoined ta
the other parts of the eye. 4. Thence arises the universal
harmony of aIl the parts. S. Special and particular harmonies
can be produccd everywhere, for no fibl-e, nor even a little
point, clesignates [anythingJ without regard to use. 6.vVhere­
fore the working out of the particulars is an extremely vast
undertaking; it is enough if it be of the generals, for this is the
science of sciences; particulars draw away the icleas from the
iclea of generals; he \-vho sticks long in particl1lars, never be­
comes a capable investigator of generals.
429. The e'yes of fnsects. From Leeuwenhoek: The single
optic organs seem ta be circumscribed by six sicles; in the sea- .
crab, called squilla, by a quadrilateral figure. In every organ
a very small circle is shown. He also saw a great abundance
of pellucid particles interspersecl among the optic nerves. In
the fiy there are eyes looking upward, horizontally and clo\vn­
warel. A fiy is fl1rnished with twelve thousand five hUl1drerl
 THE EYE AND SIGHT.

and forty-fom eyes. In the 11l0rdella were noticed twenty­

five thousand and eighty-eight lucie! particles in the single
eyes; three circ1es, at least, surrounded the pellucie! point.
In the mordella he saw single round parts distinctly separate
from each other, ane! in .their inter~tices there appeared a kine!
of thin light; he representee! an invertecl flame, and many
flames at once. He distingllished the motion of the single
parts.
S'WammerdG11tm: The llvea [cornea?], which coule! be
taken off, appeared on the surface ;behind this the cornea
[uvea?]. It was furnishecl with hexagonal divisions. In the
cancellus the optic nerves rnn down by decussation above the
brain; they end in the surface of a spherical forl11. The cor­
neal tunic is divided like a net; the divisions are hexagonal;
a gelatinous matter was sticking in the cavities of the divisions
of the cornea. That gelatinous matter is involved in innul1ler­
able fibres. The fibres make a pyramie! ; they are ail terminat­
cd in a gray substance, under this were the optic nerves, all of
them were composed as it were of globules: here there is a
decllssation of the optic nerves in the brain itself. In respect
to the bee: there were two eyes and three smaller ones inter­
jected between them; there is an external cornea; the di­
visions are into globules: they believe therefore that they are
many little eyes; the little intercepted masses are globular,
wherefore the eye has the appearance of a net; the uvea Sl1C­
ceeds to the cornea; it is next to the surface; it is not per­
forated; on the inner surface of the cornea there is a some­
what opaque matter, becoming red (pul'purascells), in some it
is green, etc. Dncler the llvea there are as many fibres as
there are divisions of the cornea, hexagonal above but becorn­
ing acuminate below. They form a hexagonal pyramid. The
fibres also are stained .vith a like color. Ali the fibres end in
the underlying membrane; the fibres are connectee! with the
cornea: There are innllmerable air tubes which ascend. Dn­
der this membrane there lies another thinner one; then still
another kind of fibres is discerned, upon which are superimpos­
ed the pyramie!al fibres, but fewer of them ; these fibres cohere
 r68 THE SENSES.

to the brain; they are of the same color as the brai n, they are
similar to the cortical substance; the brain appears within.
In some also the pupil can be covered or c1osed. *
430. 2. From. the use of the eyes of insects of every kind
if ma)' appear, in agreement with the principles given above,
what qua./ity of teJ.-ture of eye has falten to the lot of each
one. 1. That the eyes must be very simple and very perfect,
because they are in a purer and simpler world. 2. That they
can see more minute, indeed most minute, objects, such as they
collect, choose and carry \Vith their delicate little mouths
and tongues from leaves and other things met with. 3. That
the same little objects are seen by them at a very short distance.
4. That they recognize from sight \Vhether they are suitable,
wherefore they seem to have at the same time a purer sense of
smel!. S. That since their eye is their purest sense,-the
sense by which is the most immediate relation to the nature
and instinct of their soul,-therefore their eyes must con­
stitute, as it were, the essence of their brain. 6. That they
seem to be made for shady rather than for bright light. 7.
That they can look in every direction. 8. That they can
avert dangers, such as would offend and disturb those very
delicate organs. 9. That they have a kind of hearing in their
eyes. 10. Thus the)' clraw in ail those things which happen
in apurer deg-ree of nature, whither our most perfect micro­
scope can scarcely penetrate.

*Swammerdamm's own words in the place whicn is evidently referred

to (translated from the German). seem to contradiet this. They are:
"But how is it with the sight of bees and other inseets? l anS'ser
that the structure of their eyes proves as clear as the sun that the
sight with these is not brought about as with us, that is, by the pene­
tration of the ravs of light through the pupil into the net-like mem­
brane. but through a 111ere contact of the inverted pyramidal fibres,
which set in motion the light, forced through the cornea. These eyes
are therefore so constructed, that they can receive the images of things
by a mere casting forth of the repelled light, which, in fact. must be
an exceeding delicate sense. And since the pupil does not so close itself
with insects as with us. nor have they a hole. theil' ,ight must be most
complete, because they can constantly receive a large mass of rays.
Renee it also happens that many insects can see in the night," etc.
 THE EYE AND SIGHT. 169

431. Thér eyes must be very pure and very perfect be­
cause they are in apurer world. 1. For there are insects
which scarcely equal one degTee of our sight, sa that they can­
nat be seen except with a very good microscope. 2. There are
also larger forms the eyes of which still are not seen without
a microscope, but the il' eyes taken together present ta our
sight a confused mass, as, for instance, fEes, bees, etc. 3. The
abjects wh'ich they see must be of a like degree, sa that they
may recognize the difference between the parts ta which they
apply themselves, 4. in arder that they may pick out, choose,
and take apart those things; that they may see particIes, in­
finite in respect ta the smallest part of our eye, from which
they ma)' pick out those agreeable ta them; S. wherefore they
have been furnished with the smallest eyes, which can per­
ceive those parts 1110St distinctly, as do microscopes of a smail
sphere or diameter: 6. yet in order that they may see these
things very distinctly, they are given many eyes which together
perceive one thing; for the more organs there are, so llluch
the more distinctl)' and exquisitel)' they perceive; many
eyes are better than one. In purer nature, forms which
agree are multipl ied; thus also one form keeps another
in its own state. 8. \Vherefore the organic fonTIs of the brain
are most numerous, likewise the organic forms of the body or
of the smallest follide, glandule or branch. 9. Every viscus
derives its perfection from its smallest, and indeecl its multi­
plied parts, those parts always having respect ta motions. IO.
Thus also they are safer from every danger and mutation, for
they,. at the same time, conserve one another, and guard the
integrity of their form.
432. Thence it follows that the}' see thel:r objects at the
shortest distance. 1. This follows from their very small, as
it were microscopic, sphere~; 2. from the very near application
of insects to their food. 3. Thus they cio not see colors as we
do; for we see from the difference of many rays and from
the ratio of light ~tt1d shade in colors, while they see distinctly
every ray whether luminous or shady. 4. This also appears in
microscopes, in that man)' rays ::tt once proc\uce a color, but
liO THE SENSES.

when inspectecl singly they show no such thing; 5. but rather

l'very single part shows something luminous or dusky, which
parts taken together produce something colored, as innumer­
able insects together, the parts of the bloocl, amI many things
of the vegetable kingc1ol11 inspccted singly. 6. That which is
white, becol11es pe11ucid in a partic1e.
433. Their sight see111S to be effected in this wa:y: 1. Be­
cause there is a c1ifference in a11 insects, for there is nowhere
any greater difference than in the purest things of nature, for
there nature is in its l'very sport of varieties, nor rloes any­
thing hinder it. 2. Let us take only bees for an exal11ple; the
eyes of other insects approach thel11 in g-encral, but are c1if­
ferent in particular: then because bees are furnishecl with five
eyes, but l'very eye is subdividcd into many, 3. there is an al­
together different structure from our eyes, but they agree i:l.
general with the rules of our sight, which have been treated
of above. 4. One thing of perfection in thern is, that they
undergo changes of state more perfectly, because their affec­
tions are more perfectly excitecl, which affections are the
causes of their instincts, ancl because their affections spring
from their soul, in the nature of which there is nothing volun­
tary, thus there are perpetuai changes of state, accorJing to
l'very macle and variety of sensation. 5. As to the progression
of their sight it appears to be of this kind: 6. first, the rays
pass through into their clivided corneas, which being convex
receive the rays as they are receivec1 in our eyes, but they re­
ce ive more simple rays which they distinguish, and which
larger eyes do not distinguish; a single ray of our sight is
innumerable in their eyes, wherefore they see quite sma11 things
more distinctly than we. 7. Second, such a collection of rays
in each division of the cornea, is receivec1 indeecl by the under­
lying membrane which is calleel the uvula, (but it seems to
be rather the proximate involucre), which, according ta the
quantity and qua lity of light, is varied, is attenllated, becomes
thick, is variollsly colorecl, grows red. grows green, is obscur­
l'J, where also from the diversity of the cGlors of that uvea,
(concerning which Swammerc1am speaks), it is collectee!;
 THE EYE AND SIGHT. 171

fllrthermorc, ",hat in some is su ch an involucre, can III others

be externally drawn over like an eyelid; in a word, lest the
luminous rays rush in too much upon the tender contexture
of underlying fibres without moderation; 8. third, these fibres
are concentrated by the fibres or membranous fascic1es which
cohere to the uvea and cornea supcriorly, and to the ccm­
mon membrane inferiorly, so that they seem to be membranous
productions; in this respect also authorities agree, that ;s to
say, that they cohere, that they are divided into fascicles, in
imitation of certain living things in thcir optic nerves, where,
although membranous convolutions appear, they are only to
the end that the rays of evcry little eye may be concentrated,
as in our eyes in the crystalline lens; wherefore they emulate
our aqueous humor and the pupil, which there concentrates
more perfectly and distinctly, for the concentration itself is so
organically deduced that it may fall directly into the common
membranous plane from every eye: otherwise from so many
eyes there would not he a correct concentration; and lest the
rays be dissipateel, these membranolls fibres arc also 'stained
>vith a like color as the uvea, namely, red, green, dusky, which
col ors will conveniently absorb al1 aberrant rays. 9. F ourtlt,
in oreler that there may also be a convolution of the rays, or
of the ether actuated by the rays, there are, rounel about these
membranous fibres, as it were globular fibres, perfectly form­
eel for the modification of the ether; thel1ce there is a coml11on
moelification round about, which contains the particular modi­
fications within it; in order that a1l particular modifications may
appear more distinctly, and may flow according to rule,­
the common modification, which flows round about accorc1ing
to the gyration of its own nature, perforl11s this office. IO.
Flfth, Then the common double membrane receives it; this
membrane receives the pure tremors of a1l the little eyes, thus
concentratecl; this membrane is affecte cl by that common
tremiscence the more perfectly, since it is concentrated, and it
comes from so very many eyes and concentrations. The com­
mon plane \vi1l receive as iri larger eyes; wherefore this mem­
brane pcrforms the same office that the crystalline lens, and at
 THE SENSES.

the same time the vitreous humor, performs in the larger eye;
wherefore that membrane is double and very thin, scarcely con­
sisting of anything except of pulmonary tubules. It deserves
to be observed here, that nature everywhere, even in the mat­
ter of sight, collects the first and the one of ail things, and as it
were, reduces it into a kind of chaos, before it separates and
renders ail things distinct; it pours them into a one in order
that it may thence take out [what it chooses] ; it is done thus
in the viscera; in the other senses also ail things are at first
referred to a common membrane, as smell, to the pituitary
membrane, touch, to the reticular membrane, so also taste. II.
Sixth, from this membrane every modification passes into
the fibres of the optic nerve, which fibres also form pyramids,
and under this membrane they are appenc1ed and are contigu­
ous [to it] ; thus every ray enters its own composition of rays,
as has been observed of sound and of the retina; the cru der
ray enters many fibres at once, the thinner and simpler rays,
fewer fibres; this is the first distinction and llnfolding of the
rays from this common chaos of concentrations. 12. Seventh,
in these optic nerves, which are also multiplied, but not like
the eyes and their pyramids, [but rather] like little organs
not dissimilar to those in our own retina or in the cortical sub­
stances of the brain, (to which also Swammerdam likens
them) 1 which receive the rays and thus clistinguish them, there
is this other distinction and purification of the rays; almost
as in the ear, the modifications of which also in general agree.
13. Eighth, from these little organs the optic nerves tend
through the fibres ta the brain, and indeed immec!iately into
the cineritious substance, where the fibres terrninate. and the
little organs of which correspond to the little organs of the
optic nerve; this is the last purification and distinction of the
rays. 14. Thus sight seems to be effected in the bee, and in
other insects similarly in general, and thus more distinctly than
in larger and binocular animais. These are the successive
things which appear here congested into one globe and thus
simultaneous. The structure can be varied in an cndless
number of other ways, altogether according to use; for nothing
 THE EYE AND SIGHT. 173

hinders in nature, when the purest essences intend an end;

ail things then accommociate themselves to it; for the world
and nature were thus and hereunto made, nameIy, in order
that they may be obedient to spiritual potencies in aIl things,
and thus the natural worId as an instrumental cause be sub­
ject to the spiritual worId as its principal cause. The spiritual
worId of insects resides in their brains; the organic forms
round about are constructed entirely for the ends of that
world.
434. From the abO've observations il 'Wou Id appear, that
the brain of insects is moment by mOlnent affected according
to ail the harmonies of rays, wlûch harmonies agree with the
na.ture of their smû. 1. For every single least ray selects its
own fibres or rather collection of fibres, 2. and it modifies
them suitably. 3. The fibres likewise select their animal spirit
and the principal or cortical substance of the brain; 4. where­
fore the whole brain selects. S. The brain cannot but har­
monically consent to everything which agrees with the spirits,
that is, the soul of those fibres, wherefore which agrees with
the blood. 6. Every instinct, appetite, and aversion of what
is good and evil, in respect to their known nature, arises from
that affection. 7. Sight is their la st and inmost sense, in place
of our understanding; insects are excited in spite of them­
selves; wherefore eyes in brutes are, as it were, succenturiate
brains; they are still more l1umerous in insects; in which they
occupy the whole circumference. and makc one thing with the
brains, which are only a central nucleus; th us they coaiesce
with the brains. 8. Furthermore, there seems in other animaIs
ta be a kind of imagination, or an iterated composition of
images, whence are imaginative or material ideas, thus in
a certain successive form; but in insects there is no imagina­
tion, but only an action of the rays, which affect the brain im­
mediately, wherefore the mass of the sensory of sight. is sa
greatly enJarged and constitutes the external brain itself. Af­
fections in other animaIs are from a higher principle. but in
insects they spring from the eyes alone, in oreler that they
may be entirely subject to the influx of the whole world:
174 THE SENSES.

this also is the reason for sa manl' el'es, and there is an ex­
quisite operation of the rays. clifferent from what it is in
other animaIs, ;\ncl clifferent from what it is in man who is
gifted with unclerstanc\ing. Thus from the eyes one can
conclucle comparatively as to the brain, what quality of sen­
sation each one has, wherefore what gracle of unc\erstancling.
9. Therefore the sight of insects is guarclecl, lest anl' rays enter
towarcls the brain other t1un those which must be cloubl)' puri­
fied and clistinguished. wherefore there is a recl (purpureus)
color in the uvea, and in the first collection of the rays, 10.
Therefore the eyes are scatterecl about as in f1ies, 50 that they
can look in every direction, acconling to the observation of
Leeuwenhoek; so that there is nothing in the vicinity of the
parts \vhich cloes not at once affect them.
435. From tlûs afFection results a sudden change of the
stMe of the organs. according to eve?")' affection of theù- bra';1'1.
1. In the pt11'est parts there is a most perfect change of ail
states. 2. Their perfection consists in this potency. For
thence results instinct or natural action accorcling to the mode
of the affection. 4. That these organs are fashioned for all
changes of state, appears. bath from the very th in and very
pure membranous fibres of the brain, ancl from the softness
and elasticity of ail of them. 5. Therefore the uvea and its
appendix can change themselves very quickly, ancl perchance
also their COI01·S. 6. Therefore there is a smroun:!ing globular
matter, through which the ether circulates ancl to '2very part
of which it is concentratecl, which matter from the common
affection incluces changes of state upon those inc1uc\ed fascic1es;
for thel' consist of that most perfectly mobile substance, and
are clivicled into expansible. compressible and erectile (elt!­
vabiles), spherules; this is the change of the general affection.
7. There is an unclerll'ing common membrane, into which are
concentratecl the rays of aII the el'es still more ancl more
general1y, for it serves as a basis for ail, ancl can be con­
tracted and clilatecl ancl can thus varionsly expand the whole
organ; wherefore it is very thin, furnished with a double lay­
er, producecl almost from pulmonary fistul<e, which, accorcl­
 :nfJ:' EYE AND S'ICHT. 175

ing ta Swammerdam. can contra ct and expand it; for aIlllast

e7.-·cry gcncral change of slalc in insects ù braJl.~·ht abo/.tt
Ihrollgh the pu/monar)' fislu/cc. 8. Incleecl those fistul::e come
out ta the surface and ta the e)'es, according ta SWê.mmerc1am,
in orcier that the)' ma)' inc1uce a similar state upon aIl parts,
or in orcier that particular states ma)' correspond ta the gen­
era!. 9. There are two extremcs and two origins of changes of
state: 10. The)' come from the influx of ra)'s or of sigl1t, which
induces the first state; II. the)' come afterwards from the har­
mon)' of the sensations in the brain; 12. in like manner as has
been observed in man. 13. These mutations concur in the
common membrane between the brain and the eye, and they
thus make one thing. 14. \iVherefore that membrane is double,
one layer of whieh has respect ta the optic nerves and thus ta
the brain, the other la)'er of which has respect ta the eyes.
IS. Thence it appears how exactly the two affections concur,
and produce the instincts or acts of nature in insects.
436. But in arder that ùtstincts may come forth and their
afl1Ï7nal nature be ruled by them.. 'l.vhich 1'!œttwe has respect es­
pecially ta nutrition and ta the bload. if is a1so 11ecessa!'y tha.t
the other senses should cancur in the .'lame sense, nar shauld
the)' be separated, as, f01' instance. s1lull and a rude /n'nd of
hear'ing. As ta what respects smell, it ù ta be observed:
1. That this conjoined with sight and taste especially pro­
duces affections, and these latter changes of state or instincts
particular and genera!. 2. Decause animalcula are simpler,
smell and sight concur in one organ; 3, for organs of smell
are 110where detectecl; 4. but from the phenomena and causes
of smell, which is a subtle touch, it is c1ear that they concur.
S. That bees smell what is ta be desired in rose-gardens is
c1ear: it is c1ear that the like happens in f1ies and similar in­
sects which fi)' ta volatile putrid substances; and in other flies
which fi)' ta the place of effiuvia, etc. 6. Smell is only a sub­
tile tonch, or a sense of the more subtile particles fl)'ing in the
atmosphere, as those of effiuvia. 7. Insects perce ive still more
subtile and volatile elements, for these agree with their life
and their blood. 8. The corneal membrane is sensitive, every
 THE SENSES.

most minute totlch affects it, 9. according to the figure of the

impression in' the compound. JO. 1t refers to the circumfer­
ences and interstices, where there are cilia, the roots of ail of
which are exquisitely sensitive; II. th us similarly a tremiscence
thence arising passes through those continuous pyramic!s to
the basic or COolmon membrane, 12. and thus by another mode
with every figure of the parts ta the brain.
437. The ruder tOl/ch is siHlilar. 1. Tt cannot be doubted but
that the cornea is sensitive, since our eye is sensitive; 2. and if
anything touches the cilia, especially their roots, a continu­
ous sense of touch is thence spread ta ail the parts, 3. and
likewise to the common membrane.
438. H earing is here similarl)' conccntrated. 1. That bees'
hear is evident from the outcry of their queen, the sound of
which the)' hear; 2. it is evident from the tremor of the air,
that it vibrates ail this ocular structure; 3. from a similar
spreading ta the common membrane and thus to the common
sensory; 4. from the agreement of sight and hearing in them­
selves, for the modifications of it differ only in c1egree, that
is to say aerial modification touches and vibrates the mass
or the fascicles of the fibres, while the etherial modification
touches and vibrates only the mass or fascicles of the parts,­
this is the only difference. 5. From things described it is evi­
dent that the organ of sight of insects is a COl11l1lon external
sensor)', wherefore it is sa constructed. 6. From the senses it
likewise becomes ckar that they agrcc in general, and that
they differ only in degree and quality. 7. Thus this whole
mass is, as it \Vere, anexterna! brain; that it is sa prepared
that it can receive and carry away ail sensations t0 the in­
terior brain. 8. From these things it is evidcnt \Vhat the
senses have in common \Vith one another.
439. Fromthese things it also appears t/wt every sense is
referred to every fibre and cortical substance, which is the
common sel1sory, and Hot to con'esponding and certain fibres.
1. For ail the rays are brought ta the commOll membrane;
2. thus into ail the fibres of the optic nerve universal1y, ac­
cording ta degrees, 3. thus into the whole medul1ar)' ane!
 THE EYE AND SIGHT.

cortical substance of the brain; 4. still better III the beetle,

(see Swammerdam), where two eyes, larger than the optic
nerves, traverse the whole brain and communicate with the
whole fibre anel cortex, nay, more, with the cerebellum and
medulla spinalis. 5. In the bee the brain seems to occupy the
exterior part, and the mass hidden within again refers to the
cerebellum which disposes the instincts, and communicates
with the other little masses of the medulla spinalis, (see the
figures). Thus it is so aranged that no fibre of the cerebrum,
the cercbellum or of the medulla spinalis is devoid of sensa­
tion. 6. Thence results the general affection, 7. and thence is
general ch;mge and instinct. 8. But because no cortical part
is absolutely like another, so one part sensates more exquisitely
than another; thus one region perceives the phenomena of
sight more exquisitely, another those of hearing or smel1, ac­
corcling to accidentaI varieties; 9. but this does not hiQder
every cortical substance becoming- the consort of every sensa­
tion. 10. This harmony of varieties must be explored in order
that this science may be deeply explored.
440. They also recognize dangers or perils, 1. by the cilia;
2. for when the cilia are touched they vibrate the whole ma­
chine, and as it were hurt it. 3. Their sight seems to be ex­
tencled even to the extremities of the cilia, because they sen­
sate objects striking there which they perceive by the sense.
4. yVherefore the cilia are in the interstices,. and being touched
cannot but connect that whole series.
441. These things may be said in place of an epilogue,
where common criteria and the agreement of all the senses
are treated of, all of which is perfect1y represented in insects.
442. Finally all diseases of the eyes are reviewed from two
authoritics, namely - - - and Boerhaave, see my dictionary,
pp. 43, 44, 45, 4 6 .
443. In the epilogue are reviewed generals, all of which could
be evolved into vast volumes, if they shoulcl he treated in
particular, especially if they should be treated geometrically;
they can he so treated that they scarcely fall into the unc1er­
standing, for with particulars you can overshadow the under­
standing, and by applications increase the work into a volume:
12
 THE SENSES.

Prologue, .
Touch, 4

Taste, 4

Snlel1, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5

Hearing, 6

Sight, 7

Epilogue, 3

3°
 CHAPTER VII.

Epilogue concerning the Senses or Sensation in General.

444. 1. These generals are to be observed concerning all

sensation: 1. That the origin of an sensation is from touch
or external impulse; 2. that touch or impulse is into the fibres
or the tunics of the fibres, thus external. 4. yVherefor<; the
fibres must be so organically arranged and formed that the
touch of each one can distinctly receive the differences of that
kind. 5. The sensations of touch, taste and smell arise from a
touch or impulse of heavy partic1es, or of the inertia of the
forces, that is of the parts. 6. But the sense of hearing and of
sight from a touch or impulse of partic1es not heavy, but of
active force, that is of partic1es of the atmosphere. 7. In order
that sensation may come for th evident and affecting. there
must be many differences at the same time in one touch, thus
a kind of form of differences. 8. The differences of this form
must be simultaneous or successive: 9. a form arising from
things successive takes on the same quality as a form of things
sil11t11taneous. 10. That organico-sensory forms were made
to receive distinctly the forms of such differences.
445. 2. It is moreover to be observed: 1. that the organic
forms of every sensory exactly apply to themselves, these va­
rieties of differences, bath simultaneous and successive. 2. They
communicate those varieties with the fibres of which they are
made up; 3. which fibres by a kind of modification or tremis­
cence, after the analogy of chords, carry them away, along
the antecedents, towards their beginnings or the cortical sub­
stances, 4. and that, incleed, most perfectly, by the assistance
(beneficio) of the spiritual essence which is within the fibres,
5. and indeed according to the nature of the modification or
tremiscence, into every contiguous fibre, thus into the whole
cortical substance of both the cerebrum and cerebellum, also
of the medulla oblongata and medulla spinalis, according to the
lOontiguity of the fibres on the way. 6. From the living es­
ISo THE SENSES.

sence which is within the spirit and the fibres modification

becomes sensation; change of state becomes affection; accord­
ing to the form of the modifications, and so forth. 7· Ac­
cording to affections arise changes of state in the organs.
446. 3. 1. This modification of the fibres in their very be­
gihnings or in the cortical substances goes forth on all sides
according to their every form, for those beginnings or cortical
substances are formed according to the whole nature of modi­
fication. 2. Thus as many as are the differences and as many
as are the varieties in the touch, and between the touches, so
many diverse changes of state do they undergo; for in this
consists their perfection. 3. From the form of the differences,
of the modifications, and the thence arising changes of state,
arise affections: thus grateful affections if they agree with
their natural state, ungrateful if they disagree. 4. Bence
every touch or mode, which is repres'ented as a unit in the
sense, whether the varieties enter simultaneously or suc­
cessively, is either grateful or ungrateful. 5. It is similar with
unities or modes among themselves.
447. 4. I. The senses differ from one another in degree;
the most composite is touch, the simplest of the external
senses is sight. 2. Wherefore, they. differ in the perfection of
al! qualities; 3. altogether according to the objects which
touch, impel, strike and affect. 4. Accorùing to those degrees
the organic forms of every sensory are compounc1ed and ar­
ranged. 5. According to those degrees the fibres themselves,
from which arise the organic forms, are compounded. 6. Ac­
cording to those degrees the modifications run through their
own fibres. 7. According to those degrees they undergo
changes in the common sensory or the brain. 8. Accorc1ing
to those degrees arise the affections of the brain. 9. This
is the cause of the diversity of the five senses.
448. 5. 1. Every sense of every c1egree has its maximum
and minimum; the minimum refers to its maximum, as unity
to its number. 2. The organic fonns themse1ves determine
this in every external sense. 3. Furthermore every sense must
also have its general, to which the modes or unities will refer
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. r8r

as parts. 4. GeneraIs differ from one another, as the series of

parts or modes; S. thence the parts or unities exist rightly
distinguished from one another, and come forth to evident
perception.
449. 6. I. Ali ideas arise from sensations; 2. and are there-
fore changes of state in the brain and its cortical substances.
3. GeneraIs are changes of state among the cortical substances,
which changes must correspond with singular changes. 4.
Wherefore aIl ideas, because they are changes of state, are
affections, or there is in them what affects, furthermore there
is also between them, or in their nexus, what affects. S. The
more perfect or simpler senses, as, for instance, sight, enter
more intimately into the brain and its substances, or change the
interior fabric, and thus affect more perfectly. 6. Wherefore
the whole doctrine of sensations, both exterior and interior,
depends upon a knowledge of the structure of the organs in
the sensories, in the brain and in its cortical substances. 7.
Wherefore the doctrine of sensations and of the ideas conse-
quent thence, depends upon a knowledge of the changes of
state in those structures; it depends upon the doctrines, name-
ly, of order, of degrees, of forms, of influxes, of correspond-
ences, of modifications, which are to be treated of in a special
work. 8. Every general contains endless parts under it, which
exceed aIl geometrical, physical and philosophical science.
450. I. The origin of ail sensation is external touch or im-
pulse. I. This has been confirmed especially in respect to the
single sensations. 2. That touch itself is impulse is not doubt-
fuI, because it is touch. 3. That taste is impulse, see also above;
for there are parts dissolved in the saliva and in other men-
strua, which thus strike the papi11ce of the tongue. 4. Smell
arises from the touch of the parts flying in the atmo-
sphere, especially in the aeria1. S. Hearing appears to be from
a modification of the air, of which above, from an impulse
upon the membrana tympani, from the blows of the stapes,
even from the malleus upon the fenestra ovalis, from the sen-
sible percussion, and the tremor of the bodies thence arising,
from a great sound, as in bombs, in crashing, in thunder.
 THE SENSES.

From the origin of sound from the tremiscence of harder

bodies, and its corespondence in the consonant nerves, and
from many other things. 6. Sight likewise from concentrated
rays, as in burning mirrors, which exert such a force that it
melts the parts. A ray of sunlight in the nasal cavities even
excites the fibres into a convulsive motion or into sneezing.
From the origin of Iight, similar with the origin of sound, its
tendency to a straight \ine, from reflection and from many
other phenomena. From effects one must conclude concerning
those impulses which do not faU visibly under the sphere of
the senses; for without activity and change thence arising
nothing sensible can exist. 7. Thus aU external sensation
arises from external causes, or causes in the macrocosm which
act upon the microcosm, in order that thesoul may be made
conscious of aU contingencies outside its own little world,
and may be thus affected: then in order that it may learn and
know how to live in respect to the whole universe, and thus
may be informed for agreement of its forces, and for corre­
spondence; as astate is formed, so it may always be conserved
and may recognize what is true and what is false, what is good
and what is evi1.
451. 2. Toueh or irrup~dse is into the fibres or tunies of the
fibres, thus it is externaL I. The fibre is a kind of very smaU
vessel, which carries what is caUed the purer blood or animal
spirit as the blood vessels carry the blood. 2. Thus, accord­
ing to the same rules the tunics together with this fluid actuate
one cause, the fluid, the principal cause, but the fibre, the in­
strumental cause; the one is altogether accommodated to the
other. 3. Sensation, or its touch or impulse acts upon the tunic
of the fibre, wherefore extrinsically.. 4. Indeed every sensation,
even an internaI one, [arises from touch or impulse], for it
is a change of the state of the tissue composed of fibres, whence
affection arises. S, Thence in sensations an external cause is
active; 6, but it cannot act, still less be modified, wlless the in­
ternaI or principal cause concurs ; but there is one action origin­
- aUy into the tunic of the fibre, there is another into the
fluid itself within the tunic. 7. Every sensation acts upon the
 SENSATION IN GENERAL.

tunic, thus externally; 8. but indeed every action, from the will
and its determination acts upon the fluid itself, thus internally;
9. thence the motor fibres are excited. ra. How this external
change is produced by external [action], and of what quality is
the circ1e from the understanding and its ideas to the determin­
ations of the will, must be treated of in our Psychology. r 1.
Therefore, the external world produces sensations, but the in­
ternaI, actions: the internai also produces internai sensations,
but originally arising from the external world ; but they are for
the benefit of the internai forces, which then concur.
452. 3. Wherefore the fibres must be so organically formed
and arranged, that they can receive the d'ifferences of every
touch of that kind distinctly. 1. What the quality of the Iittle
organs or organic forms of every externaI sensory is, has
been treated of in their particular disquisitions; see and confer
in respect to touch, taste, smell, etc. 2. The little organs, that
is, to say, the papill::e, etc., in themselves, and among them­
selves, 3. are formed entirely after the nature of tactile, impell­
ing or modifying objects. 4. Wherefore the sensories are
organs formed entirely after the nature of objects and of modi­
fications; thus in order that we may be instructed from them, as
to how nature acts extrinsically, and in order that we may be
instructed from modifications, as to how the little organs should
be formed, 5. whence the acoustic, optic, and many organs
derive their origins; 6. but the most perfect of all are those in
microscopie animais; in these there is absolutely nothing, which
is in nature, with its single varieties, even to infinite and all pos­
sible varieties "\vhich is not impressed therein; 7. it is required
that those forms be correspondent, both in themselves, and to
one another; for one is the particular, the other general, it is
required that the correspondence belong to each, in order that
the particular may be distinct; 8. indeed every particular, such
as a papi lia, is a kind of general, which has respect to the single
things in the papilla, in order that the particular form may be
distinct, 9. and so forth; ro. also every most general state of
all, or the tissue of the whole organ must correspond.
453. 4. The sensati01~S of touch, taste and smell arise from
a touch or împ~ûse of thi1~gs heavy or of the forces of inertia,
 THE SENSES.

that is, of particulars. I. This has been shown in single treat­

ises. 2. As that these sensations arise from saline, sulphurous
and other volatile bodies which are figured, of an angular form
furnished with diverse angles, planes, protuberances and cavi­
ties; 3. thus from the external figures of the things themselves
which prick, soothe and variously affect. 4. That the objects
of taste are rolled about in water and dissolved by the salivary
f1uid and other menstrua, is known; 5. that the objects of smell
f10at in the atmosphere, see above. 6. A!l the parts of an
angular form are angular in their smallest parts and variously
pointed; so that their elements are of such a character, having
by contrary determination lost all active and elastic force. 7.
Thence arise similar compounds; 8. but of these things else­
where. 9. The external figure can be of every kind, even cir­
cular, but still its internaI determinations make it to be re­
ferred to that c1ass, not, however, its external form. 10. The
essential determinations themselves, from which forms are
produced, make them to be of this or that form; II. these are
principally ca!1ed parts, yea, the very elements of them, deeply
within which are such determinations. 12. These parts can be
divided even to their parts or e1ements, but if further, then
the determination is destroyed, thence they f1y off into the
forms of that order, from which they were originally deter­
mined. 13. From this it appears how a division of those forms
can be made. 14. Their elements are from the e1ements of many
forms the most perfect of which are from the purer ether, then
from the common ether, even from the air itself; the last have
less of gravity ; they can be dissolved even to the parts of the
air. IS. But of these things elsewhere. These things will be
trea.ted of in notes, not in the text.
454. 5. But hearing and sight are from a touch and im­
pulse not of things heavy, but rather of active forces. 1. Hear­
ing is from a modification of the aerial atmosphere. 2. Sight
is from a modification of the etherial atmosphere. 3. There is
some gravity in the air, wherefore the sensory of the ear is
composed of membranes, tremiscible and cartilaginous, and
these membranes are composed of little nerves. 4. Thus they
respond as well to the elasticity of the air as to its gravity ; they
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. r8s

have forces of inertia and forces of the active, or something

distinctly in the ear. 5. The forces absolutely active or elastic
respond altogether to the forces of gravity, for the latter arise
from the former, for ail gravity is from the active forces which
determine it; 6. rather from the tendency of the ether to the
center of gravity ; the ether enters every part of the angular
form, yea of the circular form; so also every part of the
superior form, such as are ail the parts of the inferior form. 7.
Thence gravity increases according to degrees, and it arises
from those things which are less heavy, or from pure active
forces. Thus there is a kind of superior gravity in the ether
itself. 8. The beginning of gravity is in celestial fonns them­
selves. 19. But concerning these things elsewhere; they will be
treated of in the no'tes, not in the text, except briefiy. JO. That
touch and impulse are to be derived therefrom, see above, No.
[444] 1.
455. 6. In order that evident and affecting sensation may
exist, there must be many differences in one touch, thus a form
of the differences. 1. In taste there must be parts variously
figured which touch; 2. similarly in smel!. 3. Sa that there are
infinite touching points of diverse angles, planes, cavities, pro­
tuberances and spheres. 4. \tVithout form no quality is predi­
cable. 5. Unless there be forms in unities, a suitable form
will not arise from a number of parts. 6. How infinite the
things must be which constitute one touch, see above; as are
the unities such is the common affection of the many things
which refer to their own unities. 7. How many varietes, a
single and simplest sound of our ear produces, see above, also
Part II. of the ECONOMY OF THE ANIMAL KINGDOM; 8. to the
extent that infini te things can be saie! to be in every unity. 9.
The more compounded a form is the. fewer are the things
which are in it; thus there are even more things in a single
visual ray than in the whole of sight. 10. In its smallest parts
nature sports according to ail its nature, and most distinctly;
not so in compounds, where therp are scarcely any things ex­
cept disharmonies. IL Unless these disharmonies be restored
into their harmonies, by the harmonies which are in unities, the
machine would not subsist even for a moment. 12. But unities
186 THE SENSES.

appear to us for the most part without form; for what of form
can be noticed in a unity ? Thence arise the fallacies of the
senseS. 13. N evertheless they are very distinctly perceived
through affections, grateful and ungrateful, by the soul, which
is within the compounds themselves as a common, and, as it
were, ungrateful affection.
456. 7. The differences of this form '/tUtSt be simultanemtS
or successive. I. There is nothing simultaneous which must
not arise from successives in nature; it is an attribute of nature
that it shaH successively proceed to things simultaneous. 2.
It is otherwise in supreme things where ,vhat is, is together,
nor is there anything simultaneous; this being together pro­
duces the simultaneous in nature, when for the sake of effects
it produces ends by natural causes. 3. Simultaneous things
are in natural things, even in angular forms, for by successive
determinations they are so formed. 4. Their touches also
appear to be simultaneous, especially in unities, although they
may also be successive; for one moment of our sensation may
be composed of infinite, purer moments which we do not ap­
perceive ; thence is space and time. S. Successive differences
exist between the unities, or in the number of many things,
even appreciable differences, as in hearing and sight. 6. But
these successive things must be formed into simultaneous
things in a superior sphere in order that they may be apper­
ceived in the perception, and especially in the representation of
the soul, as harmonic or disharmonic. 7. These analogies are
natural, and they agree with the state of the superior organs
and of the brain, which organ and brain apperceive them. 8.
But to describe those harmonies and disharmonies is an im­
mense field; for one must run through the whole nature of the
universe, and, at the same time, of the microcosm, and make
application to the tissue of the microcosm. 9. In a word, differ­
ences are never apperceived without form.
457. 8. Form arising from successive things Ptlts on the
sa·me quality as that arising from simultaneous things. I.
This appears from musical harmonies, 2 from optics, palaces.
ornaments, if they are orderly and coherent. 3. Long is the way
to gather the quality of forms from successives, as from sounds
 SENSATION IN GENERAL.

4. But they are reduced to simultaneous things, S. especially in

the soul, which is proximately in simultaneous things, because
it is a spiritual essence. 6. There must be a ratio of one to the
other, mutual respect, analogy, which is not perceived unless
the consequent is respected in the antecedent, and the one is
compared with the other; thus the presence of al! is required
that a judgment may be made. 7. If anything is wanting in
the antecedents or perishes therein the connection peris~es, and
ail relation which will indicate the quaIity. 8. Thence it fol­
lows, that there ought to be a perpetuaI variety, so that from
varieties suitably conjoined, the relation may be either affected
or judged of.
458. 9. Organico-sensory fOr1uS are formed for receiving
the forms of such differences distinctly. 1. The cuticle is so
formed, the tongue, the nostriIs, the ear, the eye, 2. with their
papilI<e and the connection of the papilI<e with one another, 3.
with the whole tissue. 4. You may see these things distinctly
expounded above.
459. 10. The o1'gcmic f01'1ns of every sensor)' apply these
var'ieties of differences, as well the sim1ûtaneous as the suc­
cessive, entirely to themselves. 1. You may see these things
also in the exposition of the single senses. 2. vVherefore we
wiII pass by this discussion for it is a consequence
of what has been said.
460. IL The organic forms communicate those varieties
with the fibres of wh'ich they a:re composed. 1. For they are
formed from and spring forth from the fibres; 2. they are the
organic extremities of the fibres; 3. for the end that they may
receive varieties distinctIy, and may carry the received varieties
distinctly to the brain. 4. There are fibres which themseIves
contain conducting fibres and little channels, which carry away.
S. They are determinations from the organs to the brain. and
from the brain to the organs. 6. Wherefore the brain feels
according to the state of the organs, as also according to the
state of the fibres, for these are what shal! announce the touch
and impulse. 7. Therefore the organs of the externaI sensory,
the fibres going betvveen, and the receiving organs of the fibres
must correspond exactly to one another. 8. If they be dis­
ISS THE SENSES.

crepant, a complete discrepancy results in the common sen­

sory. 9. This appears from the effects in the organs or in the
fibres or in the brains, from particular diseases and sicknesses.
10. Wherefore the organic forms of the sensory communicate
those varieties with the fibres of which the}' are composed. II.
This is the consequence, that there may be no point in a
papilla, which does not have respect to its own fibril; 12, so
that whatever happens in one extremity must be represented in
the other.
461. 13. These fibres, by a kind of '1'ItOdification or tremis­
cençe after the analogy of chords, carr}, a.way the received
varieties according to antecedents towards their beginnings
or to the cort·ical substances. 1. This will appear from the
very wonderful nature of modification and tremiscence; 2.
for modification is said to be in the atmospheres and con­
tremiscence in things continuous; 3. these things respond to
each other. 4. From the smallest origin the whole volume is
modified from extremity to extremity, and the whole mass
trembles, indeed from the smallest touch, as that of a needle, a
whole table trembles, whence arises a sound; still more per­
fectly and infinitely in the ether from the smallest refiecfon;
5. in purer things ahvays more perfectly even so that every ex­
tent trembles; and thus exceeds belief. 6. From a single very
small string, the belly of a whole great instrument, and ail con­
tiguous things, especially the whole volume of the atmosphere
even to every distance, trembles. 7. Thus also the lltrVe
fibres go forth; that they are formed entire1y for receiving and
transferring modification will be demonstrated in their own
place. 8. Every one of them receives its own modulus and
carries it away; man)' together receive the mG(l~ of the whole
or the general mode and so forth. 9. Even tl: r : fiuid :n the
fibres, which emulates the aura, conspires with the nature of
what is to be modified. 10. Because the fibres ale determina­
tions, every modification runs through that containant, even to
our sense, in an instant. 11. It runs into antecedents or from
simples to compounds; for the beginning of modifications is 111
smallest things, where it is expanded, 12. and where there is
nothing but what is elastic, in which no force perishes. 13.
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 18 9

Every sensation or sensory modification tends to antecedents,

or towards the beginnings of the fibres. 14. For every de­
termination into act tends from the beginnings of the fibres to
co;}sequents or to the motor fibres. 15. Thus the determina­
t:ems of sensation and of the will are contrary ta each other;
16, but still they concur in the beginnings; for where there is
ll::lderstanding there is will; the latter flows from the former.
17. Such a contrariety of determinations arises, partly from the
causes of sensations which act upon the tunics of the fibre, and
th~l'O act by a modification of what is continuous, the 'continuous
or enclosed animal spirit assisting, and giving wings [ta the
sensations] ; partly from the sensory fibres themselves which
flow into the same mode; it is otherwise with the motor fibres,
of which elsewhere. IS. It is evident from anatomy that the
cortical substances are the first substance of the ultimate and of
the first of the fibres. 19. Wherefore modification cannat sub­
sist except in u1timates and in firsts, that is, in the cortical sub­
stances, which thus represent the common sensory. 20. To
place the common sensory in the fibres themselves is to place it
in mediates, not in ultimates, for the fibre has nothing which it
does not derive from its own beginning or from the cortex.
2J. The cortical substance represents the brain in the smallest
effigy, wherefore it is a sensory; and it represents the heart in
least effigy, wherefore it is the common motory. 22. Here are
ta be sought the arcana of psychology. 23. These, neverthe­
less, cannot be explored except from the brain, for the brain
and the single cortical substance refer to each other, and
mutually represent each other, as the prior and posterior.
462. 14. And that indeed most perfectly by the aid of the
spiritual essence which is within. 1. This substance emulates
the auras in modifications and in active forces. 2. They are so
highly elastic that 110thing perishes. 3. The fibre dry or de­
prived of spirit is incapable of modification except a confuseü
one; 4. wherefore the sensory fibre itself is soft, and is con!­
posed quite differently.
463. 15. And indeed according to the nature of themodifi­
cation and tremiscence, into every contigu,ou,s fibre, tht~s into
the whole cortical sttbstance both of the cerebrum and the cere­
190 THE SENSES.

bellum, and a/so of the medulla oblongata and the medulla

spinalis. 1. Differently from the motor force, which is de­
termined by distinct fibres into the muscular fibres. 2. This is
the nature of a11 modifications in arder that they may enter into
contiguous parts. 3. Such is the connection of the fibres espe­
cia11y in the medu11a of the brain, that ail are pervaded. 4. For
there is fascic1e within fascicle,-perpetual anastomoses and
crossings; 5. thus ta every single cortical substance. 6. But it
is not received in a similar manner by the single substances,
because there is a variety of a11 of them. 7. It is received ac­
cording ta their state in particular, if they are more expanded,
in one way, if more contracted, in another. 8. The general
state is also received by them.
464. 16. From the living essence, which is within the spirit
and the fibres, modification becomes sensation, cha,nge of slate
produces affection according to the fO'Y1n of the modifications,
and so forth. 1. Of these things see Parts 1. and II. of the
ANIMAL KINGDOM. 2. Every fibre is traversed by the animal
spirit, in which as a beginning is the mast universal essence of
the animate body, which essence is said ta be the sou!. 3. The
most simple fibres themselves consist of this essence. 4. The
soul itself, which alone lives in the body, gives ta perceive the
qualities of modifications, 5. especially in the cortical sub­
stances, where the soul resides organically. 6. There the soul
sensates every change thence arising. 7. It is the very sensa­
tion of changes by the soul, which causes a dead modification
ta be ca11ed living, or sensation. 8. Aside from this there is no
difference.
465. 17. According to affections arise changes of state in
the organs. 1. In respect ta this see what is said in respect ta
every article or organ of sense. 2. The affections are whai
determine the will into actions, the cerebrum into voluntary.
the cerebellum into involuntary actions. 3. As is the affection
of the brain, such becomes the affection of every fibre; for the
animus of the brain, because it flows into the animal spirit,
f10ws forth into the fibres, and reigns everywhere, 4, especially
in the motor fibres of the muscles of the organ, which are in­
itiated for putting on similar changes of state from nature.
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 191

connection and use. 5. Likewise therein the affections of the

pure sensory are commùnicated with the motor fibres of the
same organ: see the articles concerning the single sensories.
466. 18. This modification of the fibres, in the beginnings
themselves or in the cortical substa·nces, is spread abroad ac­
cording to every form of the modificœtions; for those begin­
nings are formed according to alt that nature. I. The cortical
forms, which are the beginnings, cannot be explored except b y
an examination of the brain, for they are brains in the sma~!est
effigy, with a difference of perfections such as there is between
entities, prior and posterior, between the more simple and the
compound, which the doctrine of forms will teach, as also the
doctrine of order and degrees. 2. Modification cannot arrive
at those termini except it be spread abroad according to their
fonn; 3. for it runs forth into every one of its more simple
fibrils. 4. For the fibrils are furnished with a surface and most
tender meninx, they are in the fibres, they are 1n the still more
simple substances emulous of the cortical substances, 5. but
arranged according to the form of a purer nature. 6. They
are receptible of ail changes of state; in which receptibility
their perfection consists, so that it may be infinite. 7. In these
the soul resides as in its very own organic beginnings. 8.
Wherefore every modification fiowing thither is spread abroad
and induces changes of state. 9. That they are formed for the
form of the modifications, see Part II. of the ECONOMY OF THE
ANIMAL KINGDOM. 10. Thus that form cannot be explored
except from the doctrine of forms compared with the form of
the parts of the ether, or of its modifications in what is greater,
of which above.
467. 19. Thus as many as are the differences and as man:;
as are the varieties in a touch, and among touches, so many
diverse changes of sta·te do they undergo, for their perfection
consists in this. 1. There are modifications which run thither
through the single fibres; they are so many c:auses of changes
[of state]. 2. For there they are concentrated and distinguish­
ed. 3. That there are general and particular changes, both
in the substance itself and among the substances themselves. in
the bundle, in the congeries, in the whole brain, is to be learned
elsewhere.
192 THE SENSES.
f
468. 20. From the form of the differences, of the modifica~
tions, a·nd of the changes of state thencl! arising, ariS!! affec­
tions, namely, grateful onl!s if they agree with their nat~tral
state, ungrateful if they disagree. I. That is grateful which
agrees with the state of one's soul;' 2. for according to thic;
state is formed the state of these substances, and finally of the
brain itself; 3. especially do they accede ta the nature of the
universe. 4. Changes of state which do not agree are those
which attempt ta pervert that established state; they twist, and
do inj ury and harm ta those [substances]. 4. Those affections
which agree are grateful in infinite ways. S. These things are
to be drawn from the doctrine of forms.
469. 21. Hence every tMtch or mode, which is represented
as a unity in the sense, whether the varieties entering into it
bl! successive or sim~tltaneo~ts, is either grateful or ungrateful.
1. Our rational mind does not sense this variety, which does
not accede ta the principles of those harmonies, for it is an in­
ferior faculty; 2. but the soul, which perceives the smallest
things in itself and in its organ which is formed ta the nature
of the sou1's representations, does perceive them; 3. for
the soul itself is in the order, rule and truth of the universe,
hence of itself it sensates what is consonant or what is dis­
sonant; 4. that is, it is barn with it.. for its organs are barn
and formed for it. S. It sensates therefore what destroys
and what conjoins, or, more deeply, what is true ane! what
is false, and what is gooc1 and what is evil. 6. All the unities
of the senses go more e!eeply than ta the consciousness of our
mine!; 7. for the single rays, an infinite number of which con­
stitute one sensible [impulse], touch sorne one of the more
simple fibres; the harmony is what affects, and thus produces
an affection, or love and hate, desire or aversion.. and sa forth.
470. 22. It is similar ~cfith the unities or modes among
themselves. 1. Those things which come into the perception
are either unities or simple sensations; 2. their harmony among
themselves produces a common affection; 3. for they change
the very nexus between the cortical substances, 4. nay, more,
the whole brain; S. and, because the arder of ail things, as
well that of simples as that of compounds coïncide, general
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 193

affections arise from like causes. 6. General affections, or

those of the whole brain, have respect not only to the con­
nections of the cortical substances but also to those of the
fibres. 7. A like change of state is noticed among the fibres
as among the cortical substances; 8. for the whole system is
what suffers change. 9. But the soul does not sensate those
Thus it sensates affections even in the external sensory itself,
and simulates them; as thOligh it were there alone; sllch a
presence is simlilatec1.
471. 23. The senses differ from One another in degree;
the 1110st compOttnd is touch, the simplest a,mon'g the external
senses Ù sight. 1. The doctrine of order and degrees teaches
what degree is. 2. For there are also degrees of composition;
one does not come from one degree to another except by com­
positions. 3. When a composition is resolved into its unities
a c1egree then perishes; and in the unity itself the su­
periar degree succeeds; 4. thus in the unities of unities, and
so forth. 5. The whole universe and animal kingdom is com­
posed according to such degrees and in snch arc1er. 6. That
taste is a superior degree of touch, is evic1ent from the ob­
jects which strike the papil1<e, which are compound; it is also
evident from the papillée themselves. 7. That smell is a de­
gree of touch superior to that of taste, is also apparent from
the partic1es which strike, and from the papillce themselves.
8. That sight is a degree higher than hearing is likewise evi­
dent from the organ and from the atmospheres themselves;
for they are formed with regard to the modification of their
own atmosphere. 9. Unless we admit that there are degrees
of the atmospheres, we can admit degrees neither of argans,
nor of sensations. ra. vVherefore we cannot do this unless
we admit the divisions of the parts of one atmosphere into
its principles. Ir. See above concerning these things.
472. 24. Wherefore they differ in the perfection of aU
q~talities. 1. Superior forms are the measures and beginnings
of inferior ones. 2. They are to be conceived of as a form of
unities respectively to the inferior forms, which are referred
to the fonns of a number of such unities. 3. To our sense, re­
spective1y to inferior forms, they are almost infinite; nor are
I3
194 THE SENSES.

their differences recognized except by a superior sense. 4. Re­

spectively ta Our senses aIl successions are represented to­
gether in those forms, or as simultaneities. 5. There arp in­
finite . forms of celerity respectively ta inferior forms, for
myriads of celerities scarcely compose a one which may ap­
pear as a simultaneous in an inferior sense. 6. They can put
on infinite changes of state in the smallest moment of an in­
ferior sense. 7. They are more perfect in respect ta form,
essence, nature, <lttributes, accidents, and therefore in respect ta
modes. 8. They are in their own {orm, and are more constant
than are other things which depenrl upon them. 9. They are
more fluid. IO. They are more powerful than an)' force, as
for instance theelastic force. II. They are more beautiful
and suitable. I2. They are more distinct, more unanimous,
more similar to one another, more harmonic. I3. They are
more unlimited and freer. I4. They are more sensitive, more
rational. I5. They remain longer, for they cannat be hmt by
inferior things; for prior forms exist withollt posterior forms,
not the reverse. I6. They are as it were withollt time and
space. I7. Terms which can be applied to inferior forms can­
not be applied ta them except by analogy and eminence; for
they pass beyond the sphere of words, when they pass into a
superior clegree. I8. Thus sight is in a higher degree than
hearing, understanding in a higher degree than sight, the
representation of the soul in a higher degree than rational
sight. I9. Superior forms are priaI', interior, more remote,
simpler. 20. They are also more universal. 2r. These things
will he seen in the doctrine of forms, and of order and de­
grees.
473. 25. [They differ J altogether (liCcording to the ab­
jects which touch, impel, strilœ, and affect them. 1. Touch
requires objects very much compounded. 2. Taste requires
the parts of those parts which float in water.. 3. Smell re­
quires the parts of those parts which ft y in the atmosphere.
4. Hearing requires the modifications of the aerial atmosphere;
how crass these modifications are is apparent from sounds,
from musical instruments, and from many things, for one
must speak long that one visual idea may he produced; we can
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 195

at once measure with the eye things which can scarcely he

given in books and speech. S. Thus one sensation is superior
ta another, wherefore more perfect than another.
474. 26. The organic farms af every sensary are arranged
accarding ta thase degrees. 1. Thus things are more perfect
and more imperfect, 2. in every quality, according ta the above
recital of perfections. 3. They must be variec1 according ta
the superiority of qualities.
475. 27. Accarding ta thase degrees the fibres themselves,
tram which arganic farms arise, au campaunded. 1. Such
seems to be the manner of the composition, of which we have
treatec1 in the Part concerning the medullary fibre of the brain
and the nervous fibre of the body.* 2. The first of all are the
simple or simplest fibre; which determine the rest, and they
are determinations of the soul itself; 3. from these the fibres
of our inmost sense are determined, this is a second
composition; 4. from these again are c1eterminec1 the visual
fibres or those emulous of the visual fibres; this is a
third composition; 5. from these again there is a fourth
composition, which is that of the fibres of hearing. 6.
But let us tarry in the fibres of sight, which are of the third
composition; these are its unities. 7. lVlany fibres taken to­
gether, and bound with a common membrane, are fibres which
belong ta every papilla or organic substance of the retina of
the eye. 8. These correspond to the general of the parts.
9. These again coalesce in the nerve which is callcel the ,)ptic
nerve. 10. Thus common visual fibres correspond to every
single cortical substance, or each papilla ta every single
substance. II. Thus there are three unities: one of these
is the simple unity of the visual fibre or third composi­
tion, the second is composed of the latter, and the third is
the optic nerve itself. 12. Each one of these if resolveel falls
back into the simpler sphere. 13. Eut the acoustic fibres or
those of the ear are of the fourth composition and are its
unities. 14. These unities are scattered through the mem­
branes of the cochlea and of the canals. 15. Eut the unities
of the fibres are diverse, anel yet they correspo.nd to each
other, as cio the papil1<e. 16. Eut indeed the fibres of smell,

*This manifestly refers to the work on the Fibre. See n. 475. 20.
196 THE SENSES.

taste and touch seem to be of a similar composition, in re­

gard to the smallest matter of taste and touch. 17. But the
papillée themselves are consociated and inc10sed in a sheath or
covered with an epidermis, so that thence the touch of many
things may give a rather dull sense, as has been observed.
18. But the motor fibres are little formed canals through which
flows the animal spirit. 19. Therefore the sensory fibres are
softer than the motor fibres; this happens from their composi­
tion. 20. But you will see experience agreeing with these
things, in the Part on the Fibre.
476. 28. According to those degrees the modifications run
through their own fibres. 1. The modifications run through
more perfectly as the fibres are of superior or simpler com­
position; 2. thus visual modifications, more perfectly than the
auditory; 3. thus they run through the second or inmost fibres
still more perfectly, where they can scarcely be called' modi­
fications. 4. They run through the simple fibre most perfectly.
5. Ali perfection decreases according to the clegree of the
composition. 6. The rays or modes of that most simple or­
gan, or the unities of the modifications fly most perfect1y; for
they are forrnecl and rollec1 quite agreeably to the nature of
that modification; 7. then their common modes, or those of
every papillée; 8. then their most common modes, or those of
the whole nerve; 9. these modes, that is to say the particular,
the cornmon and the most common, must agree, in order that
any sensation may exist. IO. The one reduces tlle other into
order with itself. II. Rence the least discrepancy is instantly
corrected by the inmost modes, through composition and har­
monizing. 12. Ali their parts conspire to their general for
their general is of the parts.
477. 29. According to those same degrees àlso changes
toke place in the common sensory or the brain. 1. The brain
is in a manner similar to the fibres. 2. There are cortical sub­
stances; 3. there are c1usters of the cortical substances; 4.
there are balls of these c1usters; 5. there are congeries of
these balls, and serpentine crowds; 6. of these latter are the
whole brains or hemispheres. 7. The one is arranged quite
agreeably to the other, in the highest natural order, 8. and
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 197

in similar harmony and form, 9. with a difference of perfec­

tion. 9a. Wherefore the particular, general and most general
modes, agree, ancl each one produces its own harmony or dis­
harmony; 10. thence the changes occur in 1ike degree.
478. 30. According to the same degrees occur also the af­
fections in ,the brain, 1. that is ta say, according ta the changes,
2. and their harmonies or disharmonies. 3. Therefore this is
the cause of the diversity of the five senses.
479. 32. The organic fonns in every organ determine
these things. 1. We have treated of their varieties in the
Part on the Tongue. 2. They determine these things also in
hearing, where the nervous fibres consisting of the composi­
tion of many fibres enter the sonorbus membranes, 3. accord­
ing ta every perceptible variety, 4. similarly the papiliGe every­
where.
480. 33. Every sense also must have its own general, to
which the modes or wtities are referred as parts. 1. The gen­
eral is not the greatest of that sense: 2. but is in a superï'or
degree. 3. As one papilla or one fascicle of fibres is a com­
mon unit, 4. also ail the papill<e, or the whole nerve is the most
generaJ.
481. 34. The generals differ frol1~ one ano,ther, as do the
series of P{JA1ts or of modes. 1. The general is what results
from the parts. 2. From a few parts results a general dif­
ferent from that which results from many. 3. One papilla is
the general of its own parts, unities or fibres. 4. Many
papiJ1<e produce a most general; 5. wherefore a general finds
place according to the number of unities; 6. for generals have
their unities as cio the parts. 7. Parts, gem~rals, and mas!
generals correspond ta each other as degret's. 8. The parts
are the supremes of that sense, the generals are the inferiors.
and sa forth. 9. Thus every sense has its own degrees; 10.
likewise also the fibres; 1 I. consequently like as modifications
and interchanges. 12. GeneraIs have also their maximum and
minimum. 13. l have treated of the idea of generals in the pas­
sage on the peritoneum; as is the ida of generals in substances,
such also it is in accidents and modes. 14. The concordance
of parts and of generals effect that aIl things may be rightly
 THE SENSES.

accomplished. 15. The smallest discrepancy from the parts,

in which there is a more perfect nature, is reduced into order.
482. 35. Thence the pa;r.ts 01' unities exist rightly dis­
tinguished from one another, and come' forth to evident per­
fection. I. GeneraIs are what come to the perception. 2.
They give the sensation itself, 3. under which the parts are
perceived; 4. otherwise they would not be distinguished except
by their general which gives perception. 5. As in substances,
so in modes. 6. Thus colors without a shaded plane and their
Own general are not perceived. 7. Sounds without the tremor
of the whole cranium and brain and meninges are not per­
ceived. 8. Sme11 without a modification of the pituitary mem­
brane is not perceived. 9. As in the strings of a musical in­
strument, when a string is tOl1ched, there is a tremulation from
end to end; these tremors have reference to its parts, for they
flash through the smallest of its parts; thence a string is vi­
brated to the very sight, through a second vibration and a cer­
tain form of gyration, which is its general tremor; as does the
string trembles, so also does the whole body of the instrument;
this is its most general. 10. A string cannot tremble par­
ticularly unless it trembles generally, nor generally, unless mo.,t
generally. Il. From the harmony of these things arises
sound or the particular distinction of sound. 12. But the prior
degree is not heard in the strings, but as it were a unity.
The second or vibratory degree -cornes to the sense, and indeed
by the aid of the most general tremor. 13. A like ratio is in
the single senses. 14. Therefore every sense has its oum de­
grees, superior and inferior, and indeed three, namely, paIY­
ticular, general and m..ost general; for there is order every­
where, and degrees of arder, Ï1t order thal there may be series
and correspondence.
483. 36. Every sense, of whatever degree, possesses -its
own maximum and 1nini1num, and the minimum has respect to
its oum greaJ:e1' and maximum, as unity has to its oum num­
ber. I. In regard to these degrees, which are not from prior
to posterior, we must treat in a doctrine of their own, which
doctrine is to be called the doctrine of association and series. 2.
There is a maximum and minimum as well in the quality of a
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 199

sense as in the quantity. 3. Every quality of a sense can be in­

creased in quantity, just as the degrees between the maximum
and minimum may be multiplied; 4. for example, there is a
maximum and minimum in the quality of sound between low
and high (grandem et acutwm) , which are said to be differences
of qualities rather than of degree; S. every such difference in
quantity can be increased, that is ta say, can be made higher
and lower, or it can be stronger and weaker. 6. There are
innumerable other qualities in soumIs, which qualities also
have their own maximum and minimum, as, for instance, sweet­
ness, harshness: softness, the composition of many or fewer,
and sa forth. 7. Al1 these things can be var,ously multiplied
or rather increased by additions. 8. Qualities in sight arc
represented by colors, quantities by intensity and weakness of
light. 8 a. Qualities in smell are represented by odors, whicn
likewise can be multiplied by quantities. 9. Qualities in taste
are divers fiavors, which likewise quantitatively acknowledge
their maximum and minimum. 10. But who can describe
qualitatively the differences of al1 the senses? IL they al1 have
their own analogies and harmonies. 12. Let us tarry in the
differences of qualities in sounds; they can be varied in three
ways, as is apparent in strings; 13. that is ta say, by the
prolongation or production of the string; 14. or by the thick­
ness or thinness of the string or chord; 15. then by greater or
lesser tension of the chord. 14a . In the ear aH those things
are most perfectly formed; that is to say, by the prolongation
of the nerve or membrane, as appeats in the sonorous plate
of the cochlea, which increases and decreases in width, for
the membrane itse1f has respect ta the nerve, for it is com­
posed of nerves; the result is the same whether we take the
membrane or the nerve; then by the thickness of the nerve
or membrane, as likewise appears in the same plate, for it
grows likewise in thinn'ess and thickness; but indeed a greater
or lesser tension is induced by changes of state. Isa . A like

thing obtains in every other sensory organ. 16. But the

qualities of every sense must first be sought out, thus those in
sight, smell, taste, and touch. 17. Qualities have respect to
celerities, wherefore ta thickness or thinness, as also to pro­
200 THE SENSES.

ductions. 18. But quantities acknowledge as causes of origin

active force, stronger or weaker. 19. Ali these things are
varieties of modes; every sensory organ is formed for thesc
infinite varieties. 20. Thence it follows that the unities ac­
knowledge their own maximum and minimum in every sense;
whcrefore so do the fibres; this is obtained by the diversity of
the multitude of the primogenital fibres. 21. GeneraIs also
obtain their own maximl1lTi and minimum, but more imper­
fectly than unities, for they are of an inferior degree; where­
fore the organic papillre which have respect to the first generals
of sensation; this is obtained by magnitude, that is to say by
its length and thickness, as was shown above in respect to
the plate of the cochlea, wherefore it is obtained by the form
of the little organ or papi lia. 22. The mos! generals also
have their own maximum and minimum, likewise by diverse
magnitude, or length and thickness, which is obtained by the
form of the papill::e among thcmselves, as appears in the sen­
sory of the cutic1e and the retina of the eye; in the cutic1e
are diverse forms of the papill::e, in the retinaîs a variant
thickness, which is diminished even to the crystalline lens;
it is in the greatest perfection directly opposite to the pupi!.
23. The form itself determines these things, whence is every
quality. 24. Always the more perfect the form, the superior
the degree. 25. Therefore in every sense, and in every de­
gree of it, there is a harmonie variety. 26. Whatever there­
fore agrees with this harmony is grateful, and the reverse.
27. For the most part the forms of the sensories have respect
to the form of the circumfluent world; 28, but in these latter
there can be an infinite variety; for either they approach more
near1y, or they go farther away, yea, sometimes into what is
contrary, in which case goodnesses are presented as evils, and
truths as falses. 29. This especially happens in the in­
most sense, which is infinitely susceptible of ail varieties, if it
does not suffer itself to be driven away from its most perfect
form.
484. 37. Al! ideas arise from sel1sa,tions of sight. 1. But
it is to be understood that no ideas arise except from images
of sight, or from those things which have respect to images
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 201

of sight. 2. For images of sight, or the simple rays of sight,

or its unities enter into the cortical substance itself and in-
duce a change upon it. 3. Changes of state in the cortical sub-
stances are produced and indeed initiated by sight; 4. thus
initiated they remain there under the idea of memory; when
this change is produced it is the calling forth of an idea from
the memory; S. thence it becomes evident what memory and
imagination are. 6. But these are first ideas and imaginations,
as it ,vere visual, .therefore called the material ideas of the first
age, such as are the diverse arrangements of objects, and
the harmonies thence arising; but superior or intellectual ideas
arise fro)TI these latter; one intellectual idea is formed from
many imaginative ones. 7. In general it respects the true
and the false, the nature of good and evil, or of the present
or the future. 8. The idea once formed is also stored up in the
memory, for it is presented together in one' imaginative idea,
which is thus multiplied, and thus enters the composite form
of the changes of state. 9. These are the genuine ideas of
thought, and are the elements of the sciences, especially the
philosophical. ro. Supreme ideas or those of the soul, cannot
be said to be ideas, but the representations of ends, which are
connate.
485. HeMing regarded in itself does not produce any ideas,
but only refers them under visual ideas. I. For the modifica-
tion of sound does not produce change of state in the single
cortical substances in particular; 2. but produces changes
among the substances, fibres and connections in the brain, and
indeed in a triple degree. 3. From these the soul in its !ittle
organs knows which idea corresponds. 4. And the soul is in
the imagination which flows in, and thus concurs. S. Where-
fore modification cannot be said to flow into ideas, but ideas
flow into the modes of sound. 6. What is superior flows. into
what is inferior; the inferior only furnishes that into
which the superior may flow. 7. But still it appears as
lf articulate sounds inflow into the single ideas of the
memory, but this is a fallacy of our sense; 8. for many lan-
guages, many words, diversely sounding, often contrary, pre-
sent the same idea; thus the ideas of the imagination flow into
the modes of hearing or into articulate sounds.
202 THE SENSES.

486. Modes of heGtring seem to be able to affect the imagina­

tion. I. Al! affection seems to be natural; 2. but it is also
obtained by art itself. 3. If al! affection were natural, then
we would perceive al! verities and goodnesses as well the
natural as the moral, as also the spiritual, and we wouId
recognize correspondence. 4. Wherefore the superior faculty
can be instructed, to the end that the inferior may be affected
according to an order not natural but acquired; 5. where­
fore according to verities and goodnesses impressed by a way
posterior to the understanding. 6. Thus we understand
emotions by the speech of the face, of gestutes, of the fingers.
7. Thus those blind from birth learn their ideas from touch
at the same time as from sound, if they be not deaf; but this
differs greatly from ideas received by sight.
487. AU hannony of posteri01's with prion, or of inferiors
with superiors, is cocstablished, not pre-established, I. as be­
fwëen the modes of speech and the ideas of the imagination.
Vve ought to inform the imagination by exercise and culture,
as to what idea corresponds to a given sound; as appeél.rs from
different languages. 2. There is likewise a harmony between
imaginative and intellectual ideas, which also must be co­
established, that is tosay, by means of sciences, their laws,
truths and hypotheses; to these imaginative ideas likewise cor­
respond. 3. So also between the intel!ectual and representa­
tive ideas of our mind there is a coestablished, not pre-estab­
lished, harmony. 4. It is the affection of the soul alone which
concurs. 5. But the affections of the soul and intellectuai mind
do not concur if other principles contrary to truth and true
goodness beset the mind. 6. The idea is one thing and the
affection another; the latter results from the form of the ic1eas.
7. In order, therefore, that the one may flow into the other,
the superior into the inferior, that state must by all means be
induced, so that the memory may be instructed by experiences,
and at the same time by true and suitable rules of the
sciences, and that we may remove all inferior affections,
and thus may let the soul flow into its own understand­
ing, and this into the imagination, and calI forth ideas which it
may reduce into order; 8. or rather that those things may be
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 203

suggested by the memory which are true, and may push noth­
ing actively further, but may let the soul flow into those ideas
and reduce them into order. 9. For there is no truth except
from the superior, and finally from the supreme. 10. But the
soul ought to be in that state, that the affection of the spirit may
flow into it, which cannot be done without spiritual reoovation.
1 I. Affections must flow in order into inferior affections, then
there is a true pre-established harmony, and a whole state. 12.
For, as has been said, an inferior faculty never flows into a
superior, but only furnishes those things into which the su­
perior may flow.
488. There is something in the fonns of inferior modes,
sensati01tS and ideas, which nalurfjll'j' affects superior things.
1. As in speech, in its single sonorous modes, which are
sweeter, more grateful and harsher, there are harmonies to­
gether with the affections of the animus thence resulting;
wherefore there are many similar things in our words, as in
the expressions, tinkling, thunder, whistling and endless other
expressions, besides many varieties interiorly in the same;
if the sound is rendered sharper or graver, it is changed
in quality and quantity. 2. In the words themselves joined to­
gether as in music, or in speech, when the voice is at one
time elevated, at another time lowered, now more quietly, now
again varied, altogether according to the affection of the sense
in the same expressions; thus by music alone, especialIy Italian
music, we institute a kind of speech more ornately, which
moves the affections of the animus; this speech we express
otherwise in words. 3. Likewise in speech by means of eio­
quence, or a harmonious arrangement of words, which affects
the understanding itself or the superior faculty. 4. These
things bring it about that things said may be more fully and
easily grasped and understood, wherefore that art has gone S0
far that it imitates nature. 5. Rence there is no natural speech,
except such as is also notieed in brutes; indeed, that also can
be effigiec1 by music anel a concert of words.
489. These things cannot be ttnderstood e:rcept by means cf
ne'w doctrines: I. namely, by the doctrine of forms, 2. of order
and degrees, 3. of influxes, 4. of correspondences, 5. of modifi­
204 THE SENSES.

cations, 6. wherein these things will ail be explained. 7. In the

meanwhile we live, as it were, in the shadow of things and <1.1­
though we acknowledge truths, we [perceive] them, as it were,
not by sight, but by touch. 8. And the)' are not even acknowl­
edged except by those whose understanding is immune to
hypotheses and false principles. 9. For as has been said aIl
things are coestablished from the posterior to prior things, not
pre-established. 10. Things must first be reduced into true
order by these doctrines, and thus we 111ust progress from the
prior to posterior things, when first we struggle out thither
from the posterior to primes. Ir. But still truths are not t):u<;
evident, unless the order be sa re-established, that the
affections of the superior faculties ma)' flow into inferior
things; 12. thus not unless the affections of the Divine spirit be
received by the soul, thus by the understanding. 13. For it is
a different thing to receive affections, which proclaim whether
the form is truly harmonious, from what it is to receive light,
whereby the faculty is continually illuminated, so that it may
form its own ideas, and thus dispose them to itself accorc1ing
to proposec1 ends or the loves of the body. 14. This is given
to everyone, but to be affected according to loves, wherefore
according tosuperior truths, this cannot happen. unless Sll­
preme affections, while they are flowing in, are received by
the proximately inferior faculties. 15. But we will treat of
these things in the Psychology. 16. Since aIl things, which re­
gard our sensitive faculties, must be coestablished, therefore,
inferior things always contend with the superior ones; not so
when they have been re-established, which is a work of God
alone. 17. The determinations of the will are pre-established
into act, 18. according ta the understanding.
490. The ideas are what form truths" the very form of
truth, or ra.ther of truths, produce goodness, and /unce affec­
tions. 1. Since aIl ideas must be learned, no truths can be
formed except by a posterior way. 2. Ideas must be arral's;ed
in suitable form, that thence the form of trut10 ma)' result. 3·
Thousands, yea myriads, of truths must enter into the form
of one truth; 4. and when the external senses transmit mere:.y
general impressions, and faIlacies respectively to interior
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 205

causes, essences and natures, from this it IS evident what

quality of truths are formed. 5. First ideas, in themselves
of ultimate nature, are the effects or images of sight, each
one of which is gifted with its own voice. 6. The ideas after­
wards arranged are experiences understood by means of those
first ideas. 7. Ideas again compounded are scientific, evolved
from experiences, whence are sciences. They are also intel­
lectual. 8. Ideas again compounded are the principles of
things, and have respect to spiritual truths.
491. Tn~ths sin'ce they Me forms, affect either on account
of pure hMmony, or on account of the love which is placed
for an end. I. Truths which affect on account of pure har­
mon)', are ail sensations on account of the pure harmony of the
parts. 2. There are harmonies and beauties of images, as of
the universe, of gardens, of palaces, of triumphal processions,
of colors and of faces; thus of ail images; 3. because
harmonies arise from modifications, there is a harmony
in the modificaions themselves; as in things musical. 4.
There are similar and superior truths, as the philosophical,
geometrical, physical, those of many sciences, the causes of
effects, the divination of future events from things present,
conclusions from many effects, from causes, means, contin­
gents, by the method of inductions, or syllogisms, etc. 5. These
truths, since they are not on account of another end thaü on
account of the truth, are pure harmonies, nor can the)' f1.1rnish
another affection than a kind of gladness or delectation, a.:: do
the organs from the harmonious objects of the senses. 6.
These truths are simple and natural goodnesses. 7. But on the
other hand, the truths, which look to sorne love as an enct,
affect otherwise. 8. They excite sorne affection for themse1ves,
as, for instance, if they are in the body, for pleasure on ac­
count of the love of the body. 9. In the animus they excite
allurement on account of the love of the body, such as the
possession of riches, and of the goods of the world. 10. In
the mind, on account of the love of self, \-vhich is caHed
ambition. 1 I. These are called goodnesses, and are believed to
be felicities. 12. The truths of goodness themse1ves, are
that it may be explored whether a good be truly g'ood, and what
206 THE SENSES.

is! the greatest. 13. Ta inquire after these truths is intellectual,

not natural; whatever natural is therein, seduces. 14. For
inferior goodnesses fight continually with the superior, ta the
extent that they appear, as it were, contrary ta each other. 15.
Avarice which is a goodness of the imagination destroys ail the
pleasures of the body; ambition, which pertains ta the rational
mind, or is the love of self, destroys aH avarice; spiritual love,
or the love of the Deity, destroys ail ambition, especially when
the spiritual love is pure, and one does not love Gad for the
sake of the love of one's felicity. 16. Thus they fight con­
stantly. 17. The cause of these combats is our own mode of
tiving, sensating and knowing from posteriors ta priors.
492. Animais recognize the harnwnies of tlûngs arising
from the senses better [tha<n men] for the'y correspond har­
1110nically with themselves,. 1. for they are ail natural harmon­
ies; 2 for they are not referred ta any understanding-, but im­
:,ediately ta sorne imagination, similar to the visual, and thence
ta the nature of their sou!. 3. Thus while they are ignorant of
it they are affected according ta the nature of their soul, which
is always constituted in arder and rule. 4. This happens in in­
sects still more perfect1y; for their sense of sig-ht, smell and
hearing concur in the same common membrane or meninx. 6.
The things which flow into the brain before the)' flow into the
meninx are the images of sight; but those of the rest of the
senses flow almost at the same time into the meninx and into
the brain; thus their affections are more natural, and those
which depend on sight are subjected ta the judgment of rea­
son. 7. But these things are tao profound and have need ta be
explained by many things, whereas here they have been ex­
pounded only dimly; but these things are obscure, perhaps not
true. l saw a fly. It went away, l drew back.
493. It was repeated concerning truths, according to ad­
rnonitions, as l declare, It returned, l being ~mwil!ing, <.IJnd l
scarcely b01'e it.
494. [1] Al! sensations àre forms, either harmonious or in­
lwrmonious; 1. Thus the sensations of touch, taste, smell, hear­
ing and sight ; 2. and they are natural ; for they result from the
forms of abjects. 3. Those harmonies persuade, and fre­
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 207

quently impose that that also is good which is harmonious. 4.

But conçeming the goodness which is in it, it is judged by a
higher power, which flows in. 5. The influence itself some­
times manifestly appears to be in it, for according to that influx
the harmonious sometimes appears as inharmonious and the
reverse. 6. Thus a superior affection sometimes persuades the
contrary, or against the affection of the sense. 7. For the sense
does pot grasp. what is within the fonn, or the harmony lies
hidden; the sense grasps only what is from the outside.
495. 2. The CMe is the same with ima1giJw.tive sensation.
1. For this disposes visual images into another order; they are
then called ideas, and indeed materiai ones; 2. these also are
naturaI, so far as the sensory ideas are natural, for they derive
their origins thence. 3. But there must be an influx into these
from what is superior, that they may appear truly harmonious,
either from the understanding or from the superior mind. 4.
Thence they derive the habit of truth or harmony. 5. From
hannony we judge naturally of goodness. 6. But superior and
inferior goodnesses rarely agree; but for the most part the)'
contend ; 7. hence are fal1acies, uniess truths of the higher
faculty instruct, and its goodnesses at the same time flow in.
496. 3. All tntths still more superior) or those of the under­
standing) Me not natltral) but a:re adscitùious) and artificial.
1. For they are Iearned through the experiences of the senses
and through sciences; 2. as for instance, conc1uding causes
from effects, in physics, in moraIs, and in other things, or
conc1uding consequences from premises, ends from means,
things to come from things present and pasto 3. Ail those
things follow from doctrines; for they are collected from those
things which, by means of the externai senses, and by tr:p.ans
of the ide.as of the imagination, flow in from beneath, thus
from the inferior. 4. Thence those truths are truths so far 3.5
they coincide. Thence are our principles which are conject­
ures; 5. ideas, not truths.
49'1. 4. There are nevertheless intellectual truths, which
affect naturally. 2. Those, namely, which alI approve, as it
were, with one mouth, 3. or those which fall under cornmon
sense, 4. and there cannot he anything doubtful in them) un­
208 THE SENSES.

less the nature of the minci be perverse, S. or unless the orcier

of the superior faculty be perverse, 6. and unless it has respect
to some good to which it cleflects those truths and thus per-
verts them. 7. But these are very general ideas, in which
the particulars are not distinct; but still the superior minci
commonly acknowledges their form as harmonious. 8. Such
are many moral truths, as, for instance. those of honesty, then
certain very general truths cf philosophy, and metaphysics.
9. The truer those principles are, ancl the better the con-
nection by which they are recluced into a form, ancl the more
agreeable it is to the nature of things, the more perfect ar~
these truths, or, as l may so say, the truer. JO. Since Geometry
consists of naked truths, therefore aU things resultant hom
that science are truths. IL So also are those things which can
be truly deducecl acorcling to geometrical principles.
498. 5. Those indubitable t'l'1f.ths are 01l1y pMts, {rom which
supcrior truths are to be concluded. 1. Thus the most gen-
eral truths taken together again constitute a form; 2. then they
can take on the form of what is true or what is false, alto-
gether according to the encls of sorne gooclness, which ends
we propose to ourselves. 3. Those ends have respect to sorne
love inferior or superior, 4. that is to say, either of the body
as pleasure in effect, or delight of the animus, or pleasure in
cause, or sorne love of self, or pleasure in principles. S. The
affection of truths is such as is the love \>vhich is proposecl as
an end. 6. Al! those truths are regardecl as means, 7. ancl
thus those encls are repugnant, then abhorrent, or, bv a
sinister explanation or a perverse connection, they are so
formecl that they may coincicle. 8. The truths themselves,
from which is the compouncl truth or conclusion, are regarclecl
as the means of forming those things which they bring to those
ends. 9. Hence dispositions are so far perverse that they cio
not cleny truths, but they cleduce thence, by means of perverse
syllogisms, what favors themselves. ra. Wherefore those
truths affect accorcling to the loves, IL which are natura!,
inferior and superior. 12. They affect indirectly or direct!y;
13. inclirect!y, if from conclucled truths l wish to gain either
fame or advantage. 14. This affection arises through reflec-
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 209

tion; 15. but indeed if anything is thence conc1uded which

as a medium tends to our ends, that is, affection through ap-
plication.
499. 6. Therefore as the love is, and the more strongly it
reigns, such is the affection thence arising. 1. It is lowest
and most perverse if it be only for the sake of the pkasures
of the body and earthly pleasures, and there is nothing in it
above that; such affections are irrational and purely animal.
2. Superior corporeal affection is for the sake of imaginary
pleasures or those in causes, as various delights of ideas and
the mere passions of the animus, as in avarice, in which we
are of the opinion' that for us âll pleasures are in power. 3.
Still more superior are the loves of self and ambitions, so that
one believes that he is more than human society, which he
does not fcar to injure, if on1y all utility yields to him. 4.
Still more superior are those for the sake of general society;
this is truly human. 5. The supreme are those for the sake
of the glory of the Divinity; this is spiritual, superhuman, and
a divine gift.
500. 7. Inferior loves fight naturall'j' with superior ones;
1. as the pleasures of the body and the world with loves in the
cause, as in avarice, which spurns every pleasure; 2. avarice
with ambition; for the ambitious man lays no weight on
wealth, and he contemns the avaricious. 3. Common love
fights with the love of self; for he! who is led by love towards
the public loves himself the less; he acts the Roman, as he
wishes to be a sacrifice fot the public good. 4. The supreme'
love or that of the Divinity combats frequently with the love'
of society in natural things, but not in spiritual things; 5..
wherefore the love of society and of the glory of the Divinity-
are consociated; that love is the neighbor of this degree, for
it is enjoined upon man as human that he should love society
more than himself, and the neighbor as himsclf: 6. this is
the truly human, thus the love of self is put off, and one is
in the way to true love. 7. The purest love is, that one love
the Divinity, not for the sake of oneself and one's own hap-
piness, but for the sake of the Divinity itseIf. 8. l do not
14
210 THE SENSES.

know whether this purest love is possible in the body except

by the immediate operation of Gad.
501. 8. Thus the more illferior loves recede, the more su­
perior lOTes cali flow in, 1. Since the battle is of ail, therefore
inferior loves are to be repe!led as enemies. 2. Therefore the
more the inferior, the less the superior loves rule ; and thm y:::e
versa the grace of the Divinity accedes. 3. And, that inferior
loves may perish, is brought about in various ways, naturally
by combats with ourselves, by removals, by true intuitions of
things, by prayers, by the grace of the Divinity. 4. Then to
these are added the means of the Divine Providence, that is to
say, diseases, unhappiness, spiritual temptations, the immediate
grace of the Divinity, and endless other things. 5. As man)'
as are the subjects, sa many are the diverse media. 6. Thence
come aU the affections which flow into Our intellectual sen­
sations, and the'y are the, truths of goodness whiclt precede,
al'ld the goodnesses of truth are what complete a thing.
502. 9. In a word intellectual tru.ths result, either from the
affections of the body or inferior affections, or from spiritual
affections 0·1' superior ones,. fo·r the understa'YI.ding is tlteir
center.
503. JO. The intellectuai regarded in itself is only the su­
preme sensitive,. 1. it results from the faculty of calling forth
ideas according to naturai arder. V/hat its quality is, is recog­
nized from the externa! or inferior senses; according to the
infiowing (alluentes) forms of obj ects it becomes sensation
and science. 2. But still affection itself is spiritual; such
therefore as is the affection, such is the spirituality which is
within; this must fiow in that any form may exist. 3. Accord­
ing to the a,ffection the state is clumged, and one becomes a
man,· for every affection changes the state. 4. Such therefore
as is the stafe, such are the effects or actions thence resultant,
which are qualified according to the state, and this according
to the affection, and this according to the understanding. 5.
It is thus in lowest things and thus in highest things. 6.
Wherefore without spiritual change of state, there could be no
heavenly Iife.
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 2Il

These things are to be further properly noted, and more CMe­

Jully e.'t:"amined: see hereafter in the Summary.
504. I. There is nafural affection and spiritual affection.
2. Natural affection has harmonies for its foundation, where­
fore it may also be called Harmonie affection. 3. But spiritual
affection has ends for a foundation, thus the progression of
means to ultimate ends or uses, so far as they are loves, 4. and
so far as spiritual affection has respect to the harmonious flux­
ion of causes to effects, and so far as aH causes and effects
flow to theil' own uses, and the uses have respect to loves, in
this they are concordant.
505. 2. There is 0' mixed affection, which parta./œs of the
nabwal and of the spiritual. 1. That is to say, it is one which
has respect simply to uses, whether natural or moral; 2. nor
does it openly have respect to any love which is within the use.
3. This affection can be called moral. 4. Wherefore there are
affections, na,tuIf'ai, moral, and spiritual.
506. 3. Na.tural affection ü divided into the sensitive, the
ùnaginative G'l'rd the intellechwl, I. or what amounts to the
same thing, into the cOJ·po'real or materia.l, which is of the ex­
ternal senses or the countenance; into the ph')lsical which is of
the imagination, or is the animus; and into the philosophical,
which is the understanding or mind. 2. AlI this affection has
respect to the harmony of objects or to the modification of
objects originating in figure and form; 3. wherefore it is called
harmonie.
507. Sensitive affection haiS respect merely to the figures of
objects; whertfore of their general a~z:d pœrticulM qualities.
1. Thus touch has respect to whatever variously titillates, or
hurts; 2. taste, to the figures of parts; 3. likewise smell; 4.
hearing, to the harmonies of sounds; 5. sight, to the harmonies
of obj ects, of colors, of shade and Iight. 6. This sensitive
arffection coincides entirel'), with sensa:tion; for it does not per­
ceive the figures, but the qualities thence resulting.
50S. ltnaginative or physical affection, like to the visu.al,
has If'espect to images as ideas, wliich it disposes into Q, new
order; thence is ha,rmonic affection. I. It is called merely
:harmony, while the objects of sight are excited in a simple
212 THE SENSES.

manner, 2. or many affections perceived by sight are arranged

among themselves into a natural order. 3. There are changes
of state in the cortex of the brain which have excited sensual
or visual modifications. 4. The harmony among those states,
makes this affection.
509. InteUectooi or philD'sophic a,ffection has respect to im­
material or more highly elevated ideas; I. and they have re­
spect especially to what is true and what is false. 2. \Vhere­
fore also there is a harmony of objects. 3. As imagination
draws and composes its ideas from sight, so does thought from
memory. 4. These ideas are called truths and falsities.
510. AU these natural affections, because they are hannon­
ious. pres1,tppose geometrical and analytical elements and prin­
ciples. I. As the affection of touch, taste and smell considers
only figures, thence their qualities are geometrical. 2. Like­
"vise the affection of hearing, whence is music, which comes
under analytical calculus. 3. Likewise the affection of sight,
whence is optics which is likewise subject to geometry and its
figures. 4. Likewise the imaginative affection; it has respect
especially to optics, and those things which do Dot fall under
that sphere have reference to geometrical principles. 5.
Thence is physical geometry which is very extensive. 6.
Likewise the philosophical affection; this acknowledges induc­
tions and series, as analysis acknowledges geometrical princi­
pIes; 7. wherefore also it enters into geometrical principles and
is callee! analysis; 8. and by many at this day it. is referred
thither, and demonstrated by geometrical rules.
511. Tliisphilosophical affection is,inmost sensation, which
is called understGlnding. 1. For it arises from the ideas of the
memory, 2. and consists only of changes of state, and of their
harmony. 3. It results therefore from the ideas of the mem­
ory, while the soul cooperates, which soul is the order and
nonn of the natural things of its own body, 4. which has con­
structed for itself the single subjects after the image of itself,
in which therefore the order is. 5. \Viherefore whatever is
suitable to it~ order and nature, and at the same time, to the
order and nature of the universe, this is known as truth. 6.
For ail things are thus geometrically circumstanced, as has
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 213

been said. 7. Therefore brute animaIs, which refer their ideas

immediately to their soul, not to an understanding, produce
such geometrical wonders, as nests, as bees do their comb, as
do spiders, as beavers, etc. 8. It is otherwise wifu men who
refer their sensations to the medium of principles or to the
intellectual, 9. and since it is perfected by these sensations,
and those things are mere principles, hence things are other­
wise circumstanced in man.
512. Inferior affections flow into superior ones, and the
s~tperior into the inferior, but 'lvi.th much difference. 1. While
inferior affections flow into superior ones, then the state of the
inferior affections is active, and that of the superior is passive
or only reactive. 2. But ,,,hile the superior flow into the infe­
rior then the state of the superior is active, and that of the
inferior is passive. 3. While superior affections are acting, the
inferior ought to be quiet, not so vice versa. 4. The more in­
ferior affections are quiet, the better is the active state of the
superior ones. 5. In the time of infancy inferior affections act
upon the superior ones; 6. but in the time of old age superior
affections are active, while inferior affections are quiet. 7.
Common sense thence derives its origin.
513. This is the faculty of thinking and of judging, 1. which
is thus inmost sensation, 2. with which the faculty of the soul
immediately concurs. 3. It is only intelIectual Iight (lumen),
4. which is natural, because it perceives the truths in the arder
of its nature, and the harmonie things of the universe ; 5. thus
what is true or what is false. 6. It is therefore simply good­
ness of form which perceives this affection.
514. The proxùnately inferior faculty perceives according
to the state put ~tpon the intellectua.f faculty} 1. for the inferior
depends upon the superior. 2. Thence the superior frequently
persuades the inferior as to what is harmonious. 3. We learn
aIl things by a posterior, sensitive or analytical way; 4. where­
fore on the science of that faculty depend the harmonies of the
inferior facuIty. 5. Thus also it is with the sensation of hear­
ing and sight; 6. bt~t not so indeed with touch and smelI, except
obscurely so far ~.~ we know or believe that there is evil in the
abjects.
21 4 THE SENSES.

~15. 4. In CJJ SUI11111U1IYY: Natura1 affection arises from the

harmony of ideas and series in the ana1ysis of the thoughts
which conc1ude; whence a kind of delight exists; but it is only
the harmony of the changes of state, which agree with the state
now induced a posteriori, that is, from princip1es; for whatever
is within the understanding, which is composed into ana1ytical
series, this being received is carried ta the senses or ta the
posterior \-vay, thence the understanding puts on its own state
and arder, wherefore there is a harmony of the changes of
state which concords with the harmony of the modifications.
But stiJl they are not truths, for truths flow in by a prior way
or that of the soul; this is not learned or established into its own
state, but is in its own arder and natural state if the represen­
tations of the mind agree with the representations of the sou1,
then natura1 truth is produced. The soul does not flow in ex­
cept with common 1ife, as the sun does into the eye with com­
mon 1ight (lwnum) , with the he1p of which images and appari­
tions appear, not such as they ought ta be, but such as they are
projected. The soul perceives these changes,. or causes them
ta be perceived intellectuall)'; but it does not therefore con­
cord; if the sou1 concorded then there would be a true har­
monious affection, and thè ana1ytic form itself wou1d be truth;
this cannat be done, if we have been instructed in principles,
and we do not permit the soul with its Iight (lumen) and life
ta flow in and conform the ver)' forms of our thoughts into
arder for itself and the nature of the universe; for this intui­
tion of the soul can be calIèd the representation of the universe ;
but how the soul can flow into the truths of this species, would
be tao prolix ta set forth; that is ta say, the mind is ta be im­
bued with no principles, the mind must have been gifted with
common sense, it must have intuition onl)' of things which are
offered ta it, it must disperse particulars, nor ought it ta have
an)' faith, unless aJl and single things coincide; in these things
which are ta be produced the mind ought ta be active; it must
itself submit ta the connection of things, as it were, ta the supe­
rior mind, ta harmonize the form; then the sou1 is active, and
the mind passive, or the soul actuates the principal cause, the
mind the instrumental; then truth flows in as if of its own wiII,
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 21 5

ta which the mind is forced ta assent, because the arder of the

universe conspires; then a kind of harmonie affection, assent
and delight find place. But the mind itself ought to be in that
state, sa that it may be in arder and truth, or it ought ta be
reduced ta that state, otherwise it would be in vain, and, in the
place of truths, hypotheses would find place. When the mind
is constituted in this state, then infinite things are divinely pro­
vided, which contribute to the perfecting of the thing; and it
cannat be in that state, unless at the same time it be in a more
perfect moral and spiritual state, saying, as it were, good bye
to the world and the body; thus being in the body, as it were,
separate from the body, sa that it may admit superior influxes
more than the inferior which disturb.
516. 5. Spiritual affecti01~.

NB. NB.

In Summary. A General Exposition.

Sensation and Affection.

517. Sensation gives birth to offection.: affection is of what

is good or what is evil; the affection of what is good is love, of
what 1:S evil is hale. The love of good involves hm'mony; har­
mon,':;' conjunction. Therefore good and evil aa the pritnciples
of aU affections.
518. The e,t'te-rnal sen..ses recognize good and truil, through
the affections,' imagination through reproduction and through
new production from the memory, from this imnost memory or
that of the understanding, which through its faculty of calling
forth and ana/ytically forming ideas, explores truths and also
the qualities of truth, especially the inmost memoY'jI, or that of
the understanding, that is, looks to see whether it be. truly or
falsely good, or truly or falsely evil,. in and under the cogni­
tion itself of truth lies hidden good or evil, by which sensation
is affected,. which is affected according to natural and acquired
order, in which is the very organism of life.
519. Wha.t the truly good and tmly evil is, is recognized,
especiall)1 f1'01n the love which is in the affection of the sensa:­
tions. The lowest love is thal of the world,o the love proxi­
mately superior the principal cause of that love, is the love of
the body; still 'l'tiare superior is the love of oltrselves, whence
216 THE SENSES.

is ambition.; still miGre sttperior is the love of society, which

increases by degrees according to the quality or the natural,
moral and spiritual bond, and according to quantity o-r uni­
versality; still more superior is the love of heavenly society;
the supreme love is the love of God.
520. That loves thus ascend, is evident from this induction.
Ott.r bodies are for the salle of the world, the internaI faculties
of the body, wh~nce is the love of ourselves, are 1Wt for the
sake of the body; human societies are not for the salle of our­
selves, heavenly society is not for the sake of earthly society,
but the reverse. -Thus neither is God for the sake of heavenly
societ)l, but this society is for the sakr; of His glory.
521. Thus true a1zd pure love, and the true and highest good
is God, from Whom, as from its own lirst, is all love, where­
fore the affection of good, felicity, harmony and conjunction;
thus also descends aU intelligence of truth.
522. Such thr;refore as is the love, such is the affection of
good; such as is the affection of good, such is the state; such
as is the sta.te, such is the life a-nd felicity, because such is the
hannony and conjunction. Wherefore, suclt as is the love,
such is the intelligence of truth; thence truth flows forth as
from its own fountain.
But let us come to particula.rs.
523. 1. S ensa.tion gives birth to affection. 1. Affections, like
sensations, are inferior and superior, 2. or exterior, as those
of the senses, interior, as those of the imagination or superior
sense, or of the inferior understanding, and the inmost are
those of the intellectual perception, or of our mind. 3. These
are the affections which come to our consciousness.
524. Affections are natural, rational or spiritual; thus in
our body they are variously mixed. 2. Natural affections flow
from the soul and its nature, and the order in which it is. 3.
Rational affections, also to be called voluntary, are our very
own, or the)' flow forth from our mind. 4. Spiritual affections
are still more superior, that is to say, of the supreme mind;
these are communicatecl to us by the soul.
525. That sensation gives birth to affection, see above; 1.
In the external senses, as in touch, the affection is gentleness,
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 217

softness, soothing, or harshness, pricking, hurting, whence the

affection of pain, (see abov'e) ; 2. in taste, as what is sweet,
tender, or what is offensive, pungent, (see above) ; 3. in smel1,
as what is fragrant, offensively smel1ing, (see above) ; 4. in
hearing, as what is harmonious or disharmonious, (see
above); S. in sight, what is handsome, beautiful, or what is
ugly, (see above). 6. In the imagination it is either the har­
monious, as in me1ody, optics, whence is delight fiowing
forth from the mJdification of hearing and sight; or it
is what is appetizing, whence is appetite, from the imagination
of sweetness originating in taste and smell; or what is desir­
anle, whence are the cupidities of the animus, from the love of
one's own body, from the natural or rational love of conserva­
tion, or from the irrational love of keeping or taking more than
is right. 6 a . These are the affections of the imagination re­
spectively to the visible world without one, and the sensitive
world within one. 7. The affections of the mind are also where
there are delights, loves of ends, loves of self or ambitions;
and like things, 8. and they are our own because they are of
the mind. 9. They are natural, from nature itself or from
cultivation, or are a first or second nature, or they are our own
and are learned, arising from received principles, ends and
comprehended loves; or they are spiritual.
526. External sensations are merely affections, 2. for they
are affected immediately according to the qualities of form.
3. Sensation itself is the reception of form, wherefore it is
affection. 4. Imagination is either the calling forth of visual
form from the memory, whence there is an affection like as if
we, being present, were 100 king at it, S. or it is the production
or creation of a new form, by the composition of many things
which have been seen, or by sciences and arts. 6. But there
are many affections "\"hich have respect to the moral world or
to human society; 7. thus they are moral affections, and have
respect to what is useful, decorous, or honorable. 8. What is
use fuI has respect to the wealth of the world, or to use in
society; one adds wealth to himself, that he may be great so
far as he abounds in it. 9. What is decorous, has respect to
ones being handsome in face, gesture and manners, and this as
218 THE SENSES.

the form of what is honorable. IO. What is honorable, that

aIl virtues may exist. II. Ali these things, which affect ac­
cording to their form and nature, arise from sensation. 12.
For there is nothing in which there 'is not form, there is no
fonn in wh'ich there is not quality, no quality which does nO'!
a·ffect the life in -ils own way, and no affection in which there
is not love, no good in which there is not love, (J)ppetite, desire,
and no evil in which there is no't hatred, aversion, flight.
5~7. Ali a.ffeetions ha·ve respect ta objects, e-ilher in the
world or in oneself, or in the society of many, or in heaven.
528. 2. The affection of good is love, 'and that of evil is
hale. I. In the senses it is called the good, the delight­
fuI, the harmonious, the handsome; 2. in the imagina­
tion, likewise the harmonious and handsome, whence delecta­
tion, gladness; then also the convenience of the body, the de­
sirable, the lovely, the excellent, the longed for (cupitum);
thence is cupidity. 3. In the mind it looks to the analytical,
the desirable, the good. 4. In superior things also it looks to
the good, even to the highest good. 4 a . Love remains in every
degree from the 100'1est to the highest, whence is the lovely,
for it is the center of ail the affections, for thence also they
are derived, therefore the name cloes not change. S. Hatred
is the contrary, whence is aversion. 6. There are endless in­
termediates. 7. Without a disquisition on the true and the
false, the good and the evil, there is no human reason, nor
speech, except affection alone.
529. 3. Love of the good ùwolves harmony. I. Thus love,
or the good is excited by harmony in inferior things; thus love
produces harmony in superior things. 2. Harmony is in things
simultaneous, wherefore in their for ms and figures. 3. It in­
volves therefore geometry, physics and aH its parts, yea, phil­
osophy itself or analyses. 4. Harmony also is of things suc­
cessive; this is circumstanced similarly to the harmony of
things simultaneous. S. For the simultaneous arose from
things successive in nature; wherefore the one is recognized
from the other. 6. There are relations of differences which
create harmony between two opposites. 7. But of what quality
the harmony of things sucessive would be is not recognized
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 219

from simultaneous harmonies, except one be keen scented.

8. Equation consists of mere analogies, and these of ratios.
9. Thus hate involves disharmony, because destruction.
530. 4. H annonjl (involves) conju.nction. 1. This is the
reason why it gives attention to what is harmomous. 2. Ee­
cause it gives attention, as it were, to one thing, nor to any­
thing dissonant or ugly. 3. Because there is notlri.ng which
destroys it. 4. As, therefore, is the union, such is the har­
mony. 5. The harmonies of modifications or sensations unite
in the cortex. 6. Thus disharmony (involves) disjunction.
7. \iVherefore the ancients imagined to themselves, that love
created the world, or that in the world there is pure harmony;
and that love itself separated it out of chaos and reduced it
into concord. 8. These things can be illustrated by endless
examples in notes.
531. 5. Therefore the good and the evil Me the principles
of all affections. 1. Affection itself is of the life, which feels,
and harmony is of nature. 2. \tVherefore good is produced
through hannony, and in the inferior animate or living wor1<l,
harmony produces good, and good, love. 3. In superior
nature love produces good, and the good, harmony. 4. Sen­
sations are affected according to the nature of goodness, be­
cause according to the harmony of forms, and 50 forth. 5.
In every sense there is good and evil. 6. There are endless
intermediate affections. 7. There are mixed affections. 8.
Thus there is material for much extension.
532. 6. The externa.t senses recognize the good amd the
evil through the affections; 1. but through the affections and
their differences; 2. or, what is within touch; 3. of what quali­
ties are the forms of the parts in things edible, through taste;
4. and of what are the forms in atmospheric effluvia, through
smell; 5. of what quality is the harmony of modification,
through hearing; 6. and of what is the beauty in images, and
objects, through sight; for the things which touch are objects,
and thus according to the quality of form they excite and af­
fect the sensory; thence is sensation. 7. Thus the science of
objects is derived from affection, not affection from sensa­
220 THE SENSES.

tian; 8. for it is excited by many external, unseen causes at

the same time or by a cornmon impulsive force of many things.
533. 7. Imœgination takes place by reproduction, and by
new p1'oduction {rom, the memor'y. 1. The memory of imag­
inations is, as it were, the campus of abjects which enter
through the external senses. 2. Thus a kind of new visible
worId is formed within us by the senses, 3. under a visible
form. 4. Imagination, stri{:tly sa caIled, is \vhen those abjects,
now ideas, are reproduced similarly as they had entered; it is
also caIIed remembrance. 4 a . Thus it reproduces images of
sight, as palaces, fields, ail species, societies and other things.
S. These are common ideas, ta which one formula of expression
is applied. 6. From these, more simple ideas are led forth,
like the parts of which those things are composed ; as the idea
of the sky, from this are brought forth its parts, as the idea of
the stars, of the sun, and sa forth. 7. These things are called
forth either through the experience of sight or through the
sciences; 8. if by the latter, it is done by the aid of thought or
understanding. 9. These things are similarly exposed in the
field of the memory, but distinctly in their own places. 10.
Thus further, still more distinctlyand interiorly. IL This
memory thus furnished is, as it were, the campus, from which
the inmost sense takes its objects, which are now cal!ed ideas,
as the external sensations take their modes and their images
from the campus of the universe or the worId, 12. thus each
sense, as weil the inmost as the outmost, outside themselves.
13. It is the part of the imagination to reproduce those things,
14. but when excited by the external senses, or by the appetites
of the body, or by one's other loves respectively ta the moral
worId, or ta the society in which one is. 15. Thus it is repro­
duced by three causes, namely, 1. by the abjects of the visible
worId, wherefore by the harmony of its objects; 2. by causes
in the body, as hunger, and other, as it were, instincts for pre­
serving, renewing and caressing the body, whence are the ap­
petites; thus are excited the affections of the sense of taste and
smell; 3. by the objects of the social worId or those met with in
society, and by reflections on oneself, thence ail the affections
of the animus, from respect of oneself ta that of societies. 16.
These are reproductions, because the ideas of the memory are
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 221

raised up from obj ects entering through the senses. 17. But
new productions exist either from nature, as in brutes, whence
there are wonderful instincts, as well to the geometrical
harmonies of the world as to the appetites of the body, as also
mutual loves of their own society; IS. also in some men there
are similar instincts, which, however, are called inclinations.
19. But imagination is produced especially in the human race
not by nature, but by oneself by the rational mind, 20. espe­
cially by means of sciences and arts, into which a man ought
to be inaugurated. 21. Inclination accedes thereto. 22. The
imagination which is reproduced has no other cognition or
science than the external sensations themselves, that is to say,
the affections. 23. But the imagination indeed which is pro­
duced, or the imagination formed anew from these things, ac­
knowledges either nature as a cause superior to itself and its
order in itself, 24. or it acknowledges its own proper mind,
and its sciences and arts, according to the rules of which,
wherefore according to the acquired or formed order of which,
it is instituted. 25. Wherefore no cognition of goodness can
be ascribed to the imagination, as from itself, but from things
either inferior to itself, or superior to itself. 26. The whole
science of the imagination is memory; 27. thus the science of
the quality of good or of form, of which goodness and har­
mony are predicated, resides in its memory, which is thus sepa­
rated from affection. 2S. Thus imagination judges nothing,
that is, does not examine the truths of goodness, but only re­
produces them, or produces new truths; 29. and indeed, from
causes above recounted, the imagination is only the mediate
faculty, in which the rational mind is instructed, and by which
it determines its will into act, especially into acts of speech.
30. Thus the imagination knows goods, either by affections, or
by previous science, or by nature, thus not from herself, but
from things inferior or superior to herse If, upon which she as
a mediate and mediating faculty depends. 31. That alone
seems to have its own and what is proper, which can reproduce
something from culture which is fixed in its memory, as
in sleepwalking and in nocturnal and diurnal phantasms.
(These things, strictly and brieRy, and in the exposition itse1f;
they are almost confused.)
 22~ THE SENSES.

534. 8. From this imagination is the inmost sensation or

the human understanding, which by its faotlty of calling forth
and analytically considering and forming ideas, explores truths.
1. Our understanding especially judges truths. 2. Truths are
natural, moral and spiritual. 3. Truths are demonstrated by
experience, especially by that of the senses; they are demon­
strated by causes inducted geometrically or in a geometrical
manner, and by rational investigations or analyses. 4. There­
fore, ail practical and theoretical sciences, such as physics and
its many parts, geometry and its parts, philosophy and its parts,
S. are sciences so far as they involve truths; wisdom is what
also involves goodnesses. The understanding exists especially
that we n.ay be able to choose what is good, and indeed the
best, and reject what is evil, especiaIly the worst. 7. \Vhere­
fore in arder that there may be choice, and that it may be im­
puted to us, the liberty of choosing is given, wherefore of
thinking, judging, willing, and acting. 3. Truth can be as­
similated to every form; in the form itself is the quality, which
affects according ta its perfection. 9. The perfection itself is
the good which affects, whence is love in living things. 10.
The exploration of perfections in themselves and among them­
selves is the office of truth; II. wherefore without truth good­
ness is not explored, still less chosen. 12. The very affection
of good, which affection is of the life which is from what is
good or perfect, is natural, to such 'an extent that it need not
be examined nor demonstrated by the understanding, thus as
to whether it be delightful in the sense of touch, taste and smell,
whether it be a harmony in song or music, whether it be beau­
tiful in optics. 13. Science indeed points out the truth of good­
ness; 14. but on the other hand, we have spiritual truths from
revelation; for we grasp spiritual truths by no sense; 15. but
still by sciences we can ascend e\'en to the demonstrations of
those perfections, especially by the doctrines of order and de­
grees, and also of forms; 16. but to be affected by them, or to
love them, is Divine, and is of His grace. 17. No other prin­
ciples are of the understanding, than what is true and what is
false, and what is good and what is evil; without them and
-their relation to one another there WQuld be no understanding.
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 223

no reason nor speech; thé sound by which affections are ex­

pressed would be sufficient; therefore there would be no ideas.
18. The understanding is especially engaged about the truths
of goodness, and, in the understanding truths and goodnesses
are separate; not so in brutes in whom they are conjoined and
are bare affections, as in our external senses.
535. 9. Then the qualities of truth,. 1. as in things geometri­
cal, the qualities of form, given the most perfect, as that of the
circ1e; 2. in music, the qualities of modifications; 3. likewise
in optics. 4. Ali analogies a1110ng themselves give quality; 5.
so also the sequence of means among themselves up to the end;
6. they all relate to form, and form to analogies and harmonies.
7. Thus is it in truth natura! or physical, thus in moral, and
thus in spiritual; 8. wherefore spiritual truths and substances
are also called fonTIS.
536. la. Thus now there is what is truly or falsely good,
and what is truly or falsely evil. 1. A thing is not good, be­
cause it appears to be good, thus neither is evil evil. 2. The
good of taste and smell is not therefore good because it is de­
lightful and sweet; 3. so in the animus and mind a thing is not
therefore good because it is represented as good. 4. Respect­
ively to the affection and love thence arising a thing is good
or evil. 5. But the truth must be sought, as to what is better,
and what relation they have to one another, whether this good
destroys that which is better; 6. and many like things which
are unlike. 7. What is evil is sometim~s a means to what is
good, etc., etc. 8. Therefore the medical art exists that we
may not be deluded by the appearance of good in taste. 9. In
the moral world, thence is the law of nature. JO. In things phil­
osophical, thence is philosophy. JO. [a] Wherefore the un­
derstanding exists for that reason, that is, for the choice of
good, for which the science of goodness in itself, and of good­
nesses among themse1ves, is required.
537. II. In and under the very cognition of truth lies hid­
den what is good or what is evil, by which that sensation is
affected. 1. That good derives its origin from love, for that
which we love, we believe to be good. 2. The affection itself
of what is good is love, or cornes from love. 3. For that which
 224 THE SENSES.

is harmony in the inanimate world, is love in the animate

world; 4. as for example, if we wish ta allure anyone ta our
love, then all the means tending thitherward are grateful, and
we be1ieve them ta be good; 5. that goodness then, is in the
very form of truth, and under it; 6. Thus if ambition of fame
and glory be the end, then if we hatch out anything sublime,
good is under it, although not within it. 7. It may be within,
not under it, if it be not the means to that end.
538. 12. This sensation is affected according to a natural
or an acquired state, in which itself and its eminent organism is.
1. \Ve attribute an eminent organism ta our rational mind; 2.
which is within the cortical substance. 3. This is ta be demon­
strated. 4. This organism itself learns ta take on endless
changes of state, which are its ideas. 5. Wherefore that ac­
quired state is given for the putting on of changes of state.
6. If this state coincides with the arder of nature and with
higher arder it is the best. 6. A perverted state loves what is
evil and false; 7. thus the devil and his sons; 8. it is their hap­
piness, but it is truly unhappiness. ­
539. 13. It is the part of inmost SENSATION, to distinguish
by superior o-y immaterial ideas, ca-uses from effects, and prin­
ciples from causes anal')'tically educed,o so arso consequences
and conclusions from premises,o ends trom mea'1'ts,' things pres­
ent from things past,o and to be affected b')' the vey')' form of
things successivel')' determined or simultaneousl')I existing, ac­
cording to the connection in which the)! co/ure together; thus
to discern distinctl')' what things a-re better. Thus it is the part
of sensation, to look to trtte and truer things, to distinguish
them, thus to afiirm, to deny, for instance that the')' are, what
and of what qualit')' the')' are, whence the)' ~-re, arnd wh')' the')'
are. This is the perception of the understanding or the inmost
sensation of the ideas set before it,o the)' are subinsinuated
either by the heard voice or the seen letter, vf a teacher,o or
from one's ver')' own field of ideas, that is from one's memory;
thence is common sense which is the more perfect the more
it is instructed, and the more agreeable the state of that sensa;­
tion is to the arder of supe-rior nature, as also the more friendl')'
it IS, naturaU')' or as an acquired state. And because to eve-y')'
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 225

sense is ,given the faculty of changing its states according to

affections res~tltant from the harmony or goodness of objects,
so also to inmost sensation thence is its fac~tlty of TH1NK1NG
J'

things, that is to say, of variously revolving, complicating,

determimng the tn~ngs set betore it until analysis or the rational
form emerges, by which it is affected, in wlûch it acquiesces
according to jhe affection; this is said to be its faculty of
JUDG1NG; thus sensation and affection distinctly reside in our
mind, a.nd the series of its operations is so ordered that we CQ'n­
not be a.ffected before we have perceived that this is so and
that it is coherent. The objects of this sensation are therefore
indeterminate ideas, such as are those of the theoretical
senses, their laws and axioms, from which, when determined,
results form, which is the conclusion determined (rom those
ideas and applied to the state of the present thing. The single
essential determinations, which constitute this form, and the
forms themselves, are called truths, all of which, as means, look
to the end, and are caUed intermedia.te ends, because the'JI tend
fn the ulterior end J
the)! are the ends which those forms or
'

truths look to, and which the 1tnderstanding explores; they are
the good tlûngs, the better and the best which ought to be
chosen, a.et'uaU)1 embraced, and loved according to their nature.
ft is the part of SCIENCE therefore to know these truths which
manifest goodnesses, wherefore it is also its part to lmow the
nature of goodnesses by aid of the faculty of thinking and
j~tdging sensually from experience, physicall)1 by rules geo­
metrically irue, philosophicaily b)1 reasor..s and analyses of the
mind, thus by those explored b)1 the anal)!tica,z way. ft is the
part of INTELLIGENCE to regard ends in every series of the
operations of the mind, and in its single moments, and to dis­
pose the series of ends or mediate ends to the ultimate end in
order that they may be uses. It is the part of W1SDOM to
choose the better from the goods of ends, and the best from the'
better, which is the ultimaJe end of intelligence,-not only t{)l
choose, but also to 'will; not only to will, but also to do; so that
it ma)! take on astate conformable to the nature of that good­
ness; wherefore to pursue the felicity which results thence. 1t is
the part of SUPERIOR W1SDüM, not only to choose, will and do
15
226 THE SENSES.

the best, but also to love it, wherefore to be a;ffected by a good­

ness which it does not naturally feel. For that superior wisdom
a superior intelligence is required, and a superior science which
does not flow in by way of the senses or the posterior way, but
by way of the soul or the prior way. This aJone is left to the
liberty of our unde,ystanding, to remove and dispel the inferior
loves, which are sensible to us, that they may not stand in the
way of the superior and supreme mind flowing in if it pleases,o
wherefore it pours in science, intelligence and superior wisdom,o
for inferior loves must be dulled and almost extinguished, so
that in the sphere of our mind superior loves may live and rule.
These increase in purity as inferior loves decreGJSe. These now
first come forth sensibly, and infinitely exceed inferior loves in
loveliness. Titus We ascend from natural to spiritual life,o for
according to repeated demonstrations, a like affection corre­
sponds to sensation, a like state, to affection, a like effect, to
state, wherefore a like felicity to the best love which is cal/ed
heavenl:y.
540. Therefore truth is the form from which, according
to its quality, perfection, or harmony and goodness, affection
results, or love and hate. 1. Thence what truth is, what good­
ness and what love and affection are, becomes evident; 2. for
they are al! distinct, although they appear to be together
within. 3. Truth, which is affirmed or denied, is the analytical
form of immaterial ideas, which being simple are indetermi­
nate, such as the theoretical sciences contain, from which being
determined composite forms flow, which are applied to use;
for instance, the units of numbers are indeterminate, but they
are determined by applications to civil and other uses; such
therefore as are those simple truths, such are the compound
truths thence resulting. 4. The quality of form flows from its
differences and the ratio of its determinations. 5. Every
quality is more perfect or more imperfect. 6. The more per­
fect quality is always the better, because more harmonious;
thence results goodness. 7. Affection is of life itself which is
affected, according to the perfection of the form regarded in
the perfection of its own order and state; as, for instance,
modification, life being present, becomes sensation; thus this
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 227

perfection of form or its harmony, which from life is called

good, becomes affection, or love, or hate; for the affection of
good is love, and the affection of evil is hate. Love, which is
diminished according to mixture with other loves, has its own
degrees; love will be pure if true, other loves being removed.
Knowledge certainly precedes choice, wherefore truth, the
choice of goodness, in the human mind. 8. From these things
it is evident how truth is a requisite before goodness, and the
knowledge of goodness before love; 9. and that these single
things are arranged in the human understanding that man may
derive the free will of choosing from himself, that is, from his
understanding, which is his own; 10. but he does not derive
from himself a love superior to his sensual part, except by
superior means. 1 I. And he cannot have this free will by
himself, but he can only dispose himself that he may have it,
the Divine grace approving, yea even fiowing into his disposi­
tions. 12. This is left to the Divine Providence.
541. We know what is truly good, and what is truly evil,
especially from the love which is in the affection of our sensa­
tions. I. But reason dictates that that is not truly good by
which we are sensibly affected; 2. for we are not affected by
those things which are above our inmost sense. 3. But we
judge otherwise.
542. The lowest love is that of the world, I. or the love of
those things which are outside us, and affect our sensations, or
by means of our sensations, us; 2. and because love involves
conjunction, we thus appropriate those things to ourselves, as
though they were adjoined to us, and as though they were with
us, and we in them. 3. Thus we believe ourselves to be very
great so far as we are in possession of those things which are
outside, and by love 50 adjoin them to ourselves, that we re­
spect ourselves in them, whence we draw the felicity of our
life; 4. nor do we love them for the sake of uses, but for the
sake of delights and affections. 5. Such things are of the ex­
ternal senses, as those which sweetly and pleasantly caress the
body, as soft seats, couches, rubbings, titillations, are refresh­
ments as to touch; 6. dainties and exquisite vlands and nectars
to the taste; 7. the fragrances of the garden and many things
228 THE SENSES.

to the smell; 8. the delights of song and music and like things
to the hearing; 9. aU the beauties of nature to the sight; la.
many magnificences, as of c10thing and endless other apparatus,
which are outside us, and which affect the animus; Ir. finally
wealth, the goods of the world, because they are outside. 13.
All these things are outside and affect the mind itself. 14.
Rence the things which are outside us, and are not ours, but
which by love we conjoin te ourseIves as ours,and love merely
for the sake of the delights, or for our own sake, not for the
sake of a higher or superior end. 15. If we love those things
for the sake of a superior end, then those ends are conjoined,
and from them we receive delights from the delights of the end.
16. Thus they are not to be looked at as without us but within
us, although they are without. 17. These things are known
as pleasures, because they are in ultimates as in effects.
543. The proximately superior love, for the sake of that
principal love is the love of the bod'j'. 1. The love of the body
is within us, sole/y for the delights of the body and the animus,
and not for the sake of better ends. 2. They are especiaUy
loves of the imagination or imaginary loves; 3. the loves of
vener)' for the sake of delights alone, not for the sake of an­
other end; 4. the loves of our beauty; 5. the loves of our
gestures and manners, whence are various kinds of pride; 6.
the loves of our knowledge, especially that of the memor)',
whence we believe ourselves wiser than others, while neverthe­
less we may be fools (phantastœ). 7. Thence are endless kinds
of insanities. 8. They are excited by causes within us, by the
blood; by the animal spirit; and not excited by causes without
us but by our very selves; 9. even the very proportions of the
blood excite those causes. ra. There are appetites of various
kinds. Ir. There are amusements of various kinds, there are
various kinds of pride and arrogance. 12. We regard society
in ourselves, but not ourselves in society. 13. That 'we ma)'
flatter this love, we favor the lowest love, which is as it were
the servant and the instrumental cause of it; wherefore this is
called the principal cause. 14. Thus it can be conjoined with
the prior, but it can also be separated.
544. In a word, aU those things pertain to the loves of the
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 229

body, I. which arise out of the field of the memory; 2. as aH

those things which come immediately into the senses from the
world; they should be referred to the loves of the world; 3.
for there is another field of the world, as it were, formed in
the memory. 4. \Vherefore al! those pleasures, appetites and
loves of the body, or of the inferior part of man, pertain to this
c1ass. 5. vVherefore if they also affect the superior part of
man, or his mind, or his inmost sensation, which is so much
the worse, 9. all these loves are without an end or use, they are
only for the sake of delectations, delights, appetites and loves
of the body. 7. They are excited in the first place by the senses,
or by the blood, thus by the body, or by the spirit of the blood,
thus by the imagination itself, or by the rational mind, which
then does not play its own part, but places ends in the love of
the body, and not further. 8. Such, therefore, are aH the
passions or affections of the animus, as pride, revenge, anger,
gladness, and many more; 9. especiallY avarice, which is the
complex of aH of them, for in wealth itself it regards the whole
world, or the possibility of aH things without fruition, thus
power and not deed. 10. \Vherefore as power is the origin of
all acts, so avarice is the root of aH affections. 1 I. Avarice
therefore is of the body, because of the imagination alone, and
nothing more; it loves wealth not for the sake of a superior
use but for the sake of the power to flatter its own loves, which
are many.
545. Still more superior is the love of ourselves, whence is
ambition. I. This pertains to the superior part of man. 2. It
is our proprium which is of the rational mind. 3. Renee what­
ever descends thence, descends from what is ours. 4. The love
of self is the love of one's own power and ability, or that one
may be a perfect and eminent man. 5. It is Adamitic love, in
that it recognizes no one superior to oneself ; 6. and aH com­
panions, or those about one, as below oneself; 7. and society for
the sake of oneself, not for the sake of itse1f. 8. It makes one­
self equal to ail, who are to be sacrificed for the sake of one­
self; 9. thus there is no love of the neighbor, nor of society,
nor of God in the love of self. 10. It is the worst because it is
proper to man. IL It is said to be ambition, but it is a filthy
230 THE SENSES.

ambition. 12. It is a genuine ambition if it be for the end

of serving society; therefore one wishes to be greater that he
may enjoy the power to do this, but still to contemn oneself.
13. That these three loves are diverse, is evident from the fact
that the love of self and one's own glory and fame, altogether
destroys the love of the body; it spurns and exposes its
avarice. 14. But the latter love or that of the body, as avarice,
destroys ail the pleasures which the body will receive from the
world. 15. This love is recognized from this, or from its oppo­
site, that it is angry with al! who speak against it, and that it
agrees with no one except him who flatters. 16. In society
where such a love reigns there are perpetuaI dissensions, nor
is recùnciliation ever to be hoped for, unless al! are submissive
to one.
546. Still more superior is the love of society, which in­
creases through its own degrees auording to qttality, or the
natural, moral and spiritual bond, and according to quantity or
universality. 1. Society is of friends. 2. It is of one or many
families. 3. It is of one province where one is known. 4. It is
of one kingdom. 5. It is of many kingdoms or of the whole
world. 6. Love is circumstanced according to quality. 7. The
natural bond is of the native country, of pl'l.rents, of friends,
then also of manners and likenesses. 8. The moral bond is of
honor and justice. 9. The spiritual bond is of religion.
547. Still more superior is the love of heavenly society, 1.
that is to say, that we love that society because it is the king­
dom of God. 2. Thus the spiritual bond in this society has
respect to that society, 3. because it is also the kingdom of God
on earth, and is the seminary of universal society; therefore
we must love those who constitute it, 5. thus the society itself.
6. That this society exists and of what quality it is, wil! be
evidently confirmed in our psychological treatises.
548. The supreme love is the love of God:0 because it is
love itseiff 2: the highest good itself. "'3: Thence must we have
all that we have; nothing is ours except what we have from
Him; 4. from Him is our happiness. \J. But pure love is for
the sake of good alone or God, without respect to our happi­
ness, which then in the greatest degree redounds upon us ;(§J
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 231

for love is the very spiritual bond. ([) In no one is there pure
love except in God alone.
549. The remaining conclusions follow of thetnSelves with-
out comment.
550, H ecpvenly society is not for the salle of earthly society,'
î> for the heavenly arises from the earthly as from its sem-
inary, or, if we may argue from ends, it cornes to the same.
2. The end for the sake of which the world exists is the animal
'Kingdom.* (3:" The end for the sake of which the body exists is
the rational mind and the soul; for it is formed for the repre-
sentation of the soul, and for the image of the operations of
the mind. \EThe end for the sake of which man in part exists
is society. 5/ The end for the sake of which earthly society
exists is heavenly society. ~The end for the sake of which
heavenly society exists is the glory of the Divinity. ez.)Thus
every single inferior thing in itself as in an image and type
represents a superior [end].
551. Thus also all intelligence of truth descends. ~.As it
is with the good so it is with the true. Q.:.For truth produces
goodness from itself,c.1 and goodness contains truth in itself.
<.. 4.' Thus the one cannot be separated from the other in the
first instance ;;~. but that from which one flows, from that
flows the other. 6.jThus God, as He is goodness itself, so He
.J

is trE..!h itself;::.z'JiÏi'd is the true good and th;;good true, which

is one; superior goodness and truth flow into inferior, but not
the reverse. ( 8. In inferior things there is no goodness and no
truth, which they do not receive from the superior. (9:) We
receive nothing true and good from the superior, unless we
remove impediments and inferior loves; \IOJ then it inflows
from grace, not from our merit. 'i I. F;; neither can we
remove those things with a superior power, that is to say, it
must be by its equilibration, and therefore by its presence; then
by contingents which promote or impede, wherefore by provi-
dence; G~", therefore there is nothing that is not from grace.
'r'3:' Vou will see these things confirmed, yea, demonstrated, in
our psychological treatises: l would dare to say demonstrated,

"'This expression c1early seems the adjective animale is derived

to signify the sou! kingdom, since from anima, soul or life.-TRANs.
23 2 THE SENSES.

for l know how to demonstrate to the very faith even of those

who are now unbelievers.

Continuation from harmonie or musical rules.

552. 1. Deepness and sharpness in sounds are produced from
four causes: 1. From the length of the string or chord; 2.
from its tension or slackness; 3. from its thickness and multi­
plication; 4. from its soliditY and the specifie gravity thence
arising. See the experiments in our collections on harmony or
music. S. Whether it be in strings or in membranes, it is the
same thing.
553. AU these things present themselves in the ear, and in­
deed with infinite variety. 1. Length in the scala cochleae,
where it decreases with every dimension; indeed the membrane
itse1f and its hard bony part [presents this] ; 2. the tension and
slackness is effected by means of the nerves, and by the con­
tinuation of the scala from the vestibule; it is very sensible in
inflammation of the ear, which is an inflammation of the nerves;
thus it seems to be effected by the smallest arteries. 3. In re­
spect to thickness,.. it is similarly presented in that membrane
of the cochlea and in the os lamellatum to every dimension;
4. likewise gravit)', for there is a bony substance into which
the membrane, as it were, thickens. S. Wherefore no variety
from indefinite things can happen, which does not there find
its own consonant or concord. 6. It is exactly the same,
whether it be in strings or in membranes; whether in diameter
or in area, there is a like ratio, although multiplied by one
another, and, as it seems, doubled, for it consists of strings or
nerves; thus whether in a drum or a stringed instrument. 7.
Thus it, [sound], passes into the nerves according to every
composition of differences.
554. A tike ratio obtains in things simultaneous or con­
sonant as in things successive or c01~cordant. 1. This is a gen­
eral ruIe, 2. in art and in nature; 3. see the experiments. 4.
Then again that consonant mqves consonant; 5. as in strings
and instruments, and organs of sound; 6. in us and in the
cranium; 7. in the voice and in glasses, etc. 8. See the ex­
periments.
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 233

555. 2.]1.1 odifications and sounds have between their intervals

a concordance according to the coincidence of their vibrations,
and thus an application of one sound to the other. 1. Thus in
every modification. 2. More rules occur here, especially in
subtler nature than can be treated of scientifically by rules. 3.
But let us stick to musical harmonies. 4. [The interval] l to 2
gives a like consonance but deeper; thenee is the octave; there
is only one apposition, which immediately returns to a con­
cord, or coincides. 5. But [the interval] 2 to 3 is the fifth; in
every third turn it returns to the consonance; 6 [the interval]
3 to 4 returns in every fourth turn, and so forth. 7. There are
modes which never coincide, they are called surds; 8. and
there are those which coincide after a long series.
556. It makes a grateful variety, when there are opposi­
tions which quickly and truly coincide. 1. Renee the grateful­
ness can be determined by the harmony; 2. as in taste, the
sweetly acid, the citroneous, etc. 3. In smerI, a spirit is grate­
fuI if it be pungent. 4. In music where similar things coincide
into harmony, as in the chromatic. 5. In colors, the beautiful
mingling of blacks and whites; in images, shade and light.
6. In common 1ife, small infirmities, adversities, in hope, in
single things. 7. In imagination and thought, the alternation
of what is good and evil, what true and false. 70.. Therefore
every variety delights. 8. Indeed the opposIte gives relation,
relation the sense of what is lovely or unlovely. 9. Without
relatives there is no affection; one tone effects nothing, except
relatively to another. IO. In the form of variety is all beauty
and delight. IL Yea, from sub j ects decorously co-ordinated
and subordinated is society; such must be the heavenly society;
where there will be the relation of love and hate in minds.
557. AU the modifications of one sense, of whatever in­
terva1 they may be, run through the fibres of the nerves within
the sa.me moment of time, or with a like velocity. 1. Otherwise
there would not be what is simultaneous or consonant in the
brain, which consonance is in the sensory, as in the ear and
the eye. 2. They must concord in the flow and communication.
3. One simple modification consists of infinite smalter ones,. it
234 THE SENSES.

is, as it were, a llMmber, not a wn,it, but of vanous units

homogeneous among themselves. 4. Indeed a general con­
stituted of these [units], which general is of an inferior de­
gree, or is a composition of many fibres in their own cornmon
tunic of convolutions, also flashes in the same time. S. Where­
fore compound fibres are in fascic1es, 6. and the fascic1es are
conjoined with their fibres by membranes and fibres, and again
are also protracted into a right line and thus compounded; so
that they necessarily coincide, nor may one run ahead of the
other, 7. but shaH be so consonant, as if the one had arisen
from the other. which is also the case. 8. Therefore also the
general modification runs through in the sam!!' time as the par­
ticular modifications.
558. 3. The sensory fibres, as also the other fibres, are so
eom~ected, that the connection 11WY be hurt by the least move'o­
ment of dishœrmony, and the fibres thus beeome dissonant in the
brain. I.The fibres in themselves or in their tunics are thus
connected; they are made for the harmony of their own flux­
ion. 2. The fibres communicate with one another through very
thin webs of the membranes. 3. The fibres communicate with
their common tunic5 likewise by unfoldings tender and subtil;
4. likewise the membranes, which consist of fibres and vessels.
S. In them are inc10sed liquids or lymphs; or it may be the
spirit or the blood; these suffer and resist if they meet with
disharmony; for they are tormented. 6. Every such dishar­
mony reflects into every interfluent part, which is the most per­
fect form; therefore it is forced to undergo a like change of
form, or of its state; 7. not to speak of the organic beginnings
in the brain, of which below. 8. Therefore every disharmony
threatens the dissolution, disruption, perversion of the state,
sickness and death; therefore it sounds so sad; for the menace
of death is in those disharmonies.
559. 4. Among quantities also faUs agreeableness or har­
mony [I.] thence is accent; 2. but of these things elsewhere.
J'

560. S. That it may fall within the understanding, how

sounds or harmonie modes or concords coincide is to be shown
by means of lines.
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 235

561. Fig. l represents the eighth, that is to say, that AC is

l, and AF = FC is 2. 2. The triangle ABC signifies one plica­
tion or one grave mode; 3. but the two triangles AEF and
FDC represent two modes, which coincide in the eighth with a
difference of gravity and sharpness. 4. It is the same if in
place of triangles, circ1es or spirals be taken, for the com­
pounds run through circies, and the more simple through
spirals; 5. for the one corresponds to the other, the triangle to
the circ1e, and so forth. 6. From these things it appears that
while the grave mode runs through AB, the sharp mode runs

through AEF; 7. thus there is an opposItIOn while the eye

runs through EF, and a grave opposition when it runs through
EB; 8. but still by the flux of the sharp mode EF, at the same
time it binds the grave mode sensibly so that it may be bent
from B to C, and thus concurs with F.D. 9. It appears that
they also always flow parallel ; 10. then also that the triangle
of the one is equal to the side of the other, or AE + EF is
equal to AB, etc. lOa. So also it is in circ1es and spirals.
562. Fig. II represents the fifth or the ratio of 2 to 3; for l,
gq is divided into two parts at l, 2. thence arise two triangles
gil and loq. 3. The same line is divided into three parts as gk,
 THE SENSES.

kn, nq. 4. There they also become triangles, or circ1es, or

spirals, which represent modes; S. whence it appears that the
grave or 2 runs through gil at the same time as the sharp gkm
runs through 10 triangle. 6. Therefore while it runs
through kh it is grave in the ascent, and it is only with km
in the descent, but not for long.
563. From these tlvings now follow these general rules.
1. That the more consonant things are, or the more they con­
cord, the more fr~quentry they coi~isIe in the same time and

/,i Fia 2.

in the same space, according to the known rule in theoretic

music. 2. The more consonant they are or tbe more they con­
cord, the more and longer they proceed paralle1 to one another,
and thus agree. 3. Then also they c.s>incide in meaning, an­
alogies, ratios and equations; this can be fuHy illustrated by
geometry if we wish to iHustrate particular1y, indeed a book
might be filled with agreeing examples ; for if we know generals
and particulars from the rules of the sciences, then we can pro­
ceed to infinity, as, for instance, by the reading of Euc1id alone,
and from the philosophical maxims of one of the ancient phil­
osophers, or of one of the more modern; they are only appli­
cations which are endless; but they bec10ud the mind while it
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 237

is held in generals. 4. Whence also it can be deduced that the

greater the harmony the more quickly does the sharp draw the
grave with it into the same modification, whlch is the reason
that generals and particulars cannot differ, for the one draws
the other with it, and particulars thus form their own general.
5. Indeed that which is purer and more perfect, or prior, ex­
cites that which is more compound, more imperfect and pos­
terior into the same modification as itself, thus that it may be co­
incidental. 6. Wherefore that the form of the fluxion purer
or prior thus and not otherwise concurs with the form of
the fluxion posterior or more imperfect, that is to say, the
triangular with the circular, the circular with the spiral, and
so forth; 7. for thus the one form becomes the measure and
origin of the other. And in one nerve many forms agree, for
the one is generated from the other by coincidence. 8. Thus
the modification of a nerve produces a general vibration of it;
9. whether such a vibration be into perpetuaI gyres, or there be
a conatus into the same gyres, and the conatus runs through
the fibres, which conatus is then said to be active, or without
2. vibration of the fibres, but with only a pressure of the conatus,

a similar effect results. 9 [a]. These are the primary mIes,

but there are infinitely more, which are treated of every­
where in the doctrine of forms and modifications. II. It must
be observed that the graver atone is, the higher it ascends to its
general, for it produces higher vibrations; for t~e more fibres, or
units, it moves, at the same time, with the greater difficulty can
it concord; wherefore a harmony does not exceed 6/5, nor does
it pass over to the seventh, I I [a]. then also that particulars
must form their own general, as was shown above. 12. That
there are many compounds, thus, as it were, series of modifica­
tions. 13. That fibers are to be considered as inclosed in their
own general, as in centres, so that a modification may tend
hither and thither, not to one side but from centre to peri­
pheries, and be terminated in their own general. 14· That one
general can receive into itself 'aH series of vibrations of the
parts, so that it can be varied, thus the fascide of aH the fibers,
 THE SENSES.

few or many; the one rules the other, thus like moments in
like space; and without the general there is no modification.
IS. As fibreS are of apurer form, the more perfect they are,
and the less are they reduced to dissonances, and being col·
lected, the more easily are they led back to consonances; they
derive their nature from the perfection of their form.
564. The quantities of sounds express a!ffectio'nS, [1]. so that
qualities express sensations. 2. Thus qualitles or gravities of
sounds also express an acuter harmony, which indeed excites
affection, 3. but more naturally and easily if the harmony is
conjoined with an analogy of quantity. 4. Quantities are alti­
tudes, as in figure 3, vvhere triple altitudes are represetned, as

appears from nerves strongly moved; these are traversed also

in the same time, whether the sounds be intense or slight. S.
It is just the same whether the form be represented as triangu­
lar or circular or spiral, for the ratio of the one refers to the
other in these things. 6. There is also a ratio and harmony of
altitudes. By the ancients modes are also attributed to those
altitudes, but they are differences of one mode. 7. There is a
simple harmony of them, together with a double harmony of
qualities; 8. and indeed almost a similar harmony, 9. for while
they are dissonant, the degrees then likewise draw the con­
nection of the fibers apart into latitude; 10. as while it de­
scends from grave alto to the sharp thin; it is otherwise if
from the thin alto to the grave.· 1 I. This is by musicians called
thesis and arsis. 12. The ratio can easily be examined from
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 239

geom~try and from the connection of the fibers. I3. A recti­

linear triangle or a circle is the measure of the l'est. The
higher of these are changed to an acute ellipse, and the less high
to a more plane ellipse. I4. But the degrees of altitude are
learned from use, for it is difficult to determine whether the
quantity be double, triple, sextuple, etc. Hearing does not dis­
tinguish as to degrees, so as to be able to give names to them.
I5. It IS nevertheless evident that there is one measure of many.
to which they have respect; I6. and that the measure is double
when the triangle becomes of a double area, or the cube of a
triple area, and so forth, to the extent that it may not be meas­
ured perpendicularly. I7. The limit of altitude is given natur­
ally from nature, if beyond that, the connections are broken,
and they are so dulled that they can hardly be restored. I8.
But since these are degrees of quantity, thence is its quality,
the rules are similar.
565. Changes of state in the brain, but especially in the
cortical substance are similarly circumstanced. 1. For to the
modifications in the fibers correspond like changes in the
brains or in the cortical substances. 2. For the fibers are, as
it were, so man)' axes, which terminate in those substances, or
go forth from those substances, but not as their diameters.
3. Every fiber unfolds itself in the cortical substance, accord­
ing to the continuation of its fiber, 4. and because ail the fibers
are modified in sensation hence similar modifications traverse
the fibers in the cortical substances, even to their ends. S, In
those substances fibers run out by a right line in the axis into
the surface along aIl their deternlinations, wherefore from ail
the fibers of the axis into ail the corresponding fibers of the
cortical substances. 6. The fibers of the cortical substance flow
forth altogether according to the nature of the fluxion of that
modification; 7. just as the modifications in the atmospheres
are determined or formed according to every nature of modi­
fication, 8. with this sole difference, that they are connected
into a form and thus cohere, so that they are contiguous; it i5
otherwise in the atmospheres, where they do not cohere but
are continuou5.* 9. Nevertheless on bath sides there i5 a

*The Latin here is contiguœ (contiguous).-TR.

 THE SENSES.

similar form of modification, 10. which is the reason why modi­

fications in the atmospheres agree so wonderfully with the
modifications or sensations in the common sensory.
566. From these things it follows that in the cortical sub­
stances rules come to be observed similar to those in the modi­
fications of the corresponding atmopsheres. I. vVherefore
they spring from these. 2. Similar impressions of those rules
in the sensories, exist in the cerebrum; 3. and they are only the
changes of state which sensations produce.
567. It follows from these considerations that changes of
stale in the substances of the brain, observe the same harmonie
laws as the fibers, about which we have treated, that is to say:
I. There are things which concord and are consonant, and
those which discord. 2. For like changes traverse every single
fiber in the substance of the cortex, according to its determina­
tion, thus according to its form which all the changes deter­
mine at once; 3. thus because they are coherent; if they be not
coherent, as in. the nerve fibers, in modes in like time, they
hurt and distract still more. 4. For many points are there
coherent, and indeed in an expanded form, and in its own
fluxion, from which they cannot be disturbed without a sense
of pain.
568. According to the rules concerning the atmospheres il
follows, 1. That a modified volume of the atmosphere, while it
is modified in every direction, finaIly ends in unity itself, so that
in every unit it terminates its own modification. 2. If the
ratio or form of modification be harmonie, then it acts agree­
ably upon its own single unit; 3. the units therein in the cor­
tical substance of which they are disposed, are like the sub­
stances themselves in the brain; wherefore every modification
of the brain ends in every cortical substance, as in its own
unit. 4. This modification thus concentrated in the units pro­
duces such effect, that it may change the general fonn or
figure of every unit, but not the form of the singulars, which
flow within. 5. AIl single forms make their own general form
most suitable to themselves, which corresponds indeed to their
own flexion, or the form determines its own figure or external
form. 6. If now an exterior modification flow along the
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 241

fibers to the single parts as units, it follows thence, that,

if the modification or determination be discordant, they ad
upon the general forms of the units or without, discord­
antly; 7. in a word, that they change their general forms and
turn them into another form, 8. so that if they were of a circular
fonn, then by concourse they are forced into forms variously
elliptical; 9. but indeed if the modification be discordant they
are forced into forms perversely elliptical, of no rule, twisted,
variously unequal. IO. Thence the interior forms of every unit
are actuated, nor can they run forth into a form agreeable to
their own nature; 1 I. but perpetuaI collisions and combats
arise. 12. Thus innumerable other determinations, and many
contrary ones, arise so long as this form and general action
lasts. 13. If the general form lasts a long time, finally interior
determinations are formed according to it, and indeed so that
they confirm that form, for determinations are successively
thus fonned. 14. Thence arise perverse states even to' inmost
things which conspire. IS. But in the beginning there is com­
bat between modifications or changes, exterior and interior.
16. Victory is treated of. 17. If the exterior conquers, then the
state of the interiOl's is perverted; 18. if the interior conquers,
it then wins so many triumphs, and as it were modifies and.
extinguishes exterior states; and dec1ares its own freedom.
569. From these things it appears how the interior man:
fights with the exterior man in the rational mind. I. The ex­
terior man consists of the senses even to the imagination in­
c1usive1y; 2. but the interior consists of the soul. 3. The ra­
tional mind is the center. 4. The imagination continually
pushes persuasions into the sphere of the rational mind; S.
but the soul reacts. 6. The general state of the rational mind
is perpetually pervertec1, and c1isturbed out of its determination
or form by the imagination; 7. but the mind by means of the
faith which f10ws in from the divine spirit by the soul, reacts
upon the mind. 8. Thus victory is perpetually treated of. 9.
If the imagination, or the sensations, or the life of the body
conquers, then the state of the mind is perverted to the extent
that the soul can no longer react and restore it; 10. but if the
soul by means of the supreme mind gains the victory, then it
16
 THE SENSES.

destroys the states induced by the imagination, and thus so

many times as it were extinguishes them with death, or causes
that it can faH back into a suitable, harmonie and more perfect
state. 1 I. That there is such an action and reaction in our
rational mind will be demonstrated in our Psychology: 12.
And that there is such a state in the inmost things of the brain
will also be confirmed in the part on the cortical substance,
.where that substance will be treated of specifically. 13. But in
order to demonstrate these things a great digression is neces­
,sary, or, a broad foundation must be laid, yea a temple must be
built; for these shall furnish the interiors of our temple.
Praise be to God.
570. (This "vas represented by gold which l was carry­
ing, and which, although not so easily, would open the
daor, where within much gold was lying on a table, that
is to say, it might give me access ta spiritual things.)
571. In modifications or sensations singulars produce their
own. generals, and tha-t ù1dced by their o'Wn active powers of
acting. I. As especially appears in the nerves and their fibres
and compositions. 2. For one fibre has reference to a unity,
more, to some nnmber of units; all the fibres have reference at
once to the greatest number. 3. This number is intertwined in
its own common membrane, which makes up a fascic1e of those
'nnits, and it is that general to which the fibres inc1uc1ec1 in the
modifications or single sensations have reference. 4. General
modification or sensation is that which is thus proc1uced, and it
exists in that fascic1e of the fibres which otherwise is callec1 a
nervule, or the beginning of a nerve. 5. The modification of
this nervule thus concurs with the modification of single
things.
572. General modification or sensation is produced by the
modification or sensati01L of singulars through the fluxion of a
superior fo1'1n or more perfect spiral. I. It must not be con­
ceived that modifications progress by right lines only along the
fibres of the nerve; 2. but as' in the atmospheres, that while
they proceed from centres through right lines, they also go
forth into spirals, 3. and that they likewise force their way
through the spirals of their fluxion, and thus through the
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 243

easiest way. 4. Altogether as in the atmospheres. S. This

progression into spirals, or fluxion through the easiest form,
produces a complete general modification; thus from the at­
mospheres we can be instructed concerning the nerves, as we
can fram modifications concerning sensations. 6. While this
fluxion thus proceeds, it is necessary that the fascic1e or gen­
eral creep according to this fluxion, and thus of necessity pro­
duce a general modification: 7. This is apparent to the eye in
the strings of instruments, in stretched threads, especially in
ropes, very far extended, or hanging in mines, when this phe­
nomenon becomes visible, and it is a kind of spiral fluxion
from the beginning of the motion; and, like the undulation in
water, it is according to the length of the string or rape. 8.
This fluxion persists with such great force, that, in the other
extremity, where a similar fluxion shows itself, nothing can
resist it, 9. and it is circumstanced according to the length,
tension, thickness and material of the cord; this l have often
observed.
573. The modification of simple things is to general modi­
fication as a l'oot to its square; 1. to the extent that there is a
double ratio. 2. Wherefore the modification of simples pro­
ceeds by the ratio or analogy of simples, likewise the general
proceeds by the ratio or analogy squared. 3. Thence the
differences of modifications can be deduced. 4. But every
moclification per se not so, unless it conserve the same ratio;
that is to say, so that it be the same simple and the same square
from one extreme to the other. S. If many units be modi­
fied at once, then another square arises, which is similarly con­
tinued. 6. Many ratios at once, and, as it were, equations like­
wise produce their own general. 7. This exceeds all geometri­
cal and analytical calculus. 8. This also appears from geome­
try; for a fibre must be multiplied with the whole fibre, which
produces the area of the fascicle or nervule, so that this may
be produced. 9. Thus the simple and the compound, or the
raot and the square, can by no means differ, for the one exists
from the other. 10. But indeed respectively ta the spiral
fluxion of simples, which is a spiral of a higher form, it seems
to be driven with infinite swiftness, sa that it may arrive at
 THE SENSES.

that swiftness which actuates the compound, for the latter is

composed of the former; IL therefore, they correspond in
swiftness. 12. This appears very evidently to the imagination
in the atmospheres, of which above.
574. This general which exists in the fascicles likewise
prodttces a modification still more general, which finds place in
the compound of the fascicles, or in the nerve itself. 1. For a
nerve is composed of fascicles; 2. wherefore there is a like
ratio of the fascicles to their nerve as of the fibres to their
fascicles; 3. so that the things which have already been said,
can also be referred to this place; 4. wherefore, only let appli­
cation be made; S. but only with this difference, that the flux­
ion of the more perféct form then goes off into the fluxion of
a more imperfect fonn; 6. or from a spiral into a circular
form.
575.. This general modification is likewise to its own more
general as a root to its square, or what amou.nts to the same­
thing, as a sqttare to its cube. 1. There is a similar ratio and
analogy. 2, For if there be a simple ratio of 3 to 4, then the
ratio of the squares is as 9 to 12, and of the cubes as 27 to 48;
and the ratio is the same everywhere, for 3 is to 4 as 27 to 48,
and so forth. 3. Therefore, also the modification of the whole
nerve, which is the most general, coincides with the general
modification or that of the fascicle, as the general or that of
the fascicles with the simple modification or that of the fibre
or fibres.
576. From these things it follows, tha.t no modification
comes to manifest sensation, unless its simple be elevated ta
the cube or to the third dimension. 1. Even so that every
modification must represent a kind of body berore it can be­
come manifest. 2. This appears in the atmospheres. 3. Tt
appears similarly in the nerves and their compositions; it also
appears in strings, the vibrations of which must arise in a
triplicate ratio, before sound can result; that is to say, the
first ratio is through the fibres of the string; the second,
through the visible vibration or undulation thence resulting;
the third, through the body of the adjoined instrument, with­
out which there is no sound. 4. A similar thing obtains in the
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 245

purer sensations and modifications. S. Therefore, every modi­

fication puts on, as it were, a kind of body, in order that it may
be anything.
577. A like thing as has been said of the nerves, is also to
be said of the beginnings of the nerves. that is, of the cortical
substances, where changes of state exist, and sensations them­
selves according to those states,. I. for there aH the vibrations
of the fibres arrive at their boundaries, 2. as from the origins
of motion to their expanses, as it were, to their atmospheres,
3. in which aH the fibers are likewise modified, that is, all
therein that correspond; 4. but the fluxion pervades according
to the determination of the fibres therein. S. The determina­
tion of the fibres therein is entirely according to forms, of
which we have treated when treating of the atmospheres. 6.
Wherefore the fluxion does not end except in the unity of
every fibre, or in its beginning, which beginning thus takes on
change of state, 7. and thus induces changes of state upon
those things of whieh it is composed, but this change is a
change of their fluxion, wherefore it is affection, in which the
sensation ends; 8. but of this below, where the fluxion of gen­
erals into singulars is to be treated of; hitherto the treatment
has been of the influx of singulars into generals.
578. The brain in itself and every cortical substance, a'te
divwed into their own fascicles lille as the nerves, and these
fascicles into their own fibres. I. For the whole brain is com­
pounded into congeries, and these into glomes or protuber­
ences, and these into c1usters. 2. The glomes refer to the
whole nerve, 3. the c1usters, to the fascic1e, 4. every single
glandule, to the fibre. 5. Thus a like ratio is carried out in
both directions.
579. Every single cortical substance is similarly divided.
I. That is to say has its own surface, the most delicate meninx,
made up of passive fibres. 2. Every single fibre flows by the
form of its fluxion to its own beginning; 3. the fibrils of this,
or the shades or analogies of the fibrils flow likewise to their
beginnings.
580. In the single cortical substa·nces reside our internaI
sensory faculties, 1. for there is a similar ratio, 2. with a differ­
 THE SENSES.

ence only of perfection. 3. A visual idea, to which imagina­

tion corresponds, belongs to the general of the whole glandule.
4. But an intellectual perception, whence is thought, or inmost
sensation, corresponds to those beginnings; 5. thus without an
examination of the cortical glandule we make no progress in
rational psychology, or in its demonstration. 6. Of what
quality this is is known from the brain, by means of the doc­
trines which are to be given. 7. In the meanwhile we can con­
cIude from the given beginnings in the nerves.
581. That inmost sensation or intellectual perception,
which, made active, is known as fhought, necessarily produces
imagination, as its general, 1. entirely in accordance with the
demonstration drawn from the fibres and atmospheres. 2. We
cannot yet proceed to the like demonstration itself of the
geometrical form, for the form or determination of the fibrils
in the cortical glandule has not yet been examined. 3. In the
meanwhile there is the same ratio of cause, why thought can­
not exist, unless it produce imagination, or contemplative
sight, such as is represented in the eye; 4. they must be to­
gether, 5. as also every one recognizes in himself if only he at­
tends to his thought. 6. This is the reason why we can dis­
tinguish imagination from thought with such difficulty; 7.
while nevertheless thought is to imagination as a simple to a
compound, or as a root to its square; 8. for imagination is an
inferior degree of thought.
582. Imagination itself pro duces also a third composition,
namely, a certain kind of internal speech; 1. that is to say,
what it draws from hearing itse1f. 2. Hearing is an inferior
degree of sight. 3. Thus thought passes over to ideas by
formed expressions, 4. as every one can observe in himself,
that is to say, that he cannot think unless he bind his thought
to contemplative ideas emulous of visual things, and the latter
to ideas which correspond to certain words, or to ideas formed
by words, 5. to the end that there may be finally, as it were,
internaI speech to which thought may attach itself. 6. This is
the reason why the words are so easily called forth from the
memory, and why thoughts can so easily bring themselves
forth by means of words and by speech; 7. for they are called
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 247

forth, as it were, spontaneously. 8. For all sensations are only

changes of state, which mutually excite each other; that is to
say, from single changes of a state arise the general, and from
the general the most general; 9. but not likewise singulars
from generals, and generals from the most general, or in an
inverted order which we do not live. 10. Of these we are now
to treat.
583. These things have been said of sensations, which
propa-gate themselves from singulars to generals,. but the
same illdeed propagate themselves in another way, namely,
towa·rds the interiors, for thence affections e_'l:ist. I. 1t is the
very harmony of sensation which propagates itself toward the
interiors, but not the modes themselves. 2. Modes propagate
themselves toward exteriors; 3. but as has often been observed,
affection arises from the harmony of modes, which does not
put itself forth except when it has come to inmosts or to the
cOImection of inmosts.
584. Al! sensations propagate theJnselves toward inmost
things, or to the soul itself_ I. As, if you please, for the sake
of illustration, in the nerves or fibres: 2. Let there be a fascicle
which is modified, as in sounds, but not a single fibre in the
fascicle; 3. then the harmony in the fascicle cannot produce
any single modification in the fibres; 4. as when a monochord
or cymbal be struck a sound does not thence return into any
chord ; S. but according to the harmony of the modified fascicle
the state of the fibres or the connection between the fibres is
changed; 6. thence the fibres are affected according to the
change of the state or nexus. 7. Because the single fibres are
connected to one another this change of state returns into
every single fibre, 8. which is thus contracted, or extended, or
expanded, or otherwise twisted, according to the common
state. 9. Because every single fibre is connected by its fibrils,
therefore, according to the state induced it changes the state
of its fibrils, and thus even to inmosts. 10. Wherefore the
affections pervade to the inmosts or even to the soul; while
affections themselves cannat exist, unless they induce upon
themselves a body pervading to ultimates.
585. In a. simila.r manner a.nd most perfectly, things are cir­
 THE SENSES.

cumstanced in the beginning of the fibres, where there are

bmins within brains, and aU the beginnings are connected ta
one another, and are arranged in nature's most perfect
order, according to every nature of modification. 1. Let us
conceive that in a certain cortical substance there is a kind of
new brain, composed, as it were, of ills own cortical and
meduUary substance; 2. and that, as in the brain, every part
of that substance is arranged in a most orderly manner, and
in mutual harmonic, and natural connection with its asso­
ciates; 3. and that in these latter themse1ves there is again a
like arder, 4. in which the soul herself resides, thus organic­
aUy c1othed. 5. From these things it now foUows, that a gen­
eral modification sl1ch as sound, that is to say, its harmony,
pervades from the brain even ta the single cortical substance,
6. and arranges its state according to the harmon)' of the
sound; thence will be the first and general affection. 7. This
affection arises from a changed order among those parts; 8.
this change carries itself through to its centers, and induces a
similar change of state upon them, 9. these latter again, upon
those smaUest or purest things, which lie hidden within. 10.
Wherefore it subsists therein, for the connection ascends
thither. 11. Thence is the affection which is felt in the in­
mosts or in the soul, 12. which thus resides in the center, and
contemplates aU the l'est as constituted in its peripheries. 13.
While the soul thus feels the change of her own state, she also
feels the general changes of state outside herself. 14. Thence
come the affections, which are produced by nwans of sensa­
tions. 15. For they aU cohere in such order, that the least may
feel what the greatest suffen ; or that the center may feel what
happens in the peripheries, 16. and, indeed, according to every
variety of harmonies. 17. So in the nerves and fibres; 18.
most perfectly, however, in the beginnings of the fibres, 19.
where they aU reside as in modified auras, 20. but connected;
and thus by a single way the soul fee1s the changes of aU
states, 21. and is thence affected. 22. Wherefore affections
belong to the soul which is in the order of her nature, 23. and
holds aU things about her decorously bound in the same arder.
586. Every interior sensation is affected according ta its
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 249

own nature: 1. As from touch, taste, smelI, hearing, 2. the

imagination perceives whether a thing de1ights, is appetizing
or desirable; thence is delight, appetite, desires, 3. the under­
standing perceives whether a thing be good or evil, according
to its order, which is induced, or according to its own loves;
then also whether a thing be true or false according to its
ends, which for the most part have respect to loves; 4. the
soul perceives according to universal ends. 5. These affections
coincide; 6. wherefore they are excited, and indeed ultimate1y,
if by the imagination, the understanding consenting; or if by
the understanding, the soul consenting. 7. But of these things
we shall treat in the doctrine of influx.
587. Affections a;re the more sensible the more they enter
or penetrate tram more general things towards the soul,. 1. for
then they traverse many degrees, and thus the subjects and
objects of the affections are multiplied. 2. Thus touch is the
most sensible affection, as may appear from pain, which is
the greatest if it is in the body, or sorne organ. 3. The affec­
tions of taste and smell folIow; these are mere affections; 4.
musical harmony cornes next, which has but three degrees to
the soul; 5. optical harmony, or the delights of sight, are less
sensible, for it has only two degrees to the soul; 6. similarly
the imagination; 7. but thought and understanding are less
sensible, for they are next to the soul, which is affected. 8.
But the less corporeal sensible affection is, the more it affects
the soul, for the nature of the affection approaches more nearly
ta the nature of the saut's affection. 9. For the nature of the
affection of the understanding is good and evil respective1y to
loves and ends. la. Not so the nature of the affections of the
imagination; they have respect to the body. II· Wherefore
the love of one's own glory affects more than the love of the
body and of riches; 12. yea, the love of the body affects so
little that the loss of it is often willingly sacrificed, that the
other may be obtained.
588. AU [these things] deport themselves according ta the
arder, respectively ta good and evil, in which the rational m/ind
is, wherefore according ta its principles. 1. The principles
themse1ves come either by a posterior way, and are thus said
250 THE SENSES.

ta be intellectual, 2. or by a prior way, that is to say, by a cer­

tain faith accorded to those whom we believe to understand
those things better than we, 3. and because we are thus per­
suaded that those things are true. 4. All things in the emi­
nent organ of the understanding are arranged according to
this Dfder. S. They are arranged according to a most perfect
order if they be principles of truth, and if the loves be su­
perior; for therein they are the more perfecto 6. On the
other hand, according to the falsities which are in the prin­
ciples, the order is perverted; 7. wherefore affections are cir­
cumstanced altogether according to the order in which the
rational mind is. 8. For the soul is disposed according to the
same arder as to its loves. 9. Concerning these things you
will see the doctrine of influxes; for from these one can con­
c1ude, how the soul can be affectcd b'y the principles and loves
of its rational mind; for it is in connection with the mind. 10.
there also it cornes to be discussed how it can be reduced into
its own more perfect state, through received truths and
through more perfect loves, the loves being removed which
are imperfect, and which altogether pervert the order. IL
But this is a matter of deeper inquiry; l neverthe1ess line it
out (collimo*) thus far.
589. Al! changes of statc cxüt according ta affections; 1.
for the affections produce changes of state in the inmost sen­
sories. 2. And such as are the states in the Inmost sensories,
such the state exists in the outmost sensories. 3. For every
state in beginnings is propagated into the fibres, and through
the fibres into extremes. 4. But l confess that these things are
thus far obscure; l expect clearer light. S. l seem to myse1f
to perceive only this, that sensations cannot be produced un­
less they propagate themse1ves towards the exteriors, and re­
ceive general things; and at the same time towards inmosts
and the soul, whence arise the affections of sensations. 6.
Thtts whatever is modified by the external sensorics, this per­
vades the whole ncxus ta generals, and at the same tirn,.e ta
things most singular. 7. In things most singular, as in their

*1 believe this word ought to be collùw,-TR.

 SENSATION IN GENERAL.

own center, are harmony itself, the very nature and soul of the
kingdom, order itself, perfection itself and life itself. 8. But
the affection of moral truth and good does not exist except in
the understanding. 9. The understanding cannot but affect
the soul, and form a like state of it; 10. wherefore there is
given to it the choice of good and evil. 1 I. In order that a
state of it may thence exist, to which felicity or infelicity may
conformably redound.
590. We can best learn from the atmospheres what kind of
affections exist, as also sensations; the sole difference exists,
that as in the atmospheres the parts are free, and thus the free
parts are modilied, so the parts of the animal kingdom, espe­
ciaUy in the cortex, are bound; and' there is furthermore this
difference, that in the animal kingdom the beginning or soul is
aUve, from which soul the rest of the things th~rein derive
their life a.ccording to form; of this organic form 1 venture to
tell. I. The modified atmospheres indeed are concentrated
towards the single part, as has been shown above. 2. The
single part receives the form of modification of the larger part,
yea, that of the whole. 3. This part, because it is a constant
little volume from the purer atmosphere, thus affected, cannot
but communicate that affection with those things which flow
within, and compose its form. 4. This form similarly com­
municates with its own inmosts. 5. Thus the atmospheres
them;elves suffer from disharmonies even to their inmosts.
6. But because al! the parts are free, they flow back when the
modification is finished. 7. From these things also, in some
measure, but as in a shadow, it can be deducted how the uni­
verse suffers from the perverted state of man; 8. but this does
not belong in this place.
591. These affections arise from aU our live senses, as from
touch, taste, smell [hearing] and sight; I. for they are affec­
tions arising from the harmony of the modes themselves in
themselves and among themselves; 2. which coincide simul­
taneously or successively. 3. Taste is such an affection, 4.
similarly smell; 5. hearing is such in respect to song and modu­
lation; 6. sight, in respect to images and colors. 7. In every
mode of song that kind of affection lies hidden, as also in
 THE SENSES.

every color of sight; 8. likewise in the harmonies between

the modes of song and the images of sight. 9. In these things
sensations are nothing but affections, for, as has been said,
they coincide, nor can there be sensation without affection.
ra. Wherefore in these matters brutes have things similar to
us.
592. There is a true pre-established but natttral harmony of
these affections, in that the connection of alt even to the very
inmost has been co-established. r. So far, that there is not a
pure correspondence, 2. and thus a pre-established harmony of
the one without connection with the other, but with the con­
nection; 3. wherefore there is a continu01ts influx to be ex­
plained by the lar<1Js of' physics. 4. This also falls under
demonstration, yea, Gad willing, it shall fall. (On account of
these things \·vonderful things happened to me that night be­
tween the rst and 2d of July.*)
593. But speech, with its words or s01mds or articulate
modes, flows in otherwise; and in.deed even to the soul, no! by
harmonie affections, but by the changes of state alone, from
which every idea. of harmony has been clipped off; likewise
also by the images of sight and by other modes. r. Speech
consists of diverse modes, altogether differently co'nbined, 2.
thus especially of effects, 50 that there is nothing naturally
harmonious in them; 3. wherefore they f1ow, not according ta
a certain natural harmony, according to the natural arder of
the organic parts in the fibres and cortica] substances, 4. but
only by the mutations of state without harmonies. S. There
is something separate and articulate in every syllable, and in
every word; 6. whence a word reports what is as it were simul­
taneous, but speech from words, something successive, which
also must be put torth without harmony. 7. They are only
complications formed from diverse openings, closings and de­
terminations of the mouth, lips, throat, palate and nostrils

*ln the original MS. three lines
are here crossed off; they read:
"These things wnich l have writ­
ten were foreannounced to me in
a wonderful way. See the dream
of July land 2; l wrote it July
2." See the editor's preface to
DE GENERATIONE. The dream here
refem.d to. ~ill be .found in a note
to n, 'ytp below.-TR.
. , A' zq
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 253

with the aid of the tongue, then further by diverse openings of

the glottis, and a certain arrangement of the trachea and lungs.
8. In every single syllable, word, expression, is something arti­
ficial, not natural; 9. wherefore there are as many languages
as there are races of men, as many dialects as there are prov­
inces of races. 10. The one does not understand the other; it
would be otherwise if the languages were natural. IL There
are consonants and vowels variously so formed. 12. There is
also a language of the fingers. 13. There is a language of con­
ventional gestures, like those of the deaf; these'languages ap­
proach more nearly to the natural significance of things; but
still not by harmonious affections. 14. There can also b~.a
languageJ?y ÇQnta~~!1e, and their differences, in the body,
in the palms 9J ~e ~I!-9s and elsewhere. 15. There are simi­
lar ianguages in sight, nor are they harmonie images but letters
variously figured; 16. thence the written letter teaches the
same thing. 17. There is a certain affection but not natural
harmony, IS. wherefore it thus enters towards the soul, but
with no natural harmony, so as to be called delightful or un­
delightful. 19. Therefore every such thing is plucked away
from the words; 20. and they can be pronounced with any tone
whatsoever, and a letter can be written in any color whatso­
ever; 21. thence it also is that the sound is formed otherwise,
for it is not canorous, but recitative; not dancing but walking.
594. There can also be induced upon speech a kind of
affection, by which one con ind~tce a certain kind of harmonie
sound,. 1. 50 that there may be a kind of sweetness in the
sound; 2. by the raising and lowering of the sound by means
of quantity, so that the sound may be higher or lower; 3. a
'kind of harmony, so that the first may be graver and the last
sharper, which is expressed by thesis and arsis. 4. The har­
mony is similar in the succession or in speech, 5. according to
nature which they imitate in the accent; 6. thence is recitative
speech, as in the opera of the Italians, and in orators and
others, vvhich thus superadds something to speech, the better
to persuade or excite the affections. 7. They who sing words,
or join the voice to song, whence is vocal music, S. likewise
adjoin the harmonies of instruments. 9. Such natural sounds
254 THE SENSES.

are also in sorne words, as for instance, those which imitate

nature, as hissing, tinkling, murmur, thunder, etc.; 10. but they
imitate the sounds of natural sounds only for the sake of
better comprehension; II. but still there is nothing intel1ectual
in such a sound only a natural imitation. 12· The speech of
the affections alone is in brutes, indeed no other. 13. But this
speech is proper to the human race. 14. Such speech as in­
volves a certain affection is to be cal1ed partly natural, 15.
such as music imitates; which can thus, by art, imitate nature,
as a picture, images; 16. as is evident from pathetic music, es­
pecial1y Italian. 17. A similar speech is formed before the
eyes by symbols, as the Egyptian, but not by col ors ; IS. for
colors excite another affection, symbols a certain superior or
intel1ectual idea.
595. From these things if follows that artic~tlate sound or
speech is arfificial, but not natural, 1. unless something natural
be superinduced upon it. 2. Thus it cannot from itself excite
any correspondence in the inmost sensor)', still less in the sou!.
3. For affection, resulting from harmonies, excites something
correspondent in the inmosts; for it is cirCUll1stanced accord­
ing to the natural order of ail the compositions of the fibres, of
the brain, and of its cortical substances. 4. The former or
harmonie affection excites a natural harmon)', S. but the latter
a spiritual harmony, 6. which, according to the order of nature,
cannot be excited; for spiritual things do not thus correspond;
7. as inferior and sl1perior loves so altogether disagree, that
the sl1perior destroys the inferior, and the inferior extin­
guishes the superior. S. It is otherwise if the state is perfecto
9. Speech, therefore, is for the sake of the understanding and
its parts, and thus for the sake of the choice of moral and
spiritual good and evil; 10. wherefore it is proper to man
al one. II. It is an indication that the hum an soul is a spiritual
entity, which, by the aid of the understanding and of choice,
and then the influx of the Divine, is to be prepared for a cer­
tain celestial and spiritual state. 12. to the end tIiat it may be
conjoined to the supreme by love. 13. This is a sufficiently
manifest indication of a future state. 14. This is the reason
that the sound of speech of itself excites nothing spiritual, un­
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 255

less, by cultivation, it have previously been understood spirit-

ually.
596. Articula·te sounds are formed first of ail of those things
'which occur ta every sense, not only the essential varieties, but
also the accidentaI and modificatory. 1. These are the first
e1ements of speech, 2. that is to say, that those things which
occur to the senses may be pronounced or signified in certain
articulate and formed sounds; 3. thus whatever is in every
sense, in touch, taste, smell, hearing and sight; 4. indeed,
whatever occurs to any sense, especially to sight. S. Rence
also there are infini te effects, infinite phenomena, whether they
be natural or artificial; these things are furnished "vith their
own names, 6. whether with a somewhat simple name, or with
many. 7. Wherefore there is something peculiar in every
single language, in that it embraces many things in a single ex-
pression, or expresses more intimately the essence of a thing;
8. indeed not only what our senses, but also what our actions
furnish. 9. Our senses exist by modifications, wherefore the
modes themselves are expressed in their own words, and in-
deed variously. la. Then also there are accidents or adherents,
or things flowing from the modes; IL wherefore there is some-
thing natural in the single languages, in which things they
agree; but it is expressed by the nature of the sensations
which are natural. 12. vVherefore also there are affections of
sensations. 13. Then also there are changes of state, 14. and
the very effects going forth thence. IS. Wherefore sensa-
tions are the bases of speech.
597. From these, articulate sounds are fonned, which agree
with the interi01' sight or the ilnagination. 1. These articulate
sounds express those things which result from the prior ele-
ments by the imagination or by new composition. 2. These
sounds must be called artificial, for they involve more things
than sight nakedly grasps, or than it grasps in a moment. 3.
'Y\Tords are formed according to those things which are in-
c1uded therein, 4. which are especially c1assified among arti-
ficial things, S. that effects and the phenomena thence detected,
6. delights, appetites and affections may especially spring
forth from the field of the imagination; 7. also the effects and
 THE SENSES.

states springing from them, and more things. 8. This is the

.,;econd cIass of articulate sounds, 9. which, nevertheless, that
they may be understood ought to be referred to the prior
things by which they are formed, and by the aid of which they
fall under: the understanding.
598. From these again, articulate sounds are {ormed, agree­
ing with inmost sensation, or with the intellectual sight of the
proprium,' these sounds result {rom thi1~gs imaginative or arti­
ficial. 1. These words go still more deeply, 2. nor can they be
expressed in the beginning except by a combinaticn of many
words; 3. and they express something higher, which involves
infinite things. 4. Thus they put off, as it were, the mate1Ï,ll
habit, and put on the imillaterial, because they involve infinite
things; S. as for instance, substances, essences, forms, acci­
dents, qualities, modes, good, evil, and the like, which are end­
less, and in their complex are not bounded. 6. These words
are scientific and are proper to the understanding; 7. yet they
have been hatched out from things prior or imaginative, for
they are founded in them, and are to be defined, explained and
demonstrated by them. 8. These words form the superior or
philosophical speech. 9. Thus we ascend to superior things,
just as do forms, of which in the doctrine of forms, always by
the addition of something of infinity or perpetuity. IO. But
yet these things cannot be understood unless we fix our in­
tellectual ideas in imaginativeideas, and these in sensitive. II.
The modifications or combinations themselves also ascend in
like manner; 12. as acting, doing, and many more, in which'
there are also infinite things, 13. they can be likened to an
equation in which there are infinite things which can be
evolved.
599. These articula,te sounds in the interior sensory are
caUed ideas, and they are sens~tal, or imaginative, or intellect­
uaA 1. Ali articulate sounds, because they have reference to
sorne mode grasped by sense, are referred to a kind of sight;
2. for sight judges of the rest of the senses, because it judges
of their sensories. 3. Ideas are purely emulous of the visual,
when the imagination produces the abject of sight just as
they \Vere received by the eye, as houses, cities, fields, gardens,
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 257

armies, men, different countenances, machines, visual phenom­

ena, and many effects, even those represented in type, actions,
motions, the very songs of the hearing, and many more. 4.
These are rather images of interior sight, for the eye sees noth­
ing, but is the organ of sight. S, But indeed the proper ideas
of the imagination are deeper, and participate in a higher or
intellectual power, so that they are mediate between intellectual
and visual' ideas; 6. as when we make a different arrangement
in the imagination of things seen, 7. of the things harmony in
architecture, optics, music, and other arts; while we beat out
new harmonies from things seen, which cannot be done, except
by he1p of a superior faculty; 8. while we not only represent
delights such as have been seen, but also set up another series
of delights, that they may delight the more, and more variously;
9. so that if we represent the appetites of nutrition, or love, or
any other amenity of sense, we represent them not only as they
have been seen, or by a sight of what was represented in those
things which were enjoyed and bounded in that appetite, but
we throw together still more modes at the same time and dis­
pose them into another order, to the end that the appetites may
increase. la. Thus in affections, as in fear, wrath, gladness,.
the appetites are not representecl such as the gestures and
countenance have appeared, which wouId be only historical or
visual, but we also bring together more things besides, and re­
duce them into order, in order that something similar may be
excited, which is done in endless modes. IL These things can­
not be brought about without a superior faculty, which shaH
come to the assistance. 12. Likewise the imagination reduces
ail the particular modes of one species under a certain general
species, indeed it also reduces those things which pertain to the
species, into order, and thus harmonizes its own ideas ; but with
the aid of the superior faculty. 13. But intellectual ideas are
superior, for they take into consideration only generals or
things which embrace under themselves several species, ac­
cording to every ratio of the operation of generals, as also
universals which enter into aU things which the generals em­
brace. 14. Furthermore those ideas are gifted with their own
articulate sounds, such as quantities, qualities, forms, etc. 15.
17
 THE SENSES.

Thus one passes continually to things more unbounded, and to

generals which embrace or involve many things, às also to
universals which enter into many things; thus to every sphere
is given its own proprium, Or a something that is more uni­
versaI. 16. Particular ideas form a general idea, and general
ideas form a more general or most general. 17. General ideas,
then, go back to particular ones, and dispose them in order, that
they may agree.. 18. Thus singular ideas form the universal
idea, finally the more universal, 19. and the more universal
ideas go back to particular ones and examine them in order,
according to those universalities. 20. Thus the parts are first
insinuated, then the species of the parts, and finally the genera.
21. In general we examine the species and the parts subordinate
to them, first genericaIly, then specifical1y. 22. GeneraIs and
ttniversals of prior things steal in, but the understanding cann·~t
take cognizance of them until more parts have somewhat eriter­
ed into the species, and more species into the genus; then first
the mind operates, and forms its idea. 23. Thus it appears how
ail things ascend, namely, to universals, in which aIl the partic­
ulars lie hidden; and to generals, under which ail the parts are
held ; or to genera under which are aIl the species. 24. There
is, therefore, a kind of elevation by degrees. 25. In every de­
gree there is something of what is infinite; for infinite species
are in a genus, and infinite parts in a species. 26. Thus then a
part is assumed as something general and universal, and in it
we again consider the species and the parts, and so forth. 27.
From this it appears what a visual idea is, that it is the emu­
lous or imaginative of the visual ; and what an intellectual idea
is; 28. and that always something of the infinite or perpetuaI
is added in the ascent; 29. according to the doctrine of fonns.
600. Those ideas are merely changes of state in the organic
or cortical substances. 1. They are the true substances of prin­
ciples, for from themall things f10w to principles. 2. The
sènses themselves, especially that of sight, produce changes of
state like their own images; 3. the ideas are emulous of visual
things. 4. Those changes induce a change, not only upon the
surface, but upon the whole interior cortical substance, thence
arises a general change of state. 5. AlI those substances sen­
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 259

sate this change in singular, thence are all general intellectual

changes. 6. Wherefore the changes of state among the cor­
tical substances are to be considered, especially those of the
cortical substance which are imaginative; 7. then the changes
of every substance, which are intellectua!. 8. That those
changes are the same as ideas will appear in the discussion of
the cortical substance; 9. then that infinite changes of state can
be induced, and indeed all the series of them, to the extent
that they become ineffable, will be demonstrated by induction.
601. These changes of state are impressed in the same way
as the ideas of the memory; I. for every cortical substance is
in the potency of receiving diverse changes. 2. Changes in­
duced by the posterior or sensual way are permanent, 3. and
finaHy they become from culture, as it were, natura!. 4. As
often as these changes of state are excited, so often ideas of
the memory are excited, thence is imagination; S. if the ideas
be superior, thence thought is excited. 6. Therefore, since all
things in us progress by the posterior way, those organic sub­
stances are in the potency of the changes, 7. which are induced
by sight, from the imagination, and from thought; 8. and, be­
ing induced, they remain under the guise of ideas; 9. for that
all thoughts are changes of state, is confirmed by aH phil­
osophy; 10. but that such changes really exist, and indeed in
an eminent organism, has not yet been demonstrated, 1 I. nor
can it be demonstrated until the brain shaH have been scanned,
and it shaH have been taught what changes of state are, what
superior and inferior forms, what order and degrees, and more
besides, concerning which in the proper doctrines.
602. Therefore the memory is the campus' which the ex­
ternal senses estab11:sh) as also the internaI; I. so that the
memory may be an interior world, 2. in which lie hidden all
those objects, which have entered the senses. 3. From this
campus can be produced those things which have entered from
beneath, 4. not Qnly from the external senses, S. but also from
the imagination, as also from the understanding. 6. Where­
fore the memory of those things which rise above the sphere
of the senses is to be called the superior human memory; 7.
and that which rises above the imagination is to be called the
 THE SENSES.

supreme human memory. 8. Thus the memory is distinguish­

ed into its own degrees; 9. for it is only change of state or of
the common organic cortical substance, IO. or of those single
parts or substances. II. The whole memory exists at once;
thence the mind is more visual, more imaginative, more phil­
osophical or rational; 12. but how they concur, remains to be
seen.
603. That those changes cf state, as soon as they are 112­
duced, are produced partly by causes 7.uhich excite the senses,
wherefore by the senses, partl'J by causes which are excited by
the body, wherefore by the body.. i.li known. 1. This does not
need demonstration, because it is obvious; 2. for the sense,
especially that of sight the images of which had formed those
changes, excites those ideas; 3. similarly the pleasures of the
body, and many things in the body which excite the blood inta
its modes; 4. wherefore the affections of the body, as the con­
stitution of the blood, the superfluity of the spirits of vene,y.
hunger and thirst for food, and many more. 4. [a] Thus there
are two causes of excitements, namely, from the wodd and
from the body. _
604. But the ideas of the memory which au imaginative,.
excite the intellectual memory, wheref01'e the thought of the
understanding. 1. This also is known to everyone; 2. it is the
interior principle now separate from the exterior ; 3. for it pro­
ceeds from the interior campus.
605. But ideas, whether sensual or of the memory, whence­
soever they come, do not excite a,nything else f.han a percep­
tion or sensation of those mutations; 1. for thence is sensa­
tion, which does not exist except from causes extrinsically
impulsive; 2. but because every organ of sensation can change
its states, 3. and changing the state cornes forth from a su­
perior power, 4. thence from the soul, S. the soul can there­
fore excite diverse states; thence is thought; 6. which is an
active force put forth from the power of the sou1; 7. thence
perception or inmost sensation passes over into thought; 8.
indeed, as in music, one thought excites another, and incleed
in a continuous series. 9. Thus from one object can finally
be formed infinite things which are coherent. JO. Therefore
 SENSATION IN GENERAL.

it is the part of the body and senses to excite sensation, yea,

affection or like changes. II. But indeed it is the part of the
soul to produce the changes, or to impart the force of potency,
12. and to cause all like changes and concords to run through.
13. The rational human mind imparts force to the imagination,
thence from memory arises imagination: and the soul imparts
force to thought. 14. On this account the exterior and in­
terior faculties concur; IS, and they concur in the rational
mind, as in a kind of centre. 16. Wherefore the interior
faculties, are, while they are excited, what produce those
ohanges of state, and they all turn in such order, that the de­
sired form may exist. 17. Thence is thought. 18. Thence
passive thought is sensation which is reproduced, or the mere
memory of those things which are then represented. 19. But
active sensation is thought which is produced by the sou!. 20.
This we can see from the fact, namery, that thought can pro­
duce itself, but the last idea produces a new thought, and this
another similar one, and so forth; but similar and concordant,
which is the nexus. 21. The soul is what is in the spiritual
world, and takes cognizance of superior and spiritual con­
cords. The soul gives the faculty of reproducing. 22. Thus
it produces similies and concords, but according to the loves
of the mind. 23. Thus analysis is formed. Obs: but these
things are obscure,. 1 have not a distinct idea of them.
606. Articulate sounds or wo'rds do not naturally induce any
ùiea correspondent or harmonic to the sound, but they are only
signs by which, when uttered, this or that idea is produced.
1. An articulate word has in itself no correspondent or har­
monie idea, as does a singing sound. 2. The same idea is ex­
actly the same whether it be expressed by this word or that;
3. or if a contrary idea be expressed by the same signs; 4. as
if horse, house, motion were expressed by a thousand other
words, the same idea occurs; S. indeed, if motion should be
expressed by rest, good by evil, and so forth, 6. or if these
things were expressed by signs of the fingers, or by gestures,
or touch, or a letter written in Latin or Arabie, still a like
idea would arise. 7. Therefore there is no pre-established
harmony between these articulate modifications of sound and
 THE SENSES.

ideas, as there is in harmonies. 8. A word not understood

does not enter deeply, but remains a bare sound.
G07. But the superior fa culty or soul concurs, and excites
that change of state or that ideaj which agrees with the given
sign. 1. The excitation of an idea does not therefore depend
on a word as a sign, 2. but on the perception of the soul as to
what the sign signifies ;-wherefore that perception induces
that iclea or change of state. 3. Wherefore there is indeed a
concourse, not a harmony. 4. Although it would seem from
the fact of cultivation, whereby a nature is as it were induced,
that an idea is excited by a sound, or that there is a kind of
natural correspondence; 5. but still it is evident that there is
no natural correspondence but an artificial one, or one made
byart.
G08. Therefore, between words and ideas, as between letters
seen and ideas, there is no pre-established harmon'y, but there is,
as it were, a co-established harmon)!, by which the oneoccurs
to the other from a given sign. 1. For if it were pre-establish­
ed then there would be but one language in the universe; 2, in
order that anything pre-estabtished may be in it, but by con­
nection, therefore, the words are so pronounced that they may
put on a kind of natural harmony, 3. and thus emulate the kind
of affection which is intended ta be produced~
G09. One imaginative idea excites another, not by any pre­
established harmony, but by a harmony brought on and in­
duced by usage and culture, or by one received through the
senses. 1. For as an idea is only a change of state in the in­
ternaI sensory, 2. and changes of state are simple and com­
pound, 3. and in every possible series, 4. hence one compound
idea embraces under it innumerable particular ideas and one
particular idea has reference to other general ideas. 5. Thus the
sign being given, and the idea excited which agrees with that
sign, this then excites aIl those ideas which belong ta the same
series; 6. or which are inserted in that series. 7. But no idea is
excited except that which has previously flowed in through the
senses, and has been subordinated ta the general; 8. where­
fore, when the idea of the general series is excited, the equa­
tian is, as it were, solved, then it goes forth thence in the arder
 SENSATION IN GENERAL.

of the particular. 9. Ali particular ideas which go forth, have

been inseminated by culture; others cannot be excited, al­
though they can be fabricated by means of the understanding.
10. Thus the general is the product of the particular ideas, and
the particular are the product of the general ideas; for they
are in the same change of state, because they have been in­
serted; II. wherefore, in them also appears a co-established
harmony. 12. Otherwise ail would perceive the same thing,
and like ideas would be produced by the general or other par­
ticular ideas, which never happens. 13. This happens in brutes,
in which there is nothing rational, but only natural ; no speech,
but only affections, to express which is their speech. 14. Thus
neither in our imagination, strictly speaking, is there any in­
flux, nor any which can be called physical because it is not
natural, nor spiritual, because the soul alone gives to the im­
agination the faculty of unfolding and variously infolding its
states and ideas.
610. Every visual image in the beginning produces in the
campus of the memory or imagination some general or uni­
versai idea, but without particularsj and, therefore, an obscure
notion, into which, in the process of time, enter particular
ideas, which thus perfect the general notion. I. This is evi­
dentfrom experience itself, as to how we learn to know things.
2. At first we know things as a kind of indistinct chaos; 3. as
the universe without stars, as suns without planets, without
their notion. 4. Afterwards the parts enter, and indeed parts
within parts; 5. thus the general is perfected. 6. At first we
perceive a tree, before we recognize the species, and the species
before we recognize the specific character in the species. 7.
Thus in the animal and mineraI kingdoms. 8. But as the nature
of many species, and of their parts accedes, so the notion is
perfected. 9. Ali these things place and subordinate and co­
ordinate themselves in order under the general notion; la. in­
cleed in an order, whatever species one regards as a general the
species of which it forms; 1 I. exactly according to the order
of nature, where there is nothing that is not in a series in
which are genus, species, parts and degrees. 12. This can be
demonstrated organically in substances.
 THE SENSES.

611. Whatever has entered into a general notion of the

imagination, that, bya power indttced by the soul, is called
forth when the general idea is excited; indeed also vice versa.
1. Therefore, nothing is excited except what had previously
entered by culture or through the senses, 2. and indeed then by
a turning and activity of the states, when they are suitably
changed. 3. In every single general state are many particulars,
4. as in one equation there are infinite ratios and analogies, or
minor equations.
612. Every general idea of the imagination distinguished
into its parts excites the more general, which is an idea of
thought. 1. For a generaI idea of the imagination corre­
sponds to a more general idea of thought or of the understand­
ing; 2. as while that which is delightfuI, desirable, Ionged for
in the imagination is excited, this excites what is good in the
thought; good is the general idea of all those things in the
imagination, for it embraces them aIl. 3. Thus many generals
of the imagination together are reduced under one notion of
the understanding. 4. The reason is that every change of
the general in the imagination, or in the cortical substance of
the interior organic substance does not stop until it cornes to
sorne individual cortical substance thereof, upon which it
induces a Iike change of state, which is then more general or
more universal.
613. But this general, thus excited in the understanding,
is still obscure and indistinct until its particulars or singulars
have entered in. 1. This is brought about by knowledges,
2. and in process of time as we become rational. 3. Until
particulars or singulars have entered in, we possess no general
notion, we scarcely know that anything is; 4. we know, not
rationally, but only imaginatively, as for instance in knowing
good; unless we know how rationally to distinguish good­
nesses, we do not know rationally what good is regarded in
itself.
614. But as singulars enter in, so the general intellectual
is perfected. 1. Just as has been said of the ideas of the
imagination, generaI and particular ; 2. these ideas do not enter
of themselves into the understanding, but must be added;
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 265

.3' wherefore they must be added by knowledges, especially

theoretical knowledges. 4. Thus the general intellectual, being
excited, calls forth the singttlars, 5. wherefore not by any pre­
established harmony, but by a harmony co-established by
usage, culture, the sciences and so forth.
615. From these things the nature of the human order of
learning, knowing, understanding and being wise is evident;
that is to sa:)', that it is analytical and inverted. 1. For at first
generals are formed, 2. under these generals, particulars are
.arranged. 3. Particulars perfect the general ; 4. thus in the gen­
eral we perceive singulars; 5. but in process of time, when the
understanding is more perfect, or when it has progressed by
the analytical way, then it returns, as it were, by the synthetic
way, 6. and proceeds from particulars to generals, from singu­
lars to unrversals; 7. and thus order is then truly established;
then particulars produce their own general. 8. But if the
arder be not weIl established, then such as are the particulars,
or such as are the principles, such are the generals thence
evolved; 9. wherefore we must not descend before we are in
truths themselves from particulars which have been explored.
10. It is sufficient, then, to go by the way of generals; II. for
thus particular truths place themselves therein spontaneously,
I2. and indeed by the affections, as has been said above in the
article on the affections. (But these things are still obscure.)
616. In a word: From articulate sounds, or from the
1nere speech of words, there is excited in the brain a kind of
tremiscence among the parts of the cortical substance, which
.since they cohere in a mutttal connection, and at the same time
are associated by the pia meninx into a community of con­
sorts, there is none of them but becomes participant of that
tremor, which by the order of succession, according to the con­
nection, of which above, penetrates even to inmosts, and there­
fore, to the soul, which receives the sensation of it. These
sounds or words taken singly are indete1"minate modes, but still
in a diverse manner they are determined into a certain form.
Speech thtts consisting of artiotlate modes cannot of itself
excite any correspondent idea in the external sensories, for
one tlûng expressed b'jl innumerable words, still excites the
 THE SENSES.

same idea)· wherefore it is the soul, feeling this, which induces

such change of state of its organic substance, as the connection
of the words or the speech signifies; therefore such an idea is
excited by the soul, for there is nothing naturally harmonic
in a word and an idea. Thus for every articulation of speech
the soul concurs with some change of state in the intellectual
sphere. The soul does not excite a sphere except the one
proximate to itself, or the intellectual sphere, but not one more
remote, or the imaginative, except by its own intellectual
sphere; for all things p,'oceed in order: Such therefore as are
the states previottSly induced by ideas, such are the spheres
that are e,t"cited; fOi' otherwise it would not be known what
was said. Those generals and universals which are in words,
and which by composition of many things are determined into
a certain rational form, call forth all those things, or part of
them, which involve the generals; and those singulars call
forth those things which enter into the universals,. thence the
idea is determined by the one tmderstanding, and indeed the
more fztlly as the more things have entered into the memory;
for no other things can be called forth than those which have
entered by the analytical way, and which have been connected
undel' a certain general bond as universals. But how these
single things bring about the effect by changes of state, is
difficult to explain to the comprehension of anyone, until the
cortical substance and its texture has been explored; and titis
is not fully understood unless the doctrines which we hŒve
promised carry forward the torch. Therefore_ i! is !.!!..i~ent
that there is_nQjJaY.-mony unless ),QJL~Qish to call it co-estab­
lished and by this ttnderstand concourse; for there- is a co"n­
course of ideas with the words of 'speech; and that the SOlt!
excites those changes of state or ideas which the understand­
ing has leanted, by ttsage and culture, correspond to those
articulate sounds; nor is there an influx of vocal sounds into
ideas harmonie and natural, but it is acquired by art. It must
be said of the soul that it excites those correspondent ideas, as
its rational mind has been taught; for the soul is constrained
to follow whatever the rational mind commands, for it is sub­
ject to the arbitrament of the mind. Bttt the very ideas as
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 267

the)' have been forme d, or the changes of state, do not excite

general ideos, but call forth particular or singular states, as
these have been subordinated by culture to their general ideas,
and these have been co-ordinated among themselves, and this
by the active power put on by the soul of running through in­
finite states in a moment, and thus of revolving and turning
the single things which have been subjected to generals. This
calling forth is accomplished by co-established harmany. As
is the connection which singulars {orm among the--:;;;U/ves, suclt
also are the generals which the series of the singulars involve,
limit and terminate. Thus in speech subjects are similarly
formed as in all the rest; but this amplified is the _,!!!tional
matter of al! philosophy. See the dream of luly I-2 [no
592 ] .*

*The dream here referred to is when l had aH my thoughts col­

recorded in Swedenborg's DrŒAM
BOOK, where we read:
"July 1-2. Something very won­
derful happened to me. Violent
tremors came over me, one after
another, as man)' as from ten to
fifteen-just as when Christ mani­
fested to me His Divine grace. l
expected to be thrown on my face,
as happened the last time, but l
was not. With the last of these
tremors l was raised up; and with
my hands l felt a person's back;
l passed them over the whole
back, and over the chest be1ow.
Immediate\y the person lay down,
and l saw the countenance in
front, but very obscurely. l was
th en upon my knees, and was con­
sidering whether l should lie
down beside him; but did no t, as
it did not seem permitted. Ali the
tremors commenced in the body
below, and ran up to the head.
This took place in vision, when l
was neither awake nor asleep; but
lected. The internai man sep­
araterl from the external felt ail
this. After l was fully awake,
several tremors similar to the
former p~ss~d over me. It must
have been a holy angel, since l
\Vas not thrown on my face. Our
Lord knol'l's best what ail this
means. It seemed ~o me as if l
harl been lold before, that l shouId
have something for my obedience
or for something e\se. God's grace
is exhibited towards both the in­
ternaI and the externaI man with
me. To God aIone be glory and
honor!
"From what followed and from
other indications l perceived that
it signifies this: Tha t l shaH dis­
cover the truth about internal sen­
sations, but on the back, 'and ob­
scure\y as to their front. For be­
fore this came over me, it seemed
to me as if l had been toId that
this was an announcement in re­
spect to what l have hitherto
 THE SENSES.

THE UNDERSTANDING AND ITS OPERATION.

617. We have treated of the understanding or of its sensi­

tive faculty, which is called perception, and of its rational
activity, which is known as thought, ~r whence and of what
quality it is; we now come toth~ conclusion, and we shall
embrace in a short description why, or for the sake of what
end, it is.
618. Understanding, with its faculties or rational mind,
has therefore been granted to the human race. I. The facul­
ties of the understanding or of the rational mind are, 2. first,
~eption or inmost sensation; 3. then t.!~-!-lg!2.t or the turning
of rational ideas, and, as it ',\'~re, analytical computation; 4.
then conclusion, \·ybich is known as decision; S. then choice,
thence is will, fo~ what we choose ~ will; 6. lastly is deter­
mination into act. These are the parts of the human uncler­
standing. 7. The first part, or perception, is il1lnost sensation
arising from the ideas of the memory, especially from ideas
already concluded from mate rial things, which are then called
reasons or already formed analyses. 8. These pervade even
to the inmost, which sensates, and hence follows a suitable
change of state in the inmost sensory. 9. The second part is
thought, which is the revolution and turning of the states thus
ind~cëd, or it is the active state by which all those things
which are similar are traversed and thus terminated into like
things ; whereby new things are called forth from the memory,
and thus new states induced; thus mu1tiplied. 10. The third
part, or conclusion, is the very analytical form formed by
these things ;i~ed, the one form is in the other; for from
perpetuaI forms as truths, one concludes what is formed in
almost a like manner as in an algebraic equation; for the con­
cluded form is an equation, in which there are many ratios,
analogies, and therefore equations. 1 I. The fourth part is
choice from many things concluded; otherwise if one thing

done; afterwards also it appeared also a little gold ",as given me,
to me, as if it had come to a point althoLlgh there was sorne copper
",hen my mean stivers were ex­ among it." (2 Documents con­
changed for better coins; then ceming Swedenborg, 19B.)
 SENSATION IN GENERAL.

were concluded the conclusion would coincide with the choice:

12. especially sorne general end or love would reign, of which
there has been a conclusion, so that choice would be the only
means to that end; but it is peculiarly intellectual first to ex­
plore the general end in which it may rest; second, which one
aH the rest of the ends follow. 13. The iifth part is det!!.r­
mination into aet J' the above inteHectual is in this, that it may
explOre, jUêige, and choose the means which tend to that end.
14. Then in what order, in what time, in what manner, those
things are to be determined is the explication of the equation.
15. Thence is action, in which is the rational, which had been
in the choice or will. 16. In this manner proceed the aspira­
tions of the mind. 17. It is similar in the other senses, but
with a difference of perfection, distinction, and objects, where­
fore also of subjects, which lead up to the ultimate act.
619. In order that one may explore truths. I. The first
intellectual is to explore truths; 2. and from many to separate
one general truth; 3. from many generals again, more general
truths, and so forth; this goes on even to the infinite, where
it must by all means subsist, and come to rest there: 4. for
the rational mind cannot progress outside its own sphere
through these limits, wherefore neither above them. 5. From
that form quality results, whether, to wit, it be perfect; where­
fore perfection shines forth, which is goodness. 6. From
goodness is affection. 7. Therefore trutl1s are the deten~ina­
tions of the form in vvhich goodness mayJ>e. 8. Thus we
proceed by theanalytrcal way from the body even to the soul.
9. When good is received or judged, then it reigns like a soul,
10. and prepares determinations for itself which are its tru!.hs,
II. and thus constructs and arranges for itself a body or
system; 12. these determinations aU have respect to the good
received, as to their own beginning, or as to a soul. 13. There­
after the mind proceeds by the ~ynthe!ic way, 14. a~9, EJt
were, creates a new s~~!-~m; 15. in order that the mind may
be in a kind of perpetuaI creation, so that it may pursue that
which its soul intends.
620. vVe explore universals from singulars, and generals
from partieulars. I. Universals enter into everything, and
2{'0 THE SENSES.

they involve generals. 2. AH ideas which are called forth

from the campus of the memory into the intellectual sphere,
or which flow into it, are universal and general, which are
successively determined; 3. for thus one must progress to­
wards interior and superior things. 4. Generais and universals
are effects and phenomena; they are also the laws of many
sciences, physical, philosophical and geometrical, which having
been explored are now truths. 5. But universals are not ex­
plored as to what quality they are except from singulars, nor
generals except from particulars; 6. hence singulars and par­
ticulars are to be obtained, from which the quality of uni­
versais and generals is indicated. 7. These give the under­
standing of generals and universals. 8. Hence the understand­
ing does not acquiesce in these generals or universals, which
are from the campus of the senses and the memory, inasmuch
as they are piled upon what is faliacious, but it revolves and
arranges the singulars and particulars called forth thence, by
means of laws, which are truths, and thus fonns for itself gen­
erals, which correspond to the particulars, and universals
which correspond to the singulars; 9. thus it proceeds by an
analytical \Vay, for particulars rightly co-ordinated with each
other ought to form their own general, and singulars ought to
progress even to their own universals; IO. and this in aH sub­
j eds of whatever nature they may be; II. but indeed while the
general and the universal have been thus sought out; then
those things reign in the whole series; 12. and the soul, as it
\Vere, determines its own singulars into a decorous form, which
involves a common bond. 13. This is done by a synthetic
\Vay. 14. Let there be in place of an end sorne goodness
which has been explored; 15. then that good, as a soul, as it
\Vere, perpetually regards the end, 16. and determines singu­
lars or essentials in a suitable manner, 17. and closes the sphere
or form with its own limits, that is to say, under a common
bond, in order that there may be an ens distinct from the rest.
621. Wherefore causes from their effects or priors from
their posteriors. 1. Effects are the forms of essentials de­
termined by· their own universals, 2. connected and bound
 SENSATION IN GENERAL.

together by the general, whence is the limit of their deter­

minations, wherefore also, in compounds, their figure. 3. In
every form universals superior and inferior have been deter­
mined, that is, priors and posteriors. 4. Those things which
are prior actuate the cause of posteriors; 5. but principles
actuate the first cause. 6. It is nothing but effects or pos­
teriors which first reach to the sphere of the mind; 7. but
those things being discussed, ,,,..-hich enter into and constitute
like effects, it analytically explores causes, 8. and finally from
causes, principles. 9. But after the end has been received,
then in order that there may be sorne goodness, that end, as
it were, actuates the soul, JO. and then the mind prepares
for itself forms suitable to that soul, 11. and arranges singu­
lars into a decorous order; subordinates inferior universals
ta superior ones, and thus weaves them together and hedges
them about with common bonds, 12. and thus conc1udes their
rational forms, 13. exactly according to the order of the
creation of the macrocosm or microcosm, 14. which, in order
that it may be a type, is represented in every operation of the
mind.
622. Genera tram their species, and species tram their
individuals. 1. As superior universals enter into and deter­
mine inferior universals, and these the lowest: so genera in
respect to species, and species in respect to individuals; 2.
thus the blood is a species of the purer blood, or the blood
vessel is a species of the fibre, and this a species of the simple
fibre, which is a determination of the soul. 3. At first only
genera enter into the perception, then the species of the
genera, finally the individuations of the species. 4. The mind,
therefore, while it at first snatches the genera, then examines
the species, in order that it may know the genus. 5. Thus
from the species it fOrfis its own genus, as from particulars
its generals; 6. likewise from individuals, its species. 6. [a]
But indeed while it is proceeding by a synthetic way, or when
the mind has been instructed and begins to return, then the
genus, as it were, represents the soul, from which it forms its
own species; and from these, the individuals.
623. Thus varieties tram differences; 1. for there are
 THE SENSES.

generic, specific and particular differences. 2. At first general

varieties enter in, then particular; 3. but the mind examines
varieties from differences, otherwise it could not see the differ­
ences between varieties; 4. and indeed it does this by either
the geometrical or the philosophical way by degrees and mo­
ments; 5. but afterwards the form and determination being
posited, the varieties are placed and arranged according to the
determinations.
624. And wherefore qualities) accidents and modes) from
essences and the nature of the operations. 1. Every form
takes on a quality according to its determinations; 2. thus it
is more perfect or more imperfect. 3. The distinction of per­
fections is quality. 4. From quality results affection. 5. As
are essences, such also are accidents. 5. [a] lVlodes are varied,
while an essence is permanent; from modes the nature is
known. 6. Essences are what first enter the perception. 7.
But the understanding examines the qualities of an essence;
for essential determinations arrange the forms, also all analyti­
cal forms; 8. but afterwards, in inverse order it establishes es~
sences, and presupposes qualities, or of what quality the es­
sences ought to be, to lead through to ends.
625. Then, into continued series, greatest things from lesser
and lesser from least; thus quantities and their varieties arising
from differences of degrees. 1. That is called a contimlC'us
series which is subject to the universal, and its determinations
proceed from greatest to least things, or to unities. 2. In
unities occurs the higher, superior or prior series; 3. and so
forth. 4. From the posterior to the prior, as from a square to
its root, is not called a continuum; but it is called a double
ratio, then a triple. 5. Nor are they homogeneous, that is, they
do not spring from the same unit. 6. Greatest things enter the
sphere of the mind first; 7. but unless afterwards lesser things
also enter, the mind cannot kl10W of what quality this greatest
is; 8. thus it can know the essence and nature of water, or
air, from its smaller volumes in their order, and from drops.
9. The least thing passes outside the sphere of sensation, then
the mind explores it by the greater things, but since the nature
of a unit is like that of a volume, it thence follows as a con­
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 273

sequence. IO. But indeed "vhen the mind explores synthetic-

ally, it tends from parts to the greater, for its compound form
must consist of parts. II. Thus general truth is known from
particular truth. •
626. Thus simultaneous from successive things. 1. Suc-
cessive things belong to ce!erity and space, wherefore to
moments and degrees, 2. wherefore through inter"Vals. 3. At
first those things appear to be understood which enter as
simultaneous things; 4. but from successive things it is dis-
cerned of what quality the simultaneous is, or what is in the
simultaneous. S. Thus successive things ought to be in the
mind, before simultaneous things. whether they be irî relation
to time or in relation to space. 6. There is nothing simul-
t1lneous which has not previously been successive in nature.
7. There are like harmonies and ratios in each. 8. But indeed
while the mind progresses in a synthetic way, then the simul-
taneous occllpies the first part,. or, the conclusion the general
/ parts. 9. This is evolved like an algebraic equation into its
own successives; la. on which accollnt determinations become
acts.
627. Things preseNt from things past, and may conclude
contingents rationally from each; 1. not indeed future con-
ting nb; lhe.5 belong tu litt Diviut rlùviJeu~e, L.. ùul lllust
contingents that follow from natural necessity and the nexus·
of causes. 3. For certain contingents are necessary, and
then they put off the name of contingents. 4. Certain con-
tingents are to be divined, certain ones cannot indeed be
divined. S. Things past give light to things present, that is
to say, both historical and analytical things. 6. If we under-
stand ail those things as present, which are present in the
memory, 7. then we understand ail those things as future,
which can be brollght forth, or which are brollght forth
analytically, 8. thus truths and goodnesses not yet explored.
9. The use of this ratiocination holds every point in politics,
economics and civil life.
628. This [exploration) is nrst in an analytical order,
afterwards in the inverse or synthetic order. LIdo not
18
274 THE SENSES.

speak of inmost sensation, which first perceives generals, 2.

then distinctions between generals, afterwards the parts of
generals; 3. for the first notiol} thence arising is obscure,
which thus cornes forth distinct; 4. for all things enter into
the sphere of the understanding throl1gh sensation; thence
they proceed further where they are digested. S, Thence is
the sphere of the memory, which properly belongs to the
understanding; 6. that is to say, which holds back those
abstract or universal things from the limits of inferior things.
7. For the memory consists of mere mutations of state by
habit induced from the inferior fields; hence also, since these
are changes of state of the intellectual sphere, the sl1perior
memory is to be ascribed to it. S. But when things of the
intellectual memory are revolved, which are revolved at the
same time with things of the imaginative memory, as at the
same time with its general things, then those things are called
forth which distinguish generals; 9. thence generals are born,
what they are and what quality they are. ra. There is an
equal ratio of universals. 1 I. Thus the mind proceeds by an
analytieal manner to forms of truths, that is to say, from the
posterior to the prior, 12. or to generals and universals to be
formed aggreably to those things. 13. ln this way truths are
first sought out, l1nless a faith of authority be seized upon as
true. 14. These things being given as truths, thence the affec­
tion of sorne goodness is excited according to the perfection
of the form, 15. and thus a soul is added to the thing or it is
sought out. 16. This soul being given, the understanding
progresses according to its synthetic custom, or from the prior
010 posterior things, for the purpose of placing goodness; 17.
and thus the nature of the soul, as it were, operates in its
body. IS. Indeed, they can be so assimilated that there is
always something left to rational analysis and something to
synthesis, or something to will and something to nature, 19. so
that the mind may apply everything which anatomy detects,
and those things which concern the operations of the mind.
ZO. For a like mode of acting reigns everywhere, zr. to detect
which is the purpose of this work.
629. And indeed is after the manner of rational or logical
 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 275

analysis, as also of geometrical or specio'tls* analysis,. the

former of which leads its ratios to conclusions, the latter,
however, to eqttations: 1. Logical analysis, as is known,
operates through various series of consequences, whence a
conclusion is formed. 2. Every consequence had been a con­
clusion either detectecl previously from other consequences, or
accepted at the mouth of others as a true conclusion. 3. In
consequences are assumed those things which cannot he
denied, otherwise they are to he demonstrated. 4. vVherefore
ail things which enter in must be truths. 5. The conclusions
themselves are in succession put back into the place of con­
sequences, thence a new conclusion is fm"med, 6. and so forth;
even up to no boundary within nature. 7. Such logical analysis
is natural to us, in order that the mode of proceeding may he
rational and at the same time natural; 8. wherefore cvery
single mind opcrates thus without scientific and artificial
logical analysis. 9. Ali consequences are successive, but are
represented in the conclusion as simultaneous. 10. vVhile
thought is being revolved, it proceeds through such series; the
terms themselves are called forth from the memory, but the
operation and connection are natural; II. for there is a per­
petuai induction, production, and edification or creation, as
has uecn said before, in imitation of the ordeï of the universe.
12.' Analytical or algebraic calculus proceeds in a similar man­
ner; 13. it assumes things known and unknown and from
things known it wishes to explore things unknown; 14. at first
it proposes ",hat is to be explored; 15. it seeks out the known
ingredients and, easily arranges them into a certain order;
15 [a]. then it computes and turns, cancels many, subtracts,
multiplies, divides and adds; 16. then finally it comes to some
conclusion, which is called an equation, consisting of mere
signs; 17. in this equation it looks at what is unknown placed
on the opposite side, which signifies the same; I8.indeed it
binds many equations into one or arranges many, whence it
sees the relation and mutual regard of each on<". 19. Rational
operation proceeds similar1y.

*Speeious, having rdatiol1 to the look oI a thing-,

 THE SENSES.

630. Then conversely, it resolves conclusions and equa­

tions, and determines them to the ends to be pttrsued. 1. And
this is done in a synthetic manner; 2. for thus only does it
arrive at the science and cognition" of truths. 3. But one con­
clusion can be resolved, as can every equation, into its own
analogies, and these into rat:os, wherefore into new equations,
4. as will be seen better below.
631. Thus truths, into which tlte same Humber of simpler
tntths enter as essentia1 dctc1'1ninattOns, are brought forth as
analytical fonns. 1. There is a similar mode and similar ratio
of proceeding in truths which are to be sought and in forms
which are to be determined; 2. although the one is in an in­
ferior sphere, the other in a superior, 3. and although the one
is physical or natural, the other moral, and the other spiritual.
4. They mutually correspond to each other, with a difference
only of perfection, 5. as will be seen in the doctrine of cor­
respondences. 6. 'Vherefore sirice the one is in a superior
sphere, the other in an inferior, similar significative formulas
do not agree; but ascend ta superior nature.
632. B'j' these mcans the mind arrives at the cognition of
good and evil. 1. Good and evil is something distinct from
truth, 2. for as rational ideas form truths, so these again form
goodncsses. 3. Goodness, which is in truth as its form, is
not the good which is sought, but is a certain perfection, which
affects as well by itself, as that in it we look at the good which
is sought; 4. wherefore without truths at first sought out we
do not arrive at good, still less at the choice of good. 5. Thus
the good ,vhich is sought will be the soul of the truths. 6. That
it is good, nothing manifests, 110t in ail nature nor in our very
selves; 7. wherefore our whale inclination tends to the good
to be pursued; 8. its opposite is evil; 9. wherefore there are
relations between good and evil, 10. as between better and
best. Ir. The best seems to be that good pm"ely without evil.
12. But still a kind of harmony between good and evil is re­
quired, in order that good or the best may become sensible
by relation. 13. Goodness itself therefore is ta be sought, or
the quality of good. 14. All such inquiry pertains to truths;
15. for truths are mere determinations, which form good;
 SENSATION IN GENERAL.

16. for good is as an end, or use, and truths as essentials; thus

- from the determinations of essentials, good f10ws as an end;
17. wherefore the relationships of good and truth can thence
be known, namely, that good reigns in the universal deter­
mination, as the end and use in the things fabricated. rS. If
the end or use is not known, the fabric is to be unrolled, and
the use thence interpreted, and that indeed from the evolution
of many uses in the series; 19. for there are the same number
of goods in truths, as uses in causes and effects; 20. where­
fore truths are to be compared "vith causes and effects, while
the goods which are sought are to be compared with uses.
22. But if uses or goods are known, then truths are only to
be evolved as forms or fabrics, and it is to be seen how they
produce good. 23. This is called the confirmation and demon­
stration of goods; 24. just as has been said in our anatomical
inquiries; only in place of truths we suppose the determina­
tions of a tissue, and in place of goods its uses. 25. Also the
uses themselves are goods, because they are encls.
633. [The mind an-ives at a cognition of good]' as well
natural as moral, and finally spiritual. 1. Natural goods are
many, yea, innumerable. 2. They are ail things of the worlel
that affect OUr senses and present uses. 3. Also ail things of
the body that affect our imagination. 4. These natural goods
also affect the lower part of our understanding, for they faB
under its sensation. 5. Whether they be truly good is to be
learned not from sensation but from use; for use goes pari
passu with good. 6. Moral good is what regards otbers out­
side ourselves, that is to say, societies lesser and greater; 7.
but with respect ta ourselves we are its subjec.ts. S. Moral
good has respect especially to virtues and vices, that is to say,
ta maraIs. 9. These nevertheless are nothing except in respect
to the subjects towards which they are exercised; ro. for we
can perform to society natural, moral and spiritual goods.
Ir. Ail these goods are in every subject, and among the sub­
jects. 12. Spiritual good has respect especially to the soul, its
state, and heavenly society. 13. Its ultimate and supreme is in
the highest degree good itself, the very essence of good, that
is, Gad, from whom every good descends. 14. Thus good­
 THE SENSES.

nesses are inferior, superior and supreme. 15. Of what

quality the representation is between these goods "vill be
seen in the doctrine of representations. 16. 1t i:; only this, that
they ascend in perfection and truth, as through degrees, to
superior things.
634. And this ta th.e end that we may knaw haw ta chaase
the best. I. This is the cause of our understanding, 2. and that
we must ascend by the analytical way to that cognition, even
to choice. 3. Our understanding does not go farther than to
the cognition that spiritual good is the best. 4. But how it
may obtain it is not the part of the understanding; 5. for it is
not affected by that goodness, because it does not fall into the
sphere of its sensation; 6. wherefore there is required an­
other and superior power which must by a11 means ftow in, 7.
not only that it may know truths, but also that it may pursue
goodnesses. 8. ,,yhat is superior must flow into the inferior,
not the reverse. 9. But there is a best in natural, in moral
and in spiritual things: thus the best in natural things is not
any particular thing, unless taken universa11y, but one thing is
the best under certain circumstances, another under other dr­
cumstances. 10. Thus goodnesses are respectively related to
each other; 1 I. sa also in morals. 12. Of ail things, however,
there is one thing in the highest degree good, or supreme, that
is, Cod.
635. Wherefare alsa ta the end that we may knaw haw ta
inquire after, j~tdge and chaase mediate ends, which lead ta
the ultimate ar best. and ta its consequence and fruitian. I.
This is, as it were, the second or third part of the understand­
ing; the lirst is ta explore good by truths by the analytical
way, and ta refer it to the choice or will. 2. The second is,
goodness being given, to confirm and demonstrate it further
by the synthetic way; for, the end being given, then the end
reigns like a soul and c10thes itself with truths, and confirms
itself thereby; 3. it is only the inverse arder ta the arder of
operation in the understanding. 4. The third* is ta explore
things leading from the mediate ta that end. 5. Thus a new
inte11ectual field occurs here; 6. the former is only theoretical,

*The Latin has quarta (fourth) .--TR.

 SENSATION IN GENERAL. 279

but the latter is practical; 7. but the mode of proceeding is

similar; 8. for goodness is posited as receivecl; 9. then its con­
sequence is analytically sought for, that is ta say, its arder,
mode, time are considered, la. thus it is judgecl; 1 I. and, being
judged, it is referred ta choice, thus determinecl into act; 12.
for every single intermediate end is sought for as an ultimate
end. 13. For these ends are by the mediate placed in the
ultimate. 14. Thus, since there are infinite ends ieading ta the
ultimate, and a perpetuai series and chain of ends, therefore
there is a perpetuaI rational analysis, 15. which al ways looks
at new abjects; but in these abjects there is one reigning and
universal abject.
636. This is the work of science and wisdom. I. It is the
part of science ta arrange the means in an orcler1y manner.
2. It is the part of wisdom ta direct those means ta what is
best. 3. This could not be done without Divine influx.
637. Ta the extent that we are affected b'Jl the love of the
truly good, and especially of the supreme best, ta that extent
we are united thereto. I. For love is spiritual conjunction ; 2.
wherefore the one being posited the other is posited; 3. as has
been shown above. 4. What the means are that we may be
affected by the love of the truly good, is not the purpose of this
discussion; 5. for those means occupy the whole of supreme
or theological science.
638. And ta that extent the state of our mùtd and soul is
rendered more perfeet and happy. 1. That every change of
state altogether fol1ows affection, has been frequently shawn
above; 2. for there is everywhere an obvious consequence,
thus one confirmed and demonstrated. 3. The unition of the
best cannot but render our state more perfect; 4. wherefore,
happier. 5. But the unition is such as is that of the superior
with the inferior. 6. This unition is to be treated of in the
doctrine of influxes.
639. From the above it follows, that the primary end of the
understanding given ta us is, that we may ascend by degrees
from moral into spiritual life. I. These things ha';; been
treated of - in the Epiloguë of part Second of the Animal
Kingdom. 2. The ends of exploring truths, and the' good­
280 THE SENSES.

nesses of truths, and finally of choosing the best are only inter­
mediate ends. 3. But this is our ultimate end, 4. which in­
volves the ultimate end of tmiversal creation, which is the
glory of Gad.
640. Thus finall'y ta hea'venly happiness, which is a per­
petuai continuation of spiritual life. \~C vVe can by no means
arrive at spiritual life of ourseIves ;\ 2. for spiritual Iife con­
sists of the love of the highest good, that is, of Gad Himself,
and of His Love, which is in Christ Jesus. 3. We cannat of
ourselves mount up farther than ta the love of ourselves. r 4.....
This love is adjoined to every intellectual sensation. 5. Every
inferior love extinguishes the superior, and, conversely, the
superior, the inferior; there is a perpetuai collision, and finally
an extinction of the one, that the other may triumph. (6:)The
love of the world, of the body, of the goods of the worId, that
is ta say, avarice is altogether repugnant to the love of self.
j':':The love of self or of one's own glory, of fame, of the mind,
of the faculties entirely extinguishes avarice.. 8. But superior
love or love of the highest good, which is truly spiritual, ex­
tinguishes the love of self, and induces humiliation so that one
regards oneself as nothing. (9:) Thus where natural life is
supreme, there divine spiritual-îife cannat be ;ro:'l wherefore
the love of self must first be extinguished.. IL Since this does
not fall under any sensation it is not the part of our pO\vers to
assume that extinction, but it is of the Divine beneficence /Iz.'
wherefore it is necessary for the love of self ta be extin­
guished, and ourselves thus regeneratec1; 13:' _... wherefore with­
out regeneration by the Divine Spirit or the Spirit of Christ
we can by no means enter into the kingdom of Gad. (Ï4~IThus
one cannat be regenerated unless the interior man die. 115.
What is in the soul itself is above the sphere of our under­
standing. "îl?) vVhen the interior man dies then first sorne
sense of that love or a certain superior happiness is born/il.
which emulates heavenly happiness, although obscurely. .IS.
Thus this new Iife is perpetuated ;(I<;~) but it supposes the ex­
tinction of natural life or that of the body and imagination,
which continually fights against it. Go:: Nor can there be any
conception of the nature of that heavenly happiness; where­
 SENSATION IN GENERAL.

fore we cannat aspire ta it through the ideas of our under­

standing. (21) We have no conception of the na,ture of this life
except that it is the greatest happiness; but whatever may be
the happiness, it is nought, without the love of the best; thence
is the origin of ail felicity, and therein the sense of ail that is
pleasing ;@ for we have not yet learned by the sciences that
the
.. -.
life - of the superior
-- degree
... - -­
exceeds the state of this life as
the superior exceeds the in_f~ri.0r, C?.b ta the extent that the
greatest perfection of this life can scarce1y be compared with
the least perfection of the superior life. (3.±,..) This thing..!!2
other_doctrine than that of.s.>rder~gre<:s can teach. 0)
This doctrine gives ta the understanding its idea, but it does
not sa weil persuade as when the experience of the senses or of
perception is added. Gf)There is no perception of it except
an obscure one, as has been said, but it is sufficiently manifest
in those things in which the love of self and of the body has
died a27. wherefore it is a continuance of the life begun here;
28. that it will be immortal i':;ost evidently proven, if only
doctrines have been premised ; these ail manifestly persuade.
Conclusion.
641. The understanding with its faculties, or the rational
mind. is therefore granted to the human race, that it may be
able to explore truths, or to rationally Ming forth universals
from singulm's.. and generals from partiwlars, wherefore
causes from their effects, or priors from posten:ors, genera
from their s/Jccies, and species from individuals. thus varie­
ties from differences, wherefore qualities, accidents and modes
from the essences and nature of the operations; then in con­
tinuous ser'ies greatest tlûngs from least, and lesser from
greatest, thus quantities; simultaneous from ~essive thi"!gs,
present from post things, and contingents from each. This is
done- lirst in a!!:!!Iytical orfier, afterwards inversely or in s)l'}1­
thetic ord;..er; a·nd, indeed, after the manner of rational or logi­
cal analysis, as also ofter the manner of geometrical or spe­
cious ana.lysis, * the former of which leads its reasons to con­

*See note to n. 329 above.-TR.

 'lHli SENSES.

chtsions, but the latter ta equations, then, in reverse arder re­

salves the conclusions and equations, and determines them ta
the ends ta be sought. Thus truths are brought forth as ana­
lytical forms into which the same number of simpler truths
may enter as determinations; by these means our mind leads
itself ta the cognition of go ad and evil, bath natural and normal,
and finally spirittt;j Thisis ta -the end that w~ may know
how ta choose the best, wherefore also ta inquire after, judge,
and choose mediate ends, which lead ta the ultimate or best,
and ta its consequence and fruition. This is the wor/. of
science and wisdom, Ta the extent that we are affeeted by
the love of the tr·ulygood and especially of the supreme best,
ta lhat e:rtent we are united ta it, and tf? that extent the state
of ot/r mind and soul is render~d more perfect and happy.
From, these things it follows that the primary end of the un­
derstanding gi'lIen ta us is that we may J!:!c.!!.'!!.d by degrees frp_m
natural into moral t.ife, and from moraLinto spiritual, and
tltt;S finclly ta hcavclû'j' happiness, which is a. continuation of
spiritual life, ,;,

*This is the end of the work Swedenborg himself had pub­

on THE SENSES, as published in
Latin by Dr. Jo. Fr. lm. Taiei.
But his edition, as careful1y noted
by the learned editor, omits two
important chapters contained in
the original manuscript. (Sec Dr.
Tafel's notes to p, 24 and p, 42,)
These omissions are: FmsT, a
chapter on the Sense of Taste;
this shonld be inserted in the
present \York before the chapter
on Smell, i. e., between nos.
66 and 67. SECOND, a chapter
on Touch, which precedes n. 97,
i. e.. the chapter on the Ear. Dr.
Tafel explains that these omis­
sions were made by order of the
London Swedenborg Society in
view of the fact that the omitted
chapters were a first draft of wha t
lished as Vol III. of (.1e ANDIAL
KINGDOM. It seems advisable,
howcver, in the present \Vork, to
inclllde these omitted chapters,
and thus present, as a whole, the
anthor's draft of the work on the
five Senses. The chapters s:10uld,
of course, have been printed in
their proper places, namely, be­
tween nos. 66 and 67, and 96 and
97, respectively; but, unfortun­
ately. when this part of the pres­
ent book went to press, no tran­
script of these chapters was avail­
able. Since then a transcript has
been made by the Rev. E. E.
l ungerich, and, ratller than omit
these chapters, we have preferred
to sl1bjoin them to the Epilogue
as chapters VIII and lX.
 THE SENSE OF TASTE.

CI-L'\PTER VIII.

THE SENSE OF T ASTE, OR THE TONGUE.

642. Experience. See Part l, ANIMAL KINGDOM, chap. 1.

643. HEISTER on the Papillce of the Tongue: The envelopes
are three in number: The outmost, which is the continuous
common membrane of the mouth, fonns little sheaths, as it
were, pyramidal and globular, and is porous for receiving the
nervous papil1ce of the third membrane. The middle is the
reticular membrane of Malpighi, consisting of a delicate net,
transmitting the nervous papillce through its foramina, and
visible in the superior part only; more difficult to be seen in
men than in beasts. The third, or papillary-nervous tunie,
found also only in the same place as the middle, contains the
nervous papillce of diverse figure, for the most part, however,
fungiform, either headed like the horns of snails or like fungi;
these, furnished \Vith little foramina, can be pushed forth
and withdrawn. Then there are the pyramidales, larger
and smaller, sometimes bent; and where these papillce arise
from this outmost tunic and the nerves of the tongue, they
pass through the little foramina of the reticular tunic, and are
terminated in the little sheaths of the exterior tunic, and con­
stitute the primary organ of taste.
644. VVINSLOW. Papill:e of three kinds are distributed over
the upper surface of the tongue; namely, the headed papil1ce,
with !ittle heads like those of fungi, superimposed upon a
slender neck or short staIk; these are found everywhere over
the base of the tongue in little fossée or superficial crypts. They
are Iike Ettle conglomerate glands, sitting upon a narrow base,
and a little hollowed out about their middle convexity. They
occupy the whole surface of the base of the tongue; the
blind foramen is fil1ed with these g·lands. The lentieular
bodies are little orbicular eminences, rather Batly convex, the
circular border of which is contiguous ta the surface of the
tongue. Through the microscope the whole convexity of the
tongue appears to be pierced with smal1 foramina or pore~,
 THE SENSES.

just like the rose of a watering pot; they easily lose their
cOl1sistency, so that when they are rubbed, they suffer them­
selves to be put forth into the forms of soft pyramids, and to
be depressed at the sides. The serico-villous papil1ce are the
smal1est and most numerous of al1, and they occupy the whole
superior surface of the tongue, indeed the intervals them­
selves of the rest of the papil1;:e; they are to be cal1ed rather
conical than vil10us papillce, for they are represented as such
by the microscope; they are natural1y rather soft, and after
death the)' become flaccid, to the degree that they are some­
what more long and slender than in the natural state; on
rubbing them between the fingers they are shortened and be­
come thick. The reticular membrane in the boiled tongues of
oxen, indeed in human tongues, is a kind of mucilaginous and
cIear substance between the papil1ary membrane and the ex­
ternal, or epidermis, scattered and sparse; this material be­
cornes white by boiling; the foramina there are caused [by the
pyramidial papiIlce].
645. l\L\LPIGHI. There are bodies breaking forth from the
outmost surface of the tongue, and in the direction of the pos­
terior pole, slightly curved, arranged in a series, resembling a
carding comb; these prominences are cartilaginous in the ox,
in the fonn of a boar's tooth; they exhibit a concavity at the
root; the)' are composed of a dense and tenacious material;
about the sides of the tongue they grow so slender that they
are almost obliterated ; in the base of the tongue instead of the
membranous tunic are found bodies which are almost like a
somewhat blunt conical teat; the single bodies are invested by
the membrane of the exterior of the tongue. In the tongue of
the fish they are bony at the apex, conical and blunt; these
horns are found in the base of the tongue; they are evidently
hollow; neverthless their substance becomes so slender and is
so dilated at the middle, that it not only gives place to the
subentering nervous papil1a, but also appears diaphanous;
they are implanted in a kind of mucous body; very minute
pores and meatuses are observed, especially at the roots of the
horns; under this they present a glutinous substance, white
outwardly, black beneath; it is stretched after the manner
 THE SENSE OF T ASTE.

of a membrane or rather coarse net; they present themselves

to the nervous papill<e, especially at the sides of the tip of the
tongue; like the horns of snails they enjoy a somewhat tall
stalk with a little round head; they originate from the nerv­
oUs and papi lia l'y bodies; in the base they have a nervous
offshoot to which they are appended or rather attached; the
papilléC of the second order are more llumerous; as many as
are the horns without, sa many are the papilléC within; arising
from a common body of the papillary substance they are ele­
vated into a middle altitude, and from their extreme head
they send forth nervous shoots still further, which enter the
sinuses below and run to meet the roots of the horns; about
them are seen innumerable papillce, allotted to the same origin,
and elevated to the same altitude, yet more sIen der, which are
given the figure of a cone; when excited, entering their OWII
sinuses beneath in a mucous substance; finally they terminate
in the outmost membrane; similarly in the palate it c1ings
closely to certain nervous offshoots, of which the whole mass
of fibres is woven, and many offshoots springing from the
trunk of the nerves end in this nervous body; hence ils origin
must be considered to be derived from them, since in the l'est
of the sensories, the nerves are extendecl into th::: membrane,
for the most part as an ultimate aid.
646. SWAMMERDAM. In the house snail (slug) they are rep­
resented like sawtoothed combs; in the cuttle fisll and in fishes,
through the microscope a kind of little bone is seen, fortified
with more than sixtY papilléC, curved backward, dentiform and
cartilaginous.
647. BOERHAAVE. In the inmost subtilely cellular, somewhat
fatty membrane, almost as in the skin through a pierced body,
the papilléC are pushed up in little erect sheaths of the ex­
terior membrane; they are protected by these sheaths agarnst
aspe rity, etc.; these sheaths are porous, and so upstanding, that
the pressure of food and drink may rush upon tllem with
force.
648. I3IDLOO shows cartilaginous bodies of a dental form,
sorne of them double headed.
 THE SENSES.

The SensoY'j' of Taste, in General and in Particula.r.i·

649. From the use we may judge of structures; the uses of
the sensations are better known than other uses, because they
declare themselves every moment, and the life of the body is in
them. Let us explain the successive series of uses, let us ex­
amine the degrees of the series, let us unfold the parts of the
tImmediately preceding this dently a first draft, and which was
heading the MS. contains the fol- crossed out by the author:
lowing passage, which is eVl-
The Sense of Taste and Its Sens01'y, in Geneml and in Partieular.
r. The uses of this sense, wherefore, of its sensory organ, that is,
the tongue, are: L That the soul may know what is brought into the
stomach, that the chyle may thence be perfected, which can be con­
verted into blood, wherefore that it may know what is suitable for
the blood and for the corporeal life; 2. that according to that sen­
sation affection may be excited, whether of appetite or aversion,
whether, for instance, it be good or bad, pleasant or unpleasant for
the stomach, the rest of the viscera, the blood and the body; 3. that
according to that affection the change of state may be indicated to the
organ itself and its parts, also to the salivary glands, indeed to the
stomach itself, and to al! the viscera which prepare the chyle and the
blood. These are the gcneral uses of this organ, for thence is the
life of the body, Now we 'must inquire into the particulars:
2. Now as to the FIRST USE if is, that [the SOu./) may know whot
ought ta be brought into the stomaeh that the eh3'le ma:\, be perfeeted
from it, which eh31le may be eonverted into blood; wherefore that it
may know what is suitable for the blood and the eorpo1'eal life: Th.ese
things are now to be considered: 1. of what quality are the objects
which excite that sense; 2. \Vhat are the things which insinuate them­
selves into the little organs, that is, the lit,tle sensories; 3. of what
quality are the little sensories in particular; 4. how they receive sensa­
tions, and from a particular produce a general; 5. ho\\' they carry them
off to the brain; 6. and what kind of state is thence excitcd in the
brain.
I. fiVhat kind of abjects are thase whieh excite that sen.se!' [1]
They are angulate, pointed, fiat, circular, of endless variety, spring­
ing from the mineraI, vegetable and animal kingdoms. 2. The lowest
forms, that is, the angular, cspecially the objects of geometry, the
hard, the heavy, the earthy parts of the kingdoms as saline partic1es
of every kind, mineraIs and sugars; if they are not thus ha rd, but
yielding, they bring forth by their yielding. those particles which are
angular, of which they consist; but if they be dissolved they then put
off those constituent parts which are angulate. 3, The greatest measure
 THE SENSE OF TASTE.

degrees, and let us confirm each part by experience; thus we

/' shall proceed in order and follow nature who shall introduce us
through the senses into ber secret recesses, especially if we know
how ta consult rightly the mistress of the senses, that is, the un­
derstanding. Sa long as we live in sense, we live as animaIs; onJy"
a superior faculty, that is, the human mind knows how ta obey
passively, and to add something which will confirm the fal­
lacies of the series; thus the senses themselves deceive their
own understanding, and render the rationality irrational; but
the higher we elevate ourselves above the senses and to a
stfperior sphere of understanding, whence the understanding
learns ta act understandingly, the more we become neighbors
ta a higher, spiritual, divine power; the more we become men,
the vicarious divinities of the earth; the more we shall behold
naked truths, constancies,* fe!icities which the senses do not
know, and which they extinguish. VVe have been long in tbis
state; the ages have rushed into these things; at this day we
know but little beyond the senses, and we live in the body or
on the surface. Let us e!evate ourselves ta higher things, and
ta the truths of things theJ11selves, which are invisible; but
still more true than the visible, because they are not fallacious
and inconstant; thus we approach nearer ta spiritual es­
sence, td the truly human, ta a more perfect state; we are un­
willing ta believe that this is impossible, or still ta be closed*
to the senses through the ages; these are the arguments which
animal and corporeal men desire. Corporeal ambition aspires
of that sense is the partic1e of common salt with its poInts; the small­
est seems to be the point itself of salt, for comll1on salt is the basis
of ail things which are tasted and which are cOll1pounded, and which
approach those sensories. 4. Thence arises, from the diversity of the
points, planes and circ1es, a tas te, saline, acid, bitter or sweet, of
every kind. s.From the taste itse1f one ll1ay know of what figure or
form the partic1e is, if only the bases and extremes be explored, in­
deed one ma)' know of how many angles, and of how many and what
kind of planes, and of how many and what qualities every abject cof\­
sists; the soul itse1f knows this in the most perfect way, but it must
come ta the recognition of the mind through experience and science. 6.
It is affection alone which is cOlmate' \Vith us; this results from the form
of ll1any things and from the general affection of the whole organ.
*Words marked with asterisk .indicate a douhtful reading of the MS.
 THE SENSES.

that no one shaH ascend above it. Let the [ail] seeing fates
so bear us on that we shall return to the silver and golden
ages; and, with our mind as a leader, let us strive to struggle
out by the analytical way; in that event the divinity is with us,
whose principal essence is wisdom and charity; but let us Ilot
­
therefore desert effects, for we ought to strive by means of
them.
650. 1. Wherefore the uses are: 1. That the sense may per­
ceive what l'ies hidden in the foods which are taken, whether
they are suitable for the blood, whether they ought to be turned
into chyle, whether they ought to be committed to the stomach,
and the chyle and blood-making viscera ; wherefore, that it may
perceive what .will serve the corporeal life, and be homogene­
ous with it; wherefore, the tongue is prefixed to the abdominal
viscera, and that sense is for the nutrition of the corporeal
life. 2. That that sense may affect the animus and the body
itself, and thus excite the appetite, and continue the desire for
food, or even that it may affect in a contrary manner, that it
may reject things taken, and may extinguish the appetite;
wherefore, that it may desire a thing if it be good, may turn
aside and reject it if it be evil; whether a thing be truly good,
or truly evil for the body, is not given man to know by nature.
but by art, afthough there are indications in the appetite itself
for what is taken, which precede in man; it is otherwise in
brutes. 3. That according to the affection of the sense and
the appetite thence arising, the state of the little sensories and
of that organ may be changed; then also the state of the
stomach itself and of all the viscera dedicated to nutrition. 4.
Finally that effects according to the change of state may come
into existence, that the media may be excited, that the salivary
pores may be opened, that the papil1<e may be extended, that
all things may be arranged for nutrition; these media them­
selves then produce the effect; they are innumerable and ex­
tend throughout the whole body.
651. Therefore, the rule is: affection according to sensation,
change of state acco~ding to affection, effect according to
change of state. But let us proceed to the particulars.
 THE SENSE OF TASTE.

652. 2. ~ow as to the first use, that the senses may perceive
what lies hidden iti the foods which are ta/un, whether they are
suitaf:;le for the chyle, the blood and the viscera, or whether
those things are homogeneous which touch this barrier and
gate, these things are to be observed: 1. We must consider the
quality of the foods which are taken, especially those parts
which excite the sense; 2. the quality of the little sensones
which correspond and apperceive; 3. how that which touches
and creates taste is brought near, or how it is dissolved,
brought near, touches and imprints an image of itself.
653. Wherefore, we must consider the objects of taste
themselves, and the media and aids.
654. 3. As to the quality of the objects or foods it is to be
observed: Î. They are the dissolved parts floating in water, the
salivary menstruum which resolves similar things to their
unities. 2. Those parts are diversely figured, they are angulate,
fiat, circular and diversely spherical, of infinite variety; nature
herself produces this variety in the minerai kingdom, where the
forms are quite simple; they are compounded and formed in
infinite modes in the vegetable kingdom; finally they are taken
and formed othenvise in the animal kingdom; thus it is the
parts of a three-fold kingdom which affect the little sensories
of taste, that is, the tongue; 3. there are parts hard and heavy,
. heavier elements, sa1ts, not soft, yie1ding, elastic; for they do
not affect the tongue; sorne of the dissolved parts break forth
as oils and spirits, sorne while they yield put forth their spicules
or planes: thus the)' are ail parts of the angular form which
are hard both outwardly and inwardly; this will come to be
demonstrated in the doctrine of forms. 4. It is only their ex-
ternal surfaces which affect, whence what kind of figures they
have is evident to the sense itself, that is to say, whether they
can be accommodated to the chyle. 5. The maximum of that
sense seems to be cornmon salt, \Vith its eight acids or spicules,
for the tongue perceives it floating in water; many things taken
at once are not so sensed uniess they be dissolved; we can
know what of aH things belongs to that sense; if only we take
a particle of watel, one particle of salt fi11s up the eight in-
terstices of water; this has been shawn elsewhere. 6 That
19
 THE SENSES.

which exceeds the maximum has reference to the sense ot

touch which is also in the tongue, for the tongue possesses both
the sense of taste and the sense of touch; thus there is a
further dimension, which is the affection of touch. 7. The
maximum of this sense, that is, touch, seems to be the smallest
apex of that same common salt, for it is sharp with minute fiat
surfaces; when these apexes are broken, they produce the acid
of salt, or even that of nitr~; the apex itself is scarcely sensed,
but because like a concave trigon it increases in dimensi&'t,
therefore while it forces itse1f in, it also forces in its broa<1er
part, and many apexes at the same time; therefore sensation
arises. 8. That which is smaller than this apex, removes itself
from the sensation of taste, and has reference to the sensation
of smelling, while it fIoats in the air, or is transferred thltner
ri. c.} to the nose] by water, as the more volatile spirit of
liquors when drawn to the nose ; the coarser and compound
parts of it affect only the taste and under the phenomenon of
heat or of something else, as experience evinces. 9. From the
above it is apparent whence is taste; that parts figured in this
manner are produced in infinite variety, that is, parallelograms,
trapezia, polygons pointed in a thousand modes, circular ac­
cording to diverse curves, and at the same time blunt, pointed,
at the same time fIat-sided, etc.; geometry can enter into only
the generals, scarcely into the particulars, still less into the
parts themselves. 10. From one object known as to its quality,
and from the sense thence arising explored, it can be known by
the sense alone "l'bat are the figures of the parts which touch
and produce it; an irregular polygon is bitter; one regularly
pointed is salt; a regular polygon is acridly sweet; that be10w
the measure of the smallest, which with its apexes is not ade­
quate to the faculty of the organ which it titillates, like touch,
if it be touched very lightly, nor is it round, which is sweet,
unless it be at tbe same time very finely and regularly pointed,
-this soothes; thence is sweetness, which is titillation, and
many other things which can be deduced from these considera­
tions. Il. The soul in which is animal nature, and thereby the
organic causes in which there is a corresponding nature, knows
most exquisitely from its own sense of taste, what is suitable;
 THE SENSE OF TASTE.

it discriminates this from the rest, and applies it ta itself; for

it knows this ta be homogeneous with the chyle, or hetero­
geneous thereto. 12. But art and science do not come sa far,
for no one yet wishes ta explore the figures and forms of
parts, and without a knowledge of them, we never arrive at
any science but [only] at its first thereshold; for the sake of
those things which are hidden from the senses, there is given
a sense which mediately instructs the soul as ta what is brought
in; for the soul residing in a superior sphere of the world, can­
nat know what is done in spheres below it except mediately,
that is, by a mediating organism, which it has constructed.
13. But this sense of taste does not arise from a single part,
which touches its organ, but from many, therefore there are
many various parts, which touch the various papillre; thence
results sense; thus it is not the form of a single part, but the
forms of many parts which produce taste; the soul from the
difference of taste exquisitely and distinctly perceives ail that
variety, and how the parts agree with its chyle.
655. Of what qua!ity truly are the' !ittle sensories of taste?
They are: 1. Conical papillre, or the pyramidal, but not the fun­
giform-headed glands, for these are the primitive tasters of the
chyle, and inhibit the juice by castigation; see the TaNGUE.
2. These papillre are infinite in number, being inserted in the
interstices of the glands, sa that nowhere can a place be
touched where they are not present. They are arranged in a
beautiful arder, especially at the tip and at the sides of the
tangue, where the food dissolved by the salivas first washes
them. 3. They are also present in the root of the tangue, in­
deed also in the palate, but there they are coarser, where they
perceive the coarser parts. 4. Vlherefore there is infinite variety
in this papilla, ta the extent that there is not one absolutely like
another. 5. They are arranged in such an arder that they can
produce communication; for such as is the form of each
papil1a, such is that of the papilire among each other; the very
form requires that the quality of the sense shall be in it, and
that ail things shall be rightly accomplished according ta the
arder of nature. 6. The papillre of the other senses are also
similar, as those of smell and touch, but otherwise arrangecl.
 THE SENSES.

dothed and congregated; thus there is a Iikeness between these

senses, for aIl of them receive objects of angular form, but In
various manner according to the organism particular and gen­
eraI, and according to many contingencies. 7. They are similar
in the œsophagus, stomach and intestines, that is to say, the
serico-villous or conical, and, as it were, capillary papilla::. 8.
They are conical, that is, somewhat broad at the base, termi­
nating in a point; 9. whence they are most suitable for taking
on every change of form, and for applying themse1ves to ail
points of a corpuscle in contact; for the conical form can turn
itself in the direction of ail curves, while it undergoes changes
of state. 10. Those papilla:: are furnished with a sheath, lel't
being naked they should sustain the first impacts; for then
they would be lacerated by the somewhat hard and at first
very coarse e1ements; besides, the sheath is for protection
against heat and cold. IL That sheath consists of the ulti­
mate branchlets or capillary arteries, wherefore it is a passive
membrane, which accommodates itself to the included actives;
for most of the membranes are woven from arterial thrum~,
as has been shown in my works, and as will appear evidently, in
the work on the Brain. 12. These sheaths a:50 aïe vaïious, and
entirely accommodated to the variety of the included papillre.
13. Wherefore they announce beforehand to t,le papilhe what
is coming; by a certain subtile sense of touch, or by a blunt
taste they teach ""hat ought to be insinuated and admitted, as
do the lips what ought to be poured into the mouth and over
the tongue; according to those indications, the papilla:: adapt
themselves, close or open their foramina, and enter into theiï
sense and its potency. 14. There are also present somewhat
hard, that is, cartilaginous membranes, which caver them like
horns or scales, for they lie hidden under the latter, and by
them they are continued through the membranes; see Mal­
pighi. 15. For thus the sense is exalted, for every sense in­
creases by the adjunction of bones or cartilages, as in the
periostea and the single sensories, the reason is that a tremor
is brought in, thence the sense is exalted, terminated and
diffused, and such a membrane gives the force for diffusing
the sense.
 THE SENSE OF TASTE. 293

656. How is that which touches the sensory brought to it? l.

It :s brought by water which dissolves the saline parts; by the
oily and spirituous parts [of the saliva] which dissolves the
fats and sulphureous parts; such things exist in Iiquids of
various kinds; [the saliva] dissolves the menstrua, which
again dissolve the first connections, indeed sometimes to the
maximum and medium degree of the sensation, whence are
appetized so many kinds of drinks, wines, liquors, waters,
mcads and foods; for the dissolved foods themselves furnish
thcir own menstrua: 2. These, because they are fluid, convey
with t11em as vehic1es and apply the dissolved parts especially
to the sheaths, in order that on the first sense of touch the
papilla may notice how it' shal1 apply itself; for infinite things
are done in purest nature of which we take no cognizance, but
stil1 the very tissue argues that such is the connection of
things. 3. These parts the saliva itself still further dissolve."
which saliva is the solvent menstruum of both saline and oily
matters, and also of sulphureous matters of most various
kinds. 4. The saliva, since it consists also of parts of the
animal kingdom, and of spirits and very many other things,
not only dissolves but also infolds, especial1y the pointed parts,
in order that they shall no longer be so hurtful; it responds
to their state and turns them into what is homogeneous, so
that it may be applied to the papillre. 5. Therefore the saliva
still further finishes, dissolves and infolds the thing, takes
away its power of hurting and adapts it that it may be suitable
for the chyle; wherefore it is of so great variety and springs
from so many little fountains. 6. After the saliva has adapted
the parts, it then insinuates them, that they may touch the
papillre, and that the papi lIre may perceive whether they are
suitable; wherefore those sheaths are porous, especially about
the roots of the horns; see Heister and Malpighi. 7. The
horns themselves also introduce things, for they stand along
the sides and are turned towards the foramina, that things
may enter. 8. Then also th-at they may be ejected thence into
the foramina, there are those which reject on the swel1ing of
the papillre. 9. The papilla applies itself to the little foramina,
nor does it admit [anything] ; but after the sensation it repels
294 THE SENSES.

[what approaches], in arder that it may be insinuated into the

glands, or taken away into the pharynx and œsophagus. !o.
The saliva is made altogether for dissolving and applying
those things which ought to enter, for it looks out in the first
place for the chyle which cannat be inaugurated without the
accompanying saliva.
657. 4. In order that that sense may affect the animus and
excite appetite, or extinguish it, etc. [see n .2: 1] : With respect
to these thing-s we have to consider; 1. that every sensation mns
from the papill::.e through the fibr.es immediately to the cere­
brum and cerebe1'lum and their whole cortical substance. 2.
This is what sensates, but not the organ or little sensories of
the tongue. 3. That the cortical substance of the brain is
affected according to the agreement with the blood, of the
things touching it; pleasantly if they are homogeneous, un­
pleasantly if heterogeneous. 3. The outmost or vaginal tunic
of the papill::.e carries the ruder sensations ta that cortical
substance of each brain, and that indeed by an arterial way; to
the end that they may concur. 4. The sensation also runs
through every fibre, membrane and structure of the tongue,
and in an instant communicates every contact of the sensation.
5. Our sensation of taste is only an affection, wherefore no
idea of it is left in the brain, as is the case with the modes of
hearing and the images of sight. 6. The brain is affected ac­
cording to the state of its organ and the parts thereof; 7. and
the organ is affected according ta the state of each brain; 8.
wherefore also according to the state of the mediating fibres.
But as to the single points:
658. That every sensation l'uns immediately through the
fibres to the cerebrum and cerebellum: Wherefore, 1. the
papill::.e are the ultimate forms of the fibres, consisting of fibres,
to which they are attached, according to Malpighi; for in­
stance, a similar mode to that which touches the fibres, passes
into the fibres; 2. not only into the fibres, but also into the
animal spirit which runs through the fibres; for the fibre and
the percurrent spirit actuate the same cause, the former a pas­
sive and instrumental cause, the latter an active one. 3. The
spirit and the fibre are of an elastic nature, and they carry
 THE SENSE OF TASTE. 295

through the whole force which they receive aH the way to their
extreme ends, just as other elastic bodies, air and ether, that is,
the atmospheres, almost in an instant; according to experience.
4· Wherefore those sensory fibres are rather soft, so also the
fifth pair, according to the authorities ; therefore they are more
tumid with spirit, and are more sensitive; for there is nothing
in them which does not flow, as it were, in its own manner,
and which is not mobile in each of its points. S. From contact
a similar tremiscence instantly arises in the fibre, and a similar
modification in the' spirit, wherefore a similar representation
in the termini of the fibres; how slight a touch produces a
mutual effect in bodies slightfy elastic, likewise in elastic mem­
branes and nerves, is wel1 known, because it happens similarly
in those which entirely correspond with the touch. 6. Every
fibrous composition expanded into the papi1la corresponds to
its papilla which is everywhere various in the tongue, where­
fore the composition of the fibre is also various. 7. The modi­
fication itself thence arising is cal1ed sensation, ,,,,hen to the
modification is added life; for sensation is modification in
which is life, in which again is spirit, and final1y, in the cortical
substance where it is in its first cause, resides the sou\. 8.
Sensation not only pervades the fibres, which are continued to
the papill~ of touch, but also pervades aH the fibres with which
it is in connection, wherefore the whole medul1ary substance,
both that of the medul1a oblongata and that of the cerebrum
and cerebellum. This is evident from the nature of the tremis­
cence and modific2.tion in hard things and in the .atmospheres,
also from the perpetuaI connection, al'so from the nature of
the sensation, that the whole cortical substance must participate
in it. We wil1 see that the brains and the cortical and medul­
lary substance participate in it. 9. Every sensation pervades
the cerebrum equally, where it becomes sensation, as well also
the cerebel1um; wherefore the fibre of the cerebrum which is
of the ninth pair, and the fibre of the cerebelhtm, tbat is, that
of the eighth pair, are joined together everywhere in a mutual
. anastomosis, and the nerve of the fifth pair which springs
from another origin, and is both soft and hard, also acts as a
uniting medium; for the nerve of the fifth pair arises from
 THE SENSES.

both the cerebrum and the cerebellum. la. Thus the extemal
organ of sense, whether it be of taste or of smell, whether of
hearing or of sight, does not sensate, but is only an instru­
ment for receiving a contact, and for carrying it to the sen­
sory; for that alone sensates which [is] organically [con­
structed] for applying sensations ta itself, also the diverse
states of the change to be suitably put on, therefore although
there is onl)' one force, [yet] the very organic form brings it
about that it is such as it is, and not something else. LI 1]
This is apparent from those organs when injured, dissected,
etc., when their fibres are separated, and from phenomena of
the brain and its diseases, from sicknesses of the animus; this
[condition] instantly feigns a sensation in the organ; hence
the fallacies of the senses delude us. 12. The more distinctly
all things act in the tongue, in the fibre and in the brain, even
so that every single fibre is distinctly left to itself, but hmlted
to the general, the more acute, distinct and perfect are sense
and affection, the better likewise are the very organic forms
arranged in part and in the common pact, as is evident in the
smallest reptil'es, in the earliest years, in adolescence, in the
weil; it is otherwise in the sick, in the wom out, in the aged,
where the simple fibres coalesce and do not exercise their own
right, but breathe only what is general.
659. That the outmost or vag'inal tunie by the arteria! way
likewise carries sensation, b~tt a ruder one, to the brain. These
things are to be considered: 1. That the vaginal tunic con­
sists of mere arterial ramifications, as is the case with most of
the membranes in the body, as also in the brain (which will be
demonstrated in the work on the Brain), wherefore they are
of a passive disposition. 2. The inmost tunic consists ot the
corporeal fibres of the arteries, these fibres terminate in the
cortical substance. The vaginal tunic of the tongue consists
of this inmost tunic, and through the carotids creeps swiftly
up to the cortical substance of each brain. 3. This tunic
weaves the cortical spherule itself, and finally unites with the
fibres thence springing forth; of these things eIsewhere. 4.
Thus a concourse of sensation takes place in the cortical sub­
stance; on one side through the arteries, on the other side
 THE SENSE OF TAS TE.

through the fibres; therefore indubitably a change of state;

thus every sensory, likewise as from an, internaI cause, also
from an external one; thus the active and the passive concur
in one effect. 5. That the carotid artery pervades the whole
brain, even to the cortical substance, is to be indicated, and
that its ramifications also form the sheaths of the bundles of
the fibres in the medullary substance of the cerebrum and
cerebellum, this also comes to be demonstrated. 6. Thence
also the tongue, like a stomach, immediately brings aliments
to the spirit of the brain; this is sufficiently c1ear and weIl
proved by effects.
660. That the cortical S1tbstance of the brain is affected ac­
cording to the agreement with the blood of the things touching
it. I. For such as is the soul, such is the spirit; such as is the
spirit, such is the blood; such as is the blood, such is the
chyle; such as is the chyle, such are the organs; therefore aIl
things ought to be acceptable to the nature of the soul, which
is various in every kind of living thing, wherefore also the
structure is various. 2. This is called the order of its nature,
for the soul has respect to the blood as to its vicar in the body,
that is. in the ultimates of its world. 3. This is the reason
that animaIs which live subject to nature, know the nature of
their food from instinct alone; it is otherwise in the human
race, which is ruled by its own will and the principles of its
own mind, into which the regimen of nature has been for the
m05t part transcribed. 4. If the parts agTee with that nature,
they are gladly snatched up, they blandish, they excite and
affect pleasantly; if othenvise, as what is contrary or hetero­
geneous, it affects sadly, it is unpleasant, it is rejected, for it is
repugnant to nature. 5. Wherefore this sense pronounces
what is good and what is bad for the blood, or for the cor­
poreal life; that which agrees is good, that which disagrees
is bad; every sense discerns good and evil, under an appear­
ance of delight or unde1ight; 6. but whether a thing be true,
that is, truly good, or truly evil, or false1y good or evil, this
does not find place in man, but is left to his art and science,
whence is the medicar and many physical arts; and these
things must be explored by effects; but animaIs have this as
 THE SENSES.

something inborn in them, for they are ruled by nature not

by reason, which must be cultivated by a posterior way. 7.
Ail science is a priori in the soul; the senses are its indices;
wherefore it instantly apperceives, and from its nature ap­
petizes or loathes; this arises from the love of its body, this
fact constitutes a sound vicar in a sound body. 8.' But in
order that it may learn intimately, it invites many senses into
consociation, namely, smell, sight, etc.; a kind of blind appe­
tite also teaches us what conduces to the bl'ood, if only our
reason have been in some manner separated, and so that we
can be wholly led by nature, which is then operative. 9. But
we cannot describe that correspondence, and the harmony
thence arising, and their affection, until we have reviewed the
whole animal kingdom, its cortical substance, the blood, the
spirit, the soul, the fibres, the brai n, indeed also the doctrine
of forms, of influxes, of correspondences; thus in the mean­
time it becomes necessary to speak in words not weil under­
stood.
661. Sensation also l'uns through every fibre, membrane and
structure of the tongue, and in an instant communicates every
mode of sensation. 1. Therefore the papill<e are inrooted in
the inmost basilary membrane. 2. This membrane itsel'f is
fibrous, to the end that every modification may continualTy
propagate itseif. 3. In particular this is as follows: it is re­
ferred to the general in order that it may be something, and
may be set in order, and may be e1evated and exalted to sense,
as in sorne instruments. 4. vVhatever happens to one [fibre]
must be communicated to ail. 5. Therefore the papillary form
must communicate within itseif. 6. Therefore the horns or
cartilaginous parts are inrooted in that same membrane. 6.
[a] Therefore the supreme membrane also receives the sensa­
tion of one [papilla] into the whole general membrane. 7.
Therefore ail the fibres of the tongue carry away every mode
of sensation to every cortical substance of the cerebrum and
cerebellum. Therefore aH the fibres communicate, as weil
those of the fifth as those of the eighth and of the ninth pair.
9. Since the sensation is in th1s universal membrane, and in its
own general, it is also immediately in every motor fibre, in
 THE SENSE OF TASTE. 299

every gland, in the whole structure of the tongue; each thing

receives that mode according to its organism. 10. The mode
goes in the direction of the antecedent parts of the fibres;
thus also the fibres communicate. 11. Thus the parts of an
organ are arranged by external causes, then al'so by internaI
causes, that is, by the brain ; external and internaI causes ought
to concur. 12. Indeed sometimes the change of state, that is,
the affection, precedes the external causes, whence habit
passes over into nature, as when a fibre is hurt or punctured,
from its nature it instantly contracts, while on the other hand,
when it is tickled, it expands; since this [condition] is in
every point of the fibre and its spirit in which is the life, there
is no part of it but fears its own extinction. 13. Hence in
respect to every single mode of every sense and organ the
parts concur with their own mode; hence is sensation.
662. The sensa·tion of taste is only an affection, for I. We do
not feel how [an article of food] pricks, hurts, how man y are
the spicules, what things are fiat, what spherical, how they are
joined; for to sensate that, is sensation itself; 2. but only how
the organ is affected, pleasantly or unpleasantly, sweetly or
bitterly, hot or cold; for it is every little sensory which does
the carrying to the common sensory, that is, to the cortical
substance. 3. There are infinite varieties and particulars which
affect one fibre, there are infinitely more which affect the
different fibres; from composite humors reduced into one
common mode by the membranes and communications, arises
sensation which then is only affection. 4. It is othe l'wise in
the sensories of hearing and sight where single things are rep­
resented, from which, distinctly conjoined in their form, an
affection results. 5. This is the reason why the ideas of the
modes of taste and smell cannot be impressed upon the mem­
ory in the same manner as can the modes of sight and hearing,
wherefore neither can they be similarly reproduced. 6. For
the affection itself cannot be reproduced unl'ess we can com­
pose all the modes into a grateful form. 7. But we reproduce
the affections themseIves by thought of the object, that is, by
ideas. 8. Therefore every variety of sensation is a variety of
affection, because the general does not sensate the particular;
,300 THE SENSES.

as, for instance, colors, the forms of the parts of which are so
arranged, that they may be affected thus or otherwise, under
this or that color. 9. If we conceive of affection alone, we
conceive of only an occult quality, and a general, obscure anc\
indistinct idea; myriads of forms concur in every single affec­
tion, and simula te one form. 10. The soul alone know::> sensa­
tions, for thence it produces affections; if it did not know
them, whence could there be an affection, whether [sensation 1
took place or not? the idea results from the form of the part
and the compound. II. We must inquire into what affection
is, elsewhere.
663. The brain is affected according to the state of its organ,
that is ta say: 1. from the particular state of the papilh:e; 2.
from their state in general; 3. from the state of the mem­
branes; 4. from the state of the fibres. 5. For they are only
recipient and deferent organs, and of themselves feel noth­
ing. 6. This is evident from the state of the tangue, its
papill;:e and membranes, that is, wb ether the state be hurt,
sick or sound, in respect to the natural structure or contingent
variety. 7. Thus the brain is deceived by the fal1'acies of the
senses; for it receives in the same manner as [the modes] are
brought ta it. So it occurs in the other sensory organs in the
extremes.
664. The organ is affected according to the sfate of each
bmin. 1. If the brain is sick; 2. if its animus is affected. 3. If
the minci persuades itself that this woulcl be suitable for the
blood, it therefore appetizes it and loves that which hUrts. 4.
Rence is the appetite for unsuitable things, for medicines, for
pains tbemselves; for the mind has respect to the health of the
body and the restitution of the blood; thence it is evident
that a similar harmony occurs wben nature indicates foods
suitable for the body. 5. But the rational mind is deceived,
not so the soul which is above the mind.
665. Also according to the state of the mediating fibres,. that
is ta say, 1. of those fibres which communicate sensation to the
brain, 2. of those by which the brain communicates with the
organ, 3. by which the papill::e communicate with the ex­
tremes, with the common membrane, with the motor fibre and
 THE SENSE OF TASTE. 3°1

with the tongue. 4. This is evident to the l'ife in every change

of state from the change alone of the fibres, for they are
media. 5. Therefore it is ultimate causes, that is, in the organ
itself, mediate causes in the fibres, and inmost causes in the
brain, that is, in the cortical substance, which produce attec­
tion, and finally change of state, of which we must now treat.
666. 5. From affections arise changes of state, for sensations
are changes of state according ta affections. 1. Changes of
state are various, yea, universal, as are affections and sensa­
tions. 2. The sensory is the more perfect the more distinctly
it can undergo many changes of state, and the more suitable
are the states of the parts for the general state. 3. According
to the modes of the sensations and the affections thence aris­
ing, a change of state is instantly induced upon the papili<e,
~ecause upon the fibres, and upon the brains. 4. A similar
state is induced upon the whole sensory organ and its parts;
S. likewise upon every appendage which performs any \York
for the same office, and acts as a servant, whence, upon the
glands. 6. Then further a similar state is induced upon the
palate, œsophagus, stomach, intestines and the l'est of the
viscera. 7. The change of state itself is especial1y induced by
the cerebellum, as by inmost causes. 8. 1t is also induced
contingently by external causes which affect the tongue, as by
disorders of the blood, fluids and salivas, or the injmy of its
structure. 9. 1t is also induced by mediate causes, that is, by
disorders or affections of the animus. la. There are perma­
nent changes of state which pervert the sense, and there are
natural changes according to the affection of the aliments.
667. That the changes of state are just as variaus, yea, as
universal, as the affections and sensations, for, I. every affec­
tion induces its own change. 2. The species of affections are as
many as are the species of sensations. 3. They are named ac­
cording to excellence; the affections which are of the animus,
resulting from the forms of material ideas, that is, imagina­
tions, 4. all induce their own changes; but changes cannot be
explored without the doctrine of forms, of orcier and of de­
grees, also of influx es, for influxes are different, wherefore af­
fections are of a different orcier, and hence also changes of
302 THE SENSES.

state are different. S. Changes of state take place in the same

degree as [their corresponding] affections. 6. They are indeed
innumerable, but can be reduced to a few; they can be reckoned
as intermediate and subalternate, that is to say, tirst, changes
by contractions and expansions, second, by variations of
figure, third, by hardenings and softenings, tifth (sic), by
heat and cold, sixth, by vital tumefactions, or by quiescence,
for in ail kinds of changes the entire system trembl'es from a
certain innate force; to say nothing of other changes. 7. These
changes attack the fibres and the animal spirit, wherefore that
whole texture, which is composed of fibres. 8. Renee changes
arise in the compounds exactly according to the form of their
composition, as in the papillce and muscles.
668. The sensor)' is the more perfect, the more changes the
organ can undergo successively and at the same time, and the
more conf01'mabl)' the chanp;es of the parts correspond to the
change of the whole, I. as in the sensories and motories, that
is, in the organs and muscles. 2. The more complicated and
delicate is the tongue or any other organ, the more perfect it
is. 3. The more distinct are the parts, the more changes can
they undergo. 4. In tender age ail things are most distinctly
divided, afterwards they grow together, and thus the faculty
of changes of state perishes, henee there is a loss of life, both
sensitive and motory. 5. For in tender age the sensory can be
accommodated to ail things, can be longer and more wholly
consociated, remaining more permanently in its own essence.
6. Thus the papillce in the tongue, the fibres, glands, motor
fibres, hence ail correspondence and ail natural observation
and ends or uses are distinctly put forth. 7. Thus the modes
are varied, the essence remaining permanent; thus the more
the modes and the more distinct, the more perfect the effect,
for the harmonious and corresponding varieties are more.
669. According to sensations and affections changes of state
'are induced 1tpOn the papillœ and nerves of the brain, for I. if
anything unpleasant touches or pricks the fibre, it con tracts ;
2. if pleasant, it expands. 3. It grows hot or grows cold, or
trembles or becomes quiescent. 4. The spirit itself under­
goes these changes sometimes without the [participation of]
 THE SENSE OF TASTE. JOJ

the brains, as in cadavers but only that of contraction or ex­

pansion, whence there is motion of the muscles, for l doubt
many changes without [the participation of] the brains, yea,
rather the soul cornes into consort where she resides in her
own purest organism. 5. Wherefore the papill<e have been so
made that they can be extended into pyramids and thread5,
contracted into spheres, can change their figure, can wlth­
draw themselves deeply into the sinuses of the tongue, can
stretch themselves out for contact; 6. they can close their
pores lest that which is hurtful should enter; they can grow
hard, soft, cold or torpid; they can present a vital tremiscence
in, as it were, a flaccid connection. 7. This also can be ex­
perimented upon in tongues, the papillée of which after death
fall down and can afterwards be very easily converted into
all fOl·ms. 8. That state cornes especially from the cerebellum
according to the affection of the cerebrum; for change of state
descends through the fibres, sensation however ascends there­
by.
670. A similar change of state is induced upon the whole sen­
sory organ and its parts; that is to say, 1. upon the papillée,'
wherefore upon the papillary conge ries ; 2. upon the glands; 3.
upon the membranes on which they l'est; 4. upon the muscles.
5. AlI things concur to this end; 6. for while the papilla con­
tracts, the gland also contracts, and does not admit humor; the
muscle also contracts, wherefore the whole organ in general
undergoes a similar change; 7. indeed also the fluid parts,
which flow within the vesse1s, as also the blood; 8. for the
change descends from the cerebellum along the nerves.
671. A similar change is induced ttpon every appendage,
which performs sanze service ta the same end; that is to say, 1.
especially upon the salivary glands, which in expansion and
delight pour out abundant saliva, as the parotids, the maxil­
lary, the sublingual, and the buccal glands. 3. The glands of
the tongue open and draw in; 3 [a] the lal'gel' hiatuses and
such-like glands similarly. 4. The muscles vibrate quickly. 5.
Thus they confirm the states of motion and the states of sub­
stance which mutually correspond to one another; it 1S other­
wise if there be another change, because there will be another
affection.
304 THE SENSES.

672. A similar change is indl~ced upon the [palate], the œso­

phagus, the stomach and the intestines. 1. This is from causes
not only of the sense of taste, 2. but al'so from causes of the
sense in the stomach and intestines, where also are found the
serico-villous papill<.e. 3. Ali of these the cerebellum com­
mands through its sympathetic nerves, through which it pours
in its own changes according to every economic law and co­
establishment or order. 4. Sense is the admonishing cause.
673. Sensation is induced especially by the cerbellum. I.
This governs mastication through its sympathetic nerves. 2. It
apperceives through their states what it is that affects. 3. It
belongs to the office of the cerebrum to sensate; 4. hence there
is an alIotment to the cerebrum and an allotment to the cere­
bellum. 5. Changes of state depend upbn the cerebellum, for
they are not governed by the will. 6. Motions of the muscles
are changes of state from the natural; the cerebellum resists
them. 7. Bùt those muscles, which the nerves of the cere­
brum do not approach, are subject to the cerebellum. 8. There
are many motions of the tongue which are not governed, but
follow, as it were, in a continuous series, according to the
advertence of the sensations.
674. Sensation is also induced by externat causes, as, I. by
diseases; 2. by a sick state of the blood, by abundance, by a bad
constitution; 3. by an abundance of fluids and by their bad
disposition; 4. by the solid parts themselves growing together,
or by injuries, 5. by the nerves themselves. 5 [aH They
change the natural structure, and take away the faculty of
acting distinctly. 6. \Vherefore by these induced changes the
brain sensates and is affected and that indeed fallaciollsly; for
there are preternatural changes. 7. Finally, there are faculties
of changing state according to nature and the structure.
675. Sensation is indllced by affections of the animus, as by
anger, fear, envy, etc., are induced other states; there are
states superinduced; these being admitted, the rest of the states­
follow; but the sense of motion, the salivas, the appetite and'
many other things undergo a certain alteration.
676. 6. Hence are the effects, which are the nutrition of the­
blood and of the corporeal tife, the preparation ot' tbe chyle.
indigestion and many more.
 THE SENSE OF TASTE. 305

677. 1t is to be observed, 1. That sensation ascends to the

brains aiong the fibres; 2. that affection exists in the brains; 3.
that change of state descends through the fibres into the or­
gans; for as [sensation] affects ail the beginnings in the brain,
so it affects the fibres themselves, wherefore, so it affects every
organism constructed of fibres.
678. Sensation is the very beginning of life and the ail of its
faculty and activity, ail the l'est flow from sensation; for the
sensation in the external organs is similar to the sensation in
the internaI organs, so that he who understands the mode of
action of one will perceive the rest; the same contingents, at­
tributes and modes occur on both sides, but with a distinc­
tion which is as between the prior and the posterior, simpler
and more compounded, more perfect and more imperfect; let
a comparison be instituted: 1. Sense receives its object by a
. posterior way, thus taste, smelI, hearing and sight, so the in­
ternaI sense, that is, the understanding by its organs or by the
ideas of its memory. 2. The external sense turns those things
vvhich it receives this way and that, applies them to itse1f on
ail si des, and thus explores whether a thing is suitable; and
the internaI sense likewise revolves and turns ideas, and thinks
[about them] ; this is especially called apperception and altera­
tion. 3. The external sense is affected by things revol'ved and
turned, some it expunges, SO:.le it adapts to itself, and changes
its state suitably, so that it ma)' receive them in such manner
that they agree; likewise the external sense f ron thought ex­
punges those things which do not agree and vice versa; thus
it forms its understanding and conclusion, which it chooses
according to the affections. 4. N ext those things which the
sense, as taste, appetizes; as the appetite is enkindled so also
the internaI sense desires, and thus remits it into the will. 5.
The external sense induces suitable changes of state, sa also
the interna!' sense, for it remits it into the act which must
be altogether suitable to the sensation of the state, 6. just
as the sensation of that state which is the principal' produces
the state of motion which is a:togeth'2r suitable to it, and adapts
itself: thus sense is the cause of the motion, and of its agree­
ment between sense and motion; for those things follow in
20
306 THE SENSES.

the same series, both inmostly in the brain and 111 its internaI
sensories, and in extremes, that is in the body.t

tFol1owing the end of this para­ 7. This is the rule concerning

graph, and forming the last lines every sensation: that the soul sen­
of the chapter come the following sates, our mind is affected and
words, which, however, are cross­ thus sensates the affections, and
ed out by the author: that­
 THE SENSE OF TOUCH. 307

CHAPTER IX.

THE SENSE OF TOUCH, OR THE CULICLES.

679. 1. Experience; see the authorities; there are: 1. The

epidermis with its scales, 2. the corpus reticulare of Mal­
pighi, 3. the papillary membrane, with interwoven vessels and
filaments, properly belonging to the cutis, 4. the subcutaneous
and miliary glands, 5. the layer of subcutaneous nerves, 6.
in brutes, the muscular layer, 7. the adipose membrane-other­
wise called the periostea.
Analysis.
680. 2. The body of an animal is a world by itself within
the greater world, or it is a substance which acts by itself,
and an Essence or form, which communicates with tne greater
or greatest, by which form it subsists: and it is held in its
form, compositely and particularly; while yet it enjoys its own
powers, such as the universe enjoys, from which it rules itself
in the greater: therefore we ought to see how the animal
world acts by itself; it communicates with the greatest world,
it infiows, and the reverse; what is the nature of the depend.
ence, and how it is left ta itself, ta its own power; and how, ac­
cording to the ancients, it actuates the microcosl11.
681. 3. The circumfluent atmospheres enjoy their own char­
acteristics, powers, forces, modes and forms: as to the
first air, its characteristics are as follows: 1. ta press upon
things in the way, on aH sides equally, according ta the alti­
tude of the colul1;n; 2. to flow in volume from place to place,
and thus to he determined by its own causes, 3. diversely to
vary its nature, and to he affected, that is to say, now ta be
expanded, now contracted; to tremble and ta come to rest, to
grow hot and ta grow cold, and many more, whence are its
many affections; 4. to be modified according to the nature
of its parts, and indecd from afar; 5. then also to be impreg­
nated with many other things, such as effiuvia. 6. It is similar
in respect to the higher atmospheres, but since they are prior
 THE SENSES.

and simpler they each exercise those more perfect natures,

which have been mentioned.
682. 4. AU those atmospheres act upon the animal micro­
cosm. 1. The air by its pressure acts upon its whole cir­
cumference and surface, which it therefore holds in its own
connection and form, 2. by its force of ftowing into the lungs,
3. by its affections also upon the surface itself, such as grow­
ing hot and growing cold, whence partly is the sense of touch;
4. ta be modified, whence is the sense of hearing, which ap­
plies the nature of the modification ta itself; S. ta be moved
by effluvia, whence is the sense of smell. 6. Bence the animal
microcosm applies ta itself ail the characteristics and powers
which the air possesses, and yet those characteristics and
powers do not operate except upon the surface, nor is it ad­
mitted that they shall act inwardly; for it (the air) is imme­
diately expelled, for, for it to act inwardly would be the ad
of ~ hostile enemy. 6 [a]. 1t recei'Ues and draws down rcins;
it throws them out in a shower.
683. [4a]. The remaining atmospheres act similarly, for, 1.
they press upon the more minute parts, 2. perchance also they
floVl' into those parts as into their own lungs; 3. by their vari­
ations of state they affect those parts, as is evident from many
experiments; 4. they present modifications, as by sight ta the
eye, even from the sun and stars. S. They receive the effluvia
of those parts by means of sense when that is arranged for
reception, as in brutes, 6. or by means of sympathy, and many
other things.
684. S. As the atmospheres act upon the animal microcosm,
so supreme celestial forms act upon the SOttl, 1. not only
celestial fonns of which the soul is a part, 2. but also, spiritual
forms, 3. in which our soul is and lives; 4. the soul is not only
actuated and moved, S. but also affecte d, 6. and, moreover,
modified. 7. Dy means of correspondence and analogy, we
can learn from the one about the other, although it transcends
the sphere of co:rmon understanding; 8. thus we may treat of
the body of such things from the universe, its atmospheres
and auras, !astly from spiritual things.
 THE SENSE OF TOUCH.

685. 6. The a.nimal body has been furnished with similar

powers; for it has its own determinations, into which it
is excited, as well by an external way as by its own proper
forces and powers. 1. It presses upon its own parts according
to every adapted form of determination. 2. Its parts flow,
whence is pulmonary motion and the circulation of its blood
and llumors. 3. It is modified by its own causes, whence there
is given to it the liberty of thinking, willing and acting. 4.
It is also similar1y affected by itself. 5. It conveys its parts,
which it surrounds.
686. 7. From the above it appears, 1. what is the nature
of the influx of the macrocosm into the microcosm; 2. what
is the nature of the communication of the operations; 3. what
is the nature of the correspondence. 4. But lest l should go
off into the arcane, let us now stick to the question of the in­
flux of the air into the cutic1e, which is the object of our
lucubrations.
687. 8. The cuticle itself is the {imit between the body
with Ùs ~tltimate compages, and the grossest atmosphere with
its ultùnate compages. wheref01'e between the body and the
wortel. 1. In this limit we can learn how the air flows into
this its own wodd; 3. how the microcosm flows back into the
atmospherîc wor1d; 4. what is the nature of the communica­
tion of each one; 5. for all of it has been impressed upon the
cutic1e; wherefore such wonderful things occur.
688. 9. Let a comparison be made, in order that we may
take note of the influxes. 1. The microcosm is defended and
he1d apart from the atmosphere by the Epidermis, or squam­
ous cutic1e, lest it suffer injury. 2. 1t is held in its own form
by that atmosphere which presses it above equally. 3. It like­
wise presses back and holds itself in equilibrium against that
force and gravity, and this indeed by its own atmospheres and
vapors which fil! up its cavities. 4. Thence is the balance of
action and reaction; 5. nor could the one subsist without the
other, that is, the microcosm could not subsist without the
macrocosm; but the air is not admitted, because it is an attack­
ing enemy. 6. In order that the cuticle may sensate the af­
3JO THE SENSES.

fections of that atmosphere, it enjoys the sense of touch,

whence is the papilliform membrane, which lies beneath; 7.
and in order that it may sensate according to every affection
of itself, the retiform tunic regularly intercedes, which regu­
lates the organs of sensation, that they may ail rightly obey; 8.
in order that it may receive those things which flow to it from
the atmosphere, it is supplied with the glandular cutis or tunic.
9. Thus the u1til11ate or squamous tunic is for protection. 10.
The second or reticular tunic is for the regulation of 'sensa­
tion and of the efftuvia. II. The third tunic is for sensation.
12. The fourth tunic is for the communication of the parts. 13.
The microcosm is in aU things similar to the macrocosm, it
likewise also attracts effiuvia, moisture, and many other things,
and likewise disperses them; it is affected in like manner. 14.
Thus from the atmospheres we shall learn the nature of the
mlcrocosm.
689. IO. But the animal microcosm has been so constructed,
1. that it may appropriate to itse1f ail things which happen
from without, 2. that it may refer ail that it receives to its own
internaI, 3. that from internaIs it may communicate them with
its superior and supreme parts. 4. From the supreme it pro­
ceeds to u1timates, 5. the former by sensations, the latter by
actions. 6. Thus in order that we may be the host of the su­
preme mind. 7. By this \Vay especially, supreme things descend
to ultimates, and from u1timates ascend to primes. 8. Indeed
as the universe is ruled by its own supreme, and by the Di­
vinity, so al~o is the animal microcosm to be protected by, as it
were, its own divinity, that is, the sou!. 9. But yet in such a
way tll3t this soul shall depend upon its own supreme. la.
Thus we see how wonderfully ail things conform themselves.
The Cuticle in Particular.
690. IL The Epidermis or squamous tunic: its uses are,
1. that it may protect the papillée from injury from the air,
2. also from injury from heat and cold; 3. that it may ap­
ply itse1f to the organic papillée, so that thence may arise a
general sense; 4. so that the tremiscences arising from the
papillée may be exalted, thus the sense e1evated, that is, the
 THE SENSE OF TOUCH. 311

sensation, according to the modification. 5. Ali things are ar-

ranged and formed according to uses; 6. so that the squamous
tunic furnishes a passage for the perspiratory and evaporatory
pores, etc.
691. Its use in respect ta the air ÏS! ta proteet the sensories
against injury tram the air. I. It has respect to the air,
for it touches it, and is an ultimate boundary. 2. There
are fluent particles, variously figured in the atmosphere, from
aIl the kingdoms [of nature], which must not immediately
touch and pierce; 3. the affections and changes of the air must
not immediately impinge upon the sensories. 4. If this should
happen, the sensories would become duIl, or would sensate too
acutely. 5. It likewise protects against other injuries, as those
of the ether and its affection, against accidents from those
things which slip in, and which fly about in the air, as, for in-
stance, insects ; 6. against accidents and manifold injuries from
other microcosmic matters. 7. wherefore the scales of the epi-
dermis are of an almost general character; they are somewhat
hard, they are lamellated in accordance with this whole use.
692. ln arder that the ttses may apply themselves ta the
organie papilZee, sa that a general sense may be produeed,
J. that is to say, according to aIl those affections and changes
of state, 2. the tunics continually expand and contract. 3. Into
these they also pour out tremiscences that the sense may be
heightened; 4. for this reason they are pliable and divisible,
5. and arranged entirely according to the quality of the state;
6. they are everywhere different; 7. they differ according ta
age, labors, culture; in infancy they are membranous. 8. They
are formed according to every action and extension of the
papill.c; these effect changes of state, since they are so di-
visible, and are such as are the forms. 9. Almost the same as,
from a similar usage, is the case in the tongue. 10. They are
everywhere differently arranged, in exact ratio to the sensa-
tion, usage and culture, to place, to heat, in a word, to sense.
693. ln arder that the tremiseenees may be elevated ta the
sense through tremiseenees,o I. as elsewhere, where there
are periostea and cartilages the sense is keener. 2. Wherever
312 THE SENSES.

there is sense there are hard bodies, corresponding thereto; so

in the tongue, the nostrils, in hearing, in the eye. 3. A suit­
able tremor seizes them, wherefore it is e1astic and vibratile.
4. But these tremiscences are at the place of entrance. 5. They
are united with the papilla: by the reticular membrane, upon
which they depend and to which they are bound, and thus upon
the papilla: which are interwoven in the net of that tunic;
wherefore it is effected mediately.
694. In arder that they may furnish a way for the per­
spiratory pores, for 1. they furnish a way for the sudorific
pores. 2. They are themselves perforated with innumerable
pores according to Leeuwenhock. 3. They can be spread open
and drawn together. 4. So this tunic furnishes a passage for
the gifts of the air, and the effiuvia of the body.
695. It is f01' this end that these things are thus organieally
formed: I. for they are ail for the sake of use, 2. so that
they may accommodate themselves to the air and to their own
body, and to ail the tunics. 3. It is varied according to every
use. 4. They vary according to every temperament. 5. They
vary according to ages. 6. They are applied precisely; they
are thinner, coarser, harder, softer; they are conglutinated,
they are simple, they are more or less elastic to repel injuries;
they are accommodated, pensile, retractile, slipping back into
their own form; they are pendulons, in ordel- tInt they may
yield inwardly; the sudorific pores are adaptable; they are
variously pierced. 7. They appear to be derived from the
covering of the filaments of the reticular tunic, which covering
is continued, as it were, a subtle periosteum, upon which
they also depend. 8. Thu:; they appear to consist of continu­
ous filaments, through which flows a humor; of which the
more fluid part is evaporated. 9. Through its pores them­
selves there is perchance given a perspiratory way for most
subtile exhalations; from the body, wherefore they are pierced.
JO. This is more plainly evident from the skins of crustaceans,
insects, and many other animaIs, where this tunic cornes to an
end in a rather hard shell, and is like bark.
696. I2. The uses of the retieular tunie are, 1. that the
 THE SENSE OF TOUCH. 3 13

squamous tunic or epidermis may righdy rest upon it, 2. that

the papilla: may be regulated according to sense, affection and
change of state, also as to situation, connection, motion and
effect; 3. that the undulatory tremor may be spread round
about upon the surface, and may return into what is general ; 4.
that it may carry the sense off into the scales of the epidermis ;
5. that it may also regulate the sudorific pores, and many
other things which are within; 6. for the use of the interior
tunic is then for the exterior, and for the whole interior; thence
is its state.
697. That the scales ma)' rightly l'est ~lpon it, 1. for that
tunic passes over into the scales by thin periostea. 2. Thus
can the epidennis arise, be supported and vibrated. 3. Those
reticular filaments are the bases of the scales.
698. That the papillœ may be regulated according to sense,
1. as to situation, 2. as 0 connection, 3. as to motion. 4. By
the reticular tunic communication is given with the epidermis;
5. by it the trernor passes over into the scales and back again;
6. otherwise the scales "vould be something not in order. 7.
Thus the sense passes over from the finest to the coarsest
things, and a treumlation arises, wherefore an exaltation cven
to sensation, and a repercussion even into the nerves, when they
slip back. 8. There is everywhere a hard body.
699. That the tremor ma)' return into 'What is general, 1.
along the filaments of that tunic, and into the scales of the
epidermis; 2. there is a connection of it with the papilla:, and
with the scales; wherefore it performs a use to each and is a
inedium. 3. The tremulation of the epidermis is also recipro­
cally extended. 4. Thus is effected a communication of the
whole cutis.
700. In order lhat it may also regulate the other pores,
that is, the sudorific, 1. they also pierce that tunic, 2. both the
excretory and the inspiratory vessels, 3. and in hairs, thus it
performs a use ta the adipose tunic.
700a. From the use is known whence is its state. T. It is
black in Moors, white i.n Eu ropean s, whiter still in northern
races. 2. That is to say, it is evidently for this use, namely, that
31 4 THE SENSES.

the solar rays, penetrating the epidermis in a very lively man­

ner, may not injure the sensories; they beat back that pene­
tration, they dul1 it; they entirely change the state of those
pores. 3. For blackness absorbs the rays, whiteness repels
them. 4. Thus excessive heat or radiance does not hurt the
papil1<e in Moors, and excessive cold and the more oblique rays
of the sun does not dull the papillary sensory in Europeans. 5.
There is an equilibrium of all things, which returns thither,
lest too much or too little hurt the sensory; thence is color
which is thus put on by nature, and all things adapt themse1ves
to it; whence is black hair, kinked hair, the salacious tempera­
ment, and similar blood. 6. This equilibrium can be subjected
to calculation. 7. There are filaments, not regular forms, but
unequal interstices, among which the tunic winds about. 8.
Similar1y also among those parts, as in the retina of the eye.
9. The adaptation of the retin<e of that tunic is according to
external uses. 10. The like is observed in the tongue, which
approaches very nearly to this sense, but is softer. IL Thus
it distÏ1~guishes general sensations into parts.
701. 13. As regards the papilhe or little sensories, the 101­
lowing is a description: They are soft, sensitive, expansible,
retractile organic substance; they are mamilliform, papillary,
sensitive, organic, by reason of their contiguity appearing to
be continuous, variously winding and gyrating, in discriminat­
ing furrows, spirally, circular1y, crookedly, lineally, diverse1y;
it is here denser, there rarer; here harder, there softer; at par­
ticular points of its whole circuit; thus in one manner on the
breast, another in the hypogastric region, another on the back,
another on the arms, another on the palms of the hands, an­
other on the soles of the feet, another on the fingers, another
on the glans penis, another on the scrotum, another on the
vulva, on the cheeks, on the lobe of the ear, on the lips, indeed
within the mouth, the throat, the gullet, especially in the
tangue, where a similar distinct organism. is represented, and
such as may be demonstrated; that congeries is pierced by in­
finite pores, as it were, points, discovered, described and drawn
by Leeuwenhoek and others; thence is the subtile Sanctorian
perspiration, the vesic1es in the whole cuticular circuit num­
 THE SENSE OF TOUCH. 315

ber 2,016,000,000. This papillifonn substance under the epi­

dennis now reaches outward among the reticular space of
the interjected membrane, now withdraws inward, and spreads
itself, points itself, crinkles, becomes distinct or united. ac­
cording ta the power of the contact, ta its qualities, to the in­
tentions of the animus, ta the desires of the mind, ta many af­
fections, ta the requirement of nature. The thinner and tiner
the epidermis, the better and more distinct is the sense; on
the contrary, it is duller and more general, the harder the
superimposed scales, the more extended, the more duplicated.
It passes over and offers [itself] ta the excretory vessels, as
also to the hairs between the furrows and divisions just now
mentioned as circulaI' ancl curvilinear, where it is .vet with a
kind of unctuous and besmearing fluid.
702. The arder of things ta be observed. 1. Preface. 2.
Description, where man)' things are inse1'fed which may
COl1cern the tissue and üs uses. 3. The uses are reviewed.
4. Particular uses are expanded, together with the t,issue. 5.
The several points are confirmed in notes by experience G,nd
comment.
703. 14. The uses of the sense of touch are, 1. that they
may announce ta the soul what flows to and touches from
the contiguous outer world; then also what flows to and
touches from remaining objects, that is to say, what infec;ts
that whole kingdom, whether it be from the world or from
allied 5ubjects, or from itself, in case of sickness, why they
are, what they do as guarcls and intercommunicants. 2. In
orcier that the soul may learn the affections of the aerial atmos­
phere, and perhaps also of the etherial, and in order that it
may be changed as ta state according ta those affections; 3.
in order that the cutis and the whole surface may undergo
changes of state, according ta aIl the affections of the body,
of its blood, of the animus and its spirit, of the minci and the
soul; 4. and may thus arrange communications, especially of
the parts which are insinuated from the air, or are expired
into the air, according ta every need, state and necessity, which
are the necessary media for the conservation and restitution of
31 6 THE SENSES.

the microcosm; and which are hidden within. S. They are

qualified for these uses.
701:. 15. In arder that they may a·nnaunce ta the saul what
flows ta and attac1<s tram the contigttous warld and ather
abjects. 1. The sense is very gross and is a sense only of
greater compounds and of ultimate effects, for they are in the
ultimates of the kingdom, where it touches the circumfiuent
wodd. 2. \Yherdore only a congeries of the parts sensates; the
organ which sensates parts is that of taste, and the organwhich
sensates parts of parts is that of smel!. 3. Things which are
similar coincide with these things in the organs, but they dif­
fer in compol1nds, for while a composition is touched, it is a
cornposition of parts which is sensated, when a smaller part
or the paït itself is tOl1ched, the papill~ are too few. 4. In
order that there may be a general sensation, the scales of the
epidermis confer; the larger, coarser, less elastic, and the more
of them. that are touched at the same time, the grosser is the
sense. S. Because the senses of taste and smell are assimilated;
the papill<~ are similar and can be sharpened according to mode
of culture, and according to need, as, for instance, if they be
laid bare, the scales grow tender, they may be more distinctly
disposed; the papill~ themselves are rendered sparser, and
ordered in a more suitable form; 6. for they are arranged in a
more suitable form, that one papill~ may he conscious of the
tOl1ch and mode of another, and all together, From a particular
form and the general [effect] of many things, they have this,
that in whatever place sense exists, they sensate more ex­
quisitely and distinctly. 7. vVherefore one papilla is never
like another, no1' is the form of many in one place similar to
that in another. 8. By means of this sense the soul knows
what is being' done in the ultimates, that by means of the other
senses it may know, shun and arrange for shunning that thing.
9. Those fibres g'O off into organic for111s, in order that it may
receive every contact exquisitely, especially into the common
form, wherefore the parts or papill~ are distinct, although
they appear to be continuous. 10. That which happens in
extremes is sensated in primes, tint is, in the brain; the idea
 THE SENSE OF TOUCH. 3 17

of quality, quantity and place results from the differencc of all,

11. therefore they are naturally connected, and are hdd in their
own place, in order that they may not suffer themselves to be
removed from their places, and from their connection and
form; wherefore they cohere to the superior membranes, and
to their own nerves and vessels; no matter what then disturbs
them from their seat and natural fonn, this is sensated, it is
only change of state which produces sensation; nor can any­
thing happen without a change of state wherefore those tunics
are placed around that they may hold ail things in connection.
12. There are therefore many nerves together, that is, com­
positions of nerves, which sensate it and which are modified,
and carry it away to the cortical substances of the spinal axis,
the medulla oblongata, the cerebellulTI and the cerebrum; for
every sensation is carried away to every cortical substance.
13. There are therefore congeries of parts which undergo
those changes in the medulla spinalis and in the brain; per­
haps the whole medull2.rY and cortical brain from the change
thence induced reverberates the senses. 14. The brain is di­
vided into parts; these greater and less congeries of the tunic
are changed by the grosser sensations; but the contacts are
changed by particular modes, likewise their every substance.
15. As are the congeries, such are the sensations, ruder and
simpler, thence [as) is the difference of the sense of touch,
taste and smell, ta which they answer, such are the congeries
in the brain. 16. There are corresponding divisions in the
medulla spinalis, but unobservable as in media. 17. W'hatever
cames ta the medulla spinalis, passes inevitab!y into the cere­
bellum, for a royal road leads thither, and the medulla spinalis
is an appendix to the cerebellum and the cerebrum. 18. The
cerebellU1l', which is a unique bed, perceives the very moments
of touch, which do not arrive at the consciousness of the cere­
brum; yea, many things which the cerebrum does not observe;
otherwise it would be unable to change the stat~ suitably, for
that cornes from the cerebellum. 19. From the contact of many
papilla:: cames a modification of many nerves, and a change of
the state of many beginnings in the cerebrul11. zo. The
3 18 THE SENSES.

varieties of sense are many, being constantly according to the

qualities of the organs, their situation in the body, the qualities
0(' the reticular tunic, the qualities of the epidermis. 21.
Qualities can be varied in endless modes: they can be sharp­
ened, the)' can be dulled. 22. They have a maximum and a
minimum; the maximum is not sensated as sense but as affec­
tion, as, for instance, when the whole [cutis] is surrounded
with cold, and when the whole is compressed. 23. The smaller
the part which is touched, the sharper is the sensation. 24.
The senses are likewise circumstanced according to the state
of the nerves and the state of the brain.
705. In arder that it may Imaw tHe states of the atmo­
sphere and the ether and be suitably changed: 1. As re­
spects cold and heat, drought and humidity, etc. 2. H ence
if is ùlstantlJl contracted or expanded, and constitutes itself
a guard of the kingdom, in respect ta aU that affection, and a
similar [af/ection] breaks forth into the body. 3. Wherefore
if aets with the associate group, and if is because of the con­
tiguity and propagation of those things that it may know
what Olle thillg touches another. 4. There are many affections
of the at111osphere, which do not come to the consciousness of
the cerebrum and cerebellu111; these exist in the purer at1110­
sphere: whence we see that the body is disposed by Out1110St
causes of which we know nothing; and we bear a certain
sYlllpathy with the affection of the air, as do barometers, es­
pecial1y those who have been affected in sorne manner; that
sense returns into the place of the affection of those things.
5. \,Vherefore there are instincts \-vhich the cerebellum and na­
ture feel, of w.hich our mind does not become conscious, ex­
cept in effects alone in what is immediate1y present; thus, we
forecast tempests. 6. These are external causes of changes on
the part of the circumftuent world.
706. In arder that the s/?in may undergo changes according
to ail the affections of the bod'J', animus, mind and soul.
I. These are the internat causes, with which a communi­
cation of the microcos111 with the macrocosm takes place,
that is to say. they are the reactive force. 2. From these
 THE SENSE OF TOUCH. 319

things the state of those organs is changed ; they are expanded,

or contracted, or they tremble, or grow soft, or grow hot, or
grow cold; or they are thus and so arranged, hence there is a
certain sense from themse1ves,-sweet, sad or sportive. 3.
This is according to the state of the body, its need, hung'er,
constitution, blood, pleasures, pain; 4. according to the state
of the animus, its joy, sadness, wrath, fear, etc.; 5. according
to the desires of the animus for good or evil; 6. especially ac­
cording to the states of the soul which in itself embraces ail
the affections and changes of the body; 7. thence especially
flow effects, as in the macrocosm, that is to say, that it may
admit them as nourishment or send them out.
707. In order that thus it ma)' be able ta arrange the com­
munica.tions. 1. For emissaries, both those which select
food from the atmosphere, and those which send forth
efftuvia and sweats, flow through that substance. 2. Little
canals are inwoven in it, and are comprehended by it. 3.
Wherefore ail changes of state from the papillary congeries
return into it; these it either closes or opens, or otherwise ar­
ranges. 4. For ever)' change of state begins from sensation,
as does life from sense,. life is in sense. 5. The affection of
the papillary substance and its change must precede, thence
the effect returns into the single things, especially into those
that are contiguous. 6. Thence come the phenomena of per­
spirations, of sweats, of absorptions, and of many other
things; for the microcosm is like the world which now draws
down and absorbs rain and the efftuvia of the earth, now in­
deed sends back and repels them, and c1ears itseH of disorderly
things and calms itself. 7. A similar state is put on by the
glands and excretory organs, as in the little sensories them­
selves, and is propagated into aU of them. 8. Wherefore the
states of inmost and outmost things l11utuaUy correspond to
each other, that is to say, the states of the papillre, of the skin
and of the cortical substances of the brain; wherefore both
extremes of the fibres; such as is one extreme, such is the
other, and the intermediate.
708. ft is ta be observed: 1. There is a sense of touch which
.)20 THE SENSES.

is not an impression of the papillœ; for it cannot cause any

sensation in the cerebrum, for the intrusion alone of the nerve
and its form does not produce sensation; for no change of
state returns thence, however far it is bent. 2. But there is
at one and the same time a disturbance of the papillœ from
their seat, connection, form, etc. 3. For thence from the con­
tact and connection of one papil1a with anoth~r, there arises a
kind of friction, drawing, twisting and titillation; for they
cohere and wish to remain in their own form. 4. Thence a
certain change of state, contraction and expansion, from the
change of the cornmon form, retllrns into the several papillœ.
5. Wherefore the congeries of those papil1œ appear to be con­
tinuous, and their forms are spiral, circular, variously in­
sinuated, curved and linear. 6. The same thing contributes to
this as contributes to holding' the papi11œ in their common
fonn; as, for instance, the scales, which are variously inter­
laced in them and which variousl)' move and impress the
connection in various places, wherefore when the scales are
eut away or the papill~ laid bare it is perceived to be more
acute than the other senses; there is pain of state, etc. 7.
Then also the reticular tunic, which also holds the same con­
nection, 8. besides also the olltlets, the trajected emissaries, the
vessels, the nerves, the glands, which since they hold them
in position and connection, when they are disturbed therein,
there returns into the papil1a:, a change of state, of place, of
fom, thence friction. 9. Wherefore such an affection returns
from the single papil1a: into the brain, from the single papil1œ
a change of state returns. la. Thus there is a distinct change
of the state of al1 the papil1œ, that is, a common idea affects
us. II. There is a similar connection between the cortical
glands, which while they similarly undergo a change of their
external state, then it returns into their common congeries,
whence touch belongs .to the congeries. 12. Perchance the
[change of state] of the parts is still more distinct in
every papillœ on account of the connection; so that while
it is depressed, the state of the parts is instantly changed;
this returns distinctly ta the cerebellum. 13. This is the cause
f
 THE SENSE OF TOUCH. 32 1

of sensation, which cannot take place without a change of the

state of the parts, that is to say, unless they be hurt, or resisted,
etc. 14. Bence it is evident what the common form contributes
to the particular form of the changes of state. 15. A similar
change happens in the whole medullary substance as in the
cortical substance of the brain.
708. M eanwhile the sense of tauch is everywhere, it excites
its organ ta act according ta üs structure and nature; that
is ta say, 1. J t excites the cuticle, the muscles, the regions
of the abdomen and chest, in one way; 2. the lips, the cavity
of the palate, wherein it excites appetite, in another way; 3.
the mammœ, where it excites desire, in yet another. 4. It even
erects the penis itself, and the corresponding members of the
other sex, by touch; ta the extreme point of desire; 5. even by
the touch of the neighboring parts,. 6. ta say nothing of the
effect of taste and smell.
709. I5[a]. The orgG11ic papillary forms, although in par­
tiotlar, they vary in respect ta form, fluxion, densit)! and 1'l'tany
accidents, are 31et seen in general ta agree, l, because they con­
sist of the most distinct parts, whether papillce, the serico-villous
portions, or the pyramidal or conical fonns, as similar for ms in
the tongue, nostrils, intestines and stomach, but because they
are packed into one form and cohere, the'Y seem to coalesce into
one forest, as it were, or one body. 2. But the form of the
composition seems to be according to the degree of this sense,
that is, of touch, since many of them are united, as it were, into
one congeries, and this congeries again into a larger one, ac­
cording to the mode of the composition in the brains; 3. so that
there may be simple fonns, of these, composite forms, and of
these, again composite forms; as more frequent1y appears in the
muscles, and especially in the brain where are similar circular
and spiral forms, but in various clusters again and again com­
pounded. 4. Microscopic examination itself also seems to con­
firm this; for the distinctions indeed appear, while the inter­
stices or foramina have been counted by Leeuwenhoek; 5. for
while the larger ones are apparent to the eyes, the smaller ones
are seen by means of the microscope; it is allowable to argue
that there are still smaller ones, which cannot be reached by the
200
322 THE SEZ'lSES.

keenness of the microscope. 6. The very effects prove the

same, for a change of the form produces a sensation, which
can be sharpened even to the sharpest, so that the change may
pass over to inmost things.
710. The form itself of each papilla can scarcely be e_1:­
amined, for,!. it cannot be distinctly examined with a micro­
scope, 2. but when adjoined to neighboring papiliée it cano 3. It
cannot then be hollow,~' but in itself it can possess a forl11, which
will correspond to the greater or exposed forl11s. 4. Therefore
it is explorable by the doctrine of order and degrees; S. as for
instance the cortical gland is not a vesic1e, but it contains mariy
vesic1es which the hUl11an mind can never explore.
711. It is in general t1'ue that the papillee are the extremities
of the nerves. 1. As for instance, the papillée in the tongue, the
nostrils, the intestines; 2. because they are sensitive, 3. and
are extremities which correspond to their own beginnings in
the brain. 4. Sensation does not come from the extremity of
the artery.
712. If they are the extremities of the nerves formed 01"­
ganically for receiving sensation, it foUows that the nerve does
not end there. 1. For there is everywhere a circ1e and a con­
tinuous path. 2. The beginning is where the end is. 3. The
spirit which is conveyed thither through the nerves, goes fur­
ther, nor does it slip through the cutic1es, for nature does not
suffer the loss of its spirit. 4. 'Wherefore it is only an outlet
and turning point, that is, an exit from the papil1a, in order
that the spirituous humor may circulate. S. This filament must
be of very great fineness. 6. This filament returning from the
papilla furnishes a kind of new thrum, which, united to others
of that first congeries, must certainly form a kind of little
canal. 7. \Vherefore that papilla is a new beginning of some
nervous thread, which must be called a nervous fibre; 8. this,
united to many as in the brain, constitutes the corporeal fibre.
713. The little canal formed of these corporeal fibres, that is,
of papiUœ, seems to be that which attracts elements, espe­
ciaUy trom the ether, perhaps a/so from the purest air; for, 1.
that the body nourishes itself by its cuticular envelope, all ex­
perience confirms. 2. For there are men who have lived
 THE SENSE OF TOUCH. 323

months and years without food. 3. There are kinds of animais

which likewise have lived months and years, as for instance,
bears, chameleons, etc. 4. The same thing is met with in the
vegetable kingdom, namely, that there are plants which are
nourished by the sun, air and ether, sach as the sempervivum,
the aloes and others; 5. perhaps also trees and other plants
having roots. 6. In the minerai kingdom likewise; for a salt
attracts e1emcnts f rom the air and ether and increases and
nourishes itself thereby, as for instance, nitre, saI ammoniac,
common salt, vitriol, its oil, especially its ash, which continu­
ally increases. 7. Hence come so many wonderful kinds of
verdigris as the solutions of these salts are impregnated by the
air; these sometimes penetrate through and through. 8. In a
word, a new kind always draws similar things to itself, for in
the air f10at the purest elements, especial1y in the ether; there
is nothing that cannot be got from them; it is only the form
which varies the thing; the elements, the simples, the unitie~
are the same ; 9. as has been observed in respect to the blood in
the animal kingdom; concerning these things sec the ECON­
OMY OF THE ANIMAL KINGDOM. ra. Yea, perhaps also
metals. II. Thus the whole universe serves the kingdoms and
the animal body, for the sake of which is ail the rest, yea, the
universe. 12. Death-dealing contagions, the rising of life from
effiuvias atone, sudden changes, jf only such spirits as are at­
tracted from the air and dwell in it, be applied, sufficiently con­
firm this, as many things for restoring the strength.*
714. That the little canal carries away tltase elements even to
the brain a.nd ifs cortical substance and thence produces the
animal spirit. 1. This is also evident; from sudden changes in
the beginnings, as has been said; 2. from the anima! spirit it­
self, which consists of the pUl"est essences of life, mixed with
the purest elements. 3. AIl spirits of a similar origin are as­
cribable to this. 4. It has reference to the blood, for this con­
sists of animal spirit, and the somewhat gross atmospheric
elements; so the anima! spirit consists of ethereal elements. S·
Those elements cannot be drawn through the chyle, for thosc
foods cannot be 50 far dissolved. 6. Other phenomena also
dictate the same conclusion as those which have been men­
21
32 4 THE SENSES.

tioned. 7. Furthermore [it is drawn] also through the lungs,

as has been noticed in "the chapter on the Lungs; 8. from con­
tinuous want of such elements, 9. that the attraction happens
especially in the time of sleep, more in infancy than in ad­
vanced age, 10. while this perspiration is restrained, it seems to
be all up with life or the spirit to be deprived of its nutritious
juice; and thus the blood to labor, whence fever arises. 1 I.
Inspiration is as necessary as expiration; for there is a per­
petuaI alternation, as in the vegetable and mineraI kingdoms.
12. These pores cannot" be visible, for the elements are ex­
ceedingly pure, myriads of which are scarcely visible to the
microscope. 13. They depend upon the inmost affections of the
soul in order that they may be opened. 14. That when thesc
pores are c1osed, the expiratory pores are opened, can be con­
c1uded from the organism.
715. But to find the way by which they go trom the skin to
the brain, that is, trom the surface to the centers, is difficult,. it
even appea-rs very likely that they go by the arteriai way.
1. For the inmost tunic of the artery is called the nervous tunic.
2. It seems to be composed of little canals of this kind. 3.
A multitude of arteries and their ends or origins are subjoined
to this layer; so that they c10sely apply themselves; 4. thus so
that they seem to be the beginnings of the arteries; the ends
also are not far away, of which we shall treat soon, for where
the beginnings are there are the ends. S. This inmost tunic
of the arteries leads even into the aorta and thence into the
carotids, and the vertebral artery, and thus towards the brain,
from all the branches, inc1uding the subc1avians and others. 6.
This tunic remains in the ultimate brain, 7. and inserts itse1f in
the cortical substances, into which the arterial branches are not
inserted, but this very tunic, as will be seen in the following
Part on the Brain. 8. That the cortical glands are laboratories
for the spirit is acknowledged by all; Malpighi has said many
things about them. 9. Now also something may be said in re­
spect to these glands; it seems that it can he doubted, that they
pour similar essences immediately into the blood; 10. but per­
haps it is by a venous path, for the inmost tunic of the artery
is continued to the outmost tunic of the veins. 11. The infan­
 THE SENSE OF TOUCH.

tile skin, which consists of a mere vascular congeries, whence

it is ruddy, confirms this still better. 12. Also from the be-
ginning of the chick, in that the vessels are somewhat far away
before they venture to approach their heart and brain. 14.
Finally also that nothing leads to the brain and, indeed, the
medulla spinalis in chicks and embryos until it has provided
blood vesse1s; these begin in the extremes while the fibre begins
in inmosts; for it first sends off to the cutic1es the cutaneous
fibres. 15. Yea, the skin argues the same thing; in ultimates
is the incohoament, which ultimate* exists that the blood vesse1s
may correspond to firsts*; 16. and it [the little canal] must
start from an ample beginning, in that it nourishes the whole
kingdom lest there be a false origin of the mind, thus from the
whole skin. 17. There seems to be such an origin of the animal
spirit, that is to say, that the brain seeks out the purest ele-
ments from the cutic1es and the whole world to which it adds
its own essence. 18. See the chapter on the Peritoneum how
the universal inferior essence unites itself to the superior.
716. ft is confirmcd also by this, that the)' are attracted by the
tubltles in which is the most cxqltisl:te sensation, and where
it ù immcdiately associatcd with the animal spirit, for, 1. the
little canal is formed from filaments of the papillée in sorne of
their interstices; every papilla gives its filament to this little
canal, that is, to this corporeal fibre which is to be built up; 2.
wherefore the papilla instantly perceives what agrees or dis-
agrees; 3. for the nervous fibre is reflected, and from a new
beginning takes on a new character. 4. That fibre is nervous
through its whole way from its first origin ; it becomes corporeal
in its second origin. 5. Tt corresponds to the cortical substance
in the brains, which perceives what floats into the outmost,
and it does not admit anything but what is agreeable, thus the
brain is there present in u1timates; distance does not matter.
6. From such a sensitive origin a fibre of this kind must arise;
it can also be' called the venous fibre, while the fibre which
springs from the brain is the arterial fibre. 7. The animal spirit
is also present in that [venous] fibre, or a grosser spirit which
f10ws clown between the fibres and unburdens itself into the
326 THE SENSES.

papillre. 8. And thus, in order that there may be an immediate

copulation and an affinity, which aîlures such things.
717. It is to be added, that it is not attraction bHt invit'ation
by the force of incitation, for the organic papilla animates,
that is, is exponded and controcted, according to the alternate
l1WÛons of the brain. 1. For every motion in the brain and it:i
beginnings, a like motion is in the fibres thence arising, that is
to say, an alternate animation; 2. wherefore also in the ex­
tremes where the fibre has become organic. 3. From this ani­
mation of many fibres a motion of expansion is induced, and
a motion of contraction is propelJed; 4. and indeed from its
beginnings into the consequents. 5. It is similar to what ob­
tains in the animal spirit flowing from the brain through the
fibres with which they [the !ittle canals] coincide. 6. Thence
an attraction arises according to the laws of physics. 7.
Therefore, in this whole cutic1e there is a kind of respiration
similar to that of the lungs; for the animations of the lungs
and those of the brain coincide. 8. The respiration of the lungs
is the secondary and corporeal cause of those systoles, and it
acts upon the whole congeries. 9. By the second and sublime
use which the papillary tunic presents, a very subtiie. nutriment
is furnishcd to the wholc body. IO. The other tunics are also
for the sake of this use, that is, the epidermis and the reticular
tunic; 11. nor does the Sanctorian perspiration and the sweat
hincler this, for these elements are very pure, and, like the mag­
netic aura through water and glass, they pass through the
scales, 12. through the pores of the scales. 13. It also absorb"
the eff1uvia, if there be any in them which is pure and suitable.
14. The soul or nature is especially in command of these
things.
718. 16. From the conneâion it follows tha.t the microscopic
pores discO'Zlered and co'/tnt:?d b,:>, Leeuwenhoek, are the saine
as those which furnish tlze origins to the arteries in the body.
1. For aIl things are to be considered from smallest things;
2. the arteries at the same ti:l;e as the veins; 3. and indeed :n
l1ltimates, because the blood is the ultimate liquor of the animal
kingùom, that is, the inferior universal essence. 4. Nor can it
 THE SENSE OF TOUCH. 32 7

arise from the dilatation of the fibre, because it is contrary to

nature and experience that the same little canal should carry
fluids of two grades. S. It is necessary that there be origins,
and that where the origins arc, there finally are the ends, ac­
cording to the order of nature everywherc. 6. These pores
can become visible by means of the microscope, for the grasser
elements and the effluvia themselves are seen in great abund­
ance, see Doeïliaave on the Sanctorian perspiration. 7. \iVhere­
fore it expels those things in the arteries in their alternates,
or rather, frO·~l their lateral branches, which can become turgid
with blood. 8. Every effluvium presented is expelled by the
arteries, never by the fibres; thus the arterial capillaries are
extremities, and second origins.
719. The very f)apillary for;1/. arg·Ltes this. as also the duets or
pores. 1. For the porcs of the first orcier procluce fibres;
these fibres weave the little canal which is an arterial capillary,
the inmost tunic of which it constitutes. 2. The inmost tunic
remains in the ultimate threads* the rest being cast off and
laid aside. 3. This pore itself is in the midst between most
subtile pores, therefoïe the little canal thus formed is in the
midst between the filaments; for the papillary form is a com­
pound, and it is composed of simples. 4. Thus the filaments
themselves of this membrane attract, and the canal woven from
these fibres expels, which is also agreeable to the order of na­
ture. S. The papillary form is best perceived from an under­
standing of its genesis, and it conforms itself. 6. But there are
lateral ramifications which are exceedingly small unless they
become turgid with the perftuent red blood. 7. In that case they
only become turgid when the bloocl wishes to unburden itself
of abundance, as in some men, in horses and other beasts.
720. That the')' pass through the little sensories, that is, the
papillœ, argues the sanze thing. 1. For what that sense abhors
as unsuitablc, it expels, 2. according to the state of the cere­
brum and cerebellum the fibres of which in the extremes carry
aIl that belongs to the parent.
721.. NIany other things also argue the same: 1. as, the great
multiplication of arteries in embryos and infants; 2. the in­
32 8 THE SENSES.

sertions of arteries there; 3. the threads running through

this stratum; for between the arteries and the veins there is an
endless number of white filaments, 4. which run into the ar­
teries, or run back from them. 5. In insects they are, as it were,
!iUle intestines. 6. Whole membranes are usually composed of
such filaments. 6 [a]. There is a similar continuous expira­
tion in the vegetable kingdom, whence is the odor infilling the
whole atmosphere; 7. in the mineraI kingdom and from every
metal, 8. in which there is an inspiration and an expiration. 9.
Whether the origins of these things are glands still more
minute is to be sought out below.
722. I I [a]. The th1'rd kind of pm'es, tha! is, the sudorific,
will be trea.ted of more a.~ length belo'lU where the underlying
glandttlar tunic is treated of,' in the meanwhile it is to be ob­
served: I. That these pores are visible and large; 2. that they
pierce the organic forms of the third degree, that is, those
again compounded; 3. that they depend upon the subjoined
glands, as is evident; 4. that they are for the sweat; 5. anù
that they are amphibious, that is to say, that they may cast off
the effiuvial vapors, and that at stated turns, they may absorb
vapors according to changes of state; 6. that they may remit
their sweats received from the atmosphere into the veins; j.
that they are the origins of the veins, etc.
723. 12 [a]. E.rperience concerning the glandular tunic: Un­
der the papillary tunic there are arterial and venous vessels,
then are mentioned filaments, as it were tendinotts, interwoven
among and subjoined to them, which are the vascular thrums
of the arteries, communicating with the veins, and full of a
white humor, but red in inftamed subjects, in the wounded, or
those scratched with strigils, or exercised by motion, or affect­
ed with shame or anger, in full-blooded persons, in those suf­
fering from fevers, in infants and embryos; but returning to
their former state they are deprived of their redness; these to­
gether with the papillary congeries, constitute that tegument
which is properly called the skin. Under this succeeds a kind
of glandular or corpuscular congregation,' these glands are
called subcutaneous and miliary,' which ail anatomists after
 THE SENSE OF TOUCH.

Steno and Malpighi have examined with the eye assisted by

the microscope, have described and expressed in plates; the
fibres and arterial and venous capillaries terminate in them
with a hollow body or emissary follicle, furnished with ex­
cretory vessels; these little vesse1s piercing the papillary sub­
stance gape with open mouth under the reticular body and
cuticle, according to Morgagni they appear to be projected
into the tracts rather than outwardly. From these vessels the
sweat, like an unctuous and fatty shower, urinous, saline,
sanguineous, ilI-smelling, plentifully pours out; wherefore cer­
tain of those vessels are called sebaceous. The glands are
more or less sparse or thick-set, sIender or thicker; they are
arranged in an orderly series, almost like the cortical glands
of the brain; they occupy the whole surface, as al 50 the con­
cave surface of most of the viseera, the surface of the palate
and fauces, of the œsophagus, the stomach and small intes­
tines. Subjacent to this layer, and Iying' upon the fat, cornes
a layer or dense congeries of subcutaneous nerves,' in the
hard coverings of the nerves it is rendered quite tenacious
and thick ; finally in regard to many things in the other integu­
ment, see Boerhaave.
724. 13 [a]. Analysis. The uses of the glandular tunic, that
is, of the subcutaneous or miliary glands. 1. They exist in order
that they may be the follicles which shall cast forth the un­
clean serosity into the air; 2. in order that they may be folli­
des which shall attract from the air into the veins humors
and atmospheric elements, thus that they may be just 50 many
lungs, as it were, in smallest form. 3. That they are the be­
ginnings of the veins; 4. that they are subordinate to the sen­
sory papillre that they may undergo changes of state, and
that effects may enter in, which are suitable to the affection
of the sensation; 5. thus that they are secondary beginning~,
which communicate with the atmosphere, but only with the
aerial. 6. From these things it appears how a similar struct­
ure exists in the vegetable kingdom, and a similar in the
mineraI.
725. That they are follicles which cast forth the unclean
serosity of the body into the air, therefore, that they are excre­
330 THE SENSES.

tories. I. As the Iungs are excretory or emundory organs in

great continuous quantity, SO" are these follicles, in continuous
quantity, 2. they do as much as the Iungs, and more, whence the
one can be judged from the other. 3. that they throw off the
sweats and many erfluvial exhalations, is evident; 4, from the
continuaI effiuvia \'Ihich are exhaled ; 5. from hUIDors of differ­
,ent kinds, fatty, watery, oily, fouI smeIling;* 6. from the soil­
ing of linens; 7. hom the oiliness al ways apparent in the skin,
especially in certain parts, as in the axiIléC and elsewhere; 8.
from microscopes, under which the skin always appears to be
oiled; 9. Îrom the emissary vessels opening through the
papiilary substance, where perforations and incavations ap­
pear visibiy, and the yel1ow, clark and other kinds of matter
with which the whole cavity itself is damp; 10. from the
drying off of glasses when rubbed with the palms; II. from
the perpetua! heat exhaled from the body; 12. from the odor
itself sometimes sensible ta man, especially frOID the odor
sens~le to dogs; 13. from the insertion of the arteries into
these glands; 14. from the effIux of the veins out of them;
IS. sa that the)' may be the organic concentrations of the
arteries and veins, and their meeting places. 16. The arterics
do not end in those glands, but only their !ittIe branches, \ovhich
are led forth perpendicll1arly from the larger branches, as in
the kidneys, whence arises their cortical substance. 17. A
comparison can be made with the kidneys, for their emissary
vesse!s in the kidneys constitute the urinary tubes. IS. There
is a likeness and thus a cornparison of them with similar glands
in other viscera, and in the train, indeed in the great arteries;
the emissary vessels of the veins thence arisil1g are drawl1
fortb according ta uses il1tO membranes and other organs and
are arranged entirely according ta use; [9. wherefore we can
learn from these things concerning' the rest; for the manner
is of a simi!ar nature everywhere in general, but in particular
there is a variation according ta use. 20. These glands can be
exemplars of the rest, indeed of all conglomerate glands.
726. That they are also orgqns which a.ftract lmmors and
atmospheric elements from the air into the veins. This aiso is
 THE SENSE OP TOUCH. 33 1

evident from experience; 1. for the skin attracts the humors

that flow to it; 2. indeed it attracts its own eff1uvia and its own
humors; 3. as its own sVv'eats, which are absorbed from the
linen. 4. This is evident from the occasional troublesome dry­
ness of the skin of the hane!s, and palms; S. tram animais
which live for a long time without food, of which above; G.
from a like thing in the other kingdoms; 7. from the need
felt by the veins ane! from the usual custom followee! by the
veins elsewhere in the body. 8. That according to Morgagni
they are seen rather drawn back, or they lie open "vith a large
extene!ee! mouth ane! indra wn;* 9. that the entrance lies open
entirely in the gland, where the shoots from the arteries and
veins come together; ra. that the chyle alone would not suffice.
727. That the'} are amphibious and tl/us tfaat the)' bath expel
and attract: 1. according ta every need of the blood; 2. ac­
cording to the affection of the body; 3. according to the affec­
tion of the animus and mind; 4. according to the affection of
the atmosphere. 4 [a]. That there are amphibious ves5els used
elsewhere in the body, as in the intestines, according to the
observation of Albini, where the arteries both expel and at­
tract the hU111ors, when they bear both a venous and an arteriai
nature at one and the same time. 5. The glandular structure
argues the same thing, for they enter arterial and go fortll
venous, thus they are at a turning point. 6. Thus what is
injected from the arteries, can cither be expelied into the ai,
through the emissaries, if the veins refuse it, or be drawn back
into the veins if they are thirsty. 7. vVherefore it follows"
that the ducts do likewise with respect to th05e things which
flow to them from the air. 8. A similar thing is evident
from the state of embryos, which, in the first time, before these
organs have bcen formed, receive nothing (through the skin] ;
afterwards they throw back a liquor between the skin and the
amnion, then they absorb it. 9. Thus that is donc successively
and distinctly, which finally after birth exists successively and
distinctly at once; ra. for this cutic1e in infants is very porous,
and is cut up with infinite vessels, and, as it were, with mere
vessels.
728. These forces, which correspond ta the glands, (WC made
332 THE SENSES.

for humors and atmospheric elements} wherefore immedi­

ately for the blood. But the pores} which we have treated of
above} that is} the papillary substances} are made for ethereal
elements} wherefore for the animal spirit / thus they differ Ùt
fineness according to tIse. I. The elements of the aerial atmo­
sphere are somewhat coarse; 2. as also are its humors; 2 [a].
but those of the ether are more subtile. 3. As the blood is a
somewhat coarse liquor, 4. the animal spirit corresponding to
it is thinner; 5. both are of a double degree. 6. Ali the pores
traverse the sensitive papillary substance, the organic forms of
which are likewise compounded according to degree. 7. The
affections of that substance rule and moderate all things; 8.
but purer things act distinctly, for there are those which at­
tract and those which expel; otherwise the coarser things
which are of one and another character at the same time. 9.
Ali things therefore are according to the affections arisin~
from various causes which the papillary substance takes on.
la. One flows into the other according to the manner of the
composition in the rest of the structure.
729. That there is a similar expansion and contraction of
these glands} wherefore a similar mode of invitation and incita-­
tion as in the papillœ}' 1. for the perpendicular arterial rami­
fications enter beneath; 2. likewise the nerves which are there
abundant, and follow the arterial ramifications. 3. The nerve
acts upon the extremity as a brain by animating. 4. The
papillary substance surrounds and embraces the emissary
vessel, wherefore also it agitates it with its movements. S.
There cannot be a diverse respiration of two contiguous sub­
stances; 6. hence is their alternate expansion and contraction,
wherefore invitation and incitation. 7. The invitation is at the
time of the attraction of effiuvia, the incitation at the time of
their expulsion. 8. Rence there are times when they neither
attract nor expel, when the incitation entirely corresponds to
the invitation. 9. They altogether abhor the air. 10. They
admit the ether, and thus especially by this way into the blood.
Il. They can be vibrated ail the way to the surface along the
pulse of the arteries, which are ramified over the surface, but
go out perpendicularly.
 THE SENSE OF TOUCH. 333

730. That they are lungs in least form, and discrete qua.nt·ït)•.
I. They concur with the motions of the lungs, because with the
motion of the brains; 2. because they underlie* the papillary
substance; 3. because they are approached by the nerves; 4.
they emulate the pulmonary vesicles inserted in [i. e., at the
root of] the hairs; these are similar follicles. 5. The underly­
ing muscles concur in a general way, as, for instance, the
abdominal and pectoral. 6. By these media the respiration of
the lungs reigns in the extremes, thus in aIl points. 7. Where­
fore fleshy threads are interwoven with them, in brutes mani­
festly muscular fibres; see experience.
731. That they are the beginnings' of the. veins. 1. For the
artery enters, the vein goes out. 2. There the surfaces make the
turning point. 3. There are also other beginnings of the veins,
that is to say, pure continuations. 4. There are anastomoses.
4 [a]. There are pendulous stiriée, as in other glands. 5. There
are little mouths. 6. Similarly as in the hepatic glands there
are beginnings of the hepatic veins, and elsewhere. 7. These
were aIl beginnings in the beginning of things. 8. In the course
of time the beginnings were obliterated, when aIl things were
formed, many anastomoses went off into tendons, 9. and they
underlie the layers which consist of various filaments and at the
same time of arteries and veins. la. For there are venous and
arterial ramifications which sometimes constitute the whole
membrane and the whole mass. II. But if we consider the
beginnings in a simple state they seem to be these things; for
when they are once formed, then determinations are formed
from them in a very diverse manner; just as nature draws her
offspring and ways.
732. That perhaps tlunce a·rises the external venous tunie
whieh con'esponds and, as il were, is continued to the internaI
arterial tunie: 1. By a similar turning in these glands. 2. The
outmost tunic of the artery passes over into the surface of the
gland; 3. and immediately passes over in the surface of the
vein, 4. the emissary tunic from the papillée accompanying it.
5. But these are only conjectures.
733. That titis tunie seems to be extended eveninto the peri­
334 THE SENSES.

cardiulIz. The reasons which argue this are many: I. That

those glands are secondary beginnings of the vessels, where­
fore of the veins ; 2. where it is in the initiament of the arteries,
there are the beginnings of the veins; 3. that the heart is like­
wise a second beginning, and a beginning of the body itse1f;
4. it is excited by the venous blood; 5. that the tunic of the
artery in the evaporatory canalule, which is composed of
papill~:, is seen in the glands, and [there] makes a turning; 6.
thus the primary and secondary beginnings are united to con­
stitute a thin]; 7. that the inmost tunic of the pericardium is
continuee! to the external tunic of the vena cava; 8. That this
inmost tunic is insinuated into the inmost parts of the heart,
according to Lancisi; 9. tint from these it is turned in towards
the diaphragm, the centre of the motion* of the body, and to­
ware!s the lungs and their illmost parts. IO. Thus nature begins
fron, primes and u1timates, and returns to seconclary begin­
nings, that is, ta those in the brain and in the skin, which is also
conformable ta the experience concerning the begil1nings of
chicks in eggs. II. Thus ail intermediates are rightly forrned.
12. The internaI tunic of the artery is continued ta the external
of the veins. 13. The venous surface of the heart is the arterial
surface of the brain, that it may be actice and passive, 14. this
is confirmed by other expericnces, and especially by the doc­
trine of forms and influx, etc.
734. That the surface of the gland is partly artcrial and
fJ(lrt(v papillarj!-ner'vous. I. For the emissary vessels of the
gland pierce* the papillary congeries. 2. Thus the papillary
threads also unite themselves to forrn their tunic, 3. as in ail
other compositions where a like thing occurs. 4. This tunie
flows 1nto the surface of the gland; for the little canal, accord­
ing to Morgagni, is retracted. 5. The inmost tunic of the artery
runs into that surface, together with new nerves, 6. wherefore
the first beginnings of the corporeal fibers; 7. hence a new be­
ginning- comes into existence from two beginnings, which is
called corporeal and surrounds the vein which goes forth
thence. 8. From these things it is evident of what quality ie;
the reticular* tunic, the func1amenta! of the "ein, that is, of jts
 THE SENSE OF TOUCH. 335

outmost, and how it constitutes a third kind of corporeal fibers,

which is mingled with prior fibres. 9. These things follow ac­
cording to aIl reason and philosophy; experience COllcnrs in
this.
735. In the embr:yo first the papilhe seem to be born, and the
smalle1' congeries to be conglomerated. I. According to cor­
respondence with the things in the brain, 2. in order that they
may receive ail the affections of the souL 3. Natme begins
from simple compositions; 4. hence it follmvs that the embryo
attracts something f rom the ether through the cuticle and the
nerves, as the chick through the shell of the egg, according ta
experience; S. that it also breathes ont and rejects many things
which do not agree, through the pores of the second arder; G.
these things are absorbed by the veins of the amnion.
736. That afterwards the gland is formed, with a third com­
position of papilZee, and with 1wmerous ducts. 1. For the first
beginnings must be at hand before a third can be formed. 2.
The first beginning is a filament of the papilhe; 2 [a] the
second is the little canal thence formed, whence is the arter)'.
3. 1<rom these two joined together in the gland a third is born,
that is, the vein, 4. which is under the heart; S. for every vein
is barn from something smaller.* 6. This is evident hom the
liquor of the amnion which is first pressed out, and after­
wards resorbed; 7. from the nature of arder and the prin­
ciples of formation, etc.
737. 14 [a]. From these thin{;s it follows that thet-e a1'e three
degrees of composition. 1. As ever)'where in nature; 2. there
are three degrees or orders of the composition of the papi lire ;
2 [a]. three degrees or orders of the corporeal fibres. 3. The
first composition is the very simple, which arises from every
papilla; 4. the second is the little canal thence arising, that i."
the beginning of the artery; S. the third, that is, the vein,
arises from the prior two. 6. How the one arises from the
other has been expounded above.
738. Therefore 't1~ere are three degrees of corporeal fibres in
the skin, and formed afterwardsin the single hollow viscera,
which retum to their own beginnings. 1. The first is, as has
 THE SENSES.

been said, that which arises from the simple papilla, and is a
fibre of the brain, but now arisen from a new corporeal be­
ginning; 2. the second is the fibre thence compounded, that is,
the little arterial canal; 3. the third, that is, the little venous
canal, is from this last fibre and the one that arose before it.
4. These compositions must be called passive, respectively, ta
the fibres of the brain, which are active.
739. F,'om these things it is evident how ttniversal essences
arise, are determined, and reunite themselves in their begin­
nings, according to the doctrine of universals in the chapter on
the Peritoneum.
The Adipose Membrane.
740. 15 fa J. EXPERIENCE. The adipose membrane IS fur­
nished with cells not always equal, with layers mutually folded
together and superimposed upon one another; there the fat is
soft and fluent; this is interj ected into ail the interstices of the
muscles. From this layer break forth bulbs or tumors which
are the roots of the hairs, which break through the single
layers and the cutic1e itself.

AnalJ'sis.
741. 15 [b]. Every embodiment of the blood, that is, its bet­
ter part, insinuates itself into the fat. 1. Lest it be evaporated
and sweated out with the effiuvia. 2. Those effiuvia, espe­
cially the coarser, are also fatty and oily; 3. thus just as they
are in the omentum, 4. that there may be a restitution thence
into the blood through the veins, and that the blood may be
fed in time of need. 5. How true fat is distinguished from
the spurious and defiled, depends on the invitation of the fllt
itself from incitation through' the arterial capillaries, the
structure of which, their insertion, exsertion, and motion corre­
spond.
742. That the impurity of the fat is evaporated through cer­
tain channels, indeed throttgh the cuticles. 1. For there is evi­
dently a transit and entrance either into the glands, 2. or about
the glands and thus through the chinks about the papillary
 THE SENSE OF TOUCH. 337

congeries. 3. For the humor there collected, as appears, is for

the most part fatty, and the glands are therefore called seba­
ceous by Morgagni. 4. Chinks are seen to intervene, and, in­
deed, round about the little canals which are lubricated. 5.
Thus the sweat and the humor of the peritoneum and that of
the pleura penetrate by this channel; 6. as has been observed
in the chapter on the Pleura.
743. That through spiracles this fat lubricates aU the smaUer
cavities with an oily and volatile lubricant; 1. as between the
glands; 2. between the papillée, their congeries, especially the
larger; 3. as in the cortex of the brain, in the abdomen, in the
chest; 4. for there is no cavity but must be lubricated, other­
wise the parts would grow together. S. There are foramina, as
in the omentum, 6. the lubricant is dispersed by motion into ail
the cavities. 7. Those vapors are what equalize the pressure
of tne atmosphere.
744. That this fat underlies the superior tunics in order that
they may perform their offices in the best and most distinct
manner: 1. as has been observed in respect to the omentum and
the abdominal viscera, which is superimposed;* 2. it is pro­
tected from the immediate motions and impulses of the mus­
cles. 3. Thus it lies, as it were, on a pillow.
745. Likewise also of the interstices of the muscles. 1. This is
accomplished by continuity, 2. lest the space be empty; 3. in
order that the motion may be facile, 4. at the point of lubrica­
tion the fat is soft and yielding.
746. The hairs also draw off the impure and worn out fat. I.
For in order that the bulbs may be inrooted therein, 2. therefore
there is a circulation of that fat opening into the bulbs. 3. That
the hairs are hollow and consist of such material; 4. also that
they are deferent vessels appears from the microscope; S.
furthermore from their ample root.
747. That all things contribute to the end that the motion of
the lungs shall rule in the parts and in the general. 1. It has
been said that every single papilla is vibrated alternately with
the brain; 2. Iikewise every gland. 3. These things happen in
the single parts from causes in the fibres; 4. the first congeries
likewise, through its \ittle canal at first arterial, for into it is
 THE SENSES.

concentratecl the motion of the threacls; S. the congeries still

more compounclecl also from the gland, which rules this con-
gcries. 6. It happens that every single hair is rooted in the
rat, ancl pierces the more general congeries; but the fat is
[ruled] by the underlying muscles, which are actuated by
the motion of the brain and the lungs. 7. Still more generally
by the filaments, that is, the muscular filaments which pierce
it, and perform the office of muscles; 8. most generally by the
muscles by means of the fatty tunics; 9. but lest voluntary ac-
tions should disturb this natural motion, the fatty tunic is in-
terposed. 10. Thus ail tbings concur that that motion shall
reign ancl concur in things most particular and especial1y in
the compounds. II. Since it is necessary that the extremes,
the brain and cuticle, as also the intermediate, that is to say, the
lungs themselves, should be moved under the same auspices,
therefore also ail the inclucled viscera must be sa moved;
which has been demonstrated.
748. See my tirst e);Cfrpts, n. l : The comparison between the
glands of the brain and of the cuticle, page b. obverse : That the
glands throw off effiuvia, and receive effiuvia from the air. p.
c.: The causes of the appearance, that now they throw off
sweats, now drink in. p. C.: That the miliary glands are the
first termini of the veins, and the last of the arteries. p cl.:
The little canals or the fibres arising hom the papilhe. p. J.
obverse: That the most minute fibres attract effiuvia from the
ether.
749. 16 [a]. From the above considerations it is evident that
the one tunic is macle for the sake of the other, the principal of
which is the papillary tunic, after this comes the glandular;
the rest of the tunics are for the sake of these two, ancl are
servants, each one accorcling to its own nature; ta these suc-
ceed the muscles, of which there are various layers, inmostly,
however, is the peritoneum and the Pleura. It would be tao
much ta treat of the use of every single one in respect ta au-
other, ancl thus ta describe the series of uses according to the
functionating of the tunic.

[THE END.]